TriStation 1131 Developer S Guide v4 9 0 PDF

TriStation 1131
Developers Guide
TriStation 1131 Developers Workbench

Version 4.9.0
9700100-012
May 2011
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. Companies, names and data used in
examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted. No part of this document may be reproduced or
transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, without the express
written permission of Invensys Systems, Inc.
20042011 by Invensys Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Invensys, the Invensys logo, Foxboro, I/A Series, Triconex, Tricon, Trident, and TriStation are trademarks
of Invensys plc, its subsidiaries and affiliates. All other brands may be trademarks of their respective
owners.
Document No. 9720100-012, Rev. 1

Printed in the United States of America.
Contents
Preface
xiii
New Features in TriStation 1131 v4.9.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Summary of Sections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Related Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Product and Training Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xv
We Welcome Your Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
Chapter 1
Project Administration
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Project Administration Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Installing TriStation 1131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Upgrading from Previous Versions of TriStation 1131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Changing a TriStation 1131 v4.9.0 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Installing the TriStation 1131 Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Customizing the Security Banner Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Uninstalling the TriStation 1131 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Verifying the TriStation 1131 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Converting Existing Projects to Version 4.9.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Selecting the Target System Version During Project Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Rules for Tricon Project Target System Version Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Rules for Trident Project Target System Version Conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Converting Version 4.x Tricon Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Converting Version 4.x Trident Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Converting Version 2.x and 3.x Tricon or Trident Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Creating a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
The Project Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Creating a New Tricon Project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Creating a New Trident Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Creating a New Tri-GP Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Working with Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Logging In to an Existing Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Logging In for the First Time When Enhanced Security Is Enabled . . . . . . . . 28
Logging In When Standard Security Is Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Logging In When Enhanced Security Is Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Troubleshooting Login Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Adding a Project Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Adding Audit Comments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Displaying Version Numbers of Projects and Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Specifying Project Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Specifying Language Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Specifying Annotation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Specifying Monitor Colors for BOOL Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Specifying Forced Points Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
TriStation 1131 Developers Guide, v4.9.0
iv
Contents
Specifying Download Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Specifying Emulator Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Specifying TriStation 1131 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Specifying Directory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Specifying Drawing Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Specifying FBD Editor Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Specifying LD Editor Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Specifying CEM Editor Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Adding or Removing Custom Help Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Adding a Custom Help File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Viewing Custom Help Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Removing a Custom Help File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Managing User Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Changing the Security Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Managing Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Adding and Modifying User Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Recommended Rules for Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Changing the Security Level for Privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Changing Security Level Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Viewing User Access Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Viewing the User Access Log In Windows Event Viewer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Saving the User Access Log to a File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Changing Event Logging Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Clearing the User Access Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Working with Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Creating a Library of Project Elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Managing Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Adding a Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Updating a Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Deleting a Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Making Partial Changes to a Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Verifying a Library Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Generating Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Updating the Report Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Viewing and Printing a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Adding Custom Reports to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Exporting Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Report Database Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Printing Project Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Printable Project Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Printing Individual Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Printing Multiple Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Chapter 2
Application Development
97
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Application Development Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Application Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
The Application Workspace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
The Declaration Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
The Implementation Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Parts of an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Safety and Control Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Programming Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Function Block Diagram Language. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Contents
Ladder Diagram Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Structured Text Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
CEMPLE (Cause and Effect Matrix Programming Language Editor) . . . . . . 108
User Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Creating a User Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Copying User or Library Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Copying a User Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Copying a Library Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Specifying Document Summary Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Specifying Document Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Restricting Access to a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Changing a Document Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Function Block Diagram and Ladder Diagram Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Using the FBD Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Using the LD Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Function and Function Block Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Working with Logic Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Selecting a Sheet Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Managing Logic Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Editing the Sheet Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Printing Logic Sheets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Selecting Library Elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Specifying Function Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Specifying Function Block Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Specifying Function Block Application Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Using a Space Saver Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Structured Text Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Using the ST Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Using Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Defining an Enumeration Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Defining an Array Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Defining a Structured Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Declaring a VAR CONSTANT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Declaring a VAR_TEMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Declaring a VAR_EXTERNAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Declaring Local Variables in ST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Declaring Input and Output Variables in ST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Using ForLoop and Exit Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Using a CASE Statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
VAR_IN_OUT Function Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Cause Effect Matrix Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
CEMPLE Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Matrix Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
How a Matrix is Evaluated. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Using the CEM Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Matrix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
FBD Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Variable Detail Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Setting up a CEM Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Specifying CEM Editor Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Specifying CEM Element Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Specifying Monitor Colors and Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Using User-Defined Functions and Application-Defined States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Enabling User-Defined Functions and Application-Defined States. . . . . . . . 151
vi
Contents
Specifying Local Variables, Tagnames, and Constants in a CEM Program . . . . . . 152

Specifying Properties in the Variable Detail Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Working with Cells, Rows, and Columns in a CEM Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Selecting and Editing Cells in a CEM Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Displaying and Sizing Cells from the Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Inserting and Deleting Rows or Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Sizing and Hiding Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Sizing and Hiding Rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Sizing and Hiding the Comment Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Editing the Title Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Managing Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Variables and Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Declaring Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Specifying Variable Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Specifying Variable Annotation Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Naming Multiple Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Changing Multiple Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Viewing the Number of Variables and Tagnames in a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Creating Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Specifying Constant Annotation Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Tagnames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Declaring Tagnames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Assigning an Alias Number, Alias Type, and Physical Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Important Information About Alias Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Procedure for Input and Output Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Procedure for Memory Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Scaling a REAL Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Specifying Display Options for Tagnames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Creating Multiple Tagnames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Changing Multiple Tagnames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Renaming a Tagname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Deleting a Tagname. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Inserting a Column into the Tagnames Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Deleting a Column from the Tagnames Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Managing Undeclared and Unused Tagnames. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
What Are Undeclared Tagnames? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
What Are Unused Tagnames? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Displaying Undeclared and Unused Tagnames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Editing Unused Tagnames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Deleting Unused Tagnames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Importing and Exporting Tagnames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Exporting Tagname Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Format of an Exported Tagname File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Preparing an Excel File for Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
File Format Requirements for Tagname Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Import Options and Validation Criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Importing Tagname Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Annotations and Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Adding Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Specifying Annotation Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Adding a Comment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Specifying Comment Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Picking and Dropping Elements for Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Editing Comment Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Contents
vii
Using Macros with Annotations and Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Editing Macro Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Modbus Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Assigning Alias Numbers to Tagnames. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
How Tricon Transmits REAL Values With Special Alias Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Tricon Special Alias Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
How REAL Numbers are Scaled to Integers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Scaling REAL Values to Integers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
How Trident and Tri-GP REAL Values are Transmitted Without Scaling . . . . . . . 217
Disabling Scaling of REAL Values for Trident and Tri-GP Tagnames . . . . . . . . . . 218
Peer-to-Peer Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Peer-to-Peer Data Transfer Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Estimating the Peer-to-Peer Data Transfer Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Allocating Peer-to-Peer Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
SOE Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Displaying the SOE Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Defining SOE Block Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Assigning Tagnames to SOE Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Specifying a Trip Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Tricon Application Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Restricting Access to a Tricon Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
What Affects Tricon Write Access from External Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Restricting Write Access to Tricon Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Allowing Write Access to Tricon Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Trident and Tri-GP Application Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Restricting Access to a Trident or Tri-GP Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
What Affects Trident and Tri-GP Write Access from External Devices . . . . . . . . . 235
Restricting Write Access to Trident or Tri-GP Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Allowing Write Access to Trident or Tri-GP Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Building an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Specifying the Program Order and Scan Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Compiling a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Building or Rebuilding an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
About the Applications Initialization Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Viewing and Understanding Initialization Table Size Information . . . . . . . . 242
Solving an Initialization Table Overflow Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Chapter 3
Tricon Controller Configuration
245
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
The Tricon Controller Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
The Tricon Controller Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
The Tricon Configuration Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
The Tricon Controller and Emulator Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Setting Tricon Operating Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Allocating Memory for Tricon Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Configuring the Tricon Target System Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Determining Your Tricon Controllers System Version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Validating a Tricon Target System Version Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Changing the Tricon Target System Version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Target System Version Change Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
If You Have a TCM Configured in Your TriStation Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Changing the Target System Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Results of a Tricon Target System Version Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Configuring Tricon Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
viii
Contents
Adding or Deleting a Tricon Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Determining Tricon Chassis Power Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Inserting and Removing Tricon Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Configuring a Tricon AI Single-Ended or Differential Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Configuring a Tricon DO Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Configuring a Tricon PI Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Adding a Tricon Thermocouple Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Configuring Tricon Communication Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Configuring Tricon ACM Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Configuring Tricon HIM Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Configuring Tricon EICM Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Configuring Tricon NCM Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Configuring Tricon SMM Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Configuring TCM Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Configuring TCM Serial Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Configuring TCM Network Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Configuring TCM Peer-To-Peer Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Configuring TCM Modbus TCP Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Configuring TCM Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Configuring TCM Protocols (Tricon v10.3 and Later Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Exporting the TCM Configuration to a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Importing the TCM Configuration From a File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Configuring Tricon Time Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
About Tricon Time Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Using a Tricon ACM to Synchronize Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Using a Tricon NCM to Synchronize Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Using a Tricon NCM/G to Synchronize Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Using a Tricon SMM to Synchronize Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Using a Tricon TCM to Synchronize Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Configuring GPS Time Synchronization on the TCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Configuring SNTP Time Synchronization on the TCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Configuring Triconex Time Synchronization on the TCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Printing the Tricon Module Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Chapter 4
Trident and Tri-GP Controller Configuration
311
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
The Trident and Tri-GP Controller Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
The Trident and Tri-GP Controller Trees. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
The Trident and Tri-GP Configuration Trees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
The Trident and Tri-GP Controller and Emulator Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Setting Trident or Tri-GP Operating Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Allocating Memory for Trident or Tri-GP Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Target System Version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Determining Your Trident or Tri-GP Controllers System Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Validating a Trident Target System Version Change. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Changing the Trident Target System Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Results of a Trident Target System Version Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Configuring Trident and Tri-GP Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Main Processors (MPs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Specifying Trident or Tri-GP MP Module Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Displaying Trident or Tri-GP MP Attribute Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Configuring Trident 1.x MP Network Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Configuring Trident 2.x or Tri-GP MP Network Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Configuring Trident or Tri-GP MP Serial Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Contents
ix
Inserting a Trident or Tri-GP Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Removing a Trident or Tri-GP Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Configuring a Trident or Tri-GP SDO Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Configuring a Trident or Tri-GP HRDI Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Configuring a Trident or Tri-GP PI or EPI Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Communication Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Configuring the Trident v1.x Communication Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Configuring Trident v1.x CM Network Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Configuring Trident v1.x CM Serial Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Configuring Trident v1.x CM Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Configuring the Trident v2.x or Tri-GP Communication Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Configuring Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM Serial Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Configuring Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM Network Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Configuring Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM Peer-To-Peer Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Configuring Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM Modbus TCP Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Configuring Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Configuring Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Exporting the Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM Configuration to a File . . . . . . . . . 360
Importing the Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM Configuration From a File. . . . . . 361
Configuring Trident or Tri-GP Time Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
About Trident and Tri-GP Time Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Using a Trident 1.x CM to Synchronize Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Using a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM to Synchronize Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Configuring SNTP Time Synchronization on the Trident 2.x
or Tri-GP CM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Configuring Triconex Time Synchronization on the Trident 2.x
or Tri-GP CM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Using Trident or Tri-GP System and Module Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Printing the Trident or Tri-GP Module Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Chapter 5
Tricon Communication with TriStation 1131
371
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
TriStation 1131 Communication Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Configuring the TriStation PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Installing a NIC Card in a TriStation PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Installing the TCP/IP Protocol on a TriStation PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Connecting to the Tricon Controller via a Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
When to Use the Tricon Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Connecting a Tricon Serial Port to a TriStation PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Configuring the TriStation 1131 Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Connecting to the Tricon Controller via a Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Directly Connecting an ACM or NCM Network Port to a TriStation PC . . . . . . . 380
Connecting a TCM Network Port to a TriStation PC Using a Router or Hub . . . . 381
Connecting a Tricon Network Port Using a Media Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Configuring the TriStation 1131 Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Specifying the Tricon Default Connection Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Controlling Access to the TCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
What Are TCM Resources? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
How Is Access Controlled? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
What Are Access Levels? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Sample Access Control List and Resulting Access Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Configuring the Access Control List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Configuring Tricon Controller Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Effect of Printing on Scan Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Contents
Connecting a Tricon EICM Port to a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

Configuring a Tricon EICM Port for Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Connecting a TCM to Printing Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Connecting a TCM to Printing Devices Using a Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Configuring a Tricon TCM Port for Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
About Function Blocks for Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Setting Tricon Controller IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Using the Default IP Address for TriStation Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Setting a Tricon Controller IP Address Using a RARP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Setting a Tricon Controller IP Address Using an EICM or TCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Testing a Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Chapter 6
Trident and Tri-GP Communication with TriStation 1131
405
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
TriStation 1131 Communication Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Configuring the TriStation PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Installing a NIC Card in a TriStation PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Installing DLC or TCP/IP Protocol on a TriStation PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Connecting to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Controller for the First Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Connecting Via the Serial Connection (Recommended) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Connecting via the Left MP Network Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller via a Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
When to Use the Trident or Tri-GP Serial Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller for the First Time . . . . . . . . 412
Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller When the
Network Is Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller When the
Access Control List has Been Misconfigured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Connecting a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Serial Port to a TriStation PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Configuring the TriStation 1131 Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller via a Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . 416
Connecting the Trident 1.x MP to a TriStation PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Directly Connecting a Trident 1.x MP to a TriStation PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Connecting a Trident 1.x MP to a TriStation PC Using a Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Configuring the TriStation 1131 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Connecting the Trident 1.x CM to the TriStation PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Directly Connecting a Trident 1.x CM to a TriStation PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Connecting a Trident 1.x CM to a TriStation PC Using a Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Configuring the TriStation 1131 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Connecting the Trident v2.x or Tri-GP Controller to a TriStation PC . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Directly Connecting a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Network Port to
a TriStation PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Connecting a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Network Port to a TriStation PC
Using a Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Configuring the TriStation 1131 Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Specifying the Trident or Tri-GP Default Connection Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Controlling Access to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
What Are CM Resources?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
How Is Access Controlled? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
What Are Access Levels? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Sample Access Control List and Resulting Access Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Configuring the Access Control List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Configuring Trident or Tri-GP Controller Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Effect of Printing on Scan Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Devices for Trident or Tri-GP Controller Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Contents
xi
Directly Connecting a Trident or Tri-GP CM to Printing Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440

Connecting a Trident or Tri-GP CM to Printing Devices Using a Hub . . . . . . . . . . 441
Configuring a Trident or Tri-GP CM for Printing Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
About Function Blocks for Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Setting Trident or Tri-GP Controller IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Using the Default IP Address for TriStation Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Setting an IP Address Using a RARP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Setting a Trident or Tri-GP Controller IP Address Using an MP Connection . . . . 449
Setting a Trident 1.x Controller IP Address Using a CM Connection . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Specifying a Trident or Tri-GP CM Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Specifying a Trident or Tri-GP CM for Network Routing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Testing a Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Chapter 7
Implementation
455
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Implementation Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Controlling the Operational Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Using the Triconex Emulator for Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Controller Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Downloading to the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Changes to the Project Version and State After Downloading
to the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Monitoring Variables on the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Monitoring the Program Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Adding Annotation for Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Determining the Scan Surplus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Setting the Scan Time for a Downloaded Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Displaying Hardware Allocation Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Steps for Downloading Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Planning and Controlling Changes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Commands Required with Application Changes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Disabling Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Disabling Points on the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Viewing Disabled Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Re-enabling Disabled Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Forcing Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Using the Download Changes Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Using the Download All Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Appendix A Commands and Properties
481
Appendix B Data Types
645
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
Elementary Data Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
BOOL Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
DATE Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
DINT Data Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
DT Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
DWORD Data Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
INT Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
LREAL Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
REAL Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
STRING Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
xii
Contents
TIME Data Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656

TOD Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
Generic Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
Appendix C TCM Model 4351/4352 Configuration
659
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
Configuring TCM Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
Configuring TCM Serial Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
Configuring TCM Network Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
Configuring TCM Peer-To-Peer Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
Configuring TCM Modbus TCP Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
Configuring TCM Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
Using a Tricon TCM to Synchronize Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
Configuring GPS Time Synchronization on the TCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
Configuring SNTP Time Synchronization on the TCM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
Configuring Triconex Time Synchronization on the TCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Configuring a Tricon TCM Printer Port for Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
Appendix D Reserved Names
679
Names Reserved by TriStation 1131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680

Names Reserved by SQL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688
Index
693
Preface
TriStation 1131 Developers Workbench is a software application for developing, testing, and
documenting safety-critical and process-control applications that execute on Triconex
controllers.
New Features in TriStation 1131 v4.9.0

TriStation 1131 version 4.9.0 is a maintenance release, incorporating several minor fixes and
enhancements.
Note
For more detailed information about the changes made in each TriStation 1131 v4.x
release, see the Product Release Notice for TriStation v4.x, available on the Invensys Global
Customer Support web site.
Summary of Sections
Chapter 1, Project AdministrationDescribes how to install the TriStation 1131

software, create a project, set up security, and use libraries of functions and function
blocks.
Chapter 2, Application DevelopmentExplains how to develop an application.
Chapter 3, Tricon Controller ConfigurationExplains how to configure modules

installed in a Tricon controller.
Chapter 4, Trident and Tri-GP Controller ConfigurationExplains how to configure

modules installed in a Trident or Tri-GP controller.
Chapter 5, Tricon Communication with TriStation 1131Describes how to set up

communication between a TriStation 1131 PC and a Tricon controller.
Chapter 6, Trident and Tri-GP Communication with TriStation 1131Describes how to

set up communication between a TriStation 1131 PC and a Trident or Tri-GP controller.
Chapter 7, ImplementationExplains how to implement an application on a controller.
Appendix A, Commands and PropertiesDescribes TriStation 1131 commands,

properties, and tools.
Appendix B, Data TypesDescribes the data types used in applications developed

with TriStation 1131.
Appendix C, TCM Model 4351/4352 ConfigurationExplains how to configure the

model 4351 or 4352 Tricon Communication Module (TCM).
xiv
Preface
Related Documents
TriStation 1131 Libraries Reference
Triconex Emulator Users Guide
SOE Recorder Users Guide
Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor Users Guide
Tricon, Trident, and Tri-GP Safety Considerations Guides
Communication Guide for Tricon v9-v10 Systems
Communication Guide for Trident Systems
Communication Guide for Tri-GP Systems
Product Release Notices for specific Tricon, Trident, Tri-GP, and TriStation 1131 versions
Product and Training Information

To obtain information about Triconex products and in-house and on-site training, see the
Invensys Operations Management Web site or contact your regional customer center.
Web Site
http://www.iom.invensys.com
Preface
xv
Technical Support
Customers in the U.S. and Canada can obtain technical support from the Invensys Global
Customer Support (GCS) center at the numbers below. International customers should contact
their regional support center.
Requests for support are prioritized as follows:
Emergency requests are given the highest priority
Requests from participants with a support agreement and customers with purchase
order or charge card authorization are given next priority
All other requests are handled on a time-available basis
If you require emergency or immediate response and do not have a support agreement, you
may incur a charge. Please have a purchase order or credit card available for billing.
Telephone
Toll-free number 866-746-6477, or
Toll number
508-549-2424 (outside U.S.)
Fax
Toll number
508-549-4999
Web Site
http://support.ips.invensys.com/ (registration required)
xvi
Preface
We Welcome Your Comments

To help us improve future versions of Triconex documentation, we want to know about any
corrections, clarifications, or further information you would find useful. When you contact us,
please include the following information:
The title and version of the guide you are referring to
A brief description of the content you are referring to (for example, step-by-step
instructions that are incorrect, information that requires clarification or more details,
missing information that you would find helpful)
Your suggestions for correcting or improving the documentation
The version of the Triconex hardware or software you are using
Your name, company name, job title, phone number, and e-mail address
Send e-mail to us at:

[email protected]
Please keep in mind that this e-mail address is only for documentation feedback. If you have a
technical problem or question, please contact the Invensys Global Customer Support (GCS)
center. See Technical Support on page xv for contact information.
Or, you can write to us at:
Attn: Technical Publications Triconex
Invensys
26561 Rancho Parkway South
Lake Forest, CA 92630
USA
Thank you for your feedback.
1
Overview
Installing TriStation 1131
Converting Existing Projects to Version 4.9.0
11
Creating a New Project
20
Working with Projects
27
Specifying Project Options
35
Specifying TriStation 1131 Options
45
Managing User Access
54
Working with Libraries
68
Generating Reports
80
Printing Project Documents
91
Chapter 1
Overview
This figure shows a typical project cycle and the main steps for setting up a TriStation 1131
project.
Overview
Project Administration Steps

This list includes steps that can be or should be done during project administration.
Steps
See
Install the TriStation1131 software

(if needed)
Installing TriStation 1131 on page 4
Create or open an existing project.
Creating a New Project on page 20

Working with Projects on page 27
on page 11
Specify the language to be used as a default.
Specifying Language Options on page 36
Specify whether annotations are

automatically included.
Specifying Annotation Options on page 37
Specify monitor colors for displaying

variables in the Emulator and controller.
Specifying Monitor Colors for BOOL Values

on page 39
Specify sort options for the tagnames table

used by the TCM embedded OPC server.
(Optional)
Specifying Download Options on page 41
Specify options to be used when you use

TriStation 1131.
Specifying TriStation 1131 Options on

page 45
Specify FBD, LD, and CEM Editor options,

as needed. (Optional)
Specifying FBD Editor Options on page 48

Specifying LD Editor Options on page 49
Specifying CEM Editor Options on page 50
Add custom Help files for user-defined

libraries, as needed. (Optional)
Adding or Removing Custom Help Files on

page 51
Create TriStation 1131 users and configure

user access levels.
Managing User Access on page 54
Add libraries from other projects. (Optional)
Adding a Library on page 74
View standard reports; add custom reports.
Generating Reports on page 80
Chapter 1

This section explains how to install and uninstall the TriStation 1131 software, and how to verify
that the software is correctly installed. The installation also installs the TS1131 Install Check
software.
Topics include:
System Requirements on page 4
Upgrading from Previous Versions of TriStation 1131 on page 5
Changing a TriStation 1131 v4.9.0 Installation on page 5
Installing the TriStation 1131 Software on page 6
Customizing the Security Banner Text on page 7
Uninstalling the TriStation 1131 Software on page 9
Verifying the TriStation 1131 Installation on page 9
System Requirements
The following are the minimum system requirements for TriStation 1131:
PC running the .NET Framework 3.5 and one of the following Windows operating
systems:
Windows XP Professional
Windows 7 Professional/Enterprise (32-bit and 64-bit)
Windows Server 2003
Windows Server 2008 R2 (32-bit and 64-bit)
Note
If the .NET Framework is not already installed, setup will install it for you before
installing TriStation 1131. See Installing TriStation 1131 on page 4 for more
information.
1 GHz processor with 512 MB RAM
500 MB free hard drive space
CD-ROM drive
Network adapter card
SVGA monitor running at 1024 x 768 resolution with 32-bit color
DLC protocol installed (for connecting to a Trident v1.x MP only; see Installing DLC or
TCP/IP Protocol on a TriStation PC on page 408)
Upgrading from Previous Versions of TriStation 1131

If you are upgrading from a previous version of TriStation 1131, please note the following:
Projects created in previous versions of TriStation 1131 should be backed up using the
version of TriStation 1131 they were created in, before opening the project in a later
version. Projects backed up using a later version of TriStation 1131 cannot be opened
by older versions. For example, a project backed up using version 4.8.0 cannot be
opened in TriStation 1131 version 4.4.
If you have previously installed version 2.x, 3.x, or 4.x of the TriStation 1131 software,
you do not need to uninstall it before installing v4.9.0. However, only one version of
TriStation 1131 can be open at any one time; for example, you cannot have v3.x open at
the same time as v4.9.0.
If you have previously installed v4.x of the TriStation 1131 software, you do not need to
uninstall it before you install version 4.9.0. You may wish to keep both versions of the
TriStation 1131 software installed on your workstation until you have finished
converting all your projects to v4.9.0 (see Converting Existing Projects to Version 4.9.0
on page 11). However, uninstalling v4.0 after you have installed v4.9.0 will cause
v4.9.0 to no longer work. To correct this, simply uninstall both v4.0 and v4.9.0 and then
reinstall v4.9.0.
Additionally, if you installed other Triconex applications (such as SOE Recorder) after
you installed TriStation 1131 v4.0, uninstalling v4.0 may cause other installed Triconex
applications to no longer work. To correct this, simply uninstall and then reinstall the
other Triconex applications after you uninstall TriStation 1131 v4.0.
Sample TriStation 1131 projects are now found in the following locations on the PC
where you install TriStation 1131 v4.9.0:
Windows XP and Windows Server 2003: C:\Documents and Settings\All
Users\Application Data\Triconex\TriStation 1131 4.9.0\Projects
Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2: C:\Program Data\Triconex

\TriStation 1131 4.9.0\Projects
Changing a TriStation 1131 v4.9.0 Installation

There are two versions of TriStation 1131:
The Tri-GP only version: Supports application development for Tri-GP controllers
only. You cannot create applications for use with Tricon or Trident controllers.
The full-featured version: Supports application development for all Triconex

controllersTricon, Trident, and Tri-GP.
If you have previously installed either version of TriStation 1131 v4.9.0, and you want to
upgrade or downgrade your installation, you do not need to uninstall it before running the
TriStation 1131 v4.9.0 setup program.
During installation, setup will automatically modify the current installation to add or remove
features. If you currently have the full-featured version of TriStation 1131 v4.9.0 installed,
downgrading to the Tri-GP only version means you will lose the ability to work with Tricon or
Trident project files.
Chapter 1
Installing the TriStation 1131 Software

This procedure explains how to install the TriStation 1131 software. The setup program
provided by Triconex installs all the components of the TriStation 1131 Developers Workbench
on your PC.
The Triconex Emulator v1.2.0 is automatically installed as part of the TriStation 1131
installation. For more information about the Emulator, see Using the Triconex Emulator
for Testing on page 459.
If you purchased the optional CEMPLE software, it is installed at the same time.
The TriStation 1131 software must be installed on a local drive. Do NOT install and run
TriStation 1131 on a network server.
Before you start TriStation 1131 installation, make sure you have installed the latest service
packs and critical updates for your version of Windows. To look for recent updates, visit the
Microsoft Windows Update website.
If the .NET Framework is not already installed, setup will install it for you before installing
TriStation 1131. If necessary, setup will also install Windows Installer v4.5 prior to installing the
.NET Framework. Depending on your PCs configuration, Windows Installer and .NET
Framework installation can take several minutes, and may require you to restart your PC in
order to complete the installation process.
If you receive any errors during the .NET Framework installation, contact your system
administrator for assistance.
Note
During installation, you will be asked if you want to change the NERC Security Banner
message text. This is optional; the message text can also be modified at any time after
installation. If you arent sure if you want to change the text, leave the default text as-is
during installation. See Customizing the Security Banner Text on page 7 for more
information.
Procedure
1
Log on as an administrator or as a user with administrator privileges.
Close all open applications.
Insert the TriStation 1131 CD in the CD-ROM drive.

If the installation starts automatically, go to step 8. Otherwise, go to the next step.
From the Start menu, click Settings, and then click Control Panel.
Double-click Add New Programs.
Click the CD or Floppy button, and then browse to locate the setup.exe file on the CD.
Double-click setup.exe to start the installation.
Follow the InstallShield Wizard instructions.

Triconex recommends installing the TriStation 1131 software in the default destination
folder, which is:
Windows XP / Windows Server 2003: C:\Program Files\Triconex

\TriStation 1131 4.9.0\
Windows 7 / Windows Server 2008 R2 (32-bit): C:\Program Files\Triconex

\TriStation 1131 4.9.0\
Windows 7 / Windows Server 2008 R2 (64-bit): C:\Program Files(x86)

\Triconex\TriStation 1131 4.9.0\
10
To restart your PC after the installation has finished, click Yes. You are not required to
restart your PC before running the TriStation 1131 software, unless the .NET Framework
was installed as part of the TriStation 1131 installation.
To complete the installation, click Finish.
Customizing the Security Banner Text

Each time you start TriStation 1131, a
security banner appears, advising you of
the appropriate use of TriStation 1131.
If you are an administrator managing
TriStation 1131 installations in your
organization, you may want to customize
the security banner text to reflect your
corporate policy, meet site-specific needs,
or be in compliance with North American
Electric Reliability Corporation (NERC)
cyber security standards.
Note
For more information about the

NERCs Cyber Security standards, a
set of sound security practices that,
if properly implemented, can assist in securing critical infrastructure from cyber security
threats, see www.nerc.com.
The security banner text must be customized in each TriStation 1131 installation individually.
However, once you modify the security banner text once, you can simply copy and paste the
text from one PC to another. An easy way to do this would be to create a temporary text file with
the security banner text in it, and place that file on the network, or on a portable flash drive. You
can then copy and paste the text from the file.
Also, the same security banner text can be used for other Triconex products that use the security
banner functionality. For example, if your organizations security banner text is the same for all
Triconex products, you can use the same text for the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor as you do
for TriStation 1131.
The security banner text can be changed during TriStation 1131 installation, or at any time after
installation using the procedure provided in this section.
You must be logged in to Windows as user with administrator privileges to change the security
banner text.
Procedure
1
Open TriStation 1131.
On the Edit menu, click Modify Banner Message.
Chapter 1
If the Modify Banner Message menu item is not enabled, you are not logged in to
Windows with administrator privileges.
The Modify Banner Message dialog box appears.
Edit the security banner text as needed, and then click OK. The security banner text can
be a maximum of 2,100 characters.
Note
You cannot have a blank security banner message; if you delete the existing text,
but do not enter new text, the default security banner message (This system is
for use by authorized Safety System personnel only.) will be displayed.
The next time you start TriStation 1131, the customized text will appear in the security
banner.
Note
If you receive an Unable to save changes to the banner message error message when
you attempt to save the security banner text, you may not have read/write access to the
location where the message text is stored. Contact Invensys Global Customer Support
for assistance. For contact information, see Technical Support on page xv.
Uninstalling the TriStation 1131 Software

This procedure explains how to uninstall the TriStation 1131 software.
Procedure
1
Log on as an administrator or as a user with administrator privileges.
From the Start menu, click Settings, and then click Control Panel.
Double-click Add/Remove Programs, and select TriStation 1131 4.9.0.
Click Change/Remove.
Follow the on-screen instructions to confirm the deletion of the selected application and
all its components.
Note
If you saved projects in the default installation directory (see Installing TriStation
1131 on page 4) or the default Projects directory (see Specifying Directory
Locations on page 46), the uninstall program does not remove them.
Click Yes or Yes to All if the Remove Shared File dialog box asks about removing unused
DLLs.
Click Finish to complete the uninstallation process.
Verifying the TriStation 1131 Installation

This procedure explains how to verify the TriStation 1131 software is correctly installed and that
associated files are not corrupted.
After installing the software and before downloading an application to the controller, you
should run the TriStation 1131 Install Check program. The Install Check software is copied to
your hard drive when you install the TriStation 1131 software.
Note
Running TS1131 Install Check is required for safety applications. For more information,
see the Safety Considerations Guide.
Procedure
1
From the Start menu, select Programs, Triconex, and then Install Check 4.9.0.
Click Run.
Install Check verifies that all TriStation 1131 files are correctly installed. When
verification is complete, the name, version, and status of each file are displayed in the
list.
10
Chapter 1
Verify that the program is validated by viewing each item in the list.
The status of each file should be OK. If there are files that have Missing or
Corrupted in the Status column, you should re-install TriStation 1131.
Click Display Details to view the full path for verified files and expanded error messages
for any identified problems.
11

The programming model for TriStation 1131 4.x is significantly different from versions 3.x and
earlier. The most significant differences are:
There are no program instances
Programs can directly reference tagnames
Programs cannot use VAR_INPUT, VAR_OUTPUT, or VAR_IN_OUT variables
This procedure explains how an existing TriStation 1131 project can be automatically converted
to v4.9.0. Any project created with v2.x through v4.8.0 can be converted to v4.9.0. However,
once a project has been opened in v4.9.0, it can no longer be opened with an earlier version of
TriStation 1131.
Note
All projects are backed up automatically prior to project conversion. The backup file can
be opened in the version of TriStation 1131 originally used to create the project. The
name and location of the backup file is displayed in the messages window (see Message
View Command on page 561) after project conversion is complete.
Projects converted to version 4.9.0 are automatically set to use Standard Security. You can
change the security setting after project conversion is complete. See Changing the Security
Setting on page 55.
Topics include:
Selecting the Target System Version During Project Conversion on page 11
Converting Version 4.x Tricon Projects on page 13
Converting Version 4.x Trident Projects on page 15
Converting Version 2.x and 3.x Tricon or Trident Projects on page 17
Selecting the Target System Version During Project Conversion

When converting an existing project, if it is a Tricon project last opened in TriStation 1131 v4.1
or earlier, or a Trident project last opened in TriStation 1131 v4.4 or earlier, you are asked to
select the target system version for the project. The target system version determines which
controller features and modules can be configured in a project.
If your project is in the Download Changes state prior to conversion, be sure to select the correct
target system version during the conversion process. The conversion process is the only time
you can set the projects target system version without having to change the project state to
Download All. If the target system version is correctly configured during conversion, the project
can remain in the Download Changes state.
However, changing the target system version at any time after conversion will require a
Download All. If you select an incorrect target system version during project conversion, you
must do one of the following to correct the target system version:
Change the project to the Download All state, and then change the target system
version (see Configuring the Tricon Target System Version on page 252 or Configuring
the Trident or Tri-GP Target System Version on page 318).
12
Chapter 1
Keep the project in the Download Changes state by abandoning the current project and
using the projects backup file to restart the conversion process.
Rules for Tricon Project Target System Version Conversion
If the projects hardware configuration includes a model 3006 or 3007 Main Processor,
you cannot upgrade to a model 3008 Main Processor during project conversion.
In this case, you must convert the project with Tricon v9 - 3006 Main Processor as the
target system version, and then change the target system version after project
conversion is complete. This will require a Download All. For more information, see
Configuring the Tricon Target System Version on page 252 or Configuring the Trident
or Tri-GP Target System Version on page 318.
A project created in TriStation 1131 v4.4 or v4.5 with a mix of High-Density and
Enhanced Low-Density chassis cannot be changed to an earlier system version
(downgraded) or to a later system version (upgraded).1
Rules for Trident Project Target System Version Conversion
If the projects hardware configuration includes a Trident v1.0 or v1.1 system, you must
upgrade to a Trident v1.2 or later target system version during project conversion.
TriStation 1131 v4.9.0 cannot be used to create or modify projects for Trident v1.0 or v1.1
systems. In this case, if you want to maintain your project for use with these Trident
system versions, do not open the project in TriStation 1131 v4.9.0. You must use
TriStation 1131 v4.4 or earlier with these systems. See the Product Release Notice for
TriStation 1131 v4.x on the Invensys Global Customer Support (GCS) web site for
detailed compatibility information.
If you are upgrading from a Trident 1.x to Trident 2.x target system version during
project conversion, the configuration settings for the CM will be reset to their default
values during project conversion.
Invensys recommends writing down your Trident 1.x CM configuration details (or
saving a backup of your project prior to conversion) before changing the target system
version, so that you can use them to reconfigure the Trident 2.x CM after project
conversion is complete.
If time synchronization has been enabled on the Trident CM or MP (as described

below), it will be disabled during project conversion if the target system version is
changed from 1.x to 2.x, or vice-versa.
On Trident 2.x, time synchronization is enabled if the Enable Trident/Tri-GP Node
Time Synchronization check box is selected on the Operating Parameters tab of the
MP Setup dialog box.
On Trident 1.x, time synchronization is enabled if either the On NET 1 Enable Time
Synchronization or the On NET 2 Enable Time Synchronization properties are
selected on the Network tab of the CM Setup dialog box.
1.
This limitation does not apply to projects created in TriStation 1131 v4.6 or later.
13
You will need to re-enable time synchronization after project conversion is complete. See
Configuring Trident or Tri-GP Time Synchronization on page 362 for more information.
Note
Upgrading or downgrading within a major Trident version (for example, from

1.2 to 1.6, or from 2.1 to 2.0) will NOT change your time synchronization settings.
Converting Version 4.x Tricon Projects

This procedure describes how to convert Tricon projects created in TriStation 1131 versions 4.0
4.8.0 to TriStation 1131 v4.9.0.
Note
All projects will be backed up automatically during project conversion. The name and
location of the backup file will be displayed in the messages window (see Message View
Command on page 561) after project conversion is complete.
Procedure
1
Open the TriStation 1131 project to be converted.
When prompted, click Yes to continue the conversion or No to cancel.
Enter your user name and password.
Click Log On.
Do one of the following:
If the Select Main Processor dialog box appears (only when converting projects last
opened in TriStation 1131 v4.1 or earlier), go to step 6.
If the Select Main Processor dialog box does not appear, go to step 8.
14
Chapter 1
If the projects hardware configuration includes a model 3006 or 3007 Main

Processor, click OK when prompted to convert the project with Tricon v9 - 3006
Main Processor as the target system version.
If the projects hardware configuration includes a model 3008 Main Processor,

specify these properties in the Select Main Processor dialog box.
Property
Description
Model
The Main Processor model installed in the Tricona that this

project will be downloaded to.
Target System
Version
The system version of the Tricon that this project will be

downloaded to. Use the on-screen descriptions to help you
determine the correct version to select, based on your Tricon
configuration.
a. TriStation 1131 v4.9.0 does not support Tricon versions 9.4.x and earlier. For a list of
TriStation 1131 versions compatible with your Tricon, see the applicable Tricon Product
Release Notice (available on the Invensys Global Customer Support web site).
Note
If you arent sure which Main Processor model and Tricon system version to
select, use the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor to verify your Tricons system
version information. See Determining Your Tricon Controllers System Version
on page 252 for more information.
Click OK.
If you are upgrading a project from one of the following TriStation 1131 versions,
go to step 10.
TriStation 1131 v4.0.x
TriStation 1131 v4.3.x or later
15
If you are converting a project from TriStation 1131 v4.1.x or v4.2.x, go to step 9.
When prompted to update the project libraries, do one of the following, depending on
your projects current download state:
If your project is in the Download All state, go to step 10.
If your project is in the Download Changes state, click Yes to update the libraries, or
No to continue the conversion without updating the libraries. If you click Yes, you
will then be prompted to change the project state to Download All in order to
update all project libraries.
To maintain your project in the Download Changes state, you must click
Cancel when prompted to change the projects state. In this case, the TX1LIB
and TR1LIB libraries will be updated, but the TCXLIB library will NOT be
updated. You can update the TCXLIB library manually after project
conversion is complete; see Making Partial Changes to a Library on page 77.
If you click Change State, your project will be changed to the Download All
state, and all libraries (including TCXLIB) will be updated.
10
If prompted to update the project libraries, click Yes to update the libraries, or No to
continue the conversion without updating the libraries.
Note
If you click No, you must manually update the libraries prior to building and
downloading the application; see Updating a Library on page 75.
Project conversion is complete when the project file opens in TriStation 1131 and you see
the Application Workspace.
Converting Version 4.x Trident Projects

This procedure describes how to convert Trident projects created in TriStation 1131 versions
4.04.8.0 to TriStation 1131 v4.9.0.
Note
All projects will be backed up automatically during project conversion. The name and
location of the backup file will be displayed in the messages window (see Message View
Command on page 561) after project conversion is complete.
CAUTION
TriStation 1131 v4.9.0 does not support Trident versions 1.1 and earlier.
If you open a project developed for use with one of these systems, you
must upgrade the target system version to Trident v1.2 or later during
project conversion. To maintain the project for use with Trident v1.1 or
earlier, do NOT open it with TriStation 1131 v4.9.0.
Procedure
1
When prompted, click Yes to continue the conversion or No to cancel.
Enter your user name and password.
Click Log On.
16
Chapter 1
If the Select Main Processor dialog box appears (only when converting projects last
opened in TriStation 1131 v4.4 or earlier), go to step 6.
If the Select Main Processor dialog box does not appear, go to step 8.
Specify these properties in the Select Main Processor dialog box.

Property
Description
Model
The Main Processor model installed in the Trident that this project will
be downloaded to.
Target System
Version
The system version of the Tridenta that this project will be downloaded
to. Use the on-screen descriptions to help you determine the correct
version to select, based on your Trident configuration.
a. TriStation 1131 v4.9.0 does not support Trident versions 1.1 and earlier. For a list of TriStation 1131
versions compatible with your Trident, see the applicable Trident Product Release Notice (available
on the Invensys Global Customer Support web site).
Note
If you arent sure which Trident system version to select, see Determining Your
Trident or Tri-GP Controllers System Version on page 318.
Click OK.
If you are upgrading a project from one of the following TriStation 1131 versions,
go to step 10.
TriStation 1131 v4.0.x
TriStation 1131 v4.3.x or later
If you are converting a project from TriStation 1131 v4.1.x or v4.2.x, go to the next
step.
When prompted to update the project libraries, do one of the following, depending on
your projects current download state:
17
If your project is in the Download All state, go to step 10.
If your project is in the Download Changes state, click Yes to update the libraries, or
No to continue the conversion without updating the libraries. If you click Yes, you
will then be prompted to change the project state to Download All in order to
update all project libraries.
To maintain your project in the Download Changes state, you must click
Cancel when prompted to change the projects state. In this case, the TRDLIB
library will be updated, but the TCXLIB library will NOT be updated. You can
update the TCXLIB library manually after project conversion is complete; see
Making Partial Changes to a Library on page 77.
If you click Change State, your project will be changed to the Download All
state, and all libraries (including TCXLIB) will be updated.
10
If prompted to update the project libraries, click Yes to update the libraries, or No to
continue the conversion without updating the libraries.
Note
If you click No, you must manually update the libraries prior to building and
downloading the application; see Updating a Library on page 75.
Project conversion is complete when the project file opens in TriStation 1131 and you see
the Application Workspace.
Converting Version 2.x and 3.x Tricon or Trident Projects

This procedure describes how to convert Tricon or Trident projects created in TriStation 1131
v2.x or v3.x to TriStation 1131 v4.9.0.
CAUTION
TriStation 1131 v4.9.0 does not support Trident versions 1.1 and earlier.
If you open a project developed for use with one of these systems, you
must upgrade the target system version to Trident v1.2 or later during
project conversion. To maintain the project for use with Trident v1.1 or
earlier, do NOT open it with TriStation 1131 v4.9.0.
Procedure
1
When prompted, click Yes to continue the conversion or No to cancel. To get information
about what is converted, click Help.
18
Chapter 1
If you clicked Yes, you must log in to the project as a Level 01 user.
After you log in, the project is opened and a backup is made using this naming
convention: <project name>_<version>_Pre40Cnv.bt2.
For a Tricon project, click Yes when prompted to convert the project with Tricon v9
- 3006 Main Processor as the target system version.
For a Trident project:
Click Yes when prompted to update the Trident Hardware Definition File.
Click Yes again when prompted to convert the project with Trident v1.2 or
later as the target system version.
5
After completing the conversion, you must perform a Download All (see Using the
Download All Command on page 480).
The following table identifies the changes made during a v2.x or v3.x project conversion.
Table 1
Changes Made During Version 2.x or 3.x Project Conversion
Item
Description
Application
Snapshot
The conversion removes the snapshot of the application which was saved during
the last download. This means you will not be able to compare the current version
of the project to the previously downloaded version of the project until after the
first download.
Application
State
The state of the application is changed to Download All.
Multiple
Program
Instances
If there are multiple instances of a program, each instance is converted to a new

program document.
The name of each new document is generated by appending _# to the program
name, where # is a consecutive number starting at 1.
For example, if there were two instances of program TankAlarm, the first instance
is named TankAlarm_1, and the second is named TankAlarm_2.
Naming
Conflicts
If renaming a program input or output results in a name conflict with a local

variable, the name of the local variable is appended with ?Dup? and a message is
written to the message output view.
You must rename the local variable before compiling the program.
Table 1
19
Changes Made During Version 2.x or 3.x Project Conversion (continued)
Item
Description
Trident System
Variables
If a tagname references a Trident system variable, the variable name is appended

with ?Sys? and a message is written to the message output view.
You must change the names and change the Point Type to memory. One way to
do this is to replace the dot (period) in the name with an underscore and then
delete the ?Sys? from the end of the name.
You must also use the system status function blocks (SYS_*) to set the value of
these variables. The best place to do this is in the first network in your program.
The reason this must be done is that in this version of TriStation 1131, Trident
system status values are only accessible by using the system status function
blocks.
Variable
Changes
In FBD, LD, and CEM programs, input and output variable declarations are
changed to tagname declarations.
In ST programs, all VAR_INPUT, VAR_OUTPUT, and VAR_IN_OUT
declarations are changed to VAR_EXTERNAL.
20
Chapter 1

This procedure explains how to create a new TriStation 1131 project. When a new project is
created, Standard Security is enabled, and a user name and password are automatically created
with the highest level of privilegesLevel 01 (see Managing User Access on page 54). You are
automatically logged on as this default user when the project is created.
Note
Each project is created for a single controller type (Tricon, Trident, or Tri-GP); you
cannot create a single project for use with two or more controller types.
Topics include:
The Project Workspace on page 20
Creating a New Tricon Project on page 21
Creating a New Trident Project on page 23
Creating a New Tri-GP Project on page 25
The Project Workspace

The Project Workspace includes two reports folders.
The standard reports included with TriStation

1131 are found in the Default Reports folder.
See Viewing and Printing a Report on page 80.
Custom reports you create using the Crystal

Reports software appear in the User Reports
folder. See Adding Custom Reports to a Project
on page 82.
Other project features are accessed from the menus.
21
Creating a New Tricon Project

This procedure describes how to create a new project for a Tricon controller.
Procedure
1
On the File menu, click New Project.
For the Platform (controller), select Tricon or Tricon Low Density.
Click OK to continue.
Navigate to the folder you want to save the project in, enter a file name, and click Save.
Note
TriStation 1131 projects must always be run from a local drive. Projects may be
saved to a network drive for backup purposes, but you must copy the project to
your local drive before you open it in TriStation 1131.
The projects file name (including the entire folder path) cannot exceed 235
characters. Also, the first character in the file name must be an alphanumeric
character.
22
Chapter 1

Property
Description
Model
The Main Processor model installed in the Tricona that this project
will be downloaded to.
For Tricon versions 9.5.x, 9.51.x, or 9.52.x, select 3006/N, 3007.
For Tricon versions 9.6 and later, select 3008.
Target System
Version

configuration.
a. TriStation 1131 v4.9.0 does not support Tricon versions 9.4.x and earlier. For a list of TriStation
1131 versions compatible with your Tricon, see the applicable Tricon Product Release Notice
(available on the Invensys Global Customer Support web site).
Note
select, use the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor to verify your Tricon system
on page 252 for more information. You should be sure to select the correct target
system version, as changing the target system version at a later time will require
a Download All.
Click OK.
Files that are used in TriStation 1131 are copied to the project. After the file creation
process finishes, you are automatically logged on to the project using the default user
name (MANAGER) and default password (PASSWORD).
23
Creating a New Trident Project

This procedure describes how to create a new project for a Trident controller.
Procedure
1
For the Platform (controller), select Trident.
In the Filename for New Project dialog box, navigate to the folder you want to save the
project in, enter a file name, and click Save.
Note
character.
24
Chapter 1

Property
Description
Model
The Main Processor model installed in the Trident that this

Target System
Version
The system version of the Tridenta that this project will be

determine the correct version to select, based on your Trident
configuration.
a. TriStation 1131 v4.9.0 does not support Trident versions 1.1 and earlier. For a list of
TriStation 1131 versions compatible with your Trident, see the applicable Trident Product
Release Notice (available on the Invensys Global Customer Support web site).
Note
If you arent sure which Main Processor model and Trident system version to
select, see Determining Your Trident or Tri-GP Controllers System Version on
page 318. You should be sure to select the correct target system version, as
changing the target system version at a later time will require a Download All.
Click OK.
25
Creating a New Tri-GP Project

This procedure describes how to create a new project for a Tri-GP controller.
Procedure
1
For the Platform (controller), select Tri-GP.
In the Filename for New Project dialog box, navigate to the folder you want to save the
project in, enter a file name, and click Save.
Note
character.
26
Chapter 1

Property
Description
Model
The Main Processor model installed in the Tri-GP that this

Target System
Version
The system version of the Tri-GP that this project will be

determine the correct version to select, based on your Tri-GP
configuration.
Note
If you arent sure which Main Processor model and Tri-GP system version to
select, see Determining Your Trident or Tri-GP Controllers System Version on
page 318. You should be sure to select the correct target system version, as
changing the target system version at a later time will require a Download All.
Click OK.
27

This section explains how to open and log on to an existing project, add audit comments and a
description, view project version information and save an existing project.
Topics include:
Logging In to an Existing Project on page 27
Adding a Project Description on page 31
Adding Audit Comments on page 32
Displaying Version Numbers of Projects and Documents on page 33
Logging In to an Existing Project

Only one project can be opened at a time. TriStation 1131 projects must always be run from a
local drive. A project that has been saved to a network drive must be copied to your local drive
before you open it.
Depending on the current security setting, you may need to log in using your Windows user
name and password.
If Standard Security is enabled, there is no limit on the number of times you can
attempt to enter your user name and password.
If Enhanced Security is enabled, the number of times you can attempt to enter your user
name and password is determined by your Windows domain setting.
For example, if your Windows domain setting is limited to three login attempts, after
three unsuccessful attempts to log in to the project, your user account will be locked out.
If this occurs, ask your network administrator to reset your Windows account.
Note
If an existing TriStation 1131 project was created by a user with restricted or

administrator-level rights in Windows, other users may be unable to open that project.
Windows security file access rules apply to all TriStation 1131 project files. You must
have read/write access to a TriStation 1131 project, and the folder it is located in, to be able
to open the project. If you are unable to open a TriStation 1131 project created by another
user, contact your network or system administrator for assistance with changing the
access rights for the selected project file and/or file location.
Topics include:
Logging In for the First Time When Enhanced Security Is Enabled on page 28
Logging In When Standard Security Is Enabled on page 28
Logging In When Enhanced Security Is Enabled on page 28
Troubleshooting Login Problems on page 29
28
Chapter 1
Logging In for the First Time When Enhanced Security Is Enabled

If you are a new user, the first time you log on to a project when Enhanced Security is enabled,
you may need to log in twice:
First, you need to enter your Windows user name and password, to authenticate
against the Windows domain.
If Windows authentication is successful, you then need to enter your Windows user
name and TriStation 1131 password (NOT your Windows password), to authenticate
against the projects user list.
If both authentications are successful, all subsequent logins will require you to enter only your
Windows user name and password to access the project.
Logging In When Standard Security Is Enabled

When Standard Security is enabled, you must use your TriStation 1131 user name and password
to log in.
Procedure
1
Open TriStation 1131 and on the File menu, click Open Project.
Select the folder to look in, click the project to be opened, and then click Open.
Enter a user name and password. The default user name is MANAGER. The default
password is PASSWORD.
Click Log On. The project opens.
Logging In When Enhanced Security Is Enabled

When Enhanced Security is enabled, you must use your Windows user name and password to
log in. Your user information will be authenticated against Windows Active Directory, as well
as the projects user list.
If you are having problems logging in using your Windows user information, see
Troubleshooting Login Problems on page 29.
29
Procedure
1
Open TriStation 1131 and on the File menu, click Open Project.
Select the folder to look in, click the project to be opened, and then click Open.
The Windows login dialog box appears.
Enter your Windows user name (including domain, if necessary) and password, and
click OK.
Troubleshooting Login Problems

The following are common problems you may encounter when trying to log in to a TriStation
1131 project.
Problem
Solution
The following error message

appears:
The parameter is incorrect.
This message appears when Enhanced Security is enabled,

and you clicked OK in the Login dialog box without entering
your Windows user name and/or password.

appears:

and you do one of the following in the login dialog box:
Logon failure: unknown user

name or bad password.
When you click OK in the error message box, the Login dialog
box will appear again. Be sure not to leave the user name
and/or password field blank.
Enter an incorrect Windows user name that has not been

added to the projects user list.
Enter an incorrect password.
In this case, TriStation 1131 is unable to authenticate your user
information with Windows.
When you click OK in the error message box, the login dialog
box will appear again. Verify that you are trying to log in with
the correct Windows user name and password.
User names and passwords are case-sensitive. Verify that the
CAPS LOCK key is not on when you enter your user
information.
30
Chapter 1
Problem
Solution

appears:

and you enter a Windows user name that has not been added
to the projects user list for the project you are trying to open.
You are not authorized to open

this project because your user
name was not found in the
projects user list.
When you click OK in the error message box, the login dialog
box will appear again. Verify that you are trying to log in with
the correct Windows user name and password.
User names and passwords are case-sensitive. Verify that the
CAPS LOCK key is not on when you enter your user
information.

appears:
This message appears when Enhanced Security is enabled and

you are trying to log in using a Windows Guest account.
Logon failure: the user has not

been granted the requested
logon type at this computer.
Windows Guest accounts are used to provide access to a

computer when you do not have a Windows user account on
that computer. In order for you to be able to log in to a
TriStation 1131 project with a Guest account, ask your
network or system administrator to do the following:
Remove the Guest user from the Windows Local
Security Policy Deny access to this computer from the
network list.
Enable the Accounts: Guest account status option in the
Windows Local Security Policy security options list.
31
Adding a Project Description

This procedure explains how to add a description to a project. The Project Description dialog
box displays information about the project, including the version of the project being developed
and the version of the project downloaded to the controller, which may be different.
CAUTION
Do not use the Windows file properties dialog box to maintain descriptive
information about your project.
Changing or adding information to the Summary tab in the Windows File
Properties dialog box for a TriStation 1131 project file (.pt2) will prevent
TriStation 1131 from opening the file.
There is no way to recover a project file that has been changed in this way.
Procedure
1
On the Project menu, click Project Description.
Enter a description of any length for the project.
Click OK to save.
32
Chapter 1
Adding Audit Comments

This procedure explains how to add comments when you change a program, function, or
function block. These comments provide an audit trail which can be viewed in reports.
Note
You can also add audit trail comments when compiling or saving a program, and
building an application. See Building or Rebuilding an Application on page 241.
Procedure
1
Close a program, function, or function block that was changed.

The following dialog box appears, allowing you to describe the changes before the
element is saved.
Enter a comment and click OK.
33
Displaying Version Numbers of Projects and Documents

This procedure explains what version numbers are and how they can be viewed. Version
numbers are used with the project under development (current version), the downloaded
application (downloaded version), and project elements.
Version numbers include a major (first), minor (second), and EmulatorCount (third) number,
each separated by a period. For example, in version 3.7.12, the major version is 3, the minor
version is 7, and the EmulatorCount version is 12.
Differences in the Projects Downloaded Version

The projects downloaded version is different for the Emulator and the controller.
The controller downloaded project version is the last version of the project file (.pt2)
downloaded to the controller. The version is provided in the format major.minor (for
example, in version 3.7, the major version is 3 and the minor version is 7).
The Emulator downloaded project version is the last version of the project file (.pt2)
downloaded to the Emulator. The version is provided in the format
major.minor.EmulatorCount (for example, in version 3.7.12, the major version is 3, the
minor version is 7, and the EmulatorCount is 12).
The major.minor version is the same as the last controller downloaded project
version.
The EmulatorCount value is incremented sequentially after either a Download All
or a Download Changes to the Emulator.
Note
The complete list of downloaded version changes can be viewed in the Project History
dialog box. See View Project History Command on page 640.
Procedure for Projects

1
On the Project menu, click Project Description.
View these properties in the Project Description dialog box.
34
Chapter 1
Property
Description
Current
Version
The version of the project which is under development.
Downloaded
Version
The version of the project (application) which was last downloaded to

the controller or the Emulator.
Use the View Project History Command on page 640 to see the
complete list of downloaded version changes.
Click OK to close the dialog box.
Procedure for Documents

1
Expand the Application Workspace (see The Application Workspace on page 100), and
right-click a document.
On the shortcut menu that appears, click Properties. The Document Properties dialog
box appears.
On the Summary tab, view the Name property. The version of the document is located
at the end of the name.
For example, if the document name is displayed as LightEmUp - v1.26, the version
number is 1.26.
Click OK to close the dialog box.
35

Project Options are settings that specify the language, annotation, monitor, download, and
Emulator settings used when new project elements are created.
When you create new elements in a project, default settings are used unless you specify different
settings. For example, the Default Language property is set to Function Block Diagram, which
means that a new function is automatically created in FBD language unless you specify another
language.
You can change the default settings when you begin a new project or at any time during project
development. The settings only affect new elements.
Topics include:
Specifying Language Options on page 36
Specifying Annotation Options on page 37
Specifying Monitor Colors for BOOL Values on page 39
Specifying Forced Points Options on page 40
Specifying Download Options on page 41
Specifying Emulator Options on page 42
36
Chapter 1
Specifying Language Options

This procedure explains how to specify the language and element types used to create new
programs, functions, and function blocks.
Procedure
1
On the Project menu, click Project Options, and then click the Language tab.
Specify these properties on the Language tab.
Property
Action
Default Language
Specify the type of programming language to use when

creating a program, function, function block, or data type. The
default is Function Block Diagram.
Enabled Features
Select the check box for each feature (programs, functions,

function blocks, data types, and multiple programs) that can be
created in the project. The default is selected for all features.
Click OK to save the settings.
37
Specifying Annotation Options

Annotations can be used to display descriptive text about a constant, tagname, or variable,
including information specified in system and user-modifiable macros.
This procedure explains how to specify whether annotations are automatically included when
comments and variables are created and whether the value is shown when an application is
monitored. You can also specify text or macros to be included in annotations.
Procedure
1
On the Project menu, click Project Options, and then click the Annotations tab.
Specify these properties on the Annotations tab.

Property
Action
Annotation on by Default
Select the check box to have annotation boxes

automatically added to variables used with a
program, function, or function block. The default is
cleared.
Monitor Value on by
Default
Select the check box to have the value of the variable

displayed when the program or function block is
executed. The default is cleared.
Alignment
Specify how to align the text in an annotation or

comment. The default is Left.
Border
Specify the type of border to include with an

annotation or comment. The default is Single.
38
Chapter 1
Property
Action
Text Size
Specify the point size for text used in the project. The
default settings are: A (6 points), B (8 points), C (10
points), and D (10 points.)
Default Macros or Text
Specify the default macro or text to be included with a

program or function variable.
The program variable defaults are:
Tag Refs: %PGM_TAGNAME
Locals: %PGM_LOCAL
The function and function block variable defaults are:
Input: %FB_INPUT
Output: %FB_OUTPUT
Local: %FB_LOCAL
I/O: %FB_IO
See Using Macros with Annotations and Comments
39
Specifying Monitor Colors for BOOL Values

This procedure explains how to specify what colors are displayed for BOOL True and False
values when the application is run on the controller or Emulator. This feature allows you to
change the colors to meet an industry or corporate standard.
Procedure
1
On the Project menu, click Project Options, and then click the Monitor Colors tab.
Specify these properties on the Monitor Colors tab.

Property
Action
General Monitor Colors
Select the color for True and False for BOOL variables
and wires.
The default for True is red; False is green.
CEM Monitor Colors
Select the color for True and False for cause, effect, and
intersection cells in a CEM (cause and effect matrix).
The default for True is red; False is white.
40
Chapter 1
Specifying Forced Points Options

This procedure explains how to specify if you want to be prompted to enter an optional
comment when enabling, disabling, or forcing points on the controller or Emulator. Comments
appear in the Project History log.
For more information about disabling or forcing points, see Disabling Points on page 474 and
Forcing Points on page 477.
Procedure
1
On the Project menu, click Project Options, and then click the Forced Points tab.
Specify if you want to be asked to enter a comment when performing the following
actions:
Enabling a point
Disabling a point
Forcing a point to a specific value
Select the check box if you want to be asked; clear the check box if you do not want to be
asked. All check boxes are selected by default (you will be asked for a comment).
3
41
Specifying Download Options

This procedure explains how to specify download options for the tagnames table downloaded
to the TCMs embedded OPC server (models 4353 and 4354 only).
If a model 4353 or 4354 TCM is configured and installed in the Tricon, a table with information
about the tagnames and system variables configured in the project is downloaded to the TCMs
embedded OPC server during a Download All or Download Changes operation.
During a Download All operation, the table is downloaded even if no changes have
been made to the table.
During a Download Changes operation, the table is downloaded only if there have
been changes to the table since the last download, including a change to the sort order.
Tagname information from this table is used to help you configure your third-party OPC client
to monitor Tricon system variables and tagnames. The sort order controls how the information
is displayed in the OPC client.
Sort the table alphabetically to view tagnames in a single, non-hierarchical list,

organized in alphabetical order, regardless of their group assignments. This sort order
is useful for small projects without a lot of tagnames.
Sort the table by group to view tagnames in an hierarchical list, where tagnames are
organized according to the groups they are assigned to. This sort order is useful for
large projects with many tagnames.
Note
Because the tagnames table is used only for ease of OPC client configuration and is not
needed during normal Tricon operation, your choice of sort order will not have any
impact on TCM performance.
For more information about the TCMs embedded OPC server and configuring your OPC client
to access Tricon tagnames and system variables, see the Communication Guide for Tricon v9-v10
Systems.
Procedure
1
On the Project menu, click Project

Options, and then click the
Download tab.
Select the sort order for the table:
Sort by Tagname
(alphabetical view)
Sort by Group (hierarchical

view)
The default is Sort by Tagname.

3
Click OK to save the setting.
42
Chapter 1
Specifying Emulator Options

This procedure explains how to specify Emulator project options in TriStation 1131. You can
change the default settings when you begin a new project or at any time during project
development.
Emulator project options should be set prior to starting the Emulator. Options changed while
the Emulator is running will not take effect until the Emulator is stopped and restarted.
Emulator project options are saved on a per-project basis, and do not need to be reconfigured
each time you start the Emulator.
For more information about the Emulator, see the Triconex Emulator Users Guide, or the
Emulator Help (available from the TriStation 1131 Help menu).
Procedure
1
On the Project menu, click Project Options, and then click the Emulator tab.
Specify these properties on the Emulator tab.
Property
Action
Number of
Instances
Select how many instances of the Emulator you want to be able to

run at any one time.
43
If this option is set to Multiple, more than one instance of the

Emulator can be running at the same time. If this option is set to
Single, only one instance of the Emulator can be running at any one
time.
Single Emulator instances are terminated when TriStation 1131
disconnects from the Emulator, but multiple Emulator instances
must be terminated manually.
The default is Single.
Emulator Timeout
Select the timeout value for the connection to the Emulator.

During a Download All or Download Changes operation on the
Emulator, the processing time required for applications with a very
large number of variables (symbols) may exceed the default
Emulator timeout value of 4 seconds.
If you receive a download aborted message when downloading
an application to the Emulator, disconnect from the Emulator,
increase the Emulator timeout value, reconnect to the Emulator, and
then try downloading again.
Note: In most cases, you should not have to change this value. The
default timeout value should be adequate for the majority of
applications.
The valid range is from 0 to 65,535 seconds. The default is 4 seconds.
Emulator File
Generation
Select the files you want generated each time you download the
application to the Emulator.
Select the BT2 check box if you want a backup project file (.BT2)
generated (not recommended).
Select the SOE check box if you want an SOE definition file
(.SOE) generated. If you want to be able to test your SOE
configuration with the Emulator, you must select this option.
If selected, the .BT2 file and/or .SOE file are generated in the same
directory where the TriStation 1131 project is located. The default
setting is for the files to not be generated.
Note: These files will look just like the .BT2 and .SOE files
generated by TriStation 1131 when you download an
application to the controller. You will not be able to
distinguish between files generated by a download to the
Emulator, and files generated by a download to the
controller. You may want to make a note of the date and
time each time you download the application to the
Emulator, so you can compare that timestamp to the
date/time of the generated files.
44
Chapter 1
Property
Action
Communication
Modules (CMs)
for Peer-to-Peer
Optional. Required only if you want to test Peer-to-Peer

communication using the Emulator.
Select the communication module you want to get Peer-to-Peer
configuration information from and then select the network that the
communication module you selected is connected to. The default is
NET 1.
Note: If no CM modules are listed, you have not configured any
communication modules for Peer-to-Peer communication in
your project.
The Peer-to-Peer configuration from the selected communication
module will be used by the Emulator so that you can test your Peerto-Peer functionality using emulated nodes.
Only one Peer-to-Peer configuration can be used by the Emulator. If
redundant communication modules are installed in a single logical
slot, you must select the physical communication module (LEFT or
RIGHT) with the configuration you want to use. The default is
LEFT.
See the Triconex Emulator Users Guide for more information about
using Peer-to-Peer communication with the Emulator.
Communication
Modules (CMs)
for Modbus
Optional. Required only if you want to test Modbus communication

using the Emulator.
Select the communication module you want to get Modbus
configuration information from and then select the network that the
CM you selected is connected to. The default is NET 1.
Note: If no CM modules are listed, you have not configured any
communication modules for Modbus communication in
your project.
The Modbus configuration from the selected communication
module will be used by the Emulator so that you can test your
Modbus functionality using emulated nodes.
Only one Modbus configuration can be used by the Emulator. If
redundant communication modules are installed in a single logical
slot, you must select the physical communication module (LEFT or
RIGHT) with the configuration you want to use. The default is
LEFT.
See the Triconex Emulator Users Guide for more information about
using Modbus communication with the Emulator.
Click OK to apply your changes and save the settings.
45

TriStation 1131 options include properties that affect the TriStation 1131 interface. All the
properties included in the Options dialog box have default settings that specify how features are
initially configured. For example, the Wire Tool property can be specified for right-handed or
left-handed use.
You can change these settings at any time during project development. The settings you
configure are saved for your user ID only.
Topics include:
Specifying Directory Locations on page 46
Specifying Drawing Colors on page 47
Specifying FBD Editor Options on page 48
Specifying LD Editor Options on page 49
46
Chapter 1
Specifying Directory Locations

This procedure explains how to specify the locations for project, library, and report files.
Procedure
1
On the Tools menu, click TriStation 1131 Options, and then click the Directories tab.
Specify these properties on the Directories tab.

Property
Action
Project Files
Enter the path. The default is:

Windows XP/2003: C:\Documents and Settings\All
Users\Application Data\Triconex\TriStation 1131 4.9.0\Projects
Windows Server 2008 and Windows 7: C:\Program
Data\Triconex\TriStation 1131 4.9.0\Projects
Data Files

Users\Application Data\Triconex\TriStation 1131 4.9.0\Data
Data\Triconex\TriStation 1131 4.9.0\Data
Temporary
Files

Users\Application Data\Triconex\TriStation 1131 4.9.0\Temp
Data\Triconex\TriStation 1131 4.9.0\Temp
Use Defaults
Note
3
Click the Use Defaults button to return the settings to the default paths.
TriStation 1131 projects must always be run from a local drive. You should not
enter directory paths that point to a location on your network.
47
Specifying Drawing Colors

This procedure explains how to specify the colors used for items in the programming editors.
The default drawing colors are based on the Windows color scheme selected in Control Panel.
Procedure
1
On the Tools menu, click TriStation 1131 Options, and then click the Drawing Colors tab.
Specify these properties on the Drawing Colors tab.
Property
Action
Drawing Item
Select an item to be shown in a color.
Change Colors Command
Click to display a color palette from which to choose a

color for the selected drawing item.
Default Colors Command
Click to change the colors of all items to the default colors.
48
Chapter 1
Specifying FBD Editor Options

This procedure explains how to specify Function Block Diagram (FBD) Editor settings that are
used throughout the project unless changed on a specific FBD function. You can also change the
Double Space and EN/ENO properties for a specific function.
Procedure
1
On the Tools menu, click TriStation 1131 Options, and then click the FBD Editor tab.
Specify these properties on the FBD Editor tab.
Property
Action
Double Space Function

(Block) Terminals by Default
Select the check box to automatically have the spacing

doubled between terminals (inputs and outputs) on the
function block, which creates additional space for
annotation. The default is cleared.
Enable EN/ENO Terminals

on Functions by Default
Select the check box to automatically enable EN/ENO

terminals on functions. The default is cleared.
Left-Handed Wire Tool
Select the check box to enable the wire tool for lefthanded use. The default is cleared.
49
Specifying LD Editor Options

This procedure explains how to specify Ladder Diagram (LD) editor settings that are used
throughout the project unless changed on a specific LD function. You can also change the
Double Space property for a specific function.
Procedure
1
On the Tools menu, click TriStation 1131 Options, and then click the LD Editor tab.
Specify these properties on the LD Editor tab.
Property
Action
Double Space Function

(Block) Terminals by Default
Select the check box to automatically have the spacing

doubled between terminals (input and output
parameters) on the function block, which adds space
for annotation. The default is cleared.
Compiler Warning When

Right Power Rail is Missing
Select the check box to display a compiler warning if

the right (power) rail is missing from a Ladder
Diagram function. The default is cleared.
Left-Handed Link Tool
Select the check box to enable the link tool for lefthanded use. The default is cleared.
50
Chapter 1
Specifying CEM Editor Options

This procedure explains how to set the options used as initial settings for all the CEM (cause and
effect matrix) programs in a project. After a program is created, you can modify these settings
on a program-by-program basis.
Procedure
1
On the Project menu, click TriStation 1131 Options, and then click the CEM Editor tab.
Specify these properties on the CEM Editor tab.
Property
Action
Cause Header Functions On by

Default
Select the check box to automatically add input and

function columns. The default is cleared.
Effect Header Functions On by

Default
Select the check box to automatically add output and

function columns. The default is cleared.
Intersection Functions On by
Default
Select the check box to automatically add function

columns. The default is cleared.
Default Number of Cause Rows
Enter the number of rows to include in a new matrix.

The default is 22.
Default Number of Effect

Columns
Enter the number of columns to include in a new

matrix. The default is 25.
Adding or Removing Custom Help Files
51

TriStation 1131 allows you to add a maximum of 32 customized HTML Help files (.chm) to the
TriStation 1131 Help menu. Customized Help files allow users to reference specialized
information related to application development, without having to leave TriStation 1131. Some
ways you can use this feature include:
If you have added your own custom libraries to TriStation 1131, this feature allows you
to provide customized Help for these libraries.
If you have specific sets of instructions for creating a safety or control application in
your organization, this feature allows you to provide a customized Help file with that
information.
You are responsible for the creation of the Help files you want to add to the TriStation 1131 Help
menu. Help files must be in the compiled HTML Help format (.chm). WebHelp, DotNet Help,
WinHelp, or other types of Help files cannot be added. For more information about creating
HTML Help, please see the Microsoft web site at www.microsoft.com.
The Triconex Emulator Help file (TCXEMX.chm) has already been added to the Help menu as
a custom Help file. Invensys recommends not removing this Help file from the list.
Note
You must be logged into Windows as an administrator, or a user with administrator

privileges, in order to add or remove custom Help files. If you dont have administrator
privileges, see your network administrator for assistance.
Topics include:
Adding a Custom Help File on page 52
Viewing Custom Help Files on page 52
Removing a Custom Help File on page 53
52
Chapter 1
Adding a Custom Help File

This procedure describes how to add a custom Help file to the TriStation 1131 Help menu.
Procedure
1
On the Help menu, click Options.

The Add or Remove Custom Help File dialog box appears.
Click Browse to locate and select the Help file you want to add.
Help files must be in the compiled HTML Help format (.chm).
Click Add File. The Help file is added to the TriStation 1131 Help menu.
Viewing Custom Help Files

Once you have added your custom Help file(s) to
TriStation 1131, you can view them from within
TriStation 1131 by selecting them from the Help menu.
Note
The file names of the custom Help files are

displayed in the Help menu. For example, if your
custom Help file is Custom.chm, it will appear in
the Help menu as CUSTOM.
On the Help menu, click the name of your
custom Help file.
The Help file opens in the HTML Help viewer
window.
Custom
Help Files
53
Removing a Custom Help File

This procedure describes how to remove a custom Help file from the TriStation 1131 Help
menu.
Procedure
1
On the Help menu, click Options.

The Add or Remove Custom Help File dialog box appears.
In the list of custom Help files, select the file(s) you want to remove.
Click Remove File(s).

The selected Help files are removed from the list of installed files, and will no longer
appear in the TriStation 1131 Help menu.
54
Chapter 1

This section explains how to provide user access to controller and TriStation 1131 operations.
Multiple levels of access control help prevent unauthorized access to TriStation 1131.
The security setting defines the type of authentication used to identify users upon
login. Choose the security setting that is right for your implementation:
Standard Security uses a simple user name / password scheme. This is the default
setting.
Enhanced Security adds another layer of protection against unauthorized access by
requiring Windows domain user authentication.
User security levels define what operations a user can perform while using TriStation
1131. Access is based on the security level assigned to the user, from the highest level
(01) to the lowest level (10). Each level of security includes default settings for the
operation privileges allowed for that level. For example, the Manager level (03)
includes privileges for operations associated with managing a TriStation 1131 project.
Only users assigned to levels 01, 02, or 03 can access the security controls for controller and
TriStation 1131 operations.
Each new TriStation 1131 project is created with a default user name (MANAGER) and
password (PASSWORD). Once you have created a project, you should immediately add at least
one more level 01 user. This ensures that if you forget the password for the default level 01 user,
youll still be able to log in as the secondary level 01 user, and have the ability to add or modify
users, or change the security setting.
To ensure unauthorized users do not access the project, you should create a user account for
each person who will be working with the project before application development begins, and
not allow multiple users to access the project using the default level 01 user information.
Note
If a TriStation 1131 project was created by a user with restricted or administrator-level

rights in Windows, other users may be unable to access that project. Windows security
file access rules apply to all TriStation 1131 project files. Your network or system
administrator can assist with changing the access rights for the selected project file
and/or file location.
Access to a project can be further restricted by settings on documents and operating parameters.
If you are trying to edit a user document created by another user, and are unable to do so even
when you have the correct user level and access privileges, check the documents access
property. If it is locked, you must ask the user who created the document to change the access
property. See Restricting Access to a Document on page 114.
Note
2.
If you have a Tricon Communication Module2 (TCM), a Trident v2.x CM, or a Tri-GP
CM installed in your system, access to the controller via TriStation 1131 can also be
managed via the optional access control list. See Controlling Access to the TCM on
page 386 or Controlling Access to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM on page 434.
Except models 4351 and 4352, which do not have the access control list feature.
55
Topics include:
Changing the Security Setting on page 55
Managing Users on page 58
Adding and Modifying User Access on page 59
Recommended Rules for Passwords on page 60
Changing the Security Level for Privileges on page 61
Changing Security Level Names on page 63
Viewing User Access Logs on page 64
Changing the Security Setting

TriStation 1131 uses one of two application-level security settings: Standard or Enhanced. You
should choose the security setting you want to use before you begin creating user accounts. You
must be a level 01 user to change the security setting.
The security setting defines the type of authentication used to identify users upon login to a
project:
Standard Security: When selected, a user name and password is required to open the
TriStation 1131 project. No other user authentication is required.
This is the default setting. If you used a version of TriStation 1131 previous to version
4.7.0, this security setting is the same as the user name / password login used in
previous versions.
Enhanced Security: When selected, Windows and TriStation 1131 user authentications
are required to log in. The user name for each TriStation 1131 user must be the same as
the users Windows user name.
CAUTION
If you change the security setting from Standard to Enhanced, make sure
that at least one level 01 user has a valid Windows user name before
closing the project. Failure to do so will prevent you from opening the
project again and/or changing the security setting back to Standard.
Each TriStation 1131 project has its own security setting. Each time you change the security
setting for a project, the change is captured in the project history (see View Project History
Command on page 640).
Note
If you need to send a project file that uses Enhanced Security to Invensys Technical
Support for troubleshooting purposes, you must do the following:
Make a copy of the project file.
In the copy file, change the security setting to Standard.
Send the copy file (with Standard Security enabled) to Technical Support.
Leaving your project file set to use Enhanced Security may prevent technical support
personnel from being able to open the project file.
56
Chapter 1
This procedure describes how to change the security setting for a project.
Procedure
1
On the Project menu, click Security. The Security dialog box appears.
On the Security Setting tab, select the setting you want to use: Standard Security or
Enhanced Security.
Note
If both options are unavailable, you are not a level 01 user. You must be a level
01 user to change the security setting.
Click OK, and then do one of the following:
If you downgraded the security setting from Enhanced to Standard, this procedure
is complete. Go to Managing Users on page 58 to edit users as needed.
If you upgraded the security setting from Standard to Enhanced, go to the next step.
When prompted, enter your Windows user name and password, and then click OK.
57
If your Windows user name was previously added to the project user list, and
TriStation 1131 was able to successfully authenticate your Windows user name and
password, this procedure is complete. Go to Managing Users on page 58 to edit
users as needed.
If this is the first time you have upgraded the security setting from Standard to
Enhanced, and TriStation 1131 was able to successfully authenticate your Windows
user name and password, the Add User dialog box appears so you can add yourself
as a Windows user to the project user list. Go to the next step.
Specify these properties in the Add User dialog box.

Property
Action
Full Name
Enter or change the users full name (for example, John Smith).
Description
Enter or change the description for the user (for example, their job
title or function).
User Name
You cannot change the user name, because it must be the same as
the users Windows user name.
Password
Enter the users password. This is NOT the same as the users
Windows password. You should select a different password,
unique to the users TriStation 1131 account.
See Recommended Rules for Passwords on page 60 for minimum
requirements.
Verify Password
Enter the new password again for verification.
Security Level
You cannot change the security level. Enhanced Security requires

at least one level 01 Windows user.
Click OK to save your changes.
58
Chapter 1
Managing Users
This procedure explains how to manage users, which includes creating, modifying, and
deleting TriStation 1131 users. Only users assigned to security levels 01, 02, or 03 can access the
Security dialog box and view user access settings.
Note
If Enhanced Security is enabled, a quick way to prevent a user from accessing TriStation
1131 is to add their Windows user account to the Windows Local Security Policy Deny
access to this computer from the network list.
Using the Print All command, you can print a Project Users report, which lists all the users that
have been added to the projects user list. See Printing Project Documents on page 91.
Procedure
1
On the Project menu, click Security, and then click the Users tab.
Perform one of these actions on the Users tab.

Command
Action
New
To create a new user, click New. For further instructions, see Adding
and Modifying User Access on page 59.
Modify
To modify a user, select a user in the list, and then click Modify. See
Adding and Modifying User Access on page 59 for further
instructions.
Delete
To delete a user, select a user in the list, and then click Delete.
The default level 01 user (MANAGER) can be deleted only if another
level 01 user has already been created.
If Enhanced Security has ever been enabled (even if it is not the current
security setting), you cannot delete the last level 01 Windows user.
Note
Unless you have level 01 access, you cannot add, modify, or delete users who
have the same or higher security level as yourself. Thus, if you have level 03
59
access, you cannot add, modify, or delete users with level 03, 02, or 01 access. If
you have level 02 access, you cannot add, modify, or delete users with level 02 or
01 access. If you have security level 01 access, you can add, modify, or delete
other level 01 users, but you cannot delete yourself.
3
Adding and Modifying User Access

This procedure explains how to add or modify access properties for a TriStation 1131 user.
Note
When Enhanced Security is enabled, the first time a newly-added user logs in, they need
to log in twice for authentication purposes. See Logging In for the First Time When
Enhanced Security Is Enabled on page 28 for more information.
Procedure
1
On the Project menu, click Security, and then click the Users tab.
To add a user, click Add.
To modify a user, click the user name, and then click Modify.
Specify these properties in the Add or Modify User dialog box.

Property
Action
Full Name
Enter or change the name for the user.
Description
Enter or change the description for the user.
60
Chapter 1
Property
Action
Logon Name
Enter or change the name to be used to log on to the project.

If you are using Standard Security, user names can have a
maximum of 16 alphanumeric characters; spaces and special
characters are not allowed.
If you are using Enhanced Security, the user name must be the
same as the users Windows user name, including domain
information, if necessary.
If Enhanced Security is enabled, you cannot change the user
name, because it must be the same as the users Windows user
name.
Note: If you change an existing users logon name, you will also
need to enter a new password for the user, or re-enter the
users existing password.
Password
Enter or change the logon password.

If you are using Enhanced Security, this is not the same as the users
Windows password. You should select a different password, unique
to the users TriStation 1131 account.
See Recommended Rules for Passwords on page 60 for minimum
requirements.
Verify Password
Enter the new or changed password again to ensure the password is

what you intended.
Security Level
Select the security level for this user. Level 01 is the highest; level 10
is the lowest.
If the user whose information you are modifying is the only level 01
Windows user, you cannot change the security level. Enhanced
Security requires at least one level 01 Windows user. To change this
users level, assign another Windows user to level 01, and then try
changing this users level again.
Recommended Rules for Passwords

Invensys recommends configuring your Windows domain authentication settings to support
the following minimum requirements for passwords, as set forth in the NERC Cyber Security
standards. Passwords should:
Be a minimum of six (6) characters.
Consist of a combination of alpha, numeric, and special characters. Special characters

include the following:
! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ` { | } ~
Include at least one number.
Include at least one letter.
Include at least one lower-case letter AND one upper-case letter.
Include at least one special character.
Be changed at least annually, or more frequently based on risk.
61
These rules will NOT be validated by TriStation 1131 when you enter or change the users
password, so it is up to you to ensure user passwords meet these requirements. Invensys
recommends you check the latest NERC Cyber Security standards (available at www.nerc.com)
for all the latest applicable password requirements.
If Enhanced Security is enabled, Windows passwords will be used. As a result, these password
rules should be enforced at the Windows domain / Active Directory level. See your network
administrator for more information about how to enforce requirements for Windows
passwords.
Note
When Enhanced Security is enabled, all TriStation 1131 passwords are protected from
unauthorized read or copy access because they are stored and protected by Windows
security mechanisms. This meets the NERC Cyber Security standards regarding
password security. However, when Standard Security setting is enabled, this level of
password protection is not provided.
Changing the Security Level for Privileges

This procedure explains how to change the security level required for privileges to controller
and TriStation 1131 operations. By default, each operation is assigned a security level, from the
highest level (01), to the lowest level (10).
Each security level includes a set of privileges for that level, which also includes the privileges
for lower levels. For example, if the operation is set to level 04, users with level 01, 02, and 03
privileges also have access to the operation. Only users with level 01, 02, or 03 access can change
security level privileges.
Note
If a TCM is installed in the Tricon, or a CM is installed in the Trident v2.x or Tri-GP,

access to the controller via the TriStation protocol can also be managed via the optional
access control list3. For example, even if a user has the correct security level privileges to
perform a Download All command, if they do not have Read/Write TriStation access
through the TCM or CM, they will be unable to perform the Download All command.
For more information, see Controlling Access to the TCM on page 386 or Controlling
Access to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM on page 434.
Using the Print All command, you can print a Project Security Levels report, which lists the
security levels currently assigned to each operation. See Printing Project Documents on page 91.
Procedure
1
3.
On the Project menu, click Security, and then click the Privileges tab.
Except TCM models 4351 and 4352, which do not have the access control list feature.
62
Chapter 1
Specify these properties on the Privileges tab.

Property
Action
Operation Type
Select Controller Operations or TriStation 1131 Operations,

depending on the operations you want to specify.
Operations
Click the operation, and then select the check box for the level of
security to be assigned to the operation.
Press Shift and click to select multiple contiguous items.
Press Ctrl and click to select multiple non-contiguous items.
3
Note

Because they cannot access the Privileges tab, users with security levels 0410 cannot
perform the following tasks: Security: Add/modify users, Security: Change level descriptions,
Security: Change level privileges. Additionally, you cannot remove privileges from your
own security level. For example, if you are a level 03 user, you cannot remove privileges
from security level 03.
63
Changing Security Level Names

This procedure explains how to change the names associated with security levels. If you change
a name on this tab, it is reflected on the other security tabs. Changing the name does not affect
the security level assignments.
Only users with level 01, 02, or 03 access can change security level names.
Procedure
1
On the Project menu, click Security, and then click the Level Names tab.
Enter the name to associate with each security level.

The default names are as follows:
Level
Name
Level
Name
01
Corporate Manager
06
Maintenance Manager
02
Site Manager
07
Maintenance Engineer
03
Project Manager
08
Operations Manager
04
Project Engineer
09
Operator
05
Project Programmer
10
Level 10
64
Chapter 1
Viewing User Access Logs

When Enhanced Security is enabled, TriStation 1131 keeps a log of all user login attempts,
whether they are successful or not. These access logs are required for compliance with NERC
Cyber Security standards.
Note
For more information about the Enhanced Security option, see Changing the Security
Setting on page 55.
TriStation 1131 uses the Windows System Events Log to store the following information about
user login and logoff attempts:
Successful login using Windows user name and password
Login failure due to an incorrect Windows user name and/or password
Login attempt cancelled by the user
Login failure due to the user forgetting to enter their Windows user name and/or
password (this is referred to as an incorrect parameter error)
Successful logoff (when the user closes the TriStation 1131 project)
You can view this log to determine if an unauthorized user is attempting to log in to TriStation
1131 projects. You can also use this log as a troubleshooting tool when helping a user who is
having login problems.
Note
If you are logged into Windows using a Guest account, you will be unable to view the
Windows System Events Log. For more information, see Microsoft Knowledge Base
Article 842209 (http://support.microsoft.com/kb/842209).
Topics in this section include:
Viewing the User Access Log In Windows Event Viewer on page 64
Saving the User Access Log to a File on page 65
Changing Event Logging Options on page 66
Clearing the User Access Log on page 67
Viewing the User Access Log In Windows Event Viewer

This procedure describes how to view TriStation 1131 user access information in the Windows
System Events Log using the Windows Event Viewer. You must be logged on to Windows as
an administrator to perform this procedure.
Procedure
1
On the Start menu, click Control Panel, and then double-click Administrative Tools.
Double-click the Event Viewer icon. The Windows Event Viewer opens.
In the console tree, click Application. Event information appears in the details pane.
In the details pane, click the Source column header to sort the events by application.
Look for TriStation 1131 as the source type.
To view detailed information about a specific event, double-click the event.
65
Saving the User Access Log to a File

This procedure describes how to save the user access event information to a file. You must be
logged on to Windows as an administrator to perform this procedure.
When you save a log file, the entire log is saved, regardless of filtering options. You cannot save
a log file with just the events related to TriStation 1131. Also, the sort order is not retained when
logs are saved.
Procedure
1
In the Windows Event Viewer, display the event log with the user access information
that you want to save to a file.
On the Action menu, click Save Log File As.
In File name, enter a name for the archived log file.
66
Chapter 1
In Save as type, select a file format, and then click Save.
If you archive a log in log-file format, you can reopen it in Event Viewer. Logs
saved as event log files (.evt) retain the binary data for each event recorded.
If you archive a log in text (.txt) or comma-delimited (.csv) format, you can reopen
the log in other programs, such as word processing or spreadsheet programs. Logs
saved in text or comma-delimited format do not retain the binary data.
Changing Event Logging Options

Using the Windows Event Viewer, you can set the maximum size of the log and specify whether
events are overwritten or stored for a certain period of time.
The default logging policy is that if a log is full, the oldest events are deleted to make room for
new events. Invensys recommends that you change this setting to ensure that user login event
information is not lost.
This procedure describes how to change event logging options using the Windows Event
Viewer. You must be logged on to Windows as an administrator to perform this procedure.
Procedure
1
In the console tree, right-click Application. The Application Properties dialog box
appears.
Do one or both of the following:
To increase the maximum size of the event log file, enter the desired value (in KB) in
the Maximum log size field
Select Do not overwrite events (clear log file manually).
67
Clearing the User Access Log

When the Windows System Events Log reaches its maximum size, you will see the following
error message in TriStation 1131:
The event log file is full. You must manually clear all events from the event log file before
new entries can be added.
This procedure describes how to clear the event log file so that you can continue collecting user
login event information. You must be logged on to Windows as an administrator to perform this
procedure.
Note
Clearing the log file will clear ALL application event information, not just events related
to TriStation 1131. Invensys highly recommends saving the file prior to clearing it.
Procedure
1
In the console tree, right-click Application, and then select Clear all events.
When prompted to save the log before clearing it, click Yes.
Select the location where you want to save the file to, and click Save.
The file is saved to your selected location, and the current log file is cleared.
68
Chapter 1

Libraries are collections of project elements (programs, functions, and data types) that can be
used in a project. This section describes how to create a library that can be added to other
projects, and how to manage libraries that can include TriStation 1131 and user-created project
elements.
Note
Libraries created in TriStation 1131 v4.0 and later can be imported to projects developed
in TriStation 1131 v4.9.0.
These standard libraries are automatically included with TriStation 1131:
TCXLIB: Triconex library for Tricon, Trident, and Tri-GP controllers
STDLIB: Industry-standard library for Tricon, Trident, and Tri-GP controllers
TR1LIB and TX1LIB: Libraries for Tricon controllers
TRDLIB: Library for Trident and Tri-GP controllers
ALARMS: Library for process alarms
The standard libraries can be found in the default Data directory:
Windows XP/2003: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application

Data\Triconex\TriStation 1131 4.9.0\Data.
Windows Server 2008 and Windows 7: C:\Program Data\Triconex\TriStation
1131 4.9.0\Data.
For more information about the libraries automatically included with a TriStation 1131 project,
see the TriStation 1131 Libraries Reference.
Information about the version numbers of libraries included with each TriStation 1131 release
can be found in the Product Release Notice for TriStation 1131 v4.x, available on the Invensys
Global Customer Support web site.
Topics include:
Creating a Library of Project Elements on page 69
Managing Libraries on page 73
Adding a Library on page 74
Updating a Library on page 75
Deleting a Library on page 76
Making Partial Changes to a Library on page 77
Verifying a Library Version on page 79
69
Creating a Library of Project Elements

This procedure explains how to create a library of project elements (programs, functions,
function blocks, and data types) that can be imported to another TriStation 1131 project.
The library specification (.lsp) and export library (.lt2) files are created in the imported libraries
directory. To identify or change this library, see Specifying Directory Locations on page 46.
The default location is:


1131 4.9.0\Data.
Procedure
1
Open the TriStation 1131 project that contains the elements you want to copy.
Expand the Application tree, right-click User Documents, and then click Create Library.
Do either of these:
To create a new library, click Create New Library Specification, click Next, and skip
to step 5.
To add elements to an existing library, click Use Existing Library Specification, and
then click Next.
70
Chapter 1
Navigate to the library directory, and click the library file you want to add elements to.
In the list on the left, click the document that you want to include, and then click the
angle brackets ( >> ) to move the element to the right side.
To select several documents at the same time, press Ctrl, and click each document. To
select all the documents, press Ctrl and Shift, and click the top and bottom documents.
When you are finished selecting the elements to be included in the library, click Next.
71
Add information about the library, including a name, description, and major and minor
version number. You can also specify whether the source code can be viewed or
restricted from other users.
If you want to save the library to a path other than the default directory, browse to select
the path where you want to save the new library files.
Click Next to continue.
72
Chapter 1
10
Do either of these:
To save the files as a library, click Save the specification and create the Library. If
you create a library, a library.lsp file and a library.lt2 file are created (where library is
the name you selected in step 7).
To save the specification, but not create the library, click Just save the specification.
You might want to do this if you are planning to create a project library, but are not
finished with the documents in the project. If you save just the specification, a
library.lsp file is created. You can open this file and create the library file based on
the specifications at a later time.
Click Finish.
73
Managing Libraries
This procedure explains how to manage libraries. TriStation 1131 automatically includes IEC
libraries with functions, function blocks, and data types that can be copied and sometimes
modified for a project. You can also add libraries of project elements that were created in other
TriStation 1131 projects.
Note
Using the Print All command, you can print reports listing all the functions and function
blocks included in each library (Library Documents: Report), as well as a report listing
all the currently installed libraries and their version numbers (Shared Libraries). See
Printing Project Documents on page 91.
Procedure
1
Expand the Application tree, right-click Library Documents, and click Manage.
Perform one of these actions in the Manage dialog box.

Command
Action
Add
Click to add a new library. For further instructions, see

Adding a Library on page 74.
Update
Click to update an existing library. For further instructions,

see Updating a Library on page 75.
Delete
Click to delete an existing library. For further instructions,

see Deleting a Library on page 76.
Verify Version Command
Click to verify the most current version of the selected

library is loaded. For further instructions, see Verifying a
Library Version on page 79.
Allow Partial Changes to

Libraries
Select this check box to allow partial changes (add, update,

or delete) to an existing library. This allows you to make
changes to selected elements in a library without having to
add, update, or delete the entire library.
The default is cleared. For more information, see Making
Partial Changes to a Library on page 77.
74
Chapter 1
Adding a Library
This procedure explains how to add libraries to a TriStation 1131 project. This allows you to
update libraries provided by Invensys, and add libraries of project elements from other
TriStation 1131 projects.
Note
When the project is in the Download Changes state, a library can be added only if it does
not impact function blocks that have already been downloaded to the controller. If any
of the elements in the library being added are incompatible with elements that have
already been downloaded to the controller, you must change the project state to
Download All in order to add the library.
If you want to add new elements to an existing library, see Making Partial Changes to a Library
on page 77.
Procedure
1
Expand the Application tree, rightclick Library Documents, click

Manage, and then click Add.
If the library you want to add is

located in a path other than the default
directory, browse to select the path
where the library you want to add is
located.
Click the library to add, and then click

OK.
Click Yes on the Query screen.

The library is added to the project, and is displayed in the list.
If Your Library Has a Function Block with a VAR_IN_OUT Parameter

During the library import process, TriStation 1131 checks your library file for the presence of
function blocks using a Boolean VAR_IN_OUT parameter. A warning message appears if at
least one such function block is detected, giving you the option to cancel the library import
process.
Before completing the library import, you should contact your library vendor for information
about the version of TriStation 1131 that was used to compile and export the library.
If TriStation 1131 v3.1.3 or earlier was used to compile the function block and then
export the library, when the library is imported into TriStation 1131 v4.x a trap will
occur when the function block is used in a program with the control flag set.
If TriStation 1131 v4.0 or later was used to compile the function block and export the
library, the library is fully compatible with TriStation 1131 v4.x, and you may continue
with the library import process.
Note
Because VAR_IN_OUT is not allowed in a program with the safety flag set, this
problem will not occur in a safety program if you use the flags properly, regardless of
the version of TriStation 1131 used to compile and export the library.
75
If TriStation 1131 v3.1.3 or earlier was used to compile and export the library, and you choose
to continue importing the library, you can prevent a trap from occurring in your application by
substituting a VAR_INPUT and VAR_OUTPUT for each VAR_IN_OUT parameter in the
affected function block(s).
In this case, once you have imported the library and built the project, you may also want to use
the TriStation 1131 Project Analysis utility (TS2Analysis.exe) to verify that you have removed
all VAR_IN_OUT parameters from the affected function blocks.
See Product Alert Notice #10, available on the Invensys Global Customer Support web site, for
more information, including detailed instructions for obtaining and using the Project Analysis
Utility.
Updating a Library
This procedure explains how to update TriStation 1131 libraries for your project. When you
request an update, TriStation 1131 compares the library in the project with the most current
installed library and displays a message indicating the versions of each. You can then update
the library or cancel the operation.
Libraries can be updated only if they are located in the default Data directory:


1131 4.9.0\Data.
When the project is in the Download Changes state, a library can be updated only if it does not
change function blocks that have already been downloaded to the controller. If any of the
elements in the library being updated have already been downloaded to the controller, you
must change the project state to Download All in order to update the library.
Please note the following regarding updating the TRDLIB, TR1LIB, or TX1LIB libraries:
If the project is in the Download Changes state, these libraries can only be updated if
the library version is equal to or later than the version listed in the following table:
Library
Version for Update in DLC State
TRDLIB
1.113 or later
TR1LIB
1.89 or later
TX1LIB
1.62 or later
If the library version is earlier than those listed above, the library can only be updated if
the project is in the Download All state.
To update only selected elements in an existing library, and not the entire library, see Making
Partial Changes to a Library on page 77.
Procedure
1
Expand the Application tree, right-click Library Documents, and then click Manage.
76
Chapter 1
Clear the Allow partial changes to libraries check box.
Select the library to be updated, and then click Update.
Click Yes to continue the update process. Click No to cancel.
Deleting a Library
This procedure explains how to delete a library from a TriStation 1131 project.
Note
When the project is in the Download Changes state, a library can be deleted only if it
does not contain function blocks that have already been downloaded to the controller. If
any of the elements in the library being deleted have already been downloaded to the
controller, you must change the project state to Download All in order to delete the
library.
If you want to delete selected elements from a library, but do not want to delete the entire
library, see Making Partial Changes to a Library on page 77.
Procedure
1
Clear the Allow partial changes to libraries check box.
Select the library to be deleted, and then click Delete.
When prompted, click Yes to confirm deletion of the library. Click No to cancel.
77
Making Partial Changes to a Library

This procedure explains how to make changes to selected elements in an existing TriStation 1131
library. Partial library changes are defined as:
Adding individual elements to an existing library.
Updating individual elements in an existing library.
Deleting individual elements from an existing library.
All partial changes must be compatible with the other elements in the library. You cannot make
partial changes to the following standard Triconex libraries:
STDLIB
TX1LIB
TR1LIB
TRDLIB
If the project is in the Download Changes state, you cannot delete an element if it has already
been downloaded to a controller or if it is referenced anywhere in your project. You must
change the project state to Download All to update elements that have already been
downloaded.
Note
If you upgraded a project from TriStation 1131 v4.1.x or v4.2.x, and chose to not update
the TCXLIB library during project conversion (see Converting Existing Projects to
Version 4.9.0 on page 11), you can update the library after project conversion is complete
by making partial changes to the library. This maintains your project in the Download
Changes state. However, any TCXLIB functions that have already been downloaded
to the controller will not be updated while in the Download Changes state.
Libraries can be updated only if they are located in the default Data directory:


1131 4.9.0\Data.
Procedure
1
Select the Allow partial changes to libraries check box.
78
Chapter 1
Select the library you want to make changes to, and then do one of the following:
To add new elements to the library or update existing elements in the library, click
Update.
To remove elements from the library, click Delete.
The Select Elements for Partial Library Change dialog box appears.
Note
Only elements that are eligible to be included as part of the partial change
operation are displayed in the Available Library Elements list. When the project
is in the Download All state, all elements are eligible, as long as they are
compatible with other elements in the project. However, when the project is in
the Download Changes state, elements that have already been downloaded to
the controller, or have been used somewhere in the project, are not eligible for
inclusion in the partial change operation.
In the list on the left, click the element(s) that you want to add, update, or delete.
To select several elements at the same time, press Ctrl, and click each element. To select
all the elements, press Ctrl and Shift, and click the top and bottom elements. You can also
click an element, and then drag your pointer over the other elements you want to select.
Click the angle brackets ( >> ) to move the selected element(s) to the right side.
When you are finished selecting the elements to be included in the partial change
operation, click OK.
The selected elements are added to, updated in, or deleted from the library.
79
Verifying a Library Version

This procedure explains how to determine the version of TriStation 1131 libraries used in your
project.
Note
Only libraries that are located in the default library directory can be verified. If a library
is not located in the default directory, an error message will appear, stating that the
library is unregistered. For more information about the default directory, see Specifying
Directory Locations on page 46.
Procedure
1
Click the library to be verified, and then click Verify Version.

A message appears, identifying the library, version, and whether the project library is
the same as the installed library.
Click OK to close the message box.
80
Chapter 1
Generating Reports
This section describes how to view and print standard TriStation 1131 reports. You can also
export reports to a variety of formats, which can be saved to disk or sent to an e-mail address.
Standard reports are displayed through the Crystal Reports viewer, which is installed with the
TriStation 1131 software. Custom reports must be created using the SAP Crystal Reports
software, which can be purchased separately.
Topics include:
Updating the Report Database on page 80
Viewing and Printing a Report on page 80
Adding Custom Reports to a Project on page 82
Exporting Reports on page 82
Report Database Information on page 83
Updating the Report Database

This procedure explains how to update the report database. This copies project information to
a database used for generating reports. You should update the report database after making
changes to a project, and after installing or updating the TriStation 1131 software.
Procedure
1
Open the Project Workspace (see The Project Workspace on page 20), and right-click the
Default Reports or User Reports folder.
Click Update Reports Database.

The status of the updated operation can be viewed in the status bar at the bottom of the
TriStation 1131 window.
Viewing and Printing a Report

This procedure explains how to view and print a report.
Before you view a report, you should update the report database if changes have been made to
the project or if the report database was not updated after installing the TriStation 1131
software.
Procedure
1
Open the Project Workspace and then double-click a report. The report appears in the
report viewer window.
Generating Reports
Note
81
If the report database was not updated after the TriStation 1131 software was
installed, a File Not Found message will appear. Update the reports database
(see Updating the Report Database on page 80) and then try viewing the report
again.
Perform any of the following tasks in the report viewer.

Command
Action
Print Command
Click to print the report being viewed.
Export Report
Command
Click to export the report data to a file. For further

instructions, see Exporting Reports on page 82.
Refresh Command
Click to refresh the display, which re-loads project data to

the report. If project information has changed, update the
report database, and then click Refresh to have the updated
data displayed in the report.
Size of view
Search Text
Command
Type or select a percentage to change the size of the report

view.
Click to search for text in the report.
82
Chapter 1
Adding Custom Reports to a Project

This procedure explains how to add a custom report created in the Crystal Reports software to
a TriStation 1131 project. Only reports generated in the Crystal Reports software can be used in
TriStation 1131; this software must be purchased separately.
Procedure
1
In the Crystal Reports software, create a report and save it in a file with the extension
.rpt.
Put the .rpt file in the Data Files directory. For more information on directory locations,
see Specifying Directory Locations on page 46.
The next time you open the project, the report will be included in the User Reports list.
If the report is added while the project is open, you must close and re-open the project
to view the report in the list.
Exporting Reports
This procedure explains how to export report data in TriStation 1131. You can export reports to
a variety of file formats, and can save the exported data to a disk or send it to someone via
Microsoft Mail.
Procedure
1
Open the Project Workspace and then double-click the report you want to export. The
report appears in the report viewer window.
On the report viewer toolbar, click the Export Report button.
Specify these properties in the Export dialog box.
Property
Action
Export Format
Select the file format. The default is PDF.
Export Destination
Select the destination as either Disk file or Microsoft Mail.

The default is Disk.
Depending on the format, additional information, such as the characters to use to
separate and delimit a file, may be requested.
Generating Reports
83
Report Database Information

This section provides information on the dBASE IV relational databases that are used when the
Crystal Report Engine generates a report in TriStation 1131. In addition to the standard reports,
you can create custom reports that can be used in TriStation 1131. You must purchase the
Crystal Reports software in order to create custom reports.
After a project is opened, the databases are automatically updated with information from the
project when you print the first report. You can also update the databases by right-clicking the
Default Reports or User Reports folder and clicking Update Reports Database.
Databases include:
System Definition: Chassis Types (TRHWDCHS.dbf) on page 84
System Definition: Module Types (TRHWDMOD.dbf) on page 84
Configuration: Program (TRPRGINS.dbf) on page 84
Configuration: Instance Variable Connections (TRINSVAR.dbf) on page 84
Configuration: Tagnames (TRGLBVAR.dbf) on page 85
Configuration: Operating Parameters (TRSYSOPS.dbf) on page 85
Configuration: Implementation (TRIMPPAR.dbf) on page 86
Configuration: SOE Block Definition (TRSOEBLK.dbf) on page 86
Configuration: SOE Block Variables (TRSOEVAR.dbf) on page 86
Configuration: Module Configuration (TRMODCFG.dbf) on page 86
Configuration: Memory Allocation (TRMALLOC.dbf) on page 87
Security: Users (SECUSERS.dbf) on page 87
Security: Levels (SECLVLS.dbf) on page 87
Security: Operations (SECOPRS.dbf) on page 87
Project: Information (PRINFO.dbf) on page 88
Project: Shared Libraries (PRLIBS.dbf) on page 88
Project: Elements (PRELEMS.dbf) on page 88
Project: POU Variables (PRPOUVAR.dbf) on page 89
Project: POU Cross-Reference (PRPOUXRF.dbf) on page 89
Project: Audit History (PRHIST.dbf) on page 90
84
Chapter 1
The TRHWDCHS file contains information about the chassis types used in the system.
Table 2
System Definition: Chassis Types (TRHWDCHS.dbf)
Field Name
Field Type
Description
CHASTYPE (key)
Number
Chassis type numerical identifier
CHASDESC
String
Chassis description
The TRHWDMOD file contains information about the modules used in the system.
Table 3
System Definition: Module Types (TRHWDMOD.dbf)
Field Name
Field Type
Description
MODTYPE (key)
Number
Triconex module identifier
MODDESC
String
Module description
MODMODEL
String
Module marketing model number
The TRPRGINS file contains information about the programs in the project.
Table 4
Configuration: Program (TRPRGINS.dbf)
Field Name
Field Type
Description
PROGNAME
String
Program name
SEQUENCE
Number
Execution sequence number
The TRINSVAR file contains information about the variable connections in the program.
Table 5
Configuration: Instance Variable Connections (TRINSVAR.dbf)
Field Name
Field Type
Description
INSTNAME (key)
String
Program execution name. This is the same as the

program name.
VARPATH
String
Program variable path
PROGNAME
String
Program name
VARNAME
String
Program variable name. This is the same as the

tagname.
TAGNAME
String
Tagname
VAROUTPUT
Strings
W if written by instance; otherwise blank
Generating Reports
85
The TRGLBVAR file contains information about the tagnames (global variables) in the project.
Table 6
Configuration: Tagnames (TRGLBVAR.dbf)
Field Name
Field Type
Description
TAGNAME (key)
String
Tagname
GROUP1
String
Group 1 name
GROUP2
String
Group 2 name
DESCRIP
String
Tagname description
LOCATION
String
Tagname location (same format as in configuration)
MODBUS
String
Modbus alias number
DATATYP
String
Data type: BOOL, DINT, REAL, and so on.
DATACLASS
String
Data class: memory, input, or output.
TYPECLASS
String
Point memory address.
APPLICATN
String
Tagname application type (safety or control)
SHARED
String
Tagname shared for read state (Yes or No)
RETENTIVE
Boolean
Retain value indicator
INITVALUE
String
Initial value of tagname
DECPL
Number
Decimal places for REAL tagname
MINSPAN
Number
Lower limit for REAL number in Engineering Units
MAXSPAN
Number
Upper limit for REAL number in Engineering Units
SYSTEMTAG
Boolean
Is a system variable
MULTIWRIT
Boolean
Multiple writes enabled
The TRSYSOPS file contains information about the operating parameter settings in the project.
Table 7
Configuration: Operating Parameters (TRSYSOPS.dbf)
Field Name
Field Type
Description
CNFGVERS
String
Configuration version number
NETNODE
Number
NCM node number (switch setting)
NETALIAS
String
Network IP alias name
SCANRATE
Number
Scan rate (in milliseconds)
PSWDREQD
Boolean
Password required for download
DSBLSTOP
Boolean
Tricon Keyswitch STOP disabled
DSBLMBWR
Boolean
Disable Modbus writes to outputs
DSBLRCHG
Boolean
Disable remote changes
DSBLPNTS
Boolean
Permit disabling points
86
Chapter 1
The TRIMPPAR file contains information about the implementation settings (scan rate, Peer-toPeer sends/receives) in the project.
Table 8
Configuration: Implementation (TRIMPPAR.dbf)
Field Name
Field Type
Description
PARKEY (key)
Number
Parameter ID number
PARNAME
String
Parameter name
PARDESC
String
Parameter description
The TRSOEBLK file contains information about the SOE block definitions in the project.
Table 9
Configuration: SOE Block Definition (TRSOEBLK.dbf)
Field Name
Field Type
Description
SOEBLKNUM (key)
Number
SOE block number
SOEBLKTTL
String
SOE block title
SOEBUFSIZ
Number
Event buffer size
SOEBLKTYP
String
SOE block type
The TRSOEVAR file contains information about the SOE tagnames used in the project.
Table 10
Configuration: SOE Block Variables (TRSOEVAR.dbf)
Field Name
Field Type
Description
SOEBLKNUM (key)
Number
SOE block number
TAGNAME
String
Tagname
TRUENAME
String
Name of TRUE state
FALSENAME
Strings
Name of FALSE state
TRUECLR
String
Color of TRUE state
FALSECLR
String
Color of FALSE state
The TRMODCFG file contains information about the module configuration used in the project.
Table 11
Configuration: Module Configuration (TRMODCFG.dbf)
Field Name
Field Type
Description
CHASNUM (key)
Number
Chassis number (1-n)
CHASTYPE
Number
Chassis type numerical identifier
SLOTNUM
Number
Module type numerical identifier
MODTYPE
Number
Module type numerical identifier
Generating Reports
87
The TRMALLOC file contains information about how memory is allocated.

Table 12
Configuration: Memory Allocation (TRMALLOC.dbf)
Field Name
Field Type
Description
DATADESC
String
Brief (coded) description of memory section
MAXPTS
Number
Maximum number of points for this type
ALLOCPTS
Number
Allocated points of this type
FCASTPNTS
Number
Forecasted points of this type after the next

download
CURRPTS
Number
Currently used points of this type
The SECUSERS file contains information about the users authorized access to the project.
Table 13
Security: Users (SECUSERS.dbf)
Field Name
Field Type
Description
LOGINNAME (key)
String
Users log in name
USERNAME
String
Users full name
DESCRIP
String
User description
PRIVLEVEL
Number
Users privilege level
The SECLVLS file contains information about the users access (privilege) level in the project.
Table 14
Security: Levels (SECLVLS.dbf)
Field Name
Field Type
Description
PRIVLEVEL (key)
Number
Users privilege level
DESCRIP
String
User description
The SECOPRS file contains information about the level of access required to use TriStation 1131
and controller operations.
Table 15
Security: Operations (SECOPRS.dbf)
Field Name
Field Type
Description
CATEGORY
String
Operation category name
DESCRIP
String
User description
PRIVLEVEL
Number
Minimum privilege level required
88
Chapter 1
The PRINFO file contains information that is used when reports are printed.
Table 16
Project: Information (PRINFO.dbf)
Field Name
Field Type
Description
PRJNAME
String
Project name
DESCRIP
String
Project description
VERSION
String
Project version number
COINFO1
String
Company information 1
COINFO2
String
COINFO3
String
DBDATE
Date
Date the report database was updated
DBTIME
String
Time the report database was updated
The PRLIBS file contains information about the libraries included in the project.
Table 17
Project: Shared Libraries (PRLIBS.dbf)
Field Name
Field Type
Description
LIBNAME (key)
String
Library name
DESCRIP
String
Library description
VERSION
String
Library version number
The PRELEMS file contains information about the elements (programs, functions, function
blocks, and data types) in the project.
Table 18
Project: Elements (PRELEMS.dbf)
Field Name
Field Type
Description
ELEMNAME (key)
String
Element name
VERSION
String
Element version number
CATEGORY
String
Element category
DESCRIP
String
Element description
ELEMTYPE
String
Element type: function, function block, and so on.
LANGUAGE
String
Language type: Function Block Diagram, Ladder

Diagram, and so on.
OWNER
String
Element owner name
USERDEFINE
Boolean
User defined indicator
LIBRARY
Boolean
Library indicator
LIBNAME
8 characters
Library name
LOCKED
Boolean
Element locked indicator
Generating Reports
Table 18
89
Project: Elements (PRELEMS.dbf) (continued)
Field Name
Field Type
Description
READONLY
Boolean
Element read-only indicator
DRWGTITLE
String
Drawing title
DRWGNUM
Strings
Drawing number
DRWGREV
String
Drawing revision
DRWGCBY
String
Created by user name
DRWGCDATE
Date
Created date
DRWGCTIME
String
Created time
DRWGMBY
String
Modified by user name
DRWGMDATE
Date
Modified date
DRWGMTIME
String
Modified time
DRWGAB
String
Approved by name
DRWGADT
String
Approved date
APPLICATN
String
Element application type (safety or control)
The PRPOUVAR file contains information about the POUs (program organizational units),
which include programs, functions, and function blocks.
Table 19
Project: POU Variables (PRPOUVAR.dbf)
Field Name
Field Type
Description
VARPATH
String
POU variable path
POUNAME (key)
String
POU name
VARNAME ((key)
String
POU variable name
DESCRIP
String
Element description
DATATYPE
String
Data type: BOOL, DINT, REAL, and so on.
DATACLASS
String
Data class: local, input, output, and so on.
INITVALUE
String
Initial value of the POU variable
The PRPOUXRF file contains information about where variables are located in the project.
Table 20
Project: POU Cross-Reference (PRPOUXRF.dbf)
Field Name
Field Type
Description
VARPATH (key)
String
Program variable path which indicates where the

variable is used
SEQNO
Number
Record sequence number 0n
SHTCOORD
String
Sheet coordinates of variable on SHTNUM
90
Chapter 1
The PRHIST file contains information about the project history.

Table 21
Project: Audit History (PRHIST.dbf)
Field Name
Field Type
Description
EVENTID
String
ID of the event
USERNAME
String
Users full name
ELEMNAME
String
Name of element that was changed
COMMENT
String
Comment on change
DATE
Date
Date of change
TIME
String
Time of change
ACTION
String
Action performed (including version number)
91

This section describes how to print project documents, including programs, functions, libraries,
module configurations, project history, and more.
The Print All command allows you to print multiple documents at one time. You have the
ability to select which documents you want to print.
Topics in this section include:
Printable Project Documents on page 91
Printing Individual Documents on page 94
Printing Multiple Documents on page 94
Printable Project Documents

The following types of project documents and/or information can be printed:
Table 22
Printable Project Documents
Item
Description
Function
Prints a logic sheet with the graphical

representation of each function in the project.
Each function is printed on a separate sheet.
Function Blocks
Prints a logic sheet with the graphical

representation of each function block in the
project. Each function block is printed on a
separate sheet.
Hardware Module Configuration
Prints a report listing the controller hardware

(MPs, CMs, I/O modules) currently configured
in the project.
Instance Variable Connections
Prints a report listing the variables used in your

project, organized by instance.
Library Documents: Functions
Prints the structured text for each function in the

libraries used by the project. Depending on the
libraries being used, this report can be very large
(more than 150 pages).
Library Documents: Report
Prints a report listing the functions and function

blocks in each of the libraries used by the project.
Includes the name, description, category, version
and more for each function and function block,
organized by library.
92
Chapter 1
Table 22
Printable Project Documents (continued)
Item
Description
Module Configuration Settings
Prints a report listing the current configuration

settings for each applicable module in the
projects hardware configuration.
Only modules that require configuration in
TriStation 1131 are included in this report. For
example, TCM and EPI module configuration
details are included, but the SDO module is not,
as it does not require configuration in TriStation
1131.
Operating Parameters
Prints the current setting of each item on the

Operating Parameters screen. See Setting Tricon
Operating Parameters on page 249 or Setting
Trident or Tri-GP Operating Parameters on
page 315 for details about these settings.
POU Variables
Prints a report listing all the variables defined in

the projects programs, functions, or function
blocks. Includes each variables data type, initial
value, and more.
POU Cross-Reference
Prints a report listing all the variables currently

being used in the project, with a coordinate
describing where they can be found on a
program sheet.
Programs
Prints each program in the current project.

Depending on the program type, either the
structured text, or function block diagram sheet
will be printed. Each program is printed on a
separate sheet.
Program Variable Listing
Prints a report listing all the variables defined in

each program in the project. Includes each
variables data type, initial value, and more.
Organized by program name.
Project History by Element
Prints a report extracted from the projects audit

trail (see View Project History Command on
page 640). Includes information about user access
and modification of the project, organized by the
element changed (project, library, etc).
Project History by Time
Similar to the Project History by Element

document described above, except this report is
organized by time instead of by the element
changed. Most recent events are at the top of the
list.
Project Implementation
Prints a report listing the current configuration

for each item in the Implementation Tree (see The
Implementation Tree on page 101). Includes the
Program Execution List, SOE block
configuration, and scan time settings.
Table 22
93
Printable Project Documents (continued)
Item
Description
Project Memory Allocation
Prints a report listing the current memory

allocation for the project, including points used,
points allocated, and maximum points.
Project Security Levels
Prints a report listing each the security level

currently assigned to each TriStation and
controller operation for the project. See Changing
the Security Level for Privileges on page 61 for
more information.
Project Users
Prints a report listing each of the users that have

been added to the projects user list. Includes
each users full name, user name, and security
level.
Shared Libraries
Prints a report listing the libraries that have been

added to the project, including their current
version numbers.
SOE Block Variables
Prints a report listing the tagnames that have

been assigned to SOE blocks.
Tagnames: Complete Listing
Prints a report listing all the tagnames that have

been defined in the project. Includes both used
and unused tagnames.
Tagnames: Modbus Aliases
Prints a report listing Modbus alias information

for each tagname in the project. Organized by
alias number.
Tagnames: Where Used
Prints a report listing the tagnames that have

been used in a program in the project. Organized
by the name of the tagname. Includes the name of
the program the tagname is used in, and its sheet
coordinates (when applicable).
TriStation Communication Parameters
Prints the current setting of each item on the

TriStation Communication screen. See Chapter 5,
Tricon Communication with TriStation 1131 or
Chapter 6, Trident and Tri-GP Communication
with TriStation 1131 for details about these
settings.
User Documents
Prints a report listing all the user documents in

the project. User documents are programs,
functions, function blocks, and data types that
you created.
Note
If you have a PDF printer driver (such as Adobe Acrobat or PrimoPDF) installed on
your PC, you can choose to print these documents to a PDF file instead of a printer. This
may be useful if you need to provide information to Invensys Customer Support when
troubleshooting a problem, or any time you need to save or transfer this information
electronically. Contact your system administrator if you need assistance with installing
a PDF printer driver on your PC.
94
Chapter 1
Printing Individual Documents

This procedure describes how to print individual documents. Only logic sheets, function blocks,
and reports displayed in the current window can be printed individually.
Note
If the Print command is not enabled for the document you want to print, you may be able
to print it by selecting the document from the Print All Options list. See Printing
Multiple Documents on page 94.
Procedure
1
Open the logic sheet, function block, or report you want to print.
On the File menu, select Print. The Print dialog box appears.
Select the desired properties for your printer (number of copies, page orientation, etc),
and then click OK.
The document currently being viewed is printed.
Printing Multiple Documents

This procedure describes how to print multiple documents at the same time.
Procedure
1
Open the Project Workspace (see The Project Workspace on page 20).
On the File menu, select Print All. The Print All Options dialog box appears.
95
Select the check boxes for the documents you want to print. See Printable Project
Documents on page 91 for a description of each document in the list.
To quickly clear the check boxes for all the documents in the list, and make it easier to
select only those documents you want to print, clear the Select All check box.
Click OK. The Print dialog box appears.
Select the printer you want to use, and the desired settings (number of copies, page
orientation, etc), and then click OK.
The selected documents are printed.
Note
If any of the selected documents do not have content to be printed (for example,
if you selected the Functions document, but no functions have been defined in
the project), a message will appear in the messages window (see Message View
96
Chapter 1
2
Overview
98
Application Development Steps
99
Application Elements 100

User Documents 109
Function Block Diagram and Ladder Diagram Development 116
Structured Text Development 129
Cause Effect Matrix Development 141
Variables and Constants 163
Tagnames 172
Importing and Exporting Tagnames 189
Annotations and Comments 200
Modbus Applications 209
Peer-to-Peer Applications 219
SOE Development 222
Tricon Application Access 229
Trident and Tri-GP Application Access 234
Building an Application 239
98
Chapter 2
Overview
This figure shows the main steps for developing a TriStation 1131 application. An application
can be developed and tested on the Emulator before downloading the application to a
controller.
Set Up the Project
Develop the
Application
- C reate programs and functions

- Restrict access to application elements
- Restrict access to application points
- Declare tagnames
Test with the

Emulator
Fix Errors
Yes
Errors?
No
C onfigure the
C ontroller
Set Up TriStation
C ommunication
Implement on
the C ontroller
- Build and test application
99

This list includes the steps that can or should be performed during application development.
Step
See
Plan the application.
Safety and Control Applications on page 104
Create programs and functions.
User Documents on page 109

Function Block Diagram and Ladder Diagram
Development on page 116
Structured Text Development on page 129
Cause Effect Matrix Development on page 141
Add annotations and comments.
Annotations and Comments on page 200
Determine access to a document.
Restricting Access to a Document on page 114
Determine access to points.
Tricon Application Access on page 229

Trident and Tri-GP Application Access on
page 234
Create variables and constants.
Declaring Variables on page 163

Creating Constants on page 170
Declare tagnames.
Tagnames on page 172
Import or export tagnames.
Importing and Exporting Tagnames on

page 189
Assign Modbus aliases.
Modbus Applications on page 209
Add Peer-to-Peer features.
Peer-to-Peer Applications on page 219
Compile project programs and functions.
Compiling a Program on page 240
Build the application.
Building an Application on page 239
100
Chapter 2
Application Elements
This section describes the elements of an application and the steps in application development.
Topics include:
The Application Workspace on page 100
The Declaration Tree on page 101
The Implementation Tree on page 101
Parts of an Application on page 102
Safety and Control Applications on page 104
Programming Languages on page 105
The Application Workspace

Application development takes place in the Application Workspace. The folders in this tree
include the user programs, functions, function blocks, data types, tagnames, and
implementation settings needed for the application. The tree also includes the TriStation 1131
library of functions, function blocks, and data types that can be used in the project.
101
The Declaration Tree

The Declaration Tree lists the declarations for the currently opened program, function, or
function block.
Declaration Tree
The Implementation Tree

The Implementation Tree lists the elements that can be specified for the application, including
the Execution List (list of programs and scan time), SOE Configuration, and Peer-To-Peer
Configuration.
Implementation Tree
102
Chapter 2
Parts of an Application
The major elements in an application are programs, functions, function blocks, tagnames,
variables, implementation information, and controller configuration.
Application
An application includes application elements and configuration information that is built
(compiled) into executable code and downloaded and run on a Triconex controller.
The maximum number of programs in an application is 250.
Program Organizational Units (POUs)

A program organizational unit is a program, function, or function block.
The maximum number of POUs in an application being downloaded to the Emulator is 3,001
(this limitation does not apply to programs being downloaded to the controller). However, this
limit includes internal system POUs, so the actual number of POUs available for inclusion in an
emulated application is dependent on the control program implementation.
Programs
A program is an executable element that includes one or more functions and function blocks. A
program can invoke functions and function blocks but cannot invoke another program. A
program is initiated from the Execution List.
The maximum number of user-defined variables that can be used in a program is 2,000, which
includes local variables and tagnames, but not VAR_TEMP variables.
Functions and Function Blocks

A function is an executable element that returns exactly one result. The values in a function exist
only while the function is executing.
A function block is an executable element that returns one or more values and retains the values
derived during one evaluation for use in the next evaluation. For function blocks, a set of input
values may not yield the same output values.
The maximum number of variables that can be used in a function or function block is 400, which
includes input, output, input/output, and local variables, but not VAR_TEMP variables.
TriStation 1131 Libraries

TriStation 1131 includes libraries of functions, function blocks, and data types that are
automatically included with each project.
For information on specific functions, function blocks, and data types, see the TriStation 1131
Libraries Reference.
103
User-Defined Functions
In user-defined functions, if no value is assigned to the function output, the return value is the
default initial value. If there is not a statement that assigns a value to the function output, a
compiler error occurs. No error or warning is issued if an assignment to the function output is
in a conditional statement and is not executed.
Tagnames
A tagname identifies input, output, and memory points that are accessible to all programs in the
application. In IEC terminology, tagnames are called global variables. The maximum number of
user-defined variables and tagnames in a program is 2,000.
Variables
A variable is a named area in memory that stores a value or string assigned to that variable.
Table 23
Variable Types and Uses
Variable Type
Used With
Input
Functions and function blocks
In/Out
Function blocks
Output
Local
Functions, function blocks, and programs
Tagname
Programs
VAR_TEMP
Currently available only in ST programs and function blocks
Data Types
A data type identifies the type of data used in tagnames and variables. TriStation 1131 uses both
elementary and generic data types. For more information, see Appendix B, Data Types.
Elementary types are defined by IEC 61131-3 and include: BOOL, DATE, DINT, DT,
DWORD, INT, LREAL, REAL, STRING, TIME, and TOD. TriStation 1131 also supports
the derivation of structured, array, and enumerated data types.
Generic data types are used to organize elementary data types that have similar
properties and can be used with IEC 61131-3 standard functions that support
overloaded inputs and outputs. Generic data type names use the prefix ANY.
Controller Configuration
The controller configuration specifies the communication characteristics for memory, module
configuration, and other hardware-related settings. When the application is built, this
information is required. For more information, see Chapter 3, Tricon Controller Configuration
and Chapter 4, Trident and Tri-GP Controller Configuration.
104
Chapter 2
Implementation Information
Implementation information includes the Execution List, Scan Time, SOE, and Peer-to-Peer
setup.
Safety and Control Applications

An application can include safety programs only, control programs only, or a combination of
safety and control programs.
Safety applications are the most restrictive type because they are designed to take a process to
a safe state when predetermined conditions are violated. All elements of the application
(programs, functions, function blocks, and tagnames) must be approved or specified for safety.
Control applications are designed to control a process and can use control, or safety and control
functions and function blocks. The tagnames must be specified as control tagnames.
This table describes how programs, functions, function blocks, and tagnames can be used in
safety and control applications.
Table 24
Safety and Control Usage
Use
Programs
Safety programs cannot use control functions, function blocks, or tagnames.

Control programs cannot use safety tagnames.
Functions and
Function Blocks
Can be safety and control, or control.
Tagnames
Can be safety or control. If Shared Read is selected, a safety program can

read a control tagname and vice-versa.
Library functions and function blocks are designated as approved for use in
safety and control or control applications. These designations cannot be
changed.
105
Programming Languages
TriStation 1131 supports multiple programming languages for developing, testing, and
documenting applications that run on a Triconex controller.
TriStation 1131 supports these programming languages:
Function Block Diagram Language (FBD)
Ladder Diagram Language (LD)
Structured Text Language (ST)
CEMPLE (Cause and Effect Matrix Programming Language Editor)
The Function Block Diagram, Ladder Diagram, and Structured Text languages comply with the
IEC 61131-3 International Standard on Programming Languages for Programmable Controllers.
CEMPLE is an optional language that can be purchased separately from Invensys.
Function Block Diagram Language

Function Block Diagram (FBD) language is a graphical language that corresponds to circuit
diagrams. The elements used in this language appear as blocks wired together to form circuits.
The wires can communicate binary and other types of data between FBD elements. In FBD, a
group of elements visibly interconnected by wires is known as a network. An FBD diagram can
contain one or more networks.
Figure 1
Sample FBD Network
106
Chapter 2
Ladder Diagram Language

Ladder Diagram (LD) language is a graphical language that uses a standard set of symbols to
represent relay logic. The basic elements are coils and contacts which are connected by links.
Links are different from the wires used in FBD because they transfer only binary data between
LD symbols, which follow the power flow characteristics of relay logic. Function blocks and
function elements which have at least one binary input and output can be used in LD diagrams.
Figure 2
Sample Ladder Diagram
107
Structured Text Language

Structured Text (ST) language is a general purpose, high-level programming language, similar
to PASCAL or C. Structured Text is particularly useful for complex arithmetic calculations, and
can be used to implement complicated procedures that are not easily expressed in graphical
languages such as FBD or LD.
ST allows you to create Boolean and arithmetic expressions as well as structured programming
constructs such as conditional statements (IF...THEN...ELSE). Functions and function blocks can
be invoked in ST.
Figure 3
Sample Structured Text Code
108
Chapter 2
CEMPLE (Cause and Effect Matrix Programming Language Editor)

CEMPLE, which stands for Cause and Effect Matrix Programming Language Editor, is a
Triconex language based on cause and effect matrix methodology, which is commonly used in
the process control industry. A cause and effect matrix is frequently used for applications such
as fire and gas systems for which the programming logic is simple, but the volume of inputs and
outputs that need to be controlled is high. A matrix is readily understood by a broad range of
plant personnel from process control engineers to maintenance operators.
CEMPLE allows you to associate a problem in a process with one or more actions that must be
taken to correct the problem. The problem is known as a cause and the action is known as an
effect. In a typical matrix, a cause is represented by a row in the matrix and an effect is
represented by a column. An X in the intersection of a cause row and an effect column
establishes a relationship between the cause and the effect.
Figure 4
Sample CEMPLE Matrix
User Documents
109
User Documents
This section describes the how to create and specify user documents, which include programs,
functions, function blocks, and data types. Topics include:
Creating a User Document on page 109
Copying User or Library Documents on page 110
Specifying Document Summary Information on page 112
Specifying Document Attributes on page 113
Restricting Access to a Document on page 114
Changing a Document Owner on page 115
Note
If you are trying to edit a user document created by another user, and are unable to do
so even when you have the correct user level and access privileges, check the
documents access property. If it is locked, you must ask the user who created the
document to change the access property. See Restricting Access to a Document on
page 114.
Creating a User Document

This procedure explains how to create a user document. A user document can be a program,
function, function block, or data type.
Procedure
1
Expand the Application tree, right-click the User Documents folder, and then click New
Document.
110
Chapter 2
Specify these properties in the New Document dialog box.

Property
Action
Name
Enter a descriptive name for the document.
Document Type
Click the type of document to create. The default is Program.
Language
Click the language type to use. The default is Function Block

Diagram.
Application Type
Click the type of application the document is to be used in.

The default is Control.
Click OK. The document is opened in the specified programming language.
Copying User or Library Documents

You can make copies of user documents you have created, as well as library documents. This
can help you reduce development time by using an existing document as the basis for a new
document.
Note
Using the Print All command, you can print a report listing all the user documents you
have created in a project (User Documents). See Printing Project Documents on page 91.
Topics include:
Copying a User Document on page 110
Copying a Library Document on page 111
Copying a User Document

This procedure explains how to copy a user document.
Procedure
1
Expand the Application tree, right-click the document to be copied, and click Copy.
If the document is open in TriStation 1131, the Copy command will be unavailable. Close
the document and then repeat step 1.
On the Edit menu, click Paste.
User Documents
111
Enter the name for the new document, and click OK.
Copying a Library Document

This procedure explains how to make a copy of an existing library document. Only functions
and data types can be copied; function blocks cannot be copied.
Procedure
1
Expand the Application tree, open the Library Documents folder and locate the function
or data type you want to copy.
Right-click on the function or data type, and select Copy.

If the document is open in TriStation 1131, the Copy command will be unavailable. Close
the document and then repeat steps 1 and 2.
In the Application tree, right-click the User Documents folder and select Paste.
Enter a name for the copied document, and then click OK.
The new function or data type is now located in the appropriate folder in the User
Documents folder.
112
Chapter 2
Specifying Document Summary Information

This procedure explains how to specify summary information for a document.
Procedure
1
Expand the Application tree, right-click a document (program, function, function block,
or data type) and click Properties.
Specify these properties on the Summary tab.
Property
Action
Name
Displays the name of the document and version number.
Internal ID
Displays an internal number used to identify the document.
Owned by
Displays the name of the owner. To change, click Change Owner.
Created
Displays the date and time the document was created.
Modified
Displays the date and time the document was last modified.
Compiled
Displays the date and time the document was last compiled.
Category
Enter a name to be used to categorize the document. Documents

can be organized and displayed by categories.
Description
Enter a description for the document.
Document Access
Select the type of access to allow for this document. The default is
Read/Write. See Restricting Access to a Document on page 114.
Change Owner
Command
Click the Change Owner button to change the owner of the

document. See Changing a Document Owner on page 115.
User Documents
113
Specifying Document Attributes

This procedure explains how to specify document attributes, which include the type of
application the document can be used in, and whether the document can be used in a CEM
program.
Procedure
1
or data type), and click Properties.
Click the Attributes tab.
Specify these properties on the Attributes tab.

Property
Action
Application Type
Specify whether this document can be used in Safety,

Control, or Safety and Control applications. The default
is Control.
See Safety and Control Applications on page 104.
Cause Effect Matrix Support
Select the check box for each type that is supported.

Specify the number of inputs and outputs, if needed.
Only available for functions and function blocks. See
Enabling User-Defined Functions and ApplicationDefined States on page 151.
Enable Color Monitoring
Select the check box if you want a color displayed for

BOOL inputs and outputs when the application is run on
the controller or Emulator.
Only available for programs written in FBD, LD, or CEM.
See Specifying Monitor Colors for BOOL Values on
page 39.
114
Chapter 2
Restricting Access to a Document

This procedure explains how to restrict access to a document by setting the Access property. The
most restrictive setting is for Read, which means anyone with a lesser security level than yours
cannot change it. The least restrictive setting is for Read/Write, which means all users can read
and change the document. You can also Lock the document to prevent editing by unauthorized
users.
To change the setting for this property, you must have a User Security level that includes
Change Access Attributes. For more information, see Managing User Access on page 54.
Procedure
1
Document
Access
property
On the Summary tab, select the access type for this document. The default value is
Read/Write.
User Documents
115
Changing a Document Owner

This procedure explains how to change the owner of a document, which determines whether
other users can change the element. Normally, the owner of a document is the user who created
it.
To change the setting for this property, your user security level must:
Include the Elements: Change Access Attributes privilege
Be the same or greater than the security level of the user you want to assign as owner
For more information about user security levels, see Managing User Access on page 54.
Procedure
1
On the Summary tab, click Change Owner.
In the Users dialog box, select the user who is to become owner of this element.
Click OK.
The Owned By property in the Document Properties dialog box displays the name of the
new owner.
116
Chapter 2
Function Block Diagram and Ladder Diagram

Development
This section explains how to use Function Block Diagram (FBD) and Ladder Diagram (LD)
languages to develop programs, functions, and function blocks. Topics include:
Using the FBD Editor on page 117
Using the LD Editor on page 118
Function and Function Block Graphics on page 119
Working with Logic Sheets on page 120
Selecting Library Elements on page 124
Specifying Function Properties on page 125
Specifying Function Block Properties on page 126
Specifying Function Block Application Usage on page 127
Using a Space Saver Function Block on page 128
Function Block Diagram and Ladder Diagram Development
117
Using the FBD Editor

The Function Block Diagram (FBD) editor allows you to develop programs and functions by
using a graphical language that corresponds to circuit diagrams. Toolbar commands are
described in detail in Appendix A, Commands and Properties.
1
Declaration Tree
Insert Output
Variable
Command
11
Comment Tool
16
Zoom To Fit
Command
Selection Tools
Insert Input
Variable
Command
12
Horizontal Network
Divider Command
17
Previous Sheet
Command
Function Block
Command
Tagname
13
Vertical Network
Divider Command
18
Sheet Manager
Local Variable
Constant
14
Auto Name
Command
19
Next Sheet
Input Variable
10
Wire Tool
Command
15
Zoom Command
Figure 5
4 5 6
7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19
Function Block Diagram Editor Elements
118
Chapter 2
Using the LD Editor

The Ladder Diagram (LD) editor allows you to develop programs and functions by using a
graphical language that corresponds to relay logic. Toolbar commands are described in detail
in Appendix A, Commands and Properties.
1
Declaration Tree
Input
13
Link Command
19
Zoom To Fit
Command
Selection Tools
Local Variable
14
Comment Tool
20
Previous Sheet
Command
Function Block
Command
Insert Output
Variable
Command
15
Horizontal Network
Divider Command
21
Sheet Manager
Contact
Command
10
Insert Input
Variable
Command
16
Vertical Network
Divider Command
22
Next Sheet
Coil Tool
Command
11
Tagname
17
Auto Name
Command
Right Power Rail

Command
12
Constant
18
Zoom Command
Figure 6
7 8
Ladder Diagram Editor Elements
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
119
Function and Function Block Graphics

In FBD and LD languages, each function and function block is graphically represented on the
logic sheet. For more information on specific functions and function blocks, see the TriStation
1131 Libraries Reference.
Function
Output terminal
Input terminals
Evaluation order
in program
Instance name for

the function block
Function Block
Names of input
terminals
Input terminals
Type name (CSCHED)

Output terminal
names
Output terminals
Evaluation order
in program
Figure 7
Function and Function Block Elements
Table 25
Function Block Graphic Elements
Item
Description
Instance name
Identifies the specific implementation of a function block type.

For function blocks only.
Names of terminals
Identify the input and output parameters used with the function block.
Terminals
Locations where variables are attached.
Evaluation order
Identifies the order in which the function is executed in the program.
Type name
Identifies the function block type.
120
Chapter 2
Working with Logic Sheets

Logic sheets are the workspace for developing programs, functions, and function blocks. Four
sheet sizes are available; there is no limit to the number of sheets you can have in a program or
function. This section describes how to select, manage, and edit logic sheets. Topics include:
Selecting a Sheet Template on page 120
Managing Logic Sheets on page 121
Editing the Sheet Title on page 122
Printing Logic Sheets on page 122
Selecting a Sheet Template

This procedure explains how to select a sheet template. The sheet template defines the size of
the logic sheets used in the selected program, function, or function block.
Procedure
1
Expand the Application tree, and then create or open a program, function, or function
block.
On the Sheets menu, click Select Sheet Template.
Select the template you want to use for logic sheets.

Sheet Template
Description
SheetTemplate A
8.5 x 11
SheetTemplate B
11 x 17 (default)
SheetTemplate C
17 x 22
SheetTemplate D
22 x 34
Note
121
Logic sheets are oriented in the landscape (horizontal) direction. If you want
your logic sheets to be in the portrait (vertical) orientation, be sure to select the
_Portrait version of the desired sheet template.
Click OK to save your selection and apply the new sheet size to the open program,
function, or function block.
The new sheet size will also apply to any new programs, functions, or function blocks
you create.
Managing Logic Sheets

This procedure explains how to append, insert, and delete logic sheets in a program, function,
or function block.
Procedure
1
block.
On the FBD or LD Editor toolbar, click the Sheets Manager button
Do any of the following:
To add a new sheet after an existing sheet, select the existing sheet, and then click
Append. In the Enter Sheet Title box, enter the new sheet title and then click OK.
To add a new sheet before an existing sheet, select the existing sheet, and then click
Insert. In the Enter Sheet Title box, enter the new sheet title and then click OK.
To delete an existing sheet, select the sheet you want to remove and then click
Delete. You are not asked to confirm the deletion of the sheet, so be sure you have
selected the correct sheet before clicking Delete.
To change an existing sheets title, select the sheet whose title you want to change,
and then click Title. In the Enter Sheet Title box, enter the new sheet title and then
click OK.
Note
4
To view a specific sheet, select the sheet and then click Go To.

122
Chapter 2
Editing the Sheet Title

This procedure explains how to change the title of the current sheet. The sheet title is displayed
in the title block, the window caption bar, and the Window Menu list. It does not affect the logic
on the sheet.
Procedure
1
block.
Use the Previous Sheet and/or Next Sheet buttons on the FBD or LD Editor toolbar
to display the sheet whose title you want to change.
On the Sheets menu, click Edit Sheet Title.
Enter the sheet title and then click OK.
Note
To change the sheet title for multiple sheets without displaying each individual sheet,
use the Sheets Manager dialog box. See Managing Logic Sheets on page 121.
Printing Logic Sheets

This procedure explains how to print one or more logic sheets in a project. You can print logic
sheets individually, or you can print all logic sheets in a project at once.
Printing Individual Logic Sheets

1
block.
Use the Previous Sheet and/or Next Sheet

to display the sheet you want to print.
On the File menu, select Print. The Print dialog box appears.
Select the desired properties for your printer (number of copies, page orientation, etc),
and then click OK.
buttons on the FBD or LD Editor toolbar
123
Printing Multiple Logic Sheets

1
Select the check boxes for the following documents:
Functions
Function Blocks
Programs
Note
To quickly clear the check boxes for all the documents in the list, and make it
easier to select only those documents you want to print, clear the Select All check
box.
124
Chapter 2
Selecting Library Elements

This procedure explains how to select a library element to include in a program or function.
TriStation 1131 includes libraries of functions, function blocks, and data types that can be used
in a project. Many of these elements include the source code, which can be copied to a program
or function.
Procedure
1
Expand the Application tree, and then create or open a program.
On the FBD or LD Editor toolbar, click the Select Function (Block) Tool Element button
.
Select the function or function block to be inserted, and then click OK.
Click on the logic sheet to place the element.
To insert another function or function block of the same type, click the Function (Block) Tool
, and then click on the logic sheet to place the element. To select a different function or
function block, repeat steps 24.
Note
You can easily create your own function by making a copy of an existing library
function, and then modifying it to suit your needs. See Copying a Library Document on
page 111.
125
Specifying Function Properties

This procedure explains how to specify properties for functions.
Procedure
1
Expand the Application tree and open a program or function.
Double-click the graphic of the function whose properties you want to define.
Specify these properties on the Function tab.

Property
Action
Number of Inputs
If the Number of Inputs fields is enabled, the function is

extensible, which means the number of inputs can be changed.
To add inputs, enter the number of inputs and click Apply.
Invert Input
If an input is inverted, the value is changed to the opposite

value (True to False, or False to True) when the function is
executed. Only available for BOOL inputs.
To invert the value for a specific BOOL value, select the input
and then select the Invert Input check box.
Invert Output
If an output is inverted, the value is changed to the opposite

value (True to False, or False to True) when the function is
executed. Only available for BOOL outputs.
To invert the value for the output, select the Invert Output
check box.
Width
Click + or to increase or decrease the width of the selected

function graphic on the logic sheet.
EN/ENO
To include an input and output parameter that detects errors in

FBD and LD logic, select the EN/ENO check box.
Required in functions and function blocks used in LD
programs.
Double Space
Select the check box to have space in the function graphic on the
logic sheet doubled between the inputs and outputs.
126
Chapter 2
Specifying Function Block Properties

This procedure explains how to specify properties for function blocks.
Function blocks must have at least one BOOL input and one BOOL output. All input, output,
and local variables in a function block persist from one execution of a function block to the next
execution. Consequently, the same function block invoked with the same inputs may not return
the same outputs.
Any function block previously declared can be used in the declaration of another function block
or program. The scope of an instance of a function block is local to the function block or program
that declares the instance.
Procedure
1
Expand the Application tree and open a program or function block.
Double-click the graphic of the function block whose properties you want to define.
Specify these properties on the Function Block tab.

Property
Action
Instance Name
Enter a name for this specific implementation of the function

block.
Invert Input/Output
If an input or output is inverted, the value is changed to the

opposite value (True to False, or False to True) when the
function is executed. Only available for BOOL inputs.
To invert the value for a specific BOOL value, select the
input or output and then select the Invert Input/Output
check box.
Width
Click + or to increase or decrease the width of the selected

function block graphic on the logic sheet.
EN/ENO
Only available with functions.
Double Space
Select the check box to have space in the function block

graphic on the logic sheet doubled between the inputs and
outputs. The default is cleared.
127
Specifying Function Block Application Usage

This procedure explains how to specify the Usage property for function blocks, which
determines how the function block is used in a program. You can specify the usage for userdefined function blocks, but you cannot change the settings for TriStation 1131 library function
blocks.
Procedure
1
Expand the Application tree and expand the User Documents folder.
Right-click a function block, click Properties, and then click the Usage tab.
Specify one of these settings on the Usage tab.

Setting
Action
Space Saver
Use when a single instance can be executed more than once per
scan to reduce memory usage and increase performance.
For more information on specific requirements for using a
function block as a space saver, see Using a Space Saver Function
Block on page 128.
Exactly Once
Use when each instance should be executed exactly once per scan.
Only Once
Use when each instance should be executed only once per scan,
but does not need to be executed every scan.
Internal State
Use when a single instance can be executed more than once per
scan.
Click OK to save your selection.
128
Chapter 2
Using a Space Saver Function Block

This procedure explains how to use a function block as a space saver. The Space Saver setting
means a single instance can be executed more than once per scan to reduce memory usage and
increase performance.
For user-defined function blocks, you can specify this setting. For Triconex Library function
blocks, the setting cannot be changed.
Declare only one instance of the function block and use that same instance throughout
your program. On a function block diagram, just use the same instance name
repeatedly.
To prevent mistakes, connect a value to every function block input. If you forget to
connect an input, then you must search for a previous execution of the function block to
see the input value because the function block remembers the input value from one
execution to the next if the input is not connected.
Do not use the function block instance more than once in a networkthe result is a
WG0014 warning because the diagram could be ambiguous.
Structured Text Development
129

This section explains how to use Structured Text (ST) language to write a program, function,
function block, or data type. Structured Text is a high level language that has been specifically
developed for industrial control applications.
For more information, see Programming Industrial Control Systems Using IEC 1131-3, by R.W.
Lewis, London: Short Run Press Ltd., 1998 (ISBN: 0852969503).
Topics include:
Using the ST Editor on page 130
Using Expressions on page 131
Defining an Enumeration Data Type on page 132
Defining an Array Data Type on page 133
Defining a Structured Data Type on page 134
Declaring a VAR CONSTANT on page 134
Declaring a VAR_TEMP on page 135
Declaring a VAR_EXTERNAL on page 136
Declaring Local Variables in ST on page 137
Declaring Input and Output Variables in ST on page 137
Using ForLoop and Exit Statements on page 138
Using a CASE Statement on page 139
VAR_IN_OUT Function Parameters on page 140
130
Chapter 2
Using the ST Editor

The Structured Text (ST) editor allows you to develop programs and functions by writing code.
This figure shows the logic sheet and commands. Toolbar commands are described in detail in
Appendix A, Commands and Properties.
1
Read Only
Command
Replace
Command
Larger Font
(Font Size)
Type Over
Command
Find Text
Command
Line Numbers
Smaller Font
(Font Size)
Auto Indent
Command
Figure 8
7 8
Structured Text Editor Elements
The ST compiler allows you to insert tabs, spaces, and comments between keywords and
identifiers wherever a space is required. Each statement must be terminated with a semi-colon
(;) separator. Comments must be preceded by (* and followed by *), as shown in this example:
(* this is a comment *)
Note
You can easily add code to your ST program by copying and pasting code from existing
library or user documents. To do so, while viewing the code you want to copy, select the
code, right-click on it, and select Copy. Then, return to your ST program, right-click
where you want to add the code, and select Paste.
131
Using Expressions
An expression is a sequence of variable or constant operands and operators that compute a
value. For example, an expression to calculate the total area of two rectangles could be written
as follows:
(RectA_width * RectA_height) + (RectB_width * RectB_height)
Operands and Operators

An operand is an element with which an operation is performed. An operand can be a variable
(for example, X. ALARM1, VALVE_OPEN) or a literal constant (for example, 1234, 1.35, 16#FFFF).
For each expression, the operands must be the same type. For example, you cannot add a BOOL
operand to an INT operand.
An operator performs a specific action on one or more operands to compute a value. For
example, the multiplication operator (*) is used to compute the product of two or more
operands:
MyValue * 100
Order of Evaluation
Expressions are evaluated in a specific order, depending on the precedence of the operators
and/or sub-expressions. Parentheses are used to isolate sub-parts of an expression and
prioritize expression evaluation. Expressions within parentheses have the highest precedence
and are always evaluated first. Other operators are subsequently evaluated based on their
precedence. When operators have equal precedence, they are evaluated from left to right.
The following table lists the Arithmetic and Boolean operators, and their order of evaluation or
precedence:
Table 26
Operation Symbol Precedence
Operation
Symbol
Precedence
Parenthesization
(Expression)
1 (Highest)
Function Evaluation
Identifier (Argument List)
Example:
LN(A)
MAX(X,Y), etc.
Exponentiation
**
Negation
Complement
NOT
Multiply
Divide
Modulo
MOD
Add
132
Chapter 2
Table 26
Operation Symbol Precedence (continued)
Operation
Symbol
Precedence
Subtract
Comparison
<, >, <=, >=
Equality
Inequality
<>
Boolean AND
AND
Boolean Exclusive OR
XOR
10
Boolean OR
OR
11 (Lowest)
Defining an Enumeration Data Type

An enumerated data type is a data type that allows different states of a value to be given
different names.
Note
Once an enumerated data type has been successfully compiled, you can assign it as a
data type for local variables. See Declaring Variables on page 163 for more information.
Syntax Example
TYPE ENUM_COLORS:
(YELLOW, RED, GREEN);
END_TYPE
In this example, the value of a variable of type ENUM_COLORS is YELLOW, RED, or GREEN.
Any other value is an error. The default initial value is YELLOW. The order for comparison
increases from left to right.
Example
PROGRAM ST_Enumerations
VAR
MY_COLORS : ENUM_COLORS := GREEN;
END_VAR
if (MY_COLORS = GREEN)then
MY_COLORS := RED;
elsif (MY_COLORS = RED)then
MY_COLORS := YELLOW;
elsif (MY_COLORS = YELLOW)then
MY_COLORS :=GREEN;
end_if;
(* The following statement causes an error *)
(* MY_COLORS := 6; *)
END_PROGRAM
133
Defining an Array Data Type

An array is a group of data objects with identical attributes, which is sometimes referred to as
multi-element variables.
Arrays can have one or two levels, and be up to 32 KB maximum.
The maximum number of array elements is 256,000.
An array index must be in the range of -2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647.
Note
Once an array has been successfully compiled, you can assign it as a data type for local
variables. See Declaring Variables on page 163 for more information.
Syntax Example
TYPE ARRAY_DINTS :
ARRAY[1..6,1..20] OF DINT;
END_TYPE
Example
For each array, the default initial value is the one defined for the array type. In this example,
array type A has 10 elements of type INT.
TYPE A:
ARRAY [0 .. 9] OF INT ;
END_TYPE
Example
In this example, a variable declaration specifies a variable V of type A.
VAR V : A ; END_VAR
This means the array elements are referenced by the expressions:

V[0], V[1], . . , V[9]
The default initial values are 0 (zero).
Example
An index can be an expression of type ANY_INT, for example, V [I + 1].
For an array with more than one dimension, the sub-range is replaced with a comma-separated
list of sub-ranges, and the array index is replaced with a comma-separated list of array indexes.
134
Chapter 2
Defining a Structured Data Type

A structured data type is derived by defining a structure from existing data types by using
elements of other specified types, which are accessed by their specified names. A structure can
have a maximum of 400 elements.
Note
Once structure has been successfully compiled, you can assign it as a data type for local
variables. See Declaring Variables on page 163 for more information.
Syntax Example
TYPE STRUCT_SENSOR :
STRUCT
INPUT:DINT;
STATUS:BOOL;
HIGH_LIMIT:REAL;
ALARM_COUNT:INT;
END_STRUCT;
END_TYPE
Each structured declaration consists of an element name followed by a colon, followed by a type
specification. The default initial value of each structured element is the one defined for the
structured type. In this example, the structured type called STRUCT_SENSOR has four
structure elements: element INPUT of type DINT, element STATUS of type BOOL, element
HIGH_LIMIT of type REAL, and element ALARM_COUNT of type INT.
If a variable declaration specifies a variable V of type STRUCT_SENSOR (VAR V :
STRUCT_SENSOR ; END_VAR), then the four structure elements are referenced by the
expressions V. INPUT, V.STATUS, and so on. The default initial values are 0, False (0), 0.0, and
0.
Declaring a VAR CONSTANT

A VAR CONSTANT is a named constant, which is appropriate for safety applications because
the value cannot be changed in a program.
Syntax Example
VAR CONSTANT
StartUp_Speed: REAL : 12.3;
Gear_Ratio:INT : 12;
END_VAR
Program Example
PROGRAM ST_Constants
VAR CONSTANT
MILLISECS_IN_SEC : DINT := 1000;
END_VAR
VAR
TIMER_MILLISECS, TIMER_SECS : DINT;
GET_CALENDAR : TR_CALENDAR;
135
END_VAR
GET_CALENDAR(CI := TRUE);
TIMER_SECS := GET_CALENDAR.SECOND;
TIMER_MILLISECS := TIMER_SECS * MILLISECS_IN_SEC;
(* The following statement causes an error because MILLISECS_IN_SEC
*is a VAR CONSTANT*)
(* MILLISECS_IN_SEC := 999; *)
END_PROGRAM
Declaring a VAR_TEMP
A VAR_TEMP is a variable which is appropriate for safety applications because the variables
are placed in a temporary memory area (not local memory) which is cleared when the program,
function, or function block terminates. A VAR_TEMP variable provides no persistence. During
each scan, it is automatically initialized to zero at the start of the program, function, or function
block.
Syntax Example
VAR_TEMP
RESULT : REAL;
END_VAR;
Function Block Example

FUNCTION_BLOCK ST_VarTemp
VAR_TEMP
(* These 4 bytes will not be counted
as LOCAL variables *)
TEMP_SUM : REAL;
IS_ROUNDUP : BOOL;
END_VAR
VAR_INPUT
INP_1, INP_2, INP_3: REAL ;
FORCE_ROUNDUP: BOOL ;
END_VAR
VAR_OUTPUT
OUT_SUM : DINT ;
OUT_BOOL : BOOL ;
END_VAR
VAR
LOC_ROUNDUP : BOOL := FALSE;
END_VAR
TEMP_SUM := INP_1 + INP_2 + INP_3;
IS_ROUNDUP := (LOC_ROUNDUP OR FORCE_ROUNDUP);
if (IS_ROUNDUP) then
136
Chapter 2
TEMP_SUM := CEIL(TEMP_SUM);
LOC_ROUNDUP := FALSE;
else
TEMP_SUM := FLOOR(TEMP_SUM);
LOC_ROUNDUP := TRUE;
end_if;
OUT_SUM := REAL_TO_DINT(TEMP_SUM);
OUT_BOOL := IS_ROUNDUP;
END_FUNCTION_BLOCK
Declaring a VAR_EXTERNAL
A VAR_EXTERNAL (also known as a global variable) allows access to tagnames (also known
as tagname declarations in TriStation 1131). It is used for all program inputs and outputs.
Syntax Example
VAR_EXTERNAL
TagName_1, Tagname_5, Tagname_9 : BOOL;
END_VAR
Program Example
PROGRAM ST_VarExternal
VAR_EXTERNAL
TagName_1, Tagname_5, Tagname_9 : BOOL;
END_VAR
if (Tagname_1) then
Tagname_1 := FALSE;
else
Tagname_1 := TRUE;
end_if;
if (Tagname_5) then
Tagname_5 := FALSE;
else
Tagname_5 := TRUE;
end_if;
if (Tagname_9) then
Tagname_9 := FALSE;
else
Tagname_9 := TRUE;
end_if;
END_PROGRAM
137
Declaring Local Variables in ST

A local variable is declared within function blocks using the VAR..END_VAR construct. Local
variables in a program or function block are initialized with initial values (the default is zero) at
startup. Function block instances are actually local variables and are declared as such.
Syntax Example
VAR
UpCount : INT:= 100; (* Declares initial value to be 100 *)
Reset : BOOL;
(* Declares Boolean variable Reset *)
UpCounter : CTU;
(* Declares instance of CTU function block*)
END_VAR
Declaring Input and Output Variables in ST

Function block input and output variables are declared using the VAR_INPUT ... END_VAR
and VAR_OUTPUT ... END_VAR constructs. All input variables must be declared before any
output variables can be declared.
Note
The VAR_INPUT ... END_VAR and VAR_OUTPUT ... END_VAR constructs cannot be
used in programs. Programs must use VAR_EXTERNAL for input and output variables.
Function Block Example

FUNCTION_BLOCK AVERAGE
(* Variable Declarations *)
VAR_INPUT
RESET : BOOL ;
(* 1 = reset, 0 = calculate *)
CURRENT_VALUE : DINT ;(* Current Value from UPDOWN *)
END_VAR
VAR_OUTPUT
STATUS : BOOL ; (* State => 1 = resetting, 0 = calculating *)
XOUT : DINT ;
(* Avg Output = Current_Value Divided by MAX_COUNT *)
END_VAR
(* Your execution statements here *)
END_FUNCTION_BLOCK
138
Chapter 2
Using ForLoop and Exit Statements

The ForLoop and Exit statements allow a set of statements to be repeated depending on the
value of an iteration variable.
Program Example
PROGRAM ST_ForLoop
VAR
MY_ARRAY : ARRAY_DINTS;
COUNT : DINT;
IDX_1, IDX_2 : INT;
END_VAR
for IDX_1 := 1 to 6 do
for IDX_2 := 1 to 20 do
MY_ARRAY[IDX_1,IDX_2] := COUNT;
(* This statement causes an error because IDX_1 is being used
* as the counter for the ForLoop structure *)
(* IDX_1 := 20; *)
end_for;
if (COUNT = 100) then
exit;
end_if;
end_for;
COUNT := COUNT + 1;
END_PROGRAM
139
Using a CASE Statement

The CASE statement allows a selected statement to be executed depending on the value of an
expression that returns an integer result. Only numerical values can be used for the reference
items in the CASE statement. If variables are used, TriStation 1131 rejects the code.
Allows up to 5,000 selection statements.
Program Example
PROGRAM ST_Case
VAR
SETTING : DINT := 0;
SPEED :REAL := 0.0;
END_VAR
if (SETTING > 10) then
SETTING := 0;
end_if;
SETTING := SETTING + 1;
(*Select a SPEED based on the value of SETTING *)
case SETTING of
1: SPEED := 5.0;
2: SPEED := 7.5;
3,4,5:SPEED := 12.0;
6: SPEED := 15.0;
7,8:SPEED := 18.0;
9: SPEED := 21.0;
10:SPEED := 25.0;
else
SPEED := 0.0;
end_case;
END_PROGRAM
140
Chapter 2
VAR_IN_OUT Function Parameters

The VAR_IN_OUT function parameters allow more than one input and more than one output
in a function block.
CAUTION
You should not use the VAR_IN_OUT variable in a safety application.

Safety standards (such as IEC 61508) recommend limiting the use of
pointers in safety applications; VAR_IN_OUT is used as a pointer in
TriStation 1131.
To automatically check for the use of VAR_IN_OUT in your safety
application, set the Application Type to Safety for the programs included
in the application (for more information, see Application Type on
page 485).
Syntax Example
VAR_IN_OUT
INOUT_1, INOUT_2, INOUT_3 : DINT ;
END_VAR
Function Example
FUNCTION ST_VarInOut : BOOL
VAR_IN_OUT
INOUT_1, INOUT_2, INOUT_3 : DINT ;
END_VAR
if (INOUT_1 > 64000) then
INOUT_1 := 0;
end_if;
INOUT_1 := INOUT_1 + 1;
INOUT_2 := 0;
end_if;
INOUT_3 := 0;
end_if;
ST_VarInOut := TRUE;
END_FUNCTION
Cause Effect Matrix Development
141

This section explains how to use the Cause Effect Matrix (CEM) language to create a program
based on a cause and effect matrix. Topics include:
CEMPLE Overview on page 142
Using the CEM Editor on page 144
Setting up a CEM Program on page 147
Using User-Defined Functions and Application-Defined States on page 150
Specifying Local Variables, Tagnames, and Constants in a CEM Program on page 152
Working with Cells, Rows, and Columns in a CEM Program on page 153
Editing the Title Block on page 161
Managing Views on page 162
142
Chapter 2
CEMPLE Overview
CEMPLE is an optional TriStation 1131 language editor that automates the process of creating
a program based on a cause and effect matrix. Cause and effect matrix is a methodology that is
commonly used in the process control industry to define alarms, emergency shutdown
strategies, and mitigation actions.
A matrix created in CEM language can be as basic or complex as your situation requires. In a
basic matrix, causes are identified as True or False inputs related to one or more effects through
the intersections between them. The state of a cause (True or False) determines the state of the
related effect. If more than one cause is related to an effect, the state of the effect is based on how
the matrix is evaluated. You can specify the matrix evaluation as a de-energize-to-trip (fail-safe)
or energize-to-trip system. In a typical de-energize-to-trip system, if one of the inputs changes
to False, the related outputs also change to False. In an energize-to-trip system, the reverse is
true; if one of the inputs changes to True, the related outputs also change to True.
For more complex processes, CEM language allows you to add functions or function blocks to
causes, intersections, and effects. This feature can be used for many purposes; for example, to
accept non-Boolean input and convert to Boolean output, to set timers before evaluating the
input, and to pass additional input variables to output variables.
CEM language includes these features:
Ability to specify up to 99 causes, 99 effects, and 1,000 intersections
Ability to invoke functions and function blocks to evaluate cause, intersection, and
effect states
Choice of de-energize-to-trip or energize-to-trip matrix evaluation
Automatic conversion of matrix to Function Block Diagram language
Customized view monitoring of active causes, intersections, and effects
Multiple levels of undo and redo editing
Matrix Planning
Planning includes determining the causes (problems) to be monitored, and determining how
the matrix is to be evaluated.
Restrictions and Limitations
No more than 99 causes, 99 effects, and 1,000 intersections.
Variables with a variable type of In/Out (VAR_IN_OUT) are not allowed in CEM
programs, function blocks that are invoked by matrix programs, or any safety program
or function block.
Matrix Evaluation Options

When planning a matrix, you must determine how the matrix is evaluated when it includes
multiple causes and effects. If the matrix is based on an energize-to-trip system, such as a fire
suppression system, an OR evaluation is typically used because the normal state of inputs is
143
False. If one of the inputs changes to True, the related outputs also change to True. The default
setting is OR.
If the matrix is based on a de-energize-to-trip (fail-safe) system, an AND evaluation is typically
used because the normal state of inputs is True. If one of the inputs changes to False, the related
outputs also change to False. This is why it is typically used with systems that are designed to
be fail-safe.
How a Matrix is Evaluated

When a matrix is executed, the states of causes, effects, and intersections are evaluated in a
specific order. The states of causes, intersections, and effects are saved in internal variables. An
internal Move function moves the cause state to the intersection state, and then to the effect
state. The order of evaluation is shown and described in this figure.
3. For each column from the left to the right, an effect state
is determined based on the intersection state and the
function associated with the effect.
2. For each intersection from

the bottom to the top, a state is
determined based on the cause
state and intersection function.
For typical AND evaluations, all
cause states must be True for
the intersection state to be True
and one False state makes the
output False.
For typical OR evaluations, all
cause states must be False for
the intersection state to be
False and one True state makes
the output True.
1. For each cause from the top

row to the bottom, a state is
determined based on the
inputs and function associated
with the cause.
Figure 9
CEMPLE Matrix Evaluation Steps
144
Chapter 2
Using the CEM Editor

The CEM editor allows you to create a TriStation 1131 program based on a cause and effect
matrix. The editor includes the following areas:
Matrix: Identifies causes, effects, and the intersections between them. Can also include
inputs, outputs, functions, and function blocks related to causes, effects, and
intersections.
FBD Network: Displays the Function Block Diagram (FBD) related to the cause, effect,
or intersection that you select in a matrix. It also allows you to specify properties and to
invert the values of variables.
Variable Detail Table: Displays the inputs and outputs of an FBD network that are
generated when a cause, effect, or intersection is selected. It also allows you to specify
variable type and data type.
This figure depicts the areas in the CEM Editor.

Matrix rows and columns
Variable Detail Table
Figure 10
CEMPLE Editor Elements
FBD Network
145
Matrix
The matrix area of the CEM editor includes the rows, columns, and intersections of a matrix. In
a basic matrix that does not use functions, causes can be directly related to effects through
intersections. In a more complex matrix, such as this figure, functions can be included for
causes, effects, and intersections. When functions are included, the inputs and outputs of those
functions can be specified in the matrix.
Effect items
Intersections
Cause items
Figure 11
CEMPLE Matrix Elements
FBD Network
The FBD Network area of the CEM editor displays the Function Block Diagram (FBD) related to
the cause, effect, or intersection that you select in the matrix. The FBD network uses internal
Boolean variables to save and move results to associated cells so that causes and effects can be
evaluated. When you create a cause, intersection, or effect, an internal variable is automatically
created for each.
The CEM editor uses internal variables to store and move results between cells. Although you
cannot directly access the internal variables, you can create variables and copy the values to
those variables. You can also specify properties and invert values of variables.
If you select a cause, effect, or intersection that does not contain a function, or if you make
multiple selections, the FBD network cannot display appropriate information.
146
Chapter 2
FBD Network area
Figure 12
FBD Network Area in CEMPLE Editor

The Variable Detail Table area of the CEM editor displays the inputs and outputs of an FBD
Network that are generated when a cause, effect, or intersection is selected. This figure shows
the names, variable types, and data types related to the function block.
Figure 13
Variable Detail Table in CEMPLE Editor
147
Setting up a CEM Program

The following sections describe how to set default options that apply to CEM programs. Topics
include:
Specifying CEM Element Options on page 148
Specifying Monitor Colors and Names on page 149
Specifying CEM Editor Options

This procedure explains how to set the options used as initial settings for all the CEM (cause and
effect matrix) programs in a project. After a program is created, you can modify these settings
on a program-by-program basis.
Procedure
1
On the Tools menu, click TriStation 1131 Options, and then click the CEM Editor tab.
Specify these properties on the CEM Editor tab.

Property
Action
Cause Header Functions On

by Default
Select the check box to have input and function columns

added. The default is cleared.
Effect Header Functions On

by Default
Select the check box to have output and function

columns added. The default is cleared.
Intersection Functions On by
Default
Select the check box to have function columns added.

The default is cleared.
148
Chapter 2
Property
Action
Default Number of Cause

Rows
Enter the number of rows to include in a new matrix.

The default is 22.
Default Number of Effect

Columns
Enter the number of columns to include in a new

matrix. The default is 25.
Specifying CEM Element Options

This procedure explains how to specify whether functions are used in a specific CEM program,
and how the matrix is evaluated.
Procedure
1
Expand the Application tree, double-click a program, click the Document menu, and
then click Options.
Specify these properties in the CEM Element Options dialog box.

Property
Action
Enable Cause Header

Functions
Select the check box to add an input and function column

to the cause header. The default is selected.
Enable Effect Header

Functions
Select the check box to add an output and function

column to the effect header. The default is selected.
Enable Intersection
Functions
Select the check box to add a function column to the

intersection. The default is selected.
Property
Action
Enable Floating Text in

Intersection Cells
Select the check box to allow the name of the function or

function block to be displayed in a neighboring cell if that
cell is empty. This is useful when the name of the function
or function block is long. The default is cleared.
Evaluation Options
Specify how the matrix is to be evaluated when it includes

multiple intersections between a cause and effect. The
default is OR.
149
Specifying Monitor Colors and Names

This procedure explains how to specify the colors that are displayed for True and False BOOL
values when an application is monitored on the Controller and Emulator Panels.
Procedure
1
On the Project menu, click Project Options, and then click the Monitor Colors tab.
Under CEM Monitor Colors, select the color for True and False for cause, effect, and
intersection cells in a CEM (cause and effect matrix).
The default for True is red; False is white.
150
Chapter 2
Using User-Defined Functions and Application-Defined States

This section describes how user-defined functions and application-defined states can be used in
a CEM program.
User-Defined Functions
User-defined functions must be enabled before they can be used in a CEM program. (Invensyssupplied functions and function blocks do not have to be enabled.) When you enable a function,
it is validated to ensure it can be used in that part of the matrix. For example, a function used in
an intersection must have a Boolean primary input and Boolean primary output. If not enabled,
the function is not available for selection.
Application States
User-defined functions can include a variable that stores application states and that is evaluated
in the same way as the cause, intersection, and effect internal variables. This means you can
include application information that is evaluated with an AND or OR operation when the
matrix is run. Application state inputs and outputs must be a DWORD data type, which is a
32-bit string.
This figure shows an example of using a variable to store the application state.
For the cause function

block, the second
output is the
application state.
For the intersection

function block, the
second input and
output of the function
is the application state.
For the effect function

block, the second
input and output of the
function is the
application state.
Figure 14
Using a Variable to Store Application State
151
Enabling User-Defined Functions and Application-Defined States

This procedure explains how to enable user-defined functions and application-defined states
for a specific matrix. If a user-defined function is not enabled, it cannot be used in a matrix.
Procedure
1
Expand the Application tree, right-click the user-defined function, click Properties, and
then click the Attributes tab.
Specify these properties on the Attributes tab.

Property
Action
Application Type
Click either Control or Safety and Control.
Supports Use in Cause Rows

with... Inputs
Select the check box to enable the function for use in

cause rows, and then select the required number of
inputs. The default is cleared.
Supports Use in Effect

Columns With... Outputs

effect columns, and then select the required number of
outputs. The default is cleared.
Supports Use in Intersections

intersections. The default is cleared.
Supports Application Defined

States
Select the check box to enable the function to add a

variable to store the application defined state. The
default is cleared.
In the Application tree, double-click the function to open it on a logic sheet.
On the Document menu, click Compile.

The compile process determines whether the function can be used.
152
Chapter 2
Specifying Local Variables, Tagnames, and Constants in a CEM Program

This procedure explains how to specify local variables, tagnames, and constants in a CEM
program. When functions are used with causes or effects, the inputs and outputs to the
functions must be specified as variables or constants.
In/Out variables (VAR_IN_OUT) are not allowed in CEM programs, function blocks that are
invoked by CEM programs, or any safety program or function block.
Procedure
1
Expand the Application tree, expand User Documents, and double-click a CEM
program.
Select or type the name in the Input or Output columns, or in the Var/Const column in
the Variable Detail Table.
Specifying Properties in the Variable Detail Table

This procedure explains how to modify properties in the Variable Detail Table, which is located
in the lower left part of the CEM program.
Procedure
1
Expand the Application tree, and open a CEM program.
Specify these properties in the Variable Detail Table.

Property
Action
Var/Const
Enter a variable or constant name.
Var Type
Select Local or Tagname.
Data Type
Select a data type.
Description
Enter a description for the variable or constant.
If the changes are valid, the declaration is changed. If not, a message displays explaining
why the declaration was not changed.
153
Working with Cells, Rows, and Columns in a CEM Program

The following sections describe how to work with the cells, rows, and columns that make up a
CEM program matrix. Topics include:
Selecting and Editing Cells in a CEM Program on page 153
Displaying and Sizing Cells from the Matrix on page 154
Inserting and Deleting Rows or Columns on page 155
Sizing and Hiding Columns on page 158
Sizing and Hiding Rows on page 159
Sizing and Hiding the Comment Column on page 160
Selecting and Editing Cells in a CEM Program

This table and figure explain how to select one or more cells in a CEM program.
To ...
Do This ...
Select a single cell
Click anywhere in the cell.
Select contiguous (adjacent) cells
Click the first cell, hold down the shift key, and click the
last cell in the area.
Select discontiguous (non-adjacent) cells
Click a cell, hold down the Ctrl key, and click the rows or
column.
Click here to select

all effects
Click here
to select all
causes
Click here to select
all intersections
Click here to
select one effect
Click here to
select all
intersections in a
column
Click here
to select
one cause
Click here to select all
intersections in a row
Figure 15
Selecting CEMPLE Matrix Cells
154
Chapter 2
This table explains how to edit cells in a matrix.

To ...
Do This ...
Enter edit mode
Click directly over the text in an editable cell.
Complete a cell entry
Press the tab key or Enter to complete a cell entry and move the cursor to
the next cell to the right.
Move to the next cell
Press the tab key or Enter to move the cursor to the next cell to the right.
Delete the contents of a

cell or group of cells
Select a cell or group of cells (but do not place in edit mode) and press the
delete key.
Displaying and Sizing Cells from the Matrix

This table describes how to change the display and size of cells in a matrix. You can also make
changes by using commands on the View menu. These actions do not affect the matrix
evaluation.
To drag or double-click a cell boundary, you must use the double-arrow cursor, which is only
active in the gray cells of a matrix.
To ...
Do This ...
Change width of column
Drag the column boundary left or right.
Restore size of column
Drag the column boundary to the left so that the column is almost
hidden, then release the button.
Change height of row
Drag the row boundary up or down.
Restore default size of row
Drag the row boundary upward until the row is almost hidden, then
release the button.
Hide a column
Drag the column boundary to the left until it meets the nearest
boundary.
For an effect column, double-click the thickened column boundary.
Unhide a column
For a cause column, double-click the boundary between the currently

displayed columns and the hidden column.
Hide a row
Drag the row boundary upward until it meets the nearest boundary.
Unhide a row
Double-click the thickened row boundary.
155
Inserting and Deleting Rows or Columns

The following procedures explain how to insert or delete rows or columns in a CEM program.
CAUTION
Doing either of the following will cause the function block instance(s) in
the remaining rows or columns to be renamed:
Adding or deleting a row above one or more rows containing a

function block
Adding or deleting a column to the left of one or more columns

containing a function block
When a Download Changes operation is then performed, the renamed

function block output(s) will be re-initialized (set to zero).
Inserting Columns
This procedure explains how to insert columns in a CEM program.
Procedure
1
Expand the Application tree, open a CEM program,

and do either of these:
Click the Insert Columns button

toolbar
on the
Click the Edit menu, and then click Insert

Columns
Enter the number of columns to insert.
Select the column and click Before or After to specify where the column is to be inserted.
If you do not want the column to be displayed, clear the Make visible on all managed
views check box.
Click OK. The new column is inserted in the location you specified.
156
Chapter 2
Inserting Rows
This procedure explains how to insert rows in a CEM program.
Procedure
1

Click the Insert Rows button
on the toolbar
Click the Edit menu, and then click Insert Rows
Enter the number of rows to insert.
Select the row and click Before or After to specify

where the row is to be inserted.
If you do not want the column to be displayed, clear

the Make visible on all managed views check box.
Click OK. The new row is inserted in the location you specified.
Deleting Columns
This procedure explains how to delete columns in a CEM program. Column numbers are
identified at the top of the column as shown in this figure.
Column numbers are
located here.
Figure 16
CEMPLE Matrix Column Numbers
Procedure
1

Click the Delete Columns button

toolbar
on the
Click the Edit menu, and then click Delete

Columns
Enter the number of columns to delete and the

starting column number.
The selected column (E01 in this example), and the x columns to the right of the selected
column will be deleted, where x is the number of columns to delete.
Confirm your selections, and then click OK. The selected columns are deleted.
157
Deleting Rows
This procedure explains how to delete rows in a CEM program. Row numbers are identified to
the left of the row as shown in this figure.
Row numbers are

located here.
Figure 17
CEMPLE Matrix Row Numbers
Procedure
1

Click the Delete Rows button
on the toolbar
Click the Edit menu, and then click Delete Rows
Enter the number of rows to delete and the starting

row number.
The selected row (C01 in this example), and the x
columns below the selected row will be deleted, where x is the number of rows to delete.
Confirm your selections, and then click OK. The selected rows are deleted.
158
Chapter 2
Sizing and Hiding Columns

This procedure explains how to size and hide columns in a CEM program.
Procedure
1
Expand the Application tree, open a CEM program, and do either of these:
Click the Size/Hide Columns button
on the toolbar
Click the View menu, and then click Size/Hide, and then Columns
Specify these properties in the Size/Hide Columns dialog box.

Property
Action
Number of columns to
adjust
Enter the number of columns you want to resize.
Adjust starting from

column
Select the starting column.
New size
Select and then enter the new size for the column.
Size to Content
Select to automatically size the column to its

content.
Restore Default Sizes
Select to restore the column to the default size.
Hide or Unhide
Select Hide or Unhide. If hidden, the column is not

displayed, but it is used in the matrix evaluation.
159
Sizing and Hiding Rows

This procedure explains how to size and hide rows in a CEM program.
Procedure
1
Expand the Application tree, open a CEM program, and do either of these:
Click the Size/Hide Rows button
on the toolbar
Click the View menu, and then click Size/Hide, and then Rows
Specify these properties in the Size/Hide Rows dialog box.

Property
Action
Number of rows to
adjust
Enter the number of rows you want to resize.
Adjust starting from

row
Select the starting row.
New size
Select and then enter the new size for the row.
Restore Default Sizes
Select to restore the row to the default size.
Hide or Unhide
Select Hide or Unhide. If hidden, the row is not displayed,

but it is used in the matrix evaluation.
160
Chapter 2
Sizing and Hiding the Comment Column

This procedure explains how to size and hide the comment column in a CEM program.
Procedure
1
Expand the Application tree and open a CEM program. From the View menu, click
Size/Hide, and then Comment Column.
Specify one of these properties in the Size/Hide Comment Column dialog box.
Property
Action
Restore Default Size
Select to restore the comment column to its default

size.
New size
Select and then enter the new size for the column.
Hide or Unhide
Select Hide or Unhide. If hidden, the column is not

displayed.
161
Editing the Title Block

This procedure explains how to edit information in the title block, which is included when the
CEM program is printed.
Procedure
1
Expand the Application tree, open a CEM program, click the Sheets menu, and then click
Edit Sheet Title.
Enter text to describe the matrix.
162
Chapter 2
Managing Views
This procedure explains how to save, load, and remove views of CEM programs.
A view is a display of a selected portion of the matrix. You can create a view by hiding or
showing columns and rows on the matrix, either by using menu commands or by dragging
columns and rows on the matrix. Saving the view allows you to load it at anytime.
Procedure
1
Expand the Application tree and open a CEM program.
Change the view by showing or hiding columns and rows. Use commands on the View
menu or drag columns and rows on the matrix.
On the View menu, click Manage Views.
Perform one or more of these actions in the View Manager dialog box.
Command
Action
Load
Select a view and click Load to have it displayed.
Save
Click to save the currently displayed view.
Remove
Select a view and click Remove to delete the view

from the list.
Restore All Defaults
Click to restore the current view to show all causes

and effects.
Close
Click to save your changes and close the View

Manager dialog box.
Cancel
Click to close the View Manager dialog box without

saving your changes.
Variables and Constants
163

This section explains how to create variables and constants in FBD, LD, and CEM languages. For
information on tagnames (global variables), see Tagnames on page 172. The maximum number
of user-defined tagnames and variables in a program is 2,000.
Note
Using the Print All command, you can print a report listing all the variables currently
defined in your project (Program Variable Listing). See Printing Project Documents on
page 91.
Topics include:
Declaring Variables on page 163
Specifying Variable Properties on page 164
Specifying Variable Annotation Properties on page 165
Naming Multiple Variables on page 167
Changing Multiple Variables on page 168
Viewing the Number of Variables and Tagnames in a Program on page 169
Creating Constants on page 170
Specifying Constant Annotation Properties on page 171
Declaring Variables
This procedure explains how to declare input, output, in/out, and local variables in FBD, LD,
and CEM languages. Variables store values and must be declared in order to be used in a
program or function.
Note
You can use arrays, structures, and enumerations that you have defined in structured
text by declaring them as user-defined data types in local variables. The compiler will
automatically check your function blocks to determine if user-defined data types were
correctly used; errors will result in mismatched data type warnings at compile time.
Procedure
1
Create a variable by doing either of the following:
On the toolbar, click

the icon for the
variable, and then
click on the logic
sheet (FBD or LD
only).
On the program or
function
Declarations tree,
right-click the folder
for the type of
variable to be declared, and click New Declaration.
164
Chapter 2
The Item Properties dialog box for the variable appears.

2
Specify these properties on the Declaration tab.

Property
Action
Name
Enter a name for the variable. Use only alphanumeric

characters and underscores. No symbols or spaces are allowed.
Data Type
Select a data type. Required.

If the variable is dragged to a function terminal, the data type is
automatically set to the correct type for the function.
User-defined data typessuch as arrays, structures, and
enumerations that you have defined in structured textcan
also be selected as data types in local variable declarations.
However, you must successfully compile your user-defined
data type before it will appear in the Data Type list.
Initial Value
Specify a value to be used on the first scan. Must agree with the
Data Type.
Not applicable if you have selected a user-defined data type.
Description
Enter a description for the variable. (Optional)
Var Type
Select the type of variable. Required.

For programs, can be Local only.
For functions, can be Input, Output, In/Out, or Local.
Specifying Variable Properties

This procedure explains how to specify properties for variables. Properties affect the selected
occurrence of the variable. For example, when you add an annotation to a variable, it affects
only the selected variable.
Procedure
1
Expand the Application tree and then open a program or function.
On the logic sheet, double-click the icon that represents the variable.
Specify these properties on the Variable tab.
Property
Action
Variable Name
To change the selected variable to a different variable,

select the variable name and click Apply.
165
To create a new variable, enter a new name, and click

Apply.
To change the name of all the variables with this name,
click Declaration and change the name of the variable.
Data Type
Displays the data type that was set on the Declaration tab.
If the variable has not been declared, the Data Type is
undefined.
Width
Click + or to increase or decrease the width of the variable

icon on the logic sheet.
Annotate
Select the check box to add an annotation to the variable.

The default is cleared. See Specifying Variable Annotation
Properties on page 165 for more information about
annotations.
Declarations
Command
Click to view the Declaration tab for the variable. See

Declaring Variables on page 163 for more information.
Auto Name Command
Click to view the Automatic Naming dialog box. See

Naming Multiple Variables on page 167 for more
information.
Click Apply to save your changes.
Specifying Variable Annotation Properties

This procedure explains how to specify text and macros to be included with an annotation.
Annotations are available only in FBD and LD programs.
Procedure
1
Expand the Application tree and then open a program or function.
On the logic sheet, double-click the icon that represents the variable.
On the Variable tab, select the Annotate check box and then click the Annotation tab.
166
Chapter 2
Specify these properties on the Annotation tab.

Property
Action
Annotation Text
Enter text or copy macros to be used in the annotation.

To copy a macro, see Using Macros with Annotations
and Comments on page 206.
Include Monitor Value in

Annotation
Select this check box to display the value of the variable

in the annotation when the element is run on the
controller or Emulator.
Available only in programs.
Macros Command
Click to display the list of macros that can be added.

To copy a macro, click the macro and press Ctrl+C. Click
OK to close the Edit Macro dialog box.
To paste the macro in the Annotation tab, press Ctrl+V.
Close the Properties dialog box to save your changes to the Annotation tab.
167
Naming Multiple Variables

This procedure explains how to name multiple
variables by specifying a format. Variables can be
named by row, column, and selection order. The
variables must exist before they can be named.
Procedure
1
Expand the Application tree and open a

program or function logic sheet. On the logic
sheet, hold the Shift key.
To have variables named based on the selection
order, click them in the order in which you want
them named.
On the Tools, menu, click Auto Name Selected

Items.
Specify these properties in the Automatic

Naming dialog box.
Property
Action
Formatted Name
Specify whether to use theater numbering, which uses

letters, or normal numbering, which uses numbers.
Start Value and

Increment
Enter the starting value for the first variable and the
number to use when incrementing each successive
variable.
Name Order
Select the order in which to name variables.

RowsNames are applied vertically, from left to
right.
ColumnsNames are applied horizontally, from
top to bottom.
Selection OrderNames are applied based on the
order in which they were selected.
Click OK to apply the formatted name to the selected variables.
168
Chapter 2
Changing Multiple Variables

This procedure explains how to change size and annotation settings for multiple variables on a
logic sheet.
Note
To quickly change just the names of variables on a logic sheet, you can also use the
Find/Replace command. See Replace Command on page 592.
Procedure
1
On a logic sheet, select the variables you want to change by pressing the Shift key while
you click the variables.
Double-click one of the selected variables. The Item Properties dialog box appears.
Specify these properties on the Variable or Annotation tabs.

Property
Action
Variable Name
To change all the selected variables to the same variable

name, select or enter the name.
To undo this change, press Ctrl+Z.
Width
Click the + button to increase the width of the variable

graphics.
Click the button to decrease the width of the variable
graphics.
Annotate
To add the same annotation to each variable, select the

Annotate check box, click the Annotation tab, and then
enter or copy the text or macro.
Auto Name Command
To automatically name the selected variables based on a

pattern, click and specify the pattern. See Naming Multiple
Variables on page 167.
Close the Properties dialog box to save your changes to the Annotation tab.
If necessary, undo the changes you just made by pressing Ctrl+Z. Multiple levels of
undo are available.
169
Viewing the Number of Variables and Tagnames in a Program

The maximum number of user-defined variables and tagnames in a program is 2,000 (not
including undeclared tagnames). If you exceed this limit, you will be unable to build your
application.
You can view the number of user-defined variables and tagnames in each program when you
compile your application. The number of each type of variable (including tagnames) and the
total user-defined variable count are displayed in the Messages View during the compile
process:
Variable Type
Name
Input
VAR_INPUT
Output
VAR_OUTPUT
Input/Output
VAR_IN_OUT
Local
VAR
Global (also known as tagname)
VAR_EXTERNAL
Procedure
1
On the Project menu, click Compile All User Documents.

The Messages View automatically opens and displays the status of the compile process,
as shown below.
Variable count
for ST_VarTemp
program
Variable count for

ST_VarExternal
program
For each program, look for the following statement:

Total Var count=x
where x is the total number of user-defined variables and tagnames in the program. This
number must be 2,000 or less.
3
If you have exceeded the limit in any of the programs included in your application,
change your programming to reduce the number of variables and/or tagnames in the
program before building the application.
170
Chapter 2
Creating Constants
This procedure explains how to create constants in FBD, LD, and CEM languages. A constant is
a value that can be used in a program or function.
Procedure
1
Expand the Application tree, and open a program or function.
On the toolbar, click
Specify these properties on the Constant tab.
, and then click in the logic sheet.
Property
Action
Use Local Time
Enter the value for the constant.
Data Type
Select the data type; must be appropriate for the Value

property.
Width
Click the + button to increase the width of the constant

graphic.
Click the button to decrease the width of the constant
graphic.
Annotate
To add an annotation to the constant, select the Annotate

check box, click the Annotation tab, and then enter or
copy the text or macro.
Auto Name
Command
To automatically name the selected constants based on a

pattern, click and specify the pattern. See Naming
Multiple Variables on page 167.
Click the Apply to save your changes.
171
Specifying Constant Annotation Properties

This procedure explains how to specify text and macros to be included with a constant
annotation. This can be used only in FBD and LD development.
Procedure
1
On a logic sheet, double-click a constant.

The Item Properties dialog box appears.
On the Constant tab, select the Annotate check box and then click the Annotation tab.

Property
Action
Annotation Text
Enter text or copy macros to be used in the annotation.
Macros Command
Click to copy a macro. See Using Macros with Annotations

and Comments on page 206.
172
Chapter 2
Tagnames
This section describes tagnames. Tagname is the term commonly used when referring to input
points (sensors) and output points (final elements). In TriStation 1131, tagnames are references
to physical tagnames (labels) on the connected field devices or to memory points which are
locations in the controller memory. In IEC terminology, tagnames are called global variables.
For Modbus or DDE communication, tagnames must be assigned an alias number that allows
read or read/write access. An alias number is a five-digit identifier which defines the data type
and location of a point in the controller memory.
For Peer-to-Peer, OPC, or TSAA applications, tagnames can be accessed by the tagnamean
alias number is not needed.
The maximum number of user-defined tagnames and variables in a program is 2,000.
Note
Using the Print All command, you can print various reports listing the tagnames
declared and used in your project. See Printing Project Documents on page 91.
Topics include:
Declaring Tagnames on page 172
Assigning an Alias Number, Alias Type, and Physical Address on page 174
Scaling a REAL Point on page 178
Specifying Display Options for Tagnames on page 179
Creating Multiple Tagnames on page 180
Changing Multiple Tagnames on page 181
Renaming a Tagname on page 182
Deleting a Tagname on page 182
Inserting a Column into the Tagnames Table on page 183
Deleting a Column from the Tagnames Table on page 184
Managing Undeclared and Unused Tagnames on page 184
Declaring Tagnames
This procedure explains how to declare tagnames for points. Tagnames describe the type of
point (input, output, or memory) and the properties associated with the point. You can declare
tagnames before or after writing programs. Tagnames must be declared before downloading
the application to the controller.
Note
Once you have downloaded your project to the controller, making one or more changes
to existing tagnames or adding new tagnames, prior to the next download will cause the
the projects minor version number number to be increased by one. See Displaying
Version Numbers of Projects and Documents on page 33 for more information about
project version numbers.
Tagnames
173
Procedure
1
Create a tagname by doing any of these:
On the toolbar, click the tagname tool

, click on the logic sheet, enter a new
name, and then click the Declarations button.
Right-click the Tagname Declarations folder, and click New Tagname.
Right-click the Declarations tree, and click New Tagname.
Specify these properties on the Declaration tab.

Property
Action
Tagname
Enter a name for the tagname. Must be 31 characters or

less.
Data Type
Select a data type. The default is BOOL.
Group 1 and Group 2
Enter the names of the groups this tagname belongs to.
Description
Enter a description for the tagname.
Initial Value
Enter the value to be used for the tagname when the

system starts up.
Application Type
Specify whether the tagname is to be used in a Safety or

Control application. The default is Control.
Shared Read
Select the check box to allow a different Application

Type to read the tagname. The default is cleared.
Retentive
Select the check box to have the value of the tagname

retained if a power failure occurs. The default is
cleared.

Note
To view the total number of tagnames in a program, compile the application and
then look for the VAR_EXTERNAL count information in the Messages View. See
Viewing the Number of Variables and Tagnames in a Program on page 169 for
more information.
174
Chapter 2
Assigning an Alias Number, Alias Type, and Physical Address

This section includes procedures for assigning information to a tagname, including assigning
an alias number and physical address to input or output points, and assigning an alias number
and alias type to memory points.
For input and output points, the I/O hardware configuration must be completed before a
physical address or alias number can be assigned. For more information, see Configuring Tricon
Hardware on page 262 or Configuring Trident and Tri-GP Hardware on page 327.
Note
to existing tagnames prior to the next download will cause the projects minor version
number to be increased by one. See Displaying Version Numbers of Projects and
Documents on page 33 for more information about project version numbers.
Important Information About Alias Numbers

Under certain circumstances, TriStation 1131 will assign zero (0) or a default (system-specified)
alias number for a selected tagname:
If you select Default alias, but there are no available alias numbers in the range for the
selected tagname type.
If you select User alias, but do not enter an alias number, TriStation 1131 will
automatically:
Assign 0 as the alias number for Trident or Tri-GP projects.
Assign a default alias number for Tricon projects.
For Trident or Tri-GP projects, if you select No alias for an aliased memory point (Alias
Type is Read Aliased or Read/Write Aliased), TriStation 1131 will automatically assign
0 as the alias number.
Alias numbers allow a DCS or external applications to access a tagnames value via the Modbus
protocol. However, if a tagname has been assigned the alias number 0, its value will be
inaccessible. You should verify that none of your tagnames have been assigned the alias number
0 before you build your application. To do so:
1
Expand the Application tree. Right-click the Tagname Declarations folder, and click
Display Tabular View.
The tagnames and properties are displayed in a table.
View the numbers in the Alias # column to be sure none of the tagnames have 0 assigned
as the alias number.
If you find any tagnames with an alias number of zero (0), follow the instructions in
Changing Multiple Tagnames on page 181 to assign new alias numbers to those
tagnames.
Tagnames
175
Procedure for Input and Output Points

This procedure describes how to assign an alias number, alias type, and physical address for an
input or output point.
Procedure
1
Open an input or output point by doing either of these:
On the Tagname Declarations or Declarations tree, double-click a tagname.
Double-click a tagname on a logic sheet, and then click the Declarations button.
Click the Point Assignment tab.
Enter a physical address by doing either of these:
Enter the number representing the Physical Address (for example: 01.06.05), then
go to step 6.
Click the Browse button

then go to step 4.
Note
to select an address from a list of related modules,
If the address you select has already been assigned to an existing tagname,
TriStation 1131 will automatically re-assign the next available address to this
tagname when you build or rebuild your application.
On the Browse Available Points screen, select the module, and then click the point to be
assigned.
Note
In the Browse Available Points dialog box, if you select the model 3807 BPAO
module, you will see four output points and eight input points in the list of
available points. The first four input points provide coil diagnostic voltage
measurements across the load. However, the second four input points (points
5-8) are reserved for future use, and should not be assigned aliases. If you
configure the unused points, the application will receive an input value of zero
for those points.
176
Chapter 2
Click OK to return to the Point Assignment tab.
Specify the Alias Number assignment as follows:
For Tricon, the default alias number must be used.
For Trident and Tri-GP, the alias number can be user-specified (within the range),
system-specified based on a default range, or not aliased. For alias number
information, see Alias Number on page 481.
Note
Under certain circumstances, TriStation 1131 will automatically assign 0 as the

alias number. See Important Information About Alias Numbers on page 174 for
detailed information.
To allow the point to be written to multiple times from programs in the application,
select the Enable Multiple Writes check box.
To save your changes, click Apply.
Tagnames
177
To cancel your changes and restore the original settings, click Restore before clicking
Apply. Once you click Apply, you cannot revert to the original settings.
Procedure for Memory Points

This procedure describes how to assign an alias number, alias type, and physical address for a
memory point.
Procedure
1
Open a memory point by doing either of these:
Specify these properties on the Point Assignment tab.

Property
Action
Alias Type
To allow a memory point to be accessed from a remote device,

select Read Aliased or Read/Write Aliased. The default is
unaliased.
Alias Number
Specify the alias number assignment. The alias number can be

user-specified (within the range), or system-specified based on a
default range.
The default is Default alias. See the note in Assigning Alias
Numbers to Tagnames on page 210 for additional information.
Enable Multiple
Writes
Select the check box to allow the point to be written to multiple

times from programs in the application.

178
Chapter 2
WARNING
If a memory variables Point Type, Alias Type, or Alias Number is

changed, performing a Download Changes operation will re-initialize the
variable to its configured initial value, or 0 if no initial value is defined.
Invensys recommends using the Download All command if these types of
changes are made.
Scaling a REAL Point

This procedure explains how to scale a point, which allows the value of a REAL point to be
scaled to an integer so it can be transmitted through Modbus communication protocol.
The integer is derived from a formula that includes values specified on the Scaling tab and
values for the Modbus minimum and maximum range on the Tricon TCM and EICM, and
Trident/Tri-GP MP and CM Setup screens. For information on the formula, see How REAL
Numbers are Scaled to Integers on page 213.
Procedure
1
Open a tagname by doing either of these:
Click the Scaling tab.
Specify these properties on the Scaling tab.

Property
Action
Minimum Value
(Min Span)
Enter the minimum value to be used to scale the REAL number to

an integer; must be less than the maximum value. The default is 32768.0.
Maximum Value
(Max Span)
Enter the maximum value to be used to scale the REAL number to

an integer; must be more than the minimum value. The default is
32767.0.
Precision
Enter the number of decimal points to be used. The default is blank.
Tagnames
Property
Action
Disable Scaling
(Trident and TriGP only)
To allow scaling of REAL numbers to integers, do not select this

check box. The default is cleared.
179
Scaling cannot be disabled on the Tricon.

Specifying Display Options for Tagnames

This procedure explains how to specify monitor display options used when the tagname is
displayed in SOE Recorder. The display options can help an operator identify alarm conditions
at a glance. For more information, see the Triconex SOE Recorder Users Guide.
Procedure
1
Click the Display tab.
Specify these properties on the Display tab.

Property
Action
Monitor Display Options
Enter the name and color to be displayed when the state

of the tagname is True or False.
The default name is TRUE; the default color is red.
The default name is FALSE; the default color is green.
180
Chapter 2
Apply. To use the default settings, click Get Defaults at any time.
Creating Multiple Tagnames

This procedure explains how to create multiple tagnames by specifying a naming pattern.
Procedure
1
Expand the Application tree, right-click the Tagname Declarations folder, and click New
Tagnames (plural).
Specify these properties on the New Tagnames screen.

Property
Action
Formatted Name
Specify whether to use theater numbering, which uses

letters, or normal numbering, which uses numbers.
Note: Keep any text in this field (such as Input in the
example above) to 25 characters or less, to
ensure you do not exceed the 31-character limit
on tagname names.
Start Value and Increment
Enter the starting value for the first tagname and the
number to use when incrementing each successive
tagname.
How Many
Enter the number of tagnames you want to create.
Click OK to create the tagnames.
Tagnames
181
Changing Multiple Tagnames

This procedure explains how to change the properties of multiple tagnames by using a tabular
view of the tagnames. The tabular view shows a subset of the tagname properties which can be
sorted or changed by inserting or deleting columns. Tagnames can then be sorted by different
properties. For example, alias numbers can be added to a group of tagnames by sorting them,
selecting the tagnames, and then making the changes.
Note
Procedure
1
Expand the Application tree. Right-click the Tagname Declarations folder, and click
The tagnames and properties are displayed in a table. You can change the size of the
columns and the properties that are displayed.
Perform any of these actions.

Action
Description
Sort by property
Click the column heading of the property you want to sort by, or
right-click the column heading and select Sort Ascending or Sort
Descending.
Select multiple
tagnames
To select a contiguous group, click a tagname, hold the Shift key,

and click the last tagname.
To select a non-contiguous group, click the top tagname, hold the
Ctrl key, and click all the other tagnames to be selected.
Change multiple
tagnames
Note
Sort and select the tagnames to be changed. In the Tagname

Declarations tree, right-click on one of the selected tagnames, and
then click Item Properties. Make changes to the properties and
click Apply. The changes are applied to all the tagnames in the
selection. This action cannot be undone.
To view the total number of tagnames in a program, compile the application and then
look for the VAR_EXTERNAL count information in the Messages View. See Viewing the
Number of Variables and Tagnames in a Program on page 169 for more information.
182
Chapter 2
If you change a tagname after a project has been downloaded, the projects minor
(second) version number is updated.
Renaming a Tagname
This procedure explains how to rename a tagname.
Note
Procedure
1
On the Tagname Declarations or Declarations tree, right-click a tagname, and then click
Rename.
Enter the new name and press Enter.

If the tagname already exists, a message is displayed and you must enter another name.
Deleting a Tagname
This procedure explains how to delete a tagname.
Note
Once you have downloaded your project to the controller, deleting one or more
tagnames prior to the next download will cause the projects minor version number to
be increased by one. See Displaying Version Numbers of Projects and Documents on
page 33 for more information about project version numbers.
Procedure
1
On the Tagname Declarations or Declarations tree, right-click a tagname, and then click
Delete.
If the tagname is already in use, a message warns you that deleting the tagname may
result in unresolved tagnames or that the tagname is in use.
If you deleted the tagname from the
Tagname Declarations tree, the message
is similar to this screen:
Tagnames
183
If you deleted the tagname from the

program Declarations tree, the message
is similar to this screen:
To cancel, click No or Cancel. To confirm deletion of the tagname, click Yes or OK. This
action cannot be undone.
Inserting a Column into the Tagnames Table

This procedure explains how to insert a column into the Tagnames table. This action displays
an additional tagname property in the table. By inserting columns, you can customize the table
to display properties that are useful to you.
You can reorder the columns by clicking a column heading and dragging it to another location.
Procedure
1
Expand the Application tree, right-click the Tagname Declarations folder, and click
Right-click in the column heading to the right of where you want to insert another
column, and then select Insert Column.
Select the name of the column to be inserted, and then click OK.
184
Chapter 2
Deleting a Column from the Tagnames Table

This procedure explains how to delete a column from the Tagnames table. This action removes
the column from the table so you can display another column. For example, you might want to
view colors set for False by adding the False Color column and then sorting by the column.
The Tagname column cannot be deleted.
Procedure
1
Right-click in the heading of the column you want to delete, and then select Delete This
Column.
The column is removed from the table.
Note
You can add a deleted column to the table again at any time; see Inserting a
Column into the Tagnames Table on page 183.
Managing Undeclared and Unused Tagnames

This section explains how to manage undeclared and unused tagnames. Topics include:
What Are Undeclared Tagnames? on page 184
What Are Unused Tagnames? on page 186
Displaying Undeclared and Unused Tagnames on page 186
Editing Unused Tagnames on page 187
Deleting Unused Tagnames on page 188
What Are Undeclared Tagnames?

Undeclared tagnames are tagnames (also referred to as points) that have been created but not
named. They have the following characteristics:
They are not yet associated with any global tagnames.
They are not listed under Tagname Declarations in the Application Workspace.
They have a Tag name attribute of {not yet named}.
Think of undeclared tagnames as the number of free points that are available for use in your
application. You control the total number of undeclared tagnames via the amount of memory
you have allocated for points. See Allocating Memory for Tricon Points on page 251 or
Allocating Memory for Trident or Tri-GP Points on page 317.
Each time you declare a new tagname (whether it is used in a program or not), the total number
of undeclared tagnames decreases by one.
Tagnames
185
Example
In this example, memory has been allocated to allow for 640 unaliased memory BOOL points,
as shown in the Memory Allocation Item Properties dialog box.
Note
Of these points, 8 have been used and 9 have been forecast (declared). The 9
declared points will appear in the Tagname Declarations tree.
One point will also appear in the Unused Tagnames list, because while 9 points
have been declared, only 8 have been added to a program (see What Are Unused
Tagnames? on page 186).
631 points appear in the Undeclared Tagnames list, because while they have been
allocated, they have not yet been declared (640 allocated - 9 declared = 631
undeclared).
Thus, you can declare 631 more unaliased memory BOOL points, based on the
current memory allocation. Remember, you can increase or decrease the number of
available points by changing the amount of memory allocated for points.
Undeclared tagnames are not counted against the 2,000 tagnames per program limit. See
Viewing the Number of Variables and Tagnames in a Program on page 169 for more
information.
186
Chapter 2
What Are Unused Tagnames?

Unused tagnames are tagnames that have been declared, but have not yet been used in a
program. Unused tagnames:
Are already associated with global tagnames using the procedures outlined in
Declaring Tagnames on page 172.
Tagnames with invalid attributes imported from external sources will remain
unassociated with any global tagnames until they are renamed using the procedures
outlined in Renaming a Tagname on page 182.
Are listed under Tagname Declarations in the Application Workspace.
Have not yet been used in any program, function, or function block in the project.
Displaying Undeclared and Unused Tagnames

The Application Workspace tree includes the Undeclared Tagnames and Unused Tagnames
folders, which contain the lists of undeclared and unused tagnames.
Note
The Undeclared Tagnames and Unused Tagnames lists are for information only and
cannot be edited.
Procedure
1
Expand the Application tree and double-click the folder that contains the tagnames you
wish to displayUndeclared or Unused Tagnames.
Undeclared
Tagnames
Folder
Unused
Tagnames
Folder
Double-click the item in the folder you wish to displayUndeclared Points or Unused
Points.
The Unused Points or Undeclared Points tree appears, with the list of items displayed in
the right pane. The Undeclared Points and Unused Points trees are further divided by
point type: Memory, Input, and Output.
Tagnames
187
Sort the list view in ascending or descending order by clicking the desired column
header.
The list views for undeclared and unused tagnames are read-only. To edit unused
tagnames, see Editing Unused Tagnames on page 187. Undeclared tagnames cannot be
edited; see What Are Undeclared Tagnames? on page 184.
Editing Unused Tagnames

You cannot make changes to a tagnames attributes while viewing the unused tagnames list. All
tagname editing must be performed via the Tagname Declarations tree in the Application
Workspace.
Procedure
1
On the Tagname Declarations or Declarations tree, double-click on the tagname you

want to edit.
Make changes to the tagnames attributes, as needed. See Declaring Tagnames on

page 172 for detailed attribute information.
188
Chapter 2
Deleting Unused Tagnames

Unused tagnamesthose that are not being used in a program, function, or function blockcan
be quickly deleted all at one time.
Note
Because you cannot recover deleted tagnames, you may want to review the list of
unused tagnames, to be sure you want to delete them, before performing this procedure.
See Managing Undeclared and Unused Tagnames on page 184.
Procedure
1
In the Application Workspace, right-click the Tagname Declarations folder, and then
click Delete Unreferenced Tagnames.
A message appears, telling you the total number of unused tagnames that will be deleted
and asking if you want to continue.
To cancel, click No. To confirm deletion of the tagname, click Yes. This action cannot be
undone.
Importing and Exporting Tagnames
189

This section explains how to import and export tagnames using a file with point information.
Topics include:
Exporting Tagname Properties on page 189
Format of an Exported Tagname File on page 190
Preparing an Excel File for Import on page 192
File Format Requirements for Tagname Import on page 193
Import Options and Validation Criteria on page 195
Importing Tagname Properties on page 196
Exporting Tagname Properties

This procedure explains how to export tagname properties to a file. File formats you can export
to include:
dBASE (dbf)
Microsoft Access (mdb)
Microsoft Excel (xls)
Comma delimited text file (txt or csv)
Matrikon OPC XML Data file (xml)
Procedure
1
Export.
Select the location, file name, and file type to save the tagname information.
Click Export.
190
Chapter 2
If you enter a file name longer than eight characters, you are warned that you may need
to rename the file if you want to import it to a TriStation 1131 project.
Note
Some names cannot be used as file names when exporting tagnames to Microsoft
Excel files. For a list of these names, see Names Reserved by SQL on page 688.
Format of an Exported Tagname File

The exported file includes these columns.
Table 27
Exported Tagname File Format
Point Property
Description
TAGNAME
The tagname for the point. Must be 31 characters or less to be a valid IEC
61131-3 identifier.
DESCRIP
The description for the point.
GROUP1
The Group1 description.
GROUP2
The Group2 description
ALIASTYPE
The alias type for the point:

U = Unaliased
R = Read-only aliased
W = Read/Write aliased
ALIASNUM
The alias number for the point.

For Tricon, from 0 to 49999
For Trident and Tri-GP, from 0 to 42000
TAGTYPE
The data type:

D = Discrete (BOOL)
I = Integer (DINT)
R = Real (REAL)
TAGCLASS
The data class:

I = Input
O = Output
M = Memory
INITVALUE
The initial value:

For BOOL, True or False
For DINT, an integer value
For REAL, a real value
RETENTIVE
Retentive flag: if R, the value is retained if a power outage shuts down the
controller.
N = Non-retentive
R = Retentive
IOP
IOP number (1) (Trident or Tri-GP)
Table 27
191
Exported Tagname File Format
Point Property
Description
SLOT
Slot number (1 - 6) (Trident or Tri-GP)
POINT
Point number (1 - 32) (Trident or Tri-GP)
CHASSIS
Chassis number (0 - 15) (Tricon)
SLOT
Slot number (0 - 8) (Tricon)
POINT
Point number (0 - 64) (Tricon)
MIN SPAN
The lower limit for REAL in Engineering Units; the default is 32767.00.
The range is 3.402823466e+38 to +3.402823466e+38.
Must be less than the MAX SPAN value.
MAX SPAN
Upper limit for REAL in Engineering Units; the default is 32767.00.

The range is 3.402823466e+38 to +3.402823466e+38.
Must be greater than the MAX SPAN value.
DECPL
Decimal places for displaying Real variables. (Corresponds to the Precision

property and Min/Max Accuracy field in the Import Wizard.)
SCALING
Scaling flag: if S, real numbers are scaled.

N = Non-scaling
S = Scaling
For more information, see Disable Scaling on page 513.
APPLICATION
Application flag:
C = Control
S = Safety
SHARED
Shared for Read flag: Y = Yes, N = No
FALSE STATE
Text. For example, False or Zero.
TRUE STATE
Text. For example, True or Zero.
FALSE COLOR
Black, Red, Green, Blue, Cyan, Yellow, Pink, and White are allowed.
TRUE COLOR
192
Chapter 2
Preparing an Excel File for Import

This procedure explains how to prepare a Microsoft Excel file if you created the file from scratch
or renamed a previously exported file. This procedure does not have to be performed if you
exported tagnames to an Excel file, modified the contents, but did not change the file name.
Procedure
1
Open an Excel file that contains tagname data.
Ensure the data is formatted as follows:
All cells must have the Format setting as Text.
The Tagname, Data Type, and Point Type cells are required.
The values in these cells must be numeric and must begin with a single quotation
mark (): Alias Number, Initial Value, Chassis, Slot, Point, Min Span, Max Span, and
Display Precision.
Select the range of data cells to be included by selecting the headings and cells. Do not
select empty records.
On the Insert menu, click Name, then

Define.
In the Define Name dialog box, enter

the new name (in this example,
NewTagnames) in the text box, and
then click Add.
Select the names to delete (in this

example, tagnames), click Delete,
and then click OK.
Ensure the Refers to range reference
at the bottom of the screen includes
information. If it is blank, repeat step 3 through step 6.
To verify the table name was created, click the Name Box list box.
Name Box
All the records (columns and rows) should be highlighted. If not, repeat steps 4 and 5.
8
Save the file. The file is ready to be imported.
193
File Format Requirements for Tagname Import

This section describes the requirements for database or text files with tagnames to be imported
into a TriStation 1131 project.
Note
You cannot delete existing tagname information by importing a database or text file with
blank fields where the existing data resides. Importing a file only updates or creates
tagname data. Blank fields for existing tagnames are ignored, so that any existing
information will remain as-is. Blank fields may be imported for new tagnames only; see
the following table for instructions.
However, you can create a blank field for an existing tagname by typing spaces to
replace the existing data. The field will then appear blank. After the import is complete,
you can remove the spaces from the field to create a true blank field by editing the
tagnames properties; see Changing Multiple Tagnames on page 181.
Table 28
General File Requirements
Item
Database File
Text File
Filename
Must be 8 characters or less.
Must be 8 characters or less.
Table or
Lines
Each row must contain columns

mapped to these point properties:
Must have a consistent format; the same

number of fields in each line.
Tag Name
Tag Type
Tag Class
Each line must contain fields mapped to

these point properties:
Tag Name
Tag Type
Tag Class
Columns or
Fields
Can include more columns than the

number of fields to be imported, but
no more than one column can be
mapped to each point property.
Column headings can be any name.
Blank numeric fields and blank string
fields are allowed for new tagnames
only (in .DBF or .XLS files).
Must be delimited by commas with no

spaces before or after.
Can include more than 22 fields, but only 22
fields can be mapped.
Blank fields (for new tagnames only) must be
represented as follows:
For a blank numeric field, use two
commas with no spaces between.
For a blank string field, use two
quotation marks with no spaces
between.
194
Chapter 2
Table 29
Import Data Requirements
Point Property
Description
TAGNAME
The tagname for the point. Must be 31 characters or less to be a valid IEC 611313 identifier. Can be any string of letters, digits, and underscores provided that
the first character is not a digit and there are not two or more underscore
characters together.
DESCRIP
The description for the point; cannot be more than 131 characters.
GROUP1
The Group1 description; cannot be more than 63 characters.
GROUP2
The Group2 description; cannot be more than 63 characters.
ALIAS TYPE
The alias type for the point:

U = Unaliased
R = Read-Only aliased
W = Read/Write aliased
ALIAS NUMBER
The alias number for the point.

For Tricon, from 0 to 49999
For Trident or Tri-GP, from 0 to 42000
TAG TYPE
The data type:

D = Discrete (BOOL)
I = Integer (DINT)
R = Real (REAL)
TAG CLASS
The data class:

I = Input
O = Output
M = Memory
INITIAL VALUE
The initial value:

For BOOL, True or False
For DINT, an integer value
For REAL, a real value
RETENTIVE FLAG
Retentive flag: if R, the value is retained if a power outage shuts down the
controller.
N = Non-retentive
R = Retentive
IOP
IOP number (1) (Trident or Tri-GP)
SLOT
Slot number (1 - 6) (Trident or Tri-GP)
POINT
Point number (1 - 32) (Trident or Tri-GP)
CHASSIS
Chassis number (0 - 15) (Tricon)
SLOT
Slot number (0 - 8) (Tricon)
POINT
Point number (0 - 64) (Tricon)
Table 29
195
Import Data Requirements (continued)
Point Property
Description
MIN SPAN
The lower limit for REAL in Engineering Units; the default is 32767.00.
The range is 3.402823466e+38 to +3.402823466e+38.
Must be less than the MAX SPAN value.
MAX SPAN
Upper limit for REAL in Engineering Units; the default is 32767.00.

The range is 3.402823466e+38 to +3.402823466e+38.
Must be greater than the MAX SPAN value.
DISPLAY
PRECISION
Decimal places to display MIN SPAN and MAX SPAN properties. Limited to
125 digits.
REAL values are set to 1.
BOOL and DINT values are set to 0.
SCALING
Scaling flag: if S, real numbers are scaled.

N = Non-scaling
S = Scaling
For more information, see Disable Scaling on page 513.
APPLICATION
Application flag:
C = Control
S = Safety
SHARED READ
Shared for Read flag: Y = Yes, N = No
FALSE STATE
Text. For example, False or Zero.
TRUE STATE
Text. For example, True or Zero.
FALSE COLOR
TRUE COLOR
Import Options and Validation Criteria

When importing tagname information from a database or file, you can specify whether to
update, add, or update and add new tagnames.
Adding New Points

If the imported tagname includes a tagname, tag type (BOOL, DINT, or REAL), tag class (input,
output, or memory), and alias type (R for Read, W for read/write, or U for no alias), the tagname
is imported. If the tagname matches an existing tagname or is invalid in any way, a message is
displayed alerting you of the problem or error when the import operation is complete, but the
tagname is still imported.
196
Chapter 2
Updating Existing Points

If the imported tagname matches a tagname, tag type (BOOL, DINT, or REAL), and tag class
(input, output, or memory), the tagname is updated. All fields, with the exception of the
TAGNAME field (see below), can be updated for an existing tagname. If an updated value is
invalid in any way, a message is displayed alerting you of the error when the import operation
is complete, but the attribute is still changed to the new value.
Updating the TAGNAME field for an existing tagname will create a new tagname. The existing
tagname will be retained. For example, if you update the TAGNAME field for the tagname
Counter1 by changing it to Counter10, after the import process is complete, you will have two
tagnames: Counter1 AND Counter10.
Importing Tagname Properties

This procedure explains how to import tagname properties from a file.
Procedure
1
Expand the Application tree, right-click Tagname Declarations, and click Import.
Note
The project you are importing tagnames into must be in the Download All state.
If the project is not in the Download All state, the Import menu option is
disabled. Use the Change State to Download All Command on page 492 to
change the project state before continuing this procedure.
Click Select Import Data File and go to the folder that contains the file.
197
If the file is not displayed, you may need to change the type of file to match the extension
used in the file to be imported.
3
Click the file name and click Select. Click Next to continue.
On the Link Data Fields screen, match the source fields to the tagname properties by
clicking a field in the list on the left, and a tagname property in the list on the right, and
then clicking Link.
The following required tagname properties must be linked before continuing:
Data Type
Point Type
Tag Name
Once fields and properties are linked, click Next.
On the Select Import Options screen, select options as needed.
198
Chapter 2
Click Next to continue.
Read the Review Your Request screen. Click Finish to continue, or Back to make
changes.
Review the status of the records on the Data Import Validation Result screen.
If there are errors, close the screen, edit the data, and then go back to step 1 to
import the file again.
199
If you selected the Validate option on the Select Import Options screen and there
are no errors, click Commit Records to import the data. This action cannot be
undone.
This table describes the status of the imported records.

Status
Description
Ignored
The import record is mapped to an existing point that has the same
properties, so the import record is being ignored.
Added
A new record is being added to the configuration.
Error
The import record has been rejected due to one or more errors.
Updated
The import record is updating properties of an existing point.
200
Chapter 2
Annotations and Comments

This section describes how to use annotations and comments in an FBD or LD program or
function. Topics include:
Adding Annotations on page 200
Specifying Annotation Properties on page 202
Adding a Comment on page 203
Specifying Comment Style on page 204
Picking and Dropping Elements for Comments on page 205
Editing Comment Fields on page 206
Using Macros with Annotations and Comments on page 206
Editing Macro Text on page 208
Adding Annotations
This procedure explains how to add an annotation to a constant, tagname, or variable.
Annotations can be used to display descriptive text, including information specified in system
and user-modifiable macros. You can also display the value of a variable during program
execution in the Emulator or controller.
To have annotations automatically included for all new elements, see Specifying Annotation
Options on page 37 and Using Macros with Annotations and Comments on page 206.
Procedure
1
Expand the Application tree, and open an FBD or LD program or function.
Double-click the graphic for a constant, tagname, or variable.

Select the Annotate check box. For constants, the check box is on the Constant tab. For
tagname references and variables, the check box is on the Variable tab.
Click the Annotation tab.
To add text, enter the text in the annotation area.
To add a macro:
201
Click Macros. The Edit Macros dialog box appears.
Select a macro to be added. To change the value of a macro identified by a pencil

icon, double-click the macro, enter the value, and click OK.
With the macro selected, press Ctrl+C to copy the macro.
Click OK to close the Edit Macros dialog box.
Click in the annotation area, and press Ctrl+V to paste the macro.
For variables, select the Include Monitor Value in Annotation check box to display the
value of the variable in the Controller or Emulator Panel.
202
Chapter 2
Specifying Annotation Properties

This procedure explains how to specify text and macros to be included with an annotation.
Procedure
1
On the logic sheet, double-click an annotation.

The Item Properties dialog box appears, with the Annotation tab selected.

Property
Action
Annotation Text
Enter the text and/or macros to be used in the annotation.
Include Monitor Value in

Annotation
Select the check box to display the value of the variable in

the annotation when the element is run on the controller or
Emulator.
Macros Command
Click to add macros to the annotation. See Using Macros

with Annotations and Comments on page 206.
203
Adding a Comment
This procedure explains how to add comment text in FBD and LD programs. Comments are
used to add information about operations performed by a program, function, or function block.
There is no limitation on the number of comment boxes per program or their placement on a
logic sheet. If you draw a comment box around a project element it is ignored when you compile
the element.
Procedure
1
On the toolbar, click the icon for comments
On the logic sheet, click and drag to create the comment box.
Double-click the comment box to display the Comment properties.
Specify these properties on the Comment tab.
Property
Action
Comment Text
Enter the text to be included as a comment. Can include text

and macros.
Alignment
Select how to align the text. The default is left.
Text Size
Select the point size for the text; from 3 to 24 points.
Border
Select whether to include a border around an annotation or

comment box.The default is single.
Macros Command
Click to view macros that can be included with the comment

text.
To copy, click the macro and press Ctrl + C.
To paste, return to the Comment tab and press Ctrl + V.
204
Chapter 2
Specifying Comment Style

This procedure explains how to specify style features used with comments.
Procedure
1
Double-click a comment, and then click the Style tab.
Specify these properties on the Style tab.

Property
Action
Expand Macros
Select this check box to display the value of the macro when
the application is run on the Emulator or controller. For
example, if expanded, the macro %DATE_CREATED
displays the month, day, and year when the project was
created. The default is cleared.
Enable Macro Editing
Select this check box to list the user-modifiable macros on

the Edit Fields tab, which allows you to edit the value for
the macro. The default is cleared.
Move Behind Logic

Elements
Select this check box to move the selected comment box

behind a logic element. This affects the appearance of the
logic sheet only; it does not affect the execution of the logic
element.
Move the comment box to the desired position before
selecting this option. Once this option is selected, the
comment box cannot be moved.
To move the comment box after this option has been
selected, double-click the comment box to access the
Properties dialog box, and then clear this option.
205
Picking and Dropping Elements for Comments

This procedure explains how to pick up and drop elements from a comment box. Elements in
comment boxes are ignored when you compile the program. You can also remove captured
elements from a comment by selecting the comment and dropping the elements back onto the
logic sheet. This is useful for isolating logic during testing or troubleshooting.
Note
To use the Pickup and Drop commands, the Move Behind Logic Elements option cannot
be selected. For more information about this option, see Specifying Comment Style on
page 204.
Procedure
1
Double-click a comment, and then click the Pickup/Drop tab.
Specify these commands on the Pickup/Drop tab.

Command
Action
Pickup
Command
To pick up elements to include in the comment, click and drag the

comment box so it entirely covers the elements to be captured.
Double-click the comment, click the Pickup/Drop tab, and then click
Pickup.
Drop
Command
To remove elements from the comment, double-click the comment

box, click the Pickup/Drop tab, then click Drop.
206
Chapter 2
Editing Comment Fields

This procedure explains how to modify the comment text if the comment includes a macro that
can be edited and the macro is enabled for editing.
Procedure
1
Double-click a comment, and then click the Edit Fields tab.
Select a field and then click Modify.
Change the text used for the macro.
Click OK to save the change.
Using Macros with Annotations and Comments

This procedure explains how to use macros in an annotation or comment. Macros are
placeholders for text or information supplied by the system or by you. The value is displayed
when the element is run on the controller or Emulator.
Macros can be used only in FBD and LD development.
There are two types of macros:
System macros are values supplied by the system and cannot be changed. For example,
the %CREATED_ BY macro includes the user ID of the person who created the element.
You cannot change values for these macros.
User-modifiable macros, identified by a pencil icon

, are values you can specify. For
example, the %APPROVED_NAME macro can include any name you enter.
CAUTION
When you change the value of a macro, you change it for ALL annotations
and comments in the project that use the macro.
207
Procedure
1
Do either of these:
For a comment, double-click the comment, and click the Macros button.
Double-click a variable or tagname reference. Click the Annotation tab, then click
the Macros button.
If needed, select the check boxes for project, document, or sheet to view the macros
available for those elements.
To change the value of a user-modifiable macro, identified by a pencil icon

select the macro, click Modify and then make the change.
To copy a macro to an annotation or comment, select the macro and copy it by

pressing Ctrl+C.
Click OK to close the Edit Macros dialog box. You are returned to the Item Properties
dialog box.
To add the copied macro to the annotation or comment, click inside the text area and
paste the macro by pressing Ctrl+V.
208
Chapter 2
Editing Macro Text

This procedure explains how to edit text associated with a macro. You can include text and
macros that supply information from the system.
Procedure
1
Double-click a comment, constant, tagname, or variable.

Click the Edit Fields tab, select the field to be changed, and then click Modify.
Enter the text to be used when the macro is displayed.
Click OK to save.
Modbus Applications
209
Modbus Applications
This section describes information related to developing a Modbus application. Modbus is an
industry-standard master/slave communication protocol that is traditionally used for energy
management, transfer line control, pipeline monitoring, and other industrial processes.
Tricon Functionality
A Tricon controller with an EICM or TCM can operate as a Modbus master, slave, or both. A
DCS typically acts as the master, while the Tricon acts as a slave. The master can also be an
operator workstation or other device that is programmed to support Modbus devices.
The Tricon controller has serial ports on the EICM, and network and serial ports on the TCM
that provide options for communication with a Modbus devices. Each serial port can operate in
a point-to-point configuration with a single Modbus device, or in a multi-point configuration
with several Modbus devices connected to a serial link.
Trident and Tri-GP Functionality

The Trident and Tri-GP controllers have serial ports on the CM and MP that provide options for
communication with a Modbus devices. Each CM and MP port can operate in a point-to-point
configuration with a single Modbus device. In addition, each CM port can operate in a multipoint configuration with several Modbus devices connected to a serial link.
Topics include:
Assigning Alias Numbers to Tagnames on page 210
How Tricon Transmits REAL Values With Special Alias Numbers on page 211
Tricon Special Alias Numbers on page 212
How REAL Numbers are Scaled to Integers on page 213
Scaling REAL Values to Integers on page 215
How Trident and Tri-GP REAL Values are Transmitted Without Scaling on page 217
Disabling Scaling of REAL Values for Trident and Tri-GP Tagnames on page 218
210
Chapter 2
Assigning Alias Numbers to Tagnames

This procedure explains how to assign an alias number for input, output, and memory points.
Note
Using the Print All command, you can print a report listing Modbus alias information
for each tagname in the project (Tagnames: Modbus Aliases). See Printing Project
Documents on page 91.
Procedure
1
On the Tagname Declarations tree, double-click a tagname.
Double-click a tagname on a logic sheet, and then click the Declaration button.
Specify these properties on the Point Assignment tab.

Property
Action
Alias Type
For memory points, specify either Read Aliased, or

Read/Write Aliased. (Input and output points can only be
Read Aliased.)
Alias Number
For aliased memory points, specify either User alias or

Default alias. If User alias, enter a number within the range,
and then click Apply. See Important Information About
Alias Numbers on page 174 for additional information
about assigning alias numbers.
Physical Address
For input and output points, the physical address must be

specified before an alias number can be assigned.
Enable Multiple Writes
Select the check box to allow the point to be written to

multiple times in a scan. The default is cleared.
Modbus Applications
Note
211
When you select Default alias as the alias number for memory point tagnames,
these aliases can be automatically re-assigned under certain circumstances. For
example, if another tagname using the Default alias setting is deleted, the next
time you build the application, TriStation 1131 will re-use the alias number of the
deleted tagname.
You can avoid this behavior by always using the User alias setting to define your
own alias numbers and keep control of assigned aliases.
To set the alias number, click Apply. To cancel your changes and restore the original
settings, click Restore before clicking Apply. Once you click Apply, you cannot revert to
the original settings.
How Tricon Transmits REAL Values With Special Alias Numbers

This section explains how the Tricon controller transmits REAL values for tagnames by using
special alias numbers which map one 32-bit REAL value into two 16-bit Modbus integers. One
Modbus integer is mapped to the 16 most significant bits and the other Modbus integer is
mapped to the 16 least significant bits in the REAL number.
The Modbus master can also read and write values by using a scaled value in an alias number.
Reading REAL Values

This figure shows a Modbus master reading a REAL value from two consecutive special aliases
which correspond to a REAL alias. The Tricon controller splits the 32-bit REAL value into two
16-bit integers and places them in the special aliases to be read by the Modbus master.
Figure 18
Modbus Master Reading REAL Values from the Tricon
Writing REAL Values

This figure shows a Modbus master writing a REAL value to the Tricon controller by
transmitting two 16-bit integer values to two consecutive special aliases. The controller
concatenates the two 16-bit integers to form a 32-bit REAL value.
212
Chapter 2
Figure 19
Modbus Master Writing REAL Values to the Tricon
Tricon Special Alias Numbers

This table lists the special alias numbers used for read and write operations with REAL
tagnames. The Most and Least columns refer to the most significant and least significant bits.
Variable Type
Aliases
Special Aliases
Most
Input REAL,
Read Only
Memory REAL,
Read Only
Memory REAL,
Read/Write
Least
Most
Least
32001
34001
34002
- or -
44001
44002
32002
34003
34004
- or -
44003
44004
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
32120
34239
34240
- or -
44239
44240
33001
35001
35002
- or -
45001
45002
33002
35003
35004
- or -
45003
45004
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
34000
36999
37000
- or -
46999
47000
41001
42001
42002
41002
42003
42004
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
42000
43999
44000
Modbus Applications
213
How REAL Numbers are Scaled to Integers

This section explains how 32-bit REAL scaled numbers are transmitted in Modbus protocol,
which uses 16-bit integers.
If a REAL value is scaled, these operations occur:
When a Modbus master writes a 16-bit integer to a Triconex slave, the controller scales
the integer to a 32-bit REAL number before using it in the TriStation 1131 application.
When a Modbus master reads a 32-bit REAL variable from a Triconex slave, the
controller scales the REAL variable to a 16-bit integer before transmitting it.
Scaled REAL numbers use a formula that includes the value of the tagname, the Minimum
Value (Min Span) and Maximum Value (Max Span) for the tagname, and the Modbus minimum
(Modbus Min) and maximum (Modbus Max) range set for the Modbus Range property.
Scaling Integer Values to REAL Values

This figure shows how a Modbus master writes an integer value to the Triconex controller,
where it is scaled to a REAL value.
Figure 20
How Triconex Controller Scales a Integer Value to a REAL Value
Scaling an integer to a REAL value uses this formula:

(MaxSpan MinSpan)
Real Value = ------------------------------------------------------------------------- (Modbus Value Modbus Min) + Minspan
(Modbus Max Modbus Min)
This figure shows how scaling is done. Values above the Max Span or below the Min Span are
clamped to the respective limit. The same principle applies to values outside the Modbus range.
214
Chapter 2
Figure 21
Scaling an Integer Value to a REAL Value
To avoid division by zero, do not set Modbus Max equal to Modbus Minthe REAL value
result is undefined. For the Trident, Tri-GP, or Tricon v9.6 and later controllers, the result is one
of the floating point standard special numbers: NAN (not a number: -1.#IND) or infinity
(1.#INF).
Scaling REAL Values to Integer Values

This figure shows how a Modbus master reads a REAL value which has been scaled to an
integer.
Figure 22
How the Modbus Master Reads a REAL Value Scaled to an Integer Value
Scaling a REAL value to an integer value uses this formula:

(Modbus Max Modbus Min)
Modbus Value = ------------------------------------------------------------------------- (Real Value MinSpan) + ModbusMin
(Maxspan MinSpan)
This figure shows how scaling is done. Values above the Max Span or below the Min Span are
clamped to the respective limit. The same principle applies to values outside the Modbus range.
Modbus Applications
Figure 23
215
Scaling a REAL Value to an Integer Value
To avoid division by zero, do not set Max Span equal to Min Spanthe resulting Modbus value
is undefined. Typically, for a Triconex controller, the result is -1.
Scaling REAL Values to Integers

This procedure explains how to scale a REAL value to an integer. Scaling may be needed to
transmit numbers through Modbus protocol, which uses 16-bit integer numbers. Numbers are
scaled by using minimum (Min Span) and maximum (Max Span) values for the point and
minimum and maximum values for the Modbus Range.
Procedure
1
On the Tagname Declarations tree, double-click a tagname.
Double-click a tagname on a logic sheet, and then click the Declaration button.
Specify these properties on the Scaling tab.

216
Chapter 2
Property
Action
Minimum Value
(Min Span)
Enter the minimum value to be used to scale the REAL number

to an integer; must be less than the maximum value. The default
is -32768.0.
Maximum Value
(Max Span)
Enter the maximum value to be used to scale the REAL number

to an integer; must be more than the minimum value. The
default is 32767.0.
Precision
Enter the number of decimal points to be used. The default is

blank.
Disable Scaling
To allow scaling of REAL numbers to integers, do not select this

check box. Scaling cannot be disabled on the Tricon. The default
is cleared.
On the Setup dialog box for the communication module, specify the Modbus minimum
and maximum range. See the following sections for detailed instructions:
Configuring Tricon EICM Ports on page 274
Configuring TCM Serial Ports on page 280
Configuring Trident 1.x MP Network Ports on page 330
Configuring Trident v1.x CM Serial Ports on page 344
Configuring Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM Serial Ports on page 348
Modbus Applications
217
How Trident and Tri-GP REAL Values are Transmitted Without Scaling
This section explains how 32-bit REAL unscaled numbers are transmitted in Modbus protocol,
which uses 16-bit integers. This applies only to Trident and Tri-GP controllers.
If a REAL value is not scaled, these operations occur:
A Modbus master reads the least significant 16 bits of a 32-bit number which is derived
from the integer and decimal parts of a 32-bit REAL value.
A Modbus master writes a REAL value as two consecutive 16-bit integer aliases which
the Trident or Tri-GP controller concatenates to form a 32-bit REAL value.
A Modbus slave sends the least significant 16 bits of a 32-bit number.
This figure shows the standard format for REAL values, which adheres to the IEE Standard for
Binary Floating-Point Arithmetic. For more information, see IEE Std 754-1985.
Figure 24
Standard Format for REAL Values
218
Chapter 2
Disabling Scaling of REAL Values for Trident and Tri-GP Tagnames

This procedure explains how to disable scaling on a specific REAL tagname. Scaling cannot be
disabled for Tricon. The default setting is to use scaling.
Procedure
1
Expand the Application tree, and double-click a tagname which is a REAL data type and
is not to be scaled.
On the Scaling tab, select the Disable Scaling check box to ensure the point is not scaled.
Click OK to apply and save.
Peer-to-Peer Applications
219
This section explains how to use Peer-to-Peer communication to allow Triconex controllers to
send and receive information from each other. Peer-to-Peer communication is performed
through Send and Receive function blocks included in the application.
For information on the Send and Receive function blocks used for Peer-to-Peer communication,
see the TriStation 1131 Libraries Reference.
Also, if you have one of the following communication modules installed, see:
Tricon TCM: Configuring TCM Peer-To-Peer Ports on page 287
Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM: Configuring Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM Peer-To-Peer Ports
on page 352
Topics include:
Peer-to-Peer Data Transfer Time on page 219
Estimating the Peer-to-Peer Data Transfer Time on page 220
Allocating Peer-to-Peer Memory on page 221
Peer-to-Peer Data Transfer Time

In a Peer-to-Peer application, data transfer time includes the time required to initiate a send
operation, send the message over the network, and have the message read by the receiving
node. Additional time (at least two scans) is required for a sending node to get an
acknowledgment from the MPs that the message has been acted on.
These time periods are a function of the following parameters of the sending and receiving
controllers:
Scan time
Configuration size
Number of bytes for aliased variables
Number of Send function blocks, Receive function blocks, printing function blocks, and
Modbus master function blocks
Number of controllers on the Peer-to-Peer network
Send function blocks require multiple scans to transfer data from the sending controller to the
receiving controller. The number of send operations initiated in a scan is limited to five. The
number of pending send operations is limited to 10.
A typical data transfer time (based on a typical scan time) is 1 to 2 seconds, and the time-out
limit for a Peer-to-Peer send (including three retries) is 5 seconds. Consequently, the processtolerance time of the receiving controller must be greater than 5 seconds. Process-tolerance time
is the maximum length of time that can elapse before your control algorithms fail to operate
correctly. If these limitations are not acceptable, further analysis of your process is required.
220
Chapter 2
Estimating the Peer-to-Peer Data Transfer Time

This procedure explains how to estimate the Peer-to-Peer data transfer time between a pair of
Triconex controllers. The more memory allocated for aliased points, the slower the transfer time.
Procedure
1
On the sending controller, expand the Controller tree, and double-click Configuration.
On the Configuration tree, click Memory Allocation.
Find the bytes allocated for BOOL, DINT, and REAL points:
On the Configuration tree, click Memory Points, Input Points, or Output Points.
Double-click the graphic for the point type.
Add the number of bytes allocated for all BOOL input, output, and aliased memory
points. Enter the number in step 1 of the following worksheet. Do the same for
DINT and REAL points and enter the results in step 1.
On the receiving controller, get the BOOL, DINT, and REAL points and enter the
numbers in step 3. Follow the instructions on the following worksheet to estimate the
transfer time.
Steps
1. Enter the number of bytes for
each point type on the sending
controller and divide or multiply as
indicated. Add the results.
Point
Type
Allocated
Bytes
Operation
BOOL
_________
8=
_________
DINT
_________
x4=
_________
REAL
_________
x4=
_________
Total bytes of aliased points TBS =

2. Multiply the total bytes sending (TBS) from step 1 by 0.01
3. Enter the number of bytes for
each point type on the receiving
controller and divide or multiply as
indicated. Add the results.
Result
_________
TS =
_________
BOOL
_________
8=
_________
DINT
_________
x4=
_________
REAL
_________
x4=
_________
Total bytes of aliased points TBR =

4. Multiply the total bytes receiving (TBR) from step 3 by 0.01
TR =
5. Get the scan time of the sending node in milliseconds by

viewing the Scan Time in the Execution List.
SS =
6. Get the scan time of the receiving node in milliseconds by

viewing the Scan Period in the Execution List.
SR =
_________
_________
_________
_________
7. Multiply the larger of TS or SS by 2.
_________
8. Multiply the larger of TR or SR by 2.
_________
9. Add the results of step 7 and 8 to get the data transfer time
10. If the number of pending send requests in the application
is greater than 10, divide the number of send requests by 10.
DT=
_________
_________
Allocated
Bytes
Operation
11. Multiply the results of steps 9 and 10 to get the adjusted

data transfer time.
Adjusted
DT
Steps
Point
Type
221
Result
_________
12. Compare the adjusted DT to the process-tolerance time to determine if

it is acceptable.
Allocating Peer-to-Peer Memory

This procedure explains how to allocate memory for Peer-to-Peer functions, which is based on
the maximum number of Send and Receive numbers you specify. To save memory and
minimize scan time, you should use the lowest possible numbers.
The maximum number does not have to be the same for Sends and Receives. For example, a
TriStation 1131 application might need to send messages to three applications, but need to
receive messages from only one application.
A change in Peer-to-Peer allocation requires a Download All (see Using the Download All
Procedure
1
Expand the Application tree, double-click Implementation, and then click Peer-to-Peer
Configuration.
Set these properties by clicking the up and down arrows.
Maximum Number of Peer-to-Peer Sends
Maximum Number of Peer-to-Peer Receives
If you want to change the settings for an application running on the controller, you must
build the application and perform a Download All.
222
Chapter 2
SOE Development
This section explains how to enable sequence of events collection in a project. Events can be
retrieved from a Triconex controller by using the Triconex SOE Recorder software, or by using
a third-party OPC client to subscribe to the TCMs embedded OPC server. For more
information, see the Triconex SOE Recorder Users Guide and the Communication Guide for Tricon
v9-v10 Systems.
Topics include:
Displaying the SOE Configuration on page 222
Defining SOE Block Properties on page 223
Assigning Tagnames to SOE Blocks on page 226
Specifying a Trip Variable on page 228
Displaying the SOE Configuration

This procedure explains how to view the SOE Configuration screen, which displays the SOE
blocks that have been configured.
Procedure
1
Expand the Application tree, double-click Implementation, and click SOE

Configuration.
To sort by SOE block number or tagname, click on the corresponding list header.
To search for a tagname in the list, on the Edit menu, select Find, and then enter the
name (or partial name) of the tagname you want to find.
SOE Development
223
When you click Find First, the first tagname whose name matches the text you
entered is selected in the list. Click Find Next to find the next matching
tagname.
Wildcard searches are not supported.
To copy the SOE configuration information to the clipboard, select the tagnames
you want to copy, and then click Copy on the Edit menu.
To select multiple tagnames, hold down CTRL (for a non-contiguous
selection) or SHIFT (for a contiguous selection) while you click each tagname.
To select all tagnames, on the Edit menu, click Select All.
Copied SOE configuration information can be pasted into any word
processing or spreadsheet application using the Paste command in the target
application.
To print reports with SOE configuration information (Project Implementation and

SOE Block Variables), use the Print All command. See Printing Project Documents
on page 91.
To change the SOE block properties, see Defining SOE Block Properties on
page 223.
Defining SOE Block Properties

This procedure explains how to define the properties of an SOE block, which is required if you
are using sequence of events in an application.
Defining SOE block properties is related to the general task of controller configuration and can
be completed at the same time. You can define SOE blocks to provide continuous event
information to external devices on a network, or you can define them for limited operation
when your controller is not on a network.
The following table lists the types of SOE blocks that can be defined for each type of sequence
of events recorder:
If Youre Using This Sequence
of Events Recorder:
Triconex SOE Recorder
Use These Types of SOE Blocks:

First Out
History
External
Foxboro I/A Series DCS
External
Honeywell TDC 3000 DCS
Modified External
CAUTION
When a Foxboro I/A Series DCS retrieves events via an ACM, only one
block can be configured, and it must be defined as an External Block Type.
Each external block can be accessed by only one sequence of events utility. For example, if the
224
Chapter 2
Foxboro I/A DCS workstation is retrieving events from an External SOE block, SOE Recorder
cannot also retrieve events from that same block. See the Triconex SOE Recorder Users Guide for
instructions on specifying the blocks SOE Recorder can retrieve events from.
A Note About Using OPC to Collect SOE Events

If you have a model 4353 or 4354 TCM, you can use a third-party OPC client to obtain Tricon
SOE events through a subscription to the TCMs embedded OPC Alarms & Events server.
When an OPC client is subscribed, all change of state events (transitions) for tagnames assigned
to the block you have defined for this purpose will be sent to the OPC client as simple events.
However, if an OPC client is not connected, the events collected by the SOE block will be
continually cleared by the TCMs embedded OPC server.
If you choose to use the TCMs embedded OPC A&E server to obtain events from a
controller, you cannot also use SOE Recorder to retrieve events from the same system.
An SOE block used for OPC must be configured with a block type of EXTERNAL. For more
information about configuring the TCMs OPC server, see Configuring TCM Protocols (Tricon
v10.3 and Later Only) on page 292.
Procedure
1
Click the Application tree, and double-click Implementation.
Expand the SOE Configuration tree, and double-click a block number.
Specify these settings on the SOE Block Definition tab.
SOE Development
Property
Action
SOE Block Type
Select one of the following block types:
225
External Block Type: Used when an external device, such as a

DCS or a PC running SOE Recorder, is continually retrieving
events.
First Out Block Type: Used to retrieve events that started a trip.
Historical Block Type: Used to monitor current events.
Modified External Block Type: Used for event retrieval with the
SMM.
Blocks 1 through 14 can use any combination of History, First Out,
and External block types. Blocks 15 and 16 can use only the Modified
External block type.
The default is unassigned.
SOE Block Name
Enter a title for the block. If you do not enter a block name, a default
name will be assigned automatically.
The default is soe_block_n, where n is the block number.
SOE Buffer Size
The buffer stores the event entries, each containing a 8-byte time
stamp and one or more 8-byte data entries.
Enter the number of events to be stored in this block. The maximum
number is 20,000 events (320,000 bytes); the default is 0.
The maximum buffer size across all blocks is 60,000 events (1 MB).
Note: You cannot change the SOE Buffer Size while the project is in
the Download Changes state. If the project is currently in the
Download Changes state, when you click Apply you will be
prompted to change the project state to Download All. If you
do not change the project state to Download All, the buffer
size will not be changed. See Change State to Download All
Command on page 492 for important information about the
impact of changing the project state.
SOE Block
Collection Type
Select the event collection behavior type for the block.

Select Automatic if you want the blocks events to be
automatically collected by an instance of SOE Recorder running
in Primary, Redundant, or Custom mode.
Select Manual if you want the blocks events to be collected by an
external DCS or an instance of SOE Recorder running in Custom
mode.
The default is Automatic.
226
Chapter 2
Property
Action
SOE Block
Collection Mode
Select the collection mode for the block.

Select Primary if you want the blocks events to be collected by
an instance of SOE Recorder running in Primary mode or an
instance of SOE Recorder running in Custom mode when the
blocks are selected for collection.
Select Redundant if you want the block to be a copy of an
existing Primary block, and then select the Primary block you
want this block to be a copy of.
The tagnames assigned to the selected Primary block will
automatically be assigned to the Redundant block; you cannot
manually assign tagnames to a Redundant block.
The default is Primary.
Note: SOE Recorder v4.2.0 or later is required if you want to use
Redundant or Custom mode. See the Triconex SOE Recorder
v4.2 Users Guide for more information.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for all the blocks to be configured.
Note
For more detailed information about the Automatic and Manual block collection types,
and the SOE Recorder block collection modes (Primary, Redundant, or Custom), please
see the Triconex SOE Recorder Users Guide v4.2.
Assigning Tagnames to SOE Blocks

This procedure explains how to assign tagnames to an SOE block, which is required if you are
using sequence of events in an application.
Tagnames must be aliased memory and/or input tagnames of type BOOL:
Discrete physical input points
Discrete memory read-only aliased variables, or
Discrete memory read/write aliased variables
Discrete output points cannot be assigned to an SOE block.

Tagname states can be displayed with names and colors that you define. You can designate one
tagname in a TriStation 1131 application as the trip variable that notifies the operator when a
trip occurs.
Tagnames can be assigned only to blocks configured as Primary blocks. A block configured as
Redundant is automatically assigned the same tagnames as its associated Primary block. See the
Triconex SOE Recorder Users Guide v4.2 for more detailed information.
Note
For Tricon, if you define a block for use with the Advanced Communication Module
(ACM), the Foxboro I/A Series system assigns the tagnames. The only additional
configuration you can do is to specify a type of External and a buffer size.
SOE Development
227
Before you can assign tagnames, you must define SOE block properties (see Defining SOE Block
Properties on page 223).
Procedure
1
Open the Application tree, and double-click Implementation.
Click the SOE Configuration branch. The tagnames and block assignments, if any, are
listed in a pane to the right of the tree.
To assign a tagname to one or more SOE Blocks, double-click the row for the tagname.
To assign the tagname to specific blocks, select the block number check box.
If the number is disabled, it means the block has not been defined, or the block has been
defined as a Redundant block. You cannot manually assign tagnames to Redundant
blocks.
Note
If you add tagnames after opening the SOE Configuration screen, you must close
and re-open the SOE Configuration screen to have the new tagnames displayed.
Continue to assign tagnames to blocks as needed.
After assigning all the tagnames, save the project so the tagnames are available when
specifying a trip variable.
228
Chapter 2
Specifying a Trip Variable

This procedure explains how to designate a trip variable, which is optional if you are using
sequence of events in an application.
In an application used for safety shutdown, a trip variable is an aliased tagname whose state
transition causes SOE Recorder to automatically create a trip snapshot. An application can have
only one trip variable, but it can apply to all blocks. If an application requires several variables
related to trip conditions, these variables must be evaluated in combination to determine the
final state of the trip variable.
You must define at least one SOE block and assign a tagname to the block (see Defining SOE
Block Properties on page 223 and Assigning Tagnames to SOE Blocks on page 226).
Procedure
1
Open the Application tree, and double-click Implementation.
Double-click SOE Configuration. The Item Properties dialog box appears.
Specify these settings on the SOE Trip Variable tab.

Property
Action
Trip Tagname
The tagname that designates whether a trip has occurred.

Select the tagname from the list of tagnames, and then select a
Trip State of True or False.
Only tagnames that are aliased BOOL data types are available.
Trip State
Select the value on which to begin collecting events: True or

False.
Time After Trip
Select the number of minutes to collect events after a trip. The

minimum time is 2 minutes; the maximum time is 10 minutes.
The default is 2 minutes.
Time Before Trip
Select the number of minutes to collect events before a trip. The

minimum time is 2 minutes; the maximum time is 10 minutes.
The default is 2 minutes.
Tricon Application Access
229

This section explains how to restrict connection access to a Tricon controller and how to restrict
or allow write access to output and memory points in the downloaded application. Topics
include:
Restricting Access to a Tricon Controller on page 229
What Affects Tricon Write Access from External Devices on page 230
Restricting Write Access to Tricon Points on page 232
Allowing Write Access to Tricon Points on page 233
Restricting Access to a Tricon Controller

This procedure explains how to restrict access to a Tricon controller from a TriStation PC. If
access is restricted, only users with access privileges can disable points or download changes to
the controller.
Note
You can also use the optional TCM access control list1 to restrict access to the Tricon on
a per-client basis. See Controlling Access to the TCM on page 386.
Procedure
1.
Expand the Controller tree, and double-click Configuration.
On the Configuration tree, click Operating Parameters.
Specify these properties on the Operating Parameters screen.

Property
Action
Password Required for

Connection
Select the check box to restrict access by requiring a

password when connecting to the controller. The
default is cleared.
230
Chapter 2
Property
Action
Password
Enter the password required to access the controller.

The default is PASSWORD.
Disable Stop on
Keyswitch
Select the check box to prevent the keyswitch from

halting the application if it is turned to Stop. The
default is cleared.
Disable Remote Changes

to Outputs
Clear the check box to allow remote devices to write to

output points. The default is selected.
Allow Disabling of Points
Select the check box to allow the TriStation PC to

disable points while the application is running on the
controller. The default is cleared.
This property can be changed only when your project is
in the Download All state.
Once you have changed this property (by selecting or
clearing the check box), you must perform a Download
All to apply your changes to the controller. TriStation
1131 will automatically rebuild the application before it
is downloaded.
The settings you selected are used when the application is built.
What Affects Tricon Write Access from External Devices

This section describes the system properties, communication properties, and function blocks
that affect read and write access to memory and output points on a Tricon controller.
These types of read and write access are possible:
Input, output, and memory points can be read by any external device that can
communicate with a Tricon controller.
Write access to input points is not allowed from any external device.
Write access to a output or memory point is allowed or restricted based on the system,
communication, application, and point settings.
Write access to an output point via the TCMs embedded OPC server is not allowed.
This table describes write access to Tricon points from external devices.
Table 30
Tricon Write Access
Property or Feature
Description
Tricon keyswitch
A system setting that determines write access to output and memory

points unless overruled by the GATENB function block in the
application.
Restricts write access when set to the Run position.
Allows write access when set to the Remote or Program position.
Table 30
231
Tricon Write Access (continued)
Property or Feature
Description
GATENB
A Tricon function block that programmatically allows write access to a

specified range of aliased memory points when the keyswitch is in the
Run position.
GATDIS
A Tricon function block that programmatically restricts remote write

access for all ranges of aliased memory points that were previously
enabled by GATENB.

to Outputs
A system setting on the Operating Parameters screen that determines

write access to output points. When selected, external devices cannot
write to output points, no matter what other settings are made.
Privilege
A Tricon ACM and NCM module setting that determines whether

network devices using DDE, OPC, or TSAA communication have write
access to output points and read/write aliased memory points.
For Tricon ACM, the default is Read.
For Tricon NCM, the default is Read/Write.
The Tricon EICM, TCM, HIM, and SMM modules do not have this
property.
Port Write Enableda
A Tricon TCM setting that determines whether TriStation, TSAA, or

Modbus have write access to the selected port. The default value is
cleared, meaning the port is read-only.
The Tricon EICM, ACM, NCM, HIM, and SMM modules do not have
this property.
TCM Access Control Listb
An optional Tricon TCM feature that gives you the ability to control
which clients can access TCM resources, the protocols they can use, and
the level of access each client has. See Controlling Access to the TCM on
page 386.
Prohibit Writes
A Tricon SMM module setting that determines whether Honeywell

devices have write access to output points and read/write aliased
memory points. The default is cleared, which means write access is
allowed.
Point Assignment
A tagname setting that determines whether the output and memory

point is assigned a Read or Read/Write alias number.
For output points, all alias numbers are Read/Write.
For memory points, alias numbers can be Read or Read/Write.
a. This setting is not available on model 4351B, 4352B, 4353 and 4354 TCMs (used in Tricon v10.3 and later systems).
b. Except models 4351 and 4352, which do not have the access control list feature.
232
Chapter 2
CAUTION
In Tricon v10.3 and later systems, TSAA clients using a TCM interface
have write access to the NET 1 and NET 2 ports by default. Depending on
your configuration, this may create a security issue.
Please note that this default behavior is opposite of that on TCMs in Tricon
v10.2 and earlier systems.
To disable write access by TSAA clients, you must enable and configure
the TCM access control list. See Controlling Access to the TCM on
page 386.
Restricting Write Access to Tricon Points

This procedure explains how to restrict external devices from writing to output or memory
points. Input, output, and memory points can be read by any external device that can
communicate with the Tricon controller. Input points cannot be written to.
When the Tricon keyswitch is turned to Run, external devices cannot write to points unless the
GATEB function block is used programmatically to allow write access to a range of aliased
memory points.
Procedure
1
Ensure the Disable Remote Changes to Outputs check box is selected. The default is
selected.
233
Allowing Write Access to Tricon Points

This procedure explains how to allow external devices to write to memory and output points.
Input points can be read, but cannot be written to. External devices must use supported
communication protocols (Modbus, TSAA, OPC, and DDE) to communicate with the controller.
Note
External OPC clients cannot write to output points, even if the Disable Remote Changes
to Outputs property is cleared.
Procedure
1
Clear the Disable Remote Changes to Outputs check box. The default is selected.
2.
If the external devices are communicating through an ACM or NCM, ensure the
Privilege property for the module is set to Read/Write. See Privilege on page 584.
The default for Tricon ACM is Read; for Tricon NCM the default is Read/Write.
If the external devices are communicating through a TCM, ensure the Port Write
Enabled property for the selected port and protocol is selected, or that the TCM2
access control list is configured to allow read/write access for the selected client
using the appropriate protocol. See Port Write Enabled on page 581 or Controlling
Access to the TCM on page 386.
Ensure the output or memory point is assigned a Read/Write alias number. See
Assigning an Alias Number, Alias Type, and Physical Address on page 174.
234
Chapter 2
Trident and Tri-GP Application Access

This section explains how to restrict connection access to a Trident or Tri-GP controller and how
to restrict or allow write access to output and memory points in the downloaded application.
Topics include:
Restricting Access to a Trident or Tri-GP Controller on page 234
What Affects Trident and Tri-GP Write Access from External Devices on page 235
Restricting Write Access to Trident or Tri-GP Points on page 237
Allowing Write Access to Trident or Tri-GP Points on page 238
Restricting Access to a Trident or Tri-GP Controller

This procedure explains how to restrict access to a Trident or Tri-GP controller from a TriStation
PC. If access is restricted, only users with access privileges can disable points or download
changes to the controller.
Note
You can also use the optional v2.x CM access control list to restrict access to the Trident
or Tri-GP controller on a per-client basis. See Controlling Access to the Trident 2.x or
Tri-GP CM on page 434.
Procedure
1
On the Configuration tree, open the Hardware Allocation node, and then double-click
the MP. The Item Properties dialog box appears.
Click Setup. The MP Setup dialog box appears.
235
Specify these properties on the Operating Parameters tab.

Property
Action

Connection
Select the check box to restrict access by requiring a

password when connecting to the controller. The default
is cleared.
Password
Enter the password required to access the controller. The

default is PASSWORD.

to Outputs
Clear the check box to allow remote devices to write to

output points. The default is selected.
Select the check box to allow the TriStation PC to disable

points while the application is running on the controller.
This property can be changed only when your project is
in the Download All state.
Once you have changed this property (by selecting or
clearing the check box), you must perform a Download
All to apply your changes to the controller. TriStation
1131 will automatically rebuild the application before it is
downloaded.
The settings you selected are used when the application is built.
What Affects Trident and Tri-GP Write Access from External Devices
This section describes the system properties, communication properties, and function blocks
that affect read and write access to memory and output points on a Trident or Tri-GP controller.
These types of read and write access are possible:
Input, output, and memory points can be read by any external device that can
communicate with a Trident or Tri-GP controller.
Write access to input points is not allowed from any external device.
Write access to a output or memory point is allowed or restricted based on the system,
communication, application, and point settings.
This table describes write access to Trident or Tri-GP points from external devices.
Table 31
Trident and Tri-GP Write Access
Property or Feature
Description
Disable Remote Changes to

Outputs
A system setting on the MP Operating Parameters tab that

determines write access to output points.
When selected, external devices cannot write to output points,
no matter what other settings are made.
236
Chapter 2
Table 31
Trident and Tri-GP Write Access (continued)
Property or Feature
Description
SYS_SET_REMOTE_WRT_ENBL
A Trident/Tri-GP function block that programmatically allows

or restricts write access to output or memory read/write aliased
points when used in an application.
To allow write access, the Disable Remote Changes to Outputs
property cannot be selected.
Privilege (Trident 1.x only)
A CM module setting that determines whether network devices

using DDE, OPC, or TSAA communication have write access to
output points and read/write aliased memory points.
The default is Read/Write.
This setting does not affect Modbus access.
CM Access Control List

(Trident 2.x only)
An optional CM feature that gives you the ability to control

which clients can access CM resources, the protocols they can
use, and the level of access each client has. See Controlling
Access to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM on page 434.
Point Type
A tagname setting that determines whether the output and

memory point is assigned a Read or Read/Write alias number.
For output points, all alias numbers are Read/Write.
For memory points, alias numbers can be Read or
Read/Write.
CAUTION
By default, TSAA clients have write access to the NET 1 and NET 2 ports
on Trident 2.x and Tri-GP CMs. Depending on your configuration, this
may create a security issue.
the CM access control list. See Controlling Access to the Trident 2.x or
237
Restricting Write Access to Trident or Tri-GP Points

This procedure explains how to restrict external devices from writing to memory and output
points. Input, output, and memory points can be read by any external device that can
communicate with the Triconex controller. Input points cannot be written to.
The SYS_SET_REMOTE_WRT_ENBL function block can be used programmatically to override
the Disable Remote Changes to Outputs setting and allow write access to a range of aliased
output or memory points.
Procedure
1
On the Operating Parameters tab, ensure the Disable Remote Changes to Outputs check
box is selected.
238
Chapter 2
Allowing Write Access to Trident or Tri-GP Points

This procedure explains how to allow external devices to write to memory and output points.
Input points can be read, but cannot be written to. External devices must use supported
communication protocols (Modbus, TSAA, OPC, and DDE) to communicate with the controller.
Note
External OPC clients cannot write to output points, even if the Disable Remote Changes
to Outputs property is cleared, or the SYS_SET_REMOTE_WRT_ENBL function block is
used.
Procedure
1
If the external devices are communicating through an Open Network port on the
Trident 1.x CM, ensure the Privilege property on the Network tab is set to
Read/Write. See Configuring Trident 1.x MP Network Ports on page 330. The
default is Read/Write.
If the external devices are communicating through a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM,
ensure that the access control list is configured to allow read/write access for the
selected client using the appropriate protocol. See Controlling Access to the Trident
2.x or Tri-GP CM on page 434.
Ensure the output or memory point is assigned a Read/Write alias number. See
Assigning an Alias Number, Alias Type, and Physical Address on page 174.
Building an Application
239
This section includes information on how to build an application, which must be done before
testing. If you try to download an application before building it, TriStation 1131 tries to build it
and then download it. If the build has errors, the download does not continue.
Topics include:
Specifying the Program Order and Scan Time on page 239
Compiling a Program on page 240
Building or Rebuilding an Application on page 241
About the Applications Initialization Table on page 242
Specifying the Program Order and Scan Time

This procedure explains how to specify the programs and order of execution in the application.
You can also set the scan time of the application, which determines the number of milliseconds
that is taken to execute the application once.
The maximum number of programs in an application is 250.
Note
Using the Print All command, you can print a report that includes the Program
Execution List (Program Implementation). See Printing Project Documents on page 91.
Procedure
1
On the Application Tree, double-click Implementation.
On the Implementation tree, double-click Execution List.
Specify these properties on the Execution List screen.
240
Chapter 2
Property or Button
Action
Scan Time
Enter the number of milliseconds anticipated for the

scan. The actual scan time is determined after the
application is downloaded and run on the controller.
For more information, see the Enhanced Diagnostic
Monitor application. The default is 200 milliseconds.
New (insert) button
Click to add a program to the list.
Delete button
Click to delete the selected program from the list.

When prompted to confirm the deletion of the program
from the list, make sure to read the information
provided in the warning note below before clicking OK
to confirm the deletion.
Move Up button
Select a program and then click to move a program up

in the execution order.
Move Down button
Select a program and then click to move a program

down in the execution order.
Browse button
To add or change a program, double-click a program,

then enter the name, or click the Browse button to select
a name from the available programs.
WARNING
Deleting a program from the execution list, performing a download

operation (Download All or Download Changes) to the controller, and
then adding the deleted program back to the execution list at a later time
will cause a new instance of the program to be downloaded and
initialized when you perform another download.
For example, assume that you delete Program12 from the execution list,
and then perform a Download Changes to the controller. If you add
Program12 back to the execution list again, and then perform another
Download Changes to the controller, a new instance of Program12 will be
downloaded and initialized.
Compiling a Program
This procedure explains how to manually compile a program, which can be done before
building an application. Programs are automatically compiled when you build an application.
Procedure
1
On the Project menu, click Compile All User Documents.
When the Comments for Audit Trail dialog box appears, enter a comment to describe
the changes you made to the program since the last compile, and then click OK.
The Message View automatically opens and displays the status of the compile process.
If there are errors, fix them before building the application.
241
Building or Rebuilding an Application

This procedure explains how to use the Build Application command or Rebuild Application
command to build an application. If the programs in the application have not been compiled,
the Build Application command compiles them and then attempts to build the application.
Errors and warnings are displayed in the Message View. Errors must be resolved before an
application can be downloaded, but warnings do not affect online execution. Typically,
warnings refer to unused points in an application.
Note
When building an application, the number of program variables cannot exceed 64,001.
If you receive an error message that this limit has been exceeded, you must reduce the
number of program variables before you can build your application. The easiest way to
reduce the number of program variables is to turn off color monitoring in your
program(s). See Specifying Document Attributes on page 113.
Procedure
1
On the Project menu, click Build Application or Rebuild Application.
When the Comments for Audit Trail dialog box appears, enter a comment to describe
the changes you made to the application since the last build, and then click OK.
The build process begins.
Check the Message View to view the status of the build, and to check for errors. If there
are no errors, the build is successful.
If there are errors, click each error message to locate the location of the error.
Correct the errors, compile the affected user documents, and then build or rebuild the
application.
Note
When you build a CEM program, intermediate FBD and ST code is generated. This code
is useful for understanding and debugging the CEM program. To view the intermediate
code, from the Document menu, select View Intermediate FBD or View Intermediate ST.
242
Chapter 2
About the Applications Initialization Table

Each application has an initialization table, which tells the controllers operating system which
data variables need to be set to a non-zero value prior to the application starting to run (such as
initialized variables, or those marked as retentive). For example, if you declared a variable (in
structured text) as:
VAR
I1 : DINT := 5;
END_VAR
the initialization table would have an entry telling the controllers operating system to set I1 to
5 prior to running the application.
If there are too many entries in the initialization table, you may be able to download the
application to the Emulator, but you will be unable to download it to the controller due to an
initialization table overflow error (Error Code PD0004).
Note
When you delete a variable, an additional temporary entry is made in the initialization
table to set the variable to zero during the next Download Changes operation. As a
result, deleting too many variables at once can result in initialization table overflow due
to the temporary entries created to set the deleted variables to zero.
This section describes how to view and understand the size of the applications initialization
table, and what to do to correct an initialization table overflow problem.
Topics include:
Viewing and Understanding Initialization Table Size Information on page 242
Solving an Initialization Table Overflow Problem on page 243
Viewing and Understanding Initialization Table Size Information

Each time you download your project (see Downloading to the Controller on page 460),
information about the total number of initialized or retentive variables, and the number of bytes
used in the initialization table, is provided in the Message View at the end of the download
process.
243
The maximum size of the initialization table is 64K (65,535 bytes). The size of the initialization
table is calculated as follows:
Each variable carries a overhead of 8 bytes.
Each BOOL variable uses an additional 1 byte.
Each DINT or REAL variable uses an additional 4 bytes.
Each TIME variable uses an additional 8 bytes.
The following sample calculation shows how the values for each variable are used to determine
the total size of the initialization table.
Example Initialization Table Calculation

Assume your project has the following variables, which have been initialized or marked as
retentive:
279 BOOLs
64 REALs
401 DINTs
10 TIME
The total number of variables is 754 (279 + 401 + 64 + 10 = 754).

Variable
Type
Number of
Variables
Overhead
(# variables x 8)
Bytes Per
Type
Bytes Used
(# variables x
bytes per type)
Total Bytes Used

(overhead +
bytes used)
BOOL
279
2,232
279
2,511
DINT
401
3,208
1,604
4,812
REAL
64
512
256
768
TIME
10
80
80
160
Totals:
754
6,032
n/a
2219
8,251
6,032 (overhead) + 2,219 (bytes used) = 8,251

In this example, there are a total of 8,251 bytes in the initialization table. Because this is less than
the 65,535 limit, you will be able to download the application without encountering an overflow
error.
Solving an Initialization Table Overflow Problem

You will be unable to download the application to the controller if the size of the initialization
table is greater than 65,535 bytes. The following are recommendations for reducing the size of
the initialization table:
Reduce the number of initial values.
Change variables from retentive to non-retentive.
Create a program that only runs on the first scan to initialize variables.
244
Chapter 2
3
Overview 246
Setting Tricon Operating Parameters 249
Allocating Memory for Tricon Points 251
Configuring the Tricon Target System Version 252
Configuring Tricon Hardware 262
Configuring Tricon Communication Modules 271
Configuring Tricon Time Synchronization 298
Printing the Tricon Module Configuration 309
246
Chapter 3
Overview
This figure shows the main steps for configuring the Tricon controller and their typical order in
the project cycle. The controller must be configured before an application can be downloaded
and implemented on a controller.
Set Up the Project
Develop the
Application
Test with the

Emulator
Fix Errors
Yes
Errors?
No
- Set operating parameters
C onfigure the
C ontroller
- Allocate memory and configure hardware

- C onfigure communication to external devices
- Set up Time Synchronization (optional)
Set Up TriStation
C ommunication
Implement on
the C ontroller
Tricon Controller Configuration Steps

This list includes the steps that can or should be done during controller configuration.
Controller configuration must be completed before an application is downloaded to the Tricon.
Description
See
Set the operating parameters.
Setting Tricon Operating Parameters on page 249
Allocate memory and hardware.
Allocating Memory for Tricon Points on page 251
Configure hardware.
Configuring Tricon Hardware on page 262
Configure communication to external

devices.
Configuring Tricon Communication Modules on

page 271
Set up time synchronization.
Configuring Tricon Time Synchronization on

page 298
Overview
247
The Tricon Controller Workspace

This section describes the Controller Workspace, which is where you specify the configuration
for the project. Topics include:
The Tricon Controller Tree on page 247
The Tricon Configuration Tree on page 247
The Tricon Controller and Emulator Panels on page 248
The Tricon Controller Tree

The Tricon Controller tree includes the elements
(operating parameters, communication settings, memory
allocation, and hardware allocation) that can be
configured. The tree also includes the Controller and
Emulator Panels used to emulate and run an application.
The Tricon Configuration Tree

The Tricon Configuration tree includes operating parameters,
communication, memory allocation, and hardware
allocation.
248
Chapter 3
The Tricon Controller and Emulator Panels

The Controller and Emulator Panels display programs running in emulation or in the controller.
Controller and
Emulator tree
Setting Tricon Operating Parameters
249
Setting Tricon Operating Parameters

This procedure explains how to specify Tricon operating parameters, which are settings that
affect the general operation of the controller, including settings to restrict access to the controller
from a TriStation PC and from remote devices.
Note
The Target System Version displayed on the Operating Parameters screen is the target
system version currently configured in the project. This value is not obtained from a
connected controller. To view the actual system version of your Tricon system, use the
Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor. For more information, see Determining Your Tricon
Controllers System Version on page 252.
Procedure
1
Expand the Controller tree, double-click Configuration, and then click Operating
Parameters.
Specify these properties on the Operating Parameters screen.

Property
Action

Connection
Select the check box to require a password to be used to

connect from the TriStation PC to the controller. The
default is cleared.
Password
If a password is required, enter the password. Not casesensitive.
Disable Stop on
Keyswitch
Select the check box to prevent the STOP keyswitch from

halting the application running on the controller. The
default is cleared.
Disable Remote
Changes to Outputs
Select the check box to prevent external devices, such as a

DCS, from writing to output tagnames in the TriStation
application. The default is selected.
250
Chapter 3
Property
Action
Allow Disabling of
Points
Select the check box to allow points to be disabled from

TriStation. See Disabling Points on page 474 for more
information. The default is cleared.
This property can be changed only when your project is in
the Download All state.
If you change this property (by selecting or clearing the
check box), you must perform a Download All to apply
your changes to the controller. TriStation will
automatically rebuild the application before it is
downloaded.
Enable Tricon Node

Time Synchronization
Note
Select the check box to allow the controller to participate

in time synchronization across the Peer-to-Peer network
as a master node or a slave node (see Configuring
Triconex Time Synchronization on the TCM on page 307).
Using the Print All command, you can print a report listing the current Operating
Parameters settings. See Printing Project Documents on page 91.
Allocating Memory for Tricon Points
251
Allocating Memory for Tricon Points

This procedure explains how to change the amount of memory used for input, output, and
memory points (tagnames) in the application.
Initially, the amount of memory for input and output points is determined by the number and
type of I/O modules configured in the TriStation project. The amount of memory for memory
points is set when a TriStation project is created. You can change these allocations at any time
before building and downloading the application.
CAUTION
After an application has been downloaded to the controller or Emulator,

changes to memory allocation require a Download All (see Using the
See What Are Undeclared Tagnames? on page 184 for more information about memory
allocation for points.
Procedure
1
Expand the Controller tree, double-click Configuration, and then expand Memory
Allocation.
Double-click the type of point you want to change.
Move the slider up or down to change the memory allocated for the selected point.
Repeat for all points to be changed.
Note
Using the Print All command, you can print a report listing the current memory
allocation settings. See Printing Project Documents on page 91.
252
Chapter 3
Configuring the Tricon Target System Version

This procedure explains how to change the target system version in your project. The target
system version determines which Tricon features and modules can be configured in a project.
You originally set the target system version when you created a new project, or when you
converted an existing project to TriStation v4.9.0.
If you change the system version of your Tricon controller (for example, you upgrade your
system from v10.1 to v10.3), you must logically configure the change in the TriStation project.
This change requires a Download All.
When you change the target system version, TriStation saves the configuration and attaches the
Tricon library that supports the installed MPs. Before committing to the target system version
change, you are allowed to back up your project.
Note
You cannot be connected to the controller while you are changing the target system
version.
Configuring the target system version is a three-step process:
Determine the system version of the Tricon the project will be downloaded to.
Validate the target system version change to review the changes that will be made to
the project before committing to the change.
Change the target system version in the project.
Topics include:
Determining Your Tricon Controllers System Version on page 252
Validating a Tricon Target System Version Change on page 253
Changing the Tricon Target System Version on page 255
Results of a Tricon Target System Version Change on page 258
Determining Your Tricon Controllers System Version

Before changing the target system version in your TriStation project, you should determine the
system version of the Tricon you will be downloading the project to. You need to know the
following:
The model number of the Main Processor modules installed in the Tricon (3006,
3006/N, 3007, or 3008)
The Tricons system version (for example, v9.6, v10.1, v10.3, etc.)
The easiest way to find this information is to connect to the Tricon using the Enhanced
Diagnostic Monitor.
Note
If you are unable to connect to the Tricon, or you do not have the Enhanced Diagnostic
Monitor, you can also refer to your sales order paperwork, which should specify the
Main Processor model installed in your Tricon, as well as the system version.
253
The target system version currently configured in the project is displayed on the Operating
Parameters screen and at the top of the Select Main Processor dialog box.
Procedure (Using the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor)

1
Open the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor (for more detailed instructions, see the Enhanced
Diagnostic Monitor User's Guide).
Connect to the node (controller) whose system version you want to find.
In the System Overview tree, click System Overview. The System Overview window
appears.
Tricon System Version
View the system version information, located at the top of the System Overview
window.
Validating a Tricon Target System Version Change

Before committing to a target system version change, you should validate the change to
determine what effect it will have on your project. Validation allows you to plan ahead for the
changes that will occur when you switch from one target system version to another.
For detailed information about the changes that occur when switching from one target system
version to another, see the Target System Version Change Matrix on page 259.
Procedure
1
Expand the Controller tree, double-click Configuration, and expand Hardware

Allocation.
Double-click the chassis whose target system version you want to change, and then click
Replace MPs.
254
Chapter 3
Specify these properties in the Replace Main Processor dialog box.

Property
Description
Model

For Tricon versions 9.5.x, 9.51.x, or 9.52.x, select 3006/N,
3007.
Target System
Version

configuration.
a. TriStation 1131 v4.6 does not support Tricon versions v9.4.x and earlier. For a list of
TriStation versions compatible with your Tricon, see the applicable Tricon Product Release
Notice (available on the Invensys Global Customer Support web site).
Note
Select the Validate Only check box.
Click OK.
TriStation analyzes your project settings and current controller configuration to
determine the modifications that will be made to the project if you change to the selected
target system version.
In the Messages pane, review the results of the validation to determine if you want to
commit to the target system version change.
255
Changing the Tricon Target System Version

The target system version determines which Tricon features and modules can be configured in
a project. You selected the target system version for your project when you created it, or when
you converted the project from a previous version of TriStation.
If you have upgraded your Tricon to a newer version, you also need to change the target system
version in your TriStation project.
Changing the target system version requires a Download All. You cannot change the projects
target system version while the project is in the Download Changes state.
You cannot be connected to the controller while changing the target system version.
Note
You cannot change (upgrade or downgrade) the target system version for a project that
meets all of the following criteria:
Was originally created in TriStation v4.4 or v4.5.
Includes a mix of High-Density and Enhanced Low-Density chassis.
Topics include:
Target System Version Change Rules on page 255
If You Have a TCM Configured in Your TriStation Project on page 255
Changing the Target System Version on page 256
Target System Version Change Rules

When changing the target system version, you can:
Upgrade from a model 3006 or 3007 Main Processor to a model 3008 Main Processor.
Upgrade or downgrade the version number of the Tricon (for example, upgrade from
v9.8 to v10.0, or downgrade from v10.2 to v10.0).
When changing the target system version, you cannot:
Downgrade from a model 3008 MP to a model 3006 MP.
Downgrade a project created in TriStation v4.6 with a mix of High-Density and

Enhanced Low-Density chassis to a target system version of 10.2.x or earlier.
If You Have a TCM Configured in Your TriStation Project

If you have a model 4351A/B, 4352A/B, or 4353/4354 TCM configured in your project, you may
want to export the TCM configuration prior to changing the target system version, to save your
configuration settings for future use. See Exporting the TCM Configuration to a File on
page 296.
256
Chapter 3
If you have a model 4351A/4352A TCM configured in your Tricon v10.2 or v10.3 project, please
make note of the following:
If you are upgrading from Tricon v10.2 to v10.3, the TCM will be removed during
project conversion.
Once project conversion is complete, you can add the 4351A/4352A module back to
your project.
If you exported the existing TCM configuration in the v10.2 project prior to project
conversion, you can then import the configuration file in your v10.3 project.
If you did NOT export the existing TCM configuration in the v10.2 project prior to
project conversion, you must reconfigure the module from scratch, using the
instructions provided in Configuring TCM Ports on page 278.
If you are downgrading from Tricon v10.3 to v10.2, the TCM will be removed during
project conversion.
Once project conversion is complete, you can add the 4351A/4352A module back to
your project.
You must reconfigure the module from scratch, using the instructions provided in
Configuring TCM Ports on page 278. You cannot import a TCM configuration file
that was exported from the 4351A/4352A module originally configured in the v10.3
project.
Changing the Target System Version

determine what effect it will have on your project. See Validating a Tricon Target System
Version Change on page 253.
Procedure
1
Verify that you are not connected to the controller.
If needed, change the project state to Download All.
On the Commands menu, click Change State to Download All.
In the Change Project State to Download All dialog box, click Change State.

Allocation.
Double-click the chassis whose system version you want to change, and then click
Replace MPs.
Note
If the Replace MPs button is unavailable, the project is in the Download Changes
state. Go back to step 2 to change the project state before continuing.
257

Property
Description
Model

For Tricon versions 9.5.x, 9.51.x, or 9.52.x, select 3006/N,
3007.
Note: If the project is currently configured for a model 3008
MP, you cannot downgrade to a model 3006 MP.
If you must create a project for a 3006 MP, you need to
create a new project, or re-convert the project using a
backup of the project created in an earlier version of
TriStation 1131. For more information, see Converting
Existing Projects to Version 4.9.0 on page 11, or
Creating a New Project on page 20.
Target System
Version

configuration.
a. TriStation 1131 v4.6 does not support Tricon versions 9.4.x and earlier. For a list of
TriStation versions compatible with your Tricon, see the applicable Tricon Product Release
Notice (available on the Invensys Global Customer Support web site).
258
Chapter 3
Note
Click OK.
When asked to confirm your selection, click Yes to continue.
When asked to backup your project before changing the target system version, do one
of the following:
(Recommended) Click Yes and then specify the folder to save the backup file to. Use
the suggested name, or specify a new one. The file extension (.bt2) does not have to
be included in the name.
Click No to continue without creating a backup file.
TriStation reconfigures your project to the selected target system version. All current
configuration settings are maintained; however, any parameters that did not exist in the
previous version are set to their default values.
9
In the Messages pane, review the results of the target system version change. For more
information, see the Target System Version Change Matrix on page 259.
10
To finish the process, you must build the application and download it to the controller.
Results of a Tricon Target System Version Change

The following table describes the changes that are made to your project when changing from
one target system version to another.
To use the Target System Version Change Matrix:

1
Find the column for your current system version on the top.
Then move down to locate the row (on the left) for the system version you want to
change your project to.
The box where your selected column and row meet describes the changes that will be
made to your project if you change to the new target system version.
Table 32
Target System Version Change Matrix
ORIGINAL
VERSION
NEW
VERSION
3006 MP
v9.5.x,
v9.51.x, or
v9.52.x
3008 MP
v9.6 and
Later
3008 MP
v10.0.x
3008 MP
v10.2.x
3008 MP
v10.3.x
3008 MP
v10.4.x
3008 MP
v10.5.x
Note: A target system version change (upgrade or downgrade) requires that the project state be changed to Download All, with one exception
when you are converting a project created in a version of TriStation prior to v4.6. During project conversion, projects created with a previous
version of TriStation will remain in the Download Changes state regardless of a target system version change. For more information, see
Converting Existing Projects to Version 4.9.0 on page 11.
3006 MP
v9.5.x
v9.51.x
v9.52.x
NOT ALLOWED
UPGRADE
3008 MP
v9.6 and Later
UPGRADE
Add support
for model 4351,
4352 TCMs
UPGRADE
Add support
for model
4351A and
4352A TCMs
UPGRADE
Add support
for model
4351A and
4352A TCMs
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
DOWNGRADE
Remove TCMs
(all models)
DOWNGRADE
Remove TCMs
(all models)
DOWNGRADE
Remove TCMs
(all models)
Remove model
3720, 3721, 3625
I/O modules
DOWNGRADE
Remove TCMs
(all models)
Remove model
3720, 3721, 3625
I/O modules
DOWNGRADE
Remove TCMs
(all models)
Remove model
3720, 3721,
3625, 3807 I/O
modules
DOWNGRADE
Remove TCMs
(all models)
Remove model
3720, 3721,
3625, 3807 I/O
modules
DOWNGRADE
Remove model
4351A, 4352A
TCMs
Add support
for model 4351,
4352 TCMs
DOWNGRADE
Remove model
4351A, 4352A
TCMs
Remove model
3720, 3721, 3625
I/O modules
Add support
for model 4351,
4352 TCMs
DOWNGRADE
Remove model
4351A, 4351B,
4352A, 4352B,
4353, 4354
TCMs
Remove model
3720, 3721, 3625
I/O modules
Add support
for model 4351,
4352 TCMs
DOWNGRADE
Remove model
4351A, 4351B,
4352A, 4352B,
4353, 4354
TCMs
Remove model
3720, 3721,
3625, 3807 I/O
modules
Add support
for model 4351,
4352 TCMs
DOWNGRADE
Remove model
4351A, 4351B,
4352A, 4352B,
4353, 4354
TCMs
Remove model
3720, 3721,
3625, 3807 I/O
modules
Add support
for model 4351,
4352 TCMs
DOWNGRADE
Remove model
3720, 3721, 3625
I/O modules
DOWNGRADE
Remove model
4351B, 4352B,
4353, 4354
TCMs
Remove model
3720, 3721, 3625
I/O modules
DOWNGRADE
Remove model
4351B, 4352B,
4353, 4354
TCMs
Remove model
3720, 3721,
3625, 3807 I/O
modules
DOWNGRADE
Remove model
4351B, 4352B,
4353, 4354
TCMs
Remove model
3720, 3721,
3625, 3807 I/O
modules
259
UPGRADE
Add support
for model
4351A and
4352A TCMs
Remove model
4351 and 4352
TCMs
UPGRADE
Add support
for model 4351,
4352 TCMs
NOT ALLOWED
3008 MP
v10.0.x
3008 MP
v10.1.x
3008 MP
v10.1.x
Target System Version Change Matrix (continued)

3008 MP
v9.6 and
Later
UPGRADE
Add support
for model
4351A, 4352A
TCMs
Add support
for model 3720,
3721, 3625 I/O
modules
3008 MP
v10.0.x
3008 MP
v10.1.x
3008 MP
v10.2.x
UPGRADE
Add support
for model
4351A, 4352A
TCMs
Add support
for model 3720,
3721, 3625 I/O
modules
UPGRADE
Add support
for model
4351A, 4352A
TCMs
Add support
for model 3720,
3721, 3625 I/O
modules
Remove model
4351 and 4352
TCMs
UPGRADE
Add support
for model 3720,
3721, 3625 I/O
modules
Upgrade
configuration
options for
model 4351A,
4352A TCMs
UPGRADE
Add support
for model
4351A, 4351B,
4352A, 4352B,
4353, 4354,
TCMs
Add support
for model 3720,
3721, 3625 I/O
modules
UPGRADE
Add support
for model
4351A, 4351B,
4352A, 4352B,
4353, 4354,
TCMs
Add support
for model 3720,
3721, 3625 I/O
modules
UPGRADE
Add support
for model
4351A, 4351B,
4352A, 4352B,
4353, 4354,
TCMs
Add support
for model 3720,
3721, 3625 I/O
modules
Remove model
4351, 4352
TCMs
UPGRADE
Add support
for model
4351B, 4352B,
4353 and 4354
TCMs
Add support
for model 3720,
3721, 3625 I/O
modules
UPGRADE
Add support
for model
4351B, 4352B,
4353 and 4354
TCMs
Remove model
4351A and
4352A TCMsb
UPGRADE
Add support
for model
4351A, 4351B,
4352A, 4352B,
4353, 4354,
TCMs
Add support
for model 3720,
3721, 3625, 3807
I/O modules
UPGRADE
Add support
for model
4351A, 4351B,
4352A, 4352B,
4353, 4354,
TCMs
Add support
for model 3720,
3721, 3625, 3807
I/O modules
UPGRADE
Add support
for model
4351A, 4351B,
4352A, 4352B,
4353, 4354,
TCMs
Add support
for model 3720,
3721, 3625, 3807
I/O modules
Remove model
4351, 4352
TCMs
UPGRADE
Add support
for model
4351B, 4352B,
4353 and 4354
TCMs
Add support
for model 3720,
3721, 3625, 3807
I/O modules
UPGRADE
Add support
for model
4351B, 4352B,
4353 and 4354
TCMs
Add support
for model 3807
I/O module
Remove model
4351A and
4352A TCMs
3008 MP
v10.3.x
3008 MP
v10.4.x
3008 MP
v10.5.x
DOWNGRADE
Remove model
4351B, 4352B,
4353, 4354
TCMs
Remove model
4351A and
4352A TCMsa
DOWNGRADE
Remove model
4351B, 4352B,
4353, 4354
TCMs
Remove
support for
model 3807 I/O
module
DOWNGRADE
Remove model
4351B, 4352B,
4353, 4354
TCMs
Remove
support for
model 3807 I/O
module
DOWNGRADE
Remove
support for
model 3807 I/O
module
DOWNGRADE
Remove
support for
model 3807 I/O
module
NEW
VERSION
3008 MP
v10.2.x
3008 MP
v10.3.x
3008 MP
v10.4.x
UPGRADE
Add support
for model 3807
I/O module
DOWNGRADE
No hardware
change
3006 MP
v9.5.x,
v9.51.x, or
v9.52.x
Chapter 3
ORIGINAL
VERSION
260
TriStation 1131 Developers Guidev4.9.0
Table 32
Table 32
Target System Version Change Matrix (continued)
ORIGINAL
VERSION
3006 MP
v9.5.x,
v9.51.x, or
v9.52.x
3008 MP
v9.6 and
Later
UPGRADE
Add support
for model
4351A, 4351B,
4352A, 4352B,
4353, 4354,
TCMs
Add support
for model 3720,
3721, 3625, 3807
I/O modules
UPGRADE
Add support
for model
4351A, 4351B,
4352A, 4352B,
4353, 4354,
TCMs
Add support
for model 3720,
3721, 3625, 3807
I/O modules
3008 MP
v10.0.x
3008 MP
v10.1.x
3008 MP
v10.2.x
3008 MP
v10.3.x
3008 MP
v10.4.x
UPGRADE
Add support
for model
4351A, 4351B,
4352A, 4352B,
4353, 4354,
TCMs
Add support
for model 3720,
3721, 3625, 3807
I/O modules
Remove model
4351, 4352
TCMs
UPGRADE
Add support
for model
4351B, 4352B,
4353 and 4354
TCMs
Add support
for model 3720,
3721, 3625, 3807
I/O modules
UPGRADE
Add support
for model
4351B, 4352B,
4353 and 4354
TCMs
Add support
for model 3807
I/O module
Remove model
4351A and
4352A TCMs
UPGRADE
Add support
for model 3807
I/O module
UPGRADE
No hardware
change
3008 MP
v10.5.x
NEW
VERSION
3008 MP
v10.5.x
261
a. When downgrading a Tricon v10.3 project to Tricon v10.2, if a model 4351A or 4352A TCM was installed and configured in the v10.3 project, it will be removed
during project conversion. Once the project conversion is complete, you can add the 4351A/4352A TCM to the project again, and reconfigure it for use with the Tricon
v10.2 system. See If You Have a TCM Configured in Your TriStation Project on page 255 for more information.
b. When upgrading a Tricon v10.2 project to Tricon v10.3, if a model 4351A or 4352A TCM was installed and configured in the v10.2 project, it will be removed during
project conversion. Once the project conversion is complete, you can add the 4351A/4352A TCM to the project again, and reconfigure it for use with the Tricon v10.3
system. See If You Have a TCM Configured in Your TriStation Project on page 255 for more information.
262
Chapter 3
Configuring Tricon Hardware

This section explains how to configure the hardware for a Tricon controller. Topics include:
Adding or Deleting a Tricon Chassis on page 262
Determining Tricon Chassis Power Usage on page 264
Inserting and Removing Tricon Modules on page 265
Configuring a Tricon AI Single-Ended or Differential Module on page 266
Configuring a Tricon DO Module on page 267
Configuring a Tricon PI Module on page 269
Adding a Tricon Thermocouple Module on page 270
For information on configuring communication modules, see Configuring Tricon

Communication Modules on page 271.
Adding or Deleting a Tricon Chassis

This procedure explains how to add or delete a Tricon chassis from the controller configuration.
Each controller configuration includes a main chassis, usually called HD_MAIN (High-Density
chassis) or LD_MAIN (Low-Density chassis). Additional chassis in a configuration are
expansion chassis (HD_EXP, LD_EXP, or E_LD_EXP) or remote chassis (HD_RXM or
LD_RXM).
The following rules apply to configuring different chassis types in a single system:
An Enhanced Low-Density expansion chassis (E_LD_EXP) may be configured in a

system with either a High-Density or Low-Density main chassis (Tricon v10.3 or later
only).
A High-Density expansion (HD_EXP) or remote (HD_RXM) chassis cannot be

configured in a system with a Low-Density main chassis.
A Low-Density remote chassis (LD_RXM) cannot be configured in a system with a

High-Density main chassis.
Note
Only an Enhanced Low-Density expansion chassis may be configured in a system with

a High-Density main chassis. Any other Low-Density expansion chassis cannot be
configured in a system with a High-Density main chassis.
See Configuring the Tricon Target System Version on page 252 for the target system version
upgrade/downgrade rules that apply to configurations with mixed chassis types.
263
Procedure
1
Expand the Controller tree, double-click Configuration, and then double-click

Hardware Allocation.
The Item Properties dialog box for the chassis appears.
Take either of these actions.

Commands
Actions
Add
Click to add a chassis. Select the type of chassis from the list
that appears.
Delete
Only the last chassis in a configuration can be deleted. If you

have only one chassis in a configuration, it cannot be deleted.
For example, if you have four chassis in your configuration,
and you want to delete chassis 2, you must first delete chassis 3
and 4 before you can delete chassis 2.
Select the last chassis in the list and then click Delete.
264
Chapter 3
Determining Tricon Chassis Power Usage

This procedure explains how to display the amount of power used by a Tricon chassis. For more
information, see the Planning and Installation Guide for Tricon v9-v10 Systems.
Procedure
1
Expand the Controller tree, double-click Configuration, and then click Hardware
Allocation.
The Chassis Power Usage screen shows information about the logic power used by each
chassis.
Total Power Supply: Shows the maximum logic power that the chassis can
support.
Total Power Used: Shows how much logic power is being used by the current
configuration of modules in a chassis.
Available: Shows the amount of available (unused) logic power.
If the Available power is negative, delete one or more modules from the chassis and add
them to another chassis in the configuration.
Recheck the power usage for the chassis to ensure the logic power is acceptable. If
acceptable, the physical installation must be changed to match the logical configuration
in TriStation.
265
Inserting and Removing Tricon Modules

This procedure explains how to add and delete modules to/from a Tricon configuration. If a
module is deleted, you must use the Download All command to download the application to
the controller.
Procedure
1

Allocation.
Double-click the chassis that you want to add or remove a module from.
To add a module, click an empty slot, and then click Insert. On the Insert Module
screen, select the type of module to insert, and then click OK.
To remove a module, click the module to be removed from the configuration, and
then click Remove. This cannot be undone.
266
Chapter 3
Configuring a Tricon AI Single-Ended or Differential Module

This procedure explains how to configure a Tricon Analog Input Single-Ended (model 3720) or
Differential (model 3721) module. For both modules, the resolution type and field power
monitoring status can be specified. For the Differential module, the input type can also be
specified.
WARNING
Changing the resolution type on model 3720 and 3721 AI modules will
cause all input points on the module to change. A change from high to
low resolution (or vice-versa) results in a value change by a factor of four.
You must modify your application to take this change into account.
During a download change operation, the implementation of the logic
change will occur before the implementation of the range change on the
modules. This may result in a mismatch between the range the
application expects and the actual range from the module. All points
should be bypassed during a resolution change to prevent any
unintended application problems.
The model 3720 and 3721 AI modules are compatible only with Tricon v10.2 and later systems.
Procedure
1
Expand the Controller tree, click Configuration, and expand Hardware Allocation.
Expand the chassis where the module is installed, double-click the slot where the
module is installed, and then click Setup.
Specify these properties in the AI Setup dialog box.
Property
Action
Resolution Type
Select the resolution to be used for the point. Available with

Single-Ended and Differential AI modules.
267
Standard Resolution: Data resolution is 12 bits, which is 4095

counts at the maximum range of 5 volts. For a Differential AI
module, Standard Resolution cannot be selected if Bipolar
Input is selected.
High Resolution: Data resolution is 14 bits, which is 16383
counts at the maximum range of 5 volts.
The default is Standard Resolution.
Differential AI
Input Type
Select the input type for the point. Only available with the
Differential AI module.
Unipolar Input: 0 to 5 volts (with 6% over-range).
Bipolar Input: -5 to 5 volts (with 6% under-range and overrange). Available only if High Resolution is selected.
The default is Unipolar Input.
Field Power
Monitoring
Select whether the module should monitor field power at the

termination panel. When field power monitoring is On, the
module will report when field power at the term panel goes in or
out of range.
Applicable only if you are using a term panel that passes field
power to the module.
The default is Off.
If you are not using a term panel that passes field power to the
module, you must select Off. If you select On, and the term panel
does not support field power monitoring, you will see Field
Power faults on the module.
For more information about external term panels, see the Field
Terminations Guide for Tricon v9-v10 Systems.
Configuring a Tricon DO Module

This procedure explains how to configure a Tricon Digital Output (model 3625) module, which
allows you to specify how each point is configured.
The model 3625 DO module is compatible only with Tricon v10.2 and later systems.
Procedure
1
268
Chapter 3
Select the tagname to be configured, and then specify these properties in the DO Setup
dialog box.
Property
Action
DO Point
Options
Select the option to be used for the DO point.

Not Used: Provides the same fault detection as for NonSupervised points, except reporting of benign field fault
conditions is suppressed. Points configured as Not Used will
be energized if the application commands them on.
Non-Supervised: Provides detection of all internal faults
and limited external faults associated with the field device or
wiring.
Supervised: Provides detection of all internal faults and
detection of all external faults associated with field device or
wiring.
The default is Non-Supervised.
Shorted Point
Alarm Threshold
Enter the number of ohms below which values are alarmed as a

shorted load. Typical threshold values are 10 to 48 ohms.
The available range is 0 to 65,535. The default is 10.
Only available if the points are supervised.
Open Point
Alarm Threshold
Enter the number of ohms above which values are alarmed as an

open load. Typical threshold values are 480 to 3,200 ohms.
The available range is 0 to 65,535. The default is 2,400.
Only available if the points are supervised.
Continue to select tagnames and specify settings as needed.
269
Configuring a Tricon PI Module

This procedure explains how to configure a Tricon Pulse Input or Enhanced Pulse Input
module, which are used for speed and RPM inputs. Each point can be independently
configured.
Procedure
1
Select the tagname to be configured, and then specify these properties in the Pulse Input
Setup dialog box.
Property
Action
Rate Type
Select the type of rate applied to pulse input signals: Speed

or RPM.
Maximum RPM
Enter the revolutions per minute for the pulse input

device; used with RPM.
Maximum Speed
Enter the speed for the pulse input device; used with
Speed rate type.
Pulses Per Revolution
Enter the number of pulses per revolution of the

measuring shaft; used with RPM rate type.
Scale Factor
Enter the scaling value to convert pulse input signals into

engineering units. For:
Pulses per second, set to 0.016667.
Pulses per minute, set to 1.0 (default).
Pulses per hour, set to 60.0

270
Chapter 3
Adding a Tricon Thermocouple Module

This procedure explains how to specify the type of Tricon thermocouple module, which must
match the module that is installed in the system. Because these modules come in a variety of
configurations, select carefully. For more information, see the Planning and Installation Guide for
Tricon v9-v10 Systems.
Procedure
1
Expand the chassis where the module is installed, double-click the thermocouple
module slot, and then click Insert.
From the module list, select the type of thermocouple module installed in the Tricon, as
indicated by these properties.
Property
Description
Model
3706/A/AN or 3708/E/EN
Type E, J, K, T
Specifies the thermocouple type installed.

For 3706, J, K, or T.
For 3708, E, J, K, or T.
Degree conversion
dgC is converted to Celsius. dgF is converted to Fahrenheit.
UpS (upscale)
DnS (downscale)
Specifies value returned if voltage is out-of-range, or burnout

occurs.
Upscale returns +32,767.
Downscale returns 32,767.
For model 3708E only.
Points
For model 3706, 32 points.

For model 3708, 16 points.
Click the type of module installed in the controller, and click OK. There are no other
properties to specify.
Configuring Tricon Communication Modules
271

This section explains how to configure Tricon communication modules for communication with
external devices.
Note
In addition to configuring ports on the communication module(s), you also need to

configure the Tricons network and/or serial connection to the TriStation PC, in order to
connect to the Tricon and download your application. For more information, see
Chapter 5, Tricon Communication with TriStation 1131.
Topics include:
Configuring Tricon ACM Ports on page 271
Configuring Tricon HIM Ports on page 273
Configuring Tricon EICM Ports on page 274
Configuring Tricon NCM Ports on page 275
Configuring Tricon SMM Ports on page 277
Configuring TCM Ports on page 278
Configuring Tricon ACM Ports

This procedure explains how to configure ports on a Tricon ACM, which supports these
connections:
On NET 1, a network connection to a Foxboro Intelligent Automation (I/A) Series DCS
On NET 1, time synchronization with a Foxboro Intelligent Automation (I/A) Series

DCS
On NET 2, a network connection to a TriStation PC or other network devices
On NET 2, time synchronization with the Tricon master node
You can install primary and redundant ACM modules in either chassis 1 or chassis 2.
Note
If you have both an ACM and a TCM installed in your Tricon, we do not recommend
using NET 2 on the ACM for network connections. Instead, use NET 1 or NET 2 on the
TCM for network connections and/or time synchronization, and NET 1 on the ACM for
connection to the Foxboro I/A Series DCS.
Procedure
1

Allocation.
Double-click the ACM slot, and then click Setup.
272
Chapter 3
For a NET 1 connection, specify these properties on the ACM Setup screen.
Property
Action
SOE Block Collection

Mode
If using SOE, specify the block number.
Privilege
Specify Read/Write to allow external devices to read and

write points. The default is Read.
Redundant Mode
Select the check box to specify that a redundant ACM is

installed.
Select On NET 1 enable time synchronization with external

source to allow time synchronization with the I/A DCS.
For a NET 2 connection, specify these properties on the ACM Setup screen.
Property
Action
Redundant Mode
Select the check box to specify that a redundant module is

installed.
Used/Not Used
Select Used to specify the slots that have an installed ACM

module.
To enable the right slot, select the Redundant Mode check
box (above).
Privilege
Specify Read/Write to allow external devices to read and

write points. The default is Read.
Property
Action
IP Address
If using a default IP address, leave blank.
273
If not, enter the IP address that identifies the controller on

the network. This must be the same IP address as entered
on the TriStation Communication screen (see Configuring
the TriStation 1131 Network Connection on page 384).
IP Subnet Mask
If the controller is on a subnet, enter the subnet address.
Default Gateway IP
Address
If needed, enter an IP address to be used as the default for

a gateway.
Select NET 2 to enable time synchronization with the

Tricon Master controller.
Configuring Tricon HIM Ports

This procedure explains how to configure ports on a Tricon HIM, which supports a connection
between a Tricon controller and a Honeywell control system.
Procedure
1
Expand the Controller tree, double-click

Configuration, and expand Hardware
Allocation. Double-click the HIM slot, and
then click Setup.
Specify these properties on the HIM Setup

screen.
Property
Action
Base Address
Enter a number between 5 and 31 to specify the block address for

the HIM based on the Data Hiway memory map. The default is 5.
Number of
Extended Block
Enter a number which identifies a pair of HIM blocks consisting of

a base block and a secondary block (which is offset from the 6-bit
block address by 32). The default is 4.
274
Chapter 3
Configuring Tricon EICM Ports

This procedure explains how to configure ports on a Tricon EICM, which supports these serial
connections:
To a TriStation PC using TriStation 1131 protocol
To an external device using Modbus protocol (master, slave, and master/slave)
To a Centronics printer
You can install an EICM module in either chassis 1 or the first expansion chassis. An EICM
cannot be installed in the same system as a TCM. For more information about module
compatibility, see the Planning and Installation Guide for Tricon v9-v10 Systems.
Procedure
1

Allocation.
Double-click the EICM slot, and then click Setup.
Specify these properties in the EICM Setup dialog box.

Property
Action
Port Selection
For TriStation 1131 or Modbus communication, select ports

14 or
69. For a printer connection, select ports 5 or 10.
Protocol
For TriStation 1131, select TriStation.

For Modbus, select the specific Modbus protocol.
Modbus Slave Address
Enter the number of the slave address, which can be 1247.

Only available with Modbus slave and Modbus
slave/master protocols.
Property
Action
Baud Rate
Select the rate, which must be the same as other slaves on

the network. The default is 9600.
275
The total rate for all four ports must be less than or equal to
57,600.
Data Bits
Set as needed; must be the same as other Modbus slaves.

Modbus slave can use 7 or 8 bits.
Modbus master and master/slave must use 8 bits.
Stop Bits
Select either 1 Bit or 2 Bits to specify whether to send 1 or 2

bits to indicate that the transmission of a byte of data is
complete.
Parity
Must use the same setting as other Modbus slaves.
Handshake
If set to Hardware, see Setting Signal Delays for Tricon

EICM on page 608.
Modbus (Minimum
and Maximum) Range
Set minimum between 0 and 32767; maximum between 1

and 32767.
Rows and Columns
Type the number of characters for the printer; only

available with port 5 and 10. Rows can be 0255; columns
can be 0255.
SOE Block Collection

Mode
The SOE block name. Reserved for future use.
Configuring Tricon NCM Ports

This procedure explains how to configure ports on a Tricon NCM, which supports these
connections:
On NET 1, a network connection to other Triconex controllers using the Peer-to-Peer

protocol and Triconex Time Synchronization
On NET 2, a network connection to a TriStation PC or other external devices
Serial connection between a Tricon NCM/G module and a Global Positioning System
(GPS) interface
You can install a primary and redundant module in one logical slot. An NCM cannot be
installed in the same system as a TCM. For more information about module compatibility, see
the Planning and Installation Guide for Tricon v9-v10 Systems.
Procedure
1

Allocation.
Double-click the NCM slot, and then click Setup.
276
Chapter 3
Specify these properties in the NCM Setup dialog box.

Property
Action
Installed/Not
Installed
Select to indicate which slots have modules installed.

Available for the right slot only when the module is
installed in a redundant (non-COM) slot.
Privilege
Select Read or Read/Write.
IP Address
Enter the IP address for the NCM.
Global Positioning
System Installed
Select the check box to synchronize time with a GPS. The

default is cleared.
Select the check box to synchronize time with the Tricon

master node. The default is cleared.
277
Configuring Tricon SMM Ports

This procedure explains how to configure ports on a Tricon Safety Manager Module (SMM),
which supports a connection between a Tricon controller and a Honeywell Universal Control
Network (UCN).
Procedure
1

Allocation.
Double-click the SMM slot, and then click Setup.
Specify these properties in the SMM Setup dialog box.
Property
Action
UCN Node Number
Enter the UCN node number.
SOE Block
Enter 15 or 16, which are Modified External blocks

reserved for the SMM.
Prohibit Writes
Select the check box to prevent Honeywell workstations

from writing to memory and output points. The default
is cleared.
Enable UCN Test

Mode
Should only be selected if requested by Honeywell

factory test personnel. The default is cleared.
Select the check box to enable time synchronization with

the UCN. The default is cleared.
278
Chapter 3
Configuring TCM Ports

Note
The information and procedures in this section do not apply to model 4351 and 4352
TCMs. If you have one of these TCMs installed in your system, please see Appendix C,
TCM Model 4351/4352 Configuration.
A single Tricon v10.x system1 supports a maximum of four TCMs, which must reside in two
logical slots located in chassis 1 or chassis 2 only. You cannot install model 4351/4352 TCMs in
a system that also has model 4351A/B, 4352A/B, or 4353/4354 TCMs installed, even if they are
installed in different chassis.
Additionally, different TCM models cannot be mixed in the same logical slot. Exceptions to this
rule are the 4351A/B and 4352A/B modules, where A and B modules with the same model
number can be installed in the same slot. See the Planning and Installation Guide for Tricon v9-v10
Systems for detailed TCM installation guidelines.
The following table lists the protocols supported by TCM models 4351A/B and 4353 (Copper);
and 4352A/B and 4354 (Fiber) on network and serial ports.
Network Ports
(Models
4351A/B and
4352A/B)
Network Ports
(Models 4353
and 4354)
TriStation
NET 1, NET 2
NET 1, NET 2
TSAA (UDP/IP)
NET 1, NET 2
NET 1
TSAA with IP Multicast (UDP/IP)
NET 1, NET 2
NET 1
Peer-to-Peer (UDP/IP)
NET 1, NET 2
NET 1
NET 1
NET 1
Embedded OPC Server (Data Access and

Alarms & Events)
NET 2
Modbus Slave (ASCII or RTU)
Any port
Modbus Master (RTU)
Any port
NET 1, NET 2
NET 1
Port 1
NET 1
NET 1
Triconex Time Synchronization via UDP/IP
NET 1, NET 2
NET 1
SNTP Triconex Time Synchronization
NET 1, NET 2
NET 1, NET 2
Network Printing using Jet Direct
NET 1, NET 2
NET 1
Protocol or Standard
Peer-to-Peer (DLC)
Modbus Master or Slave (TCP)

GPS Time Synchronization
Triconex Time Synchronization via DLC
Serial Ports
(All Models)
Port 4
a. means the protocol is not available on this port.
1.
TCMs can be installed only in Tricon v10.x systems. They cannot be installed in Tricon v9.x or earlier
systems. Model 4351 and 4352 TCMs can be installed only in Tricon v10.0.x systems. Model 4351A
and 4352A TCMs can be installed only in Tricon v10.1.x and later systems. Model 4351B, 4352B, 4353,
and 4354 TCMs can be installed only in Tricon v10.3 and later systems. For more detailed
compatibility information, please see the Product Release Notice for your Tricon system version.
Note
279
Invensys recommends configuring a serial connection to the TCM first, because it is less
complex and easier to successfully connect to the TCM through the serial port.
Once you have successfully connected to the TCM and downloaded the initial
configuration to the Tricon, you can go back and configure the more complex network
connection without worrying about losing the ability to communicate with the
controller altogether.
To configure specific types of ports, see these topics:
Configuring TCM Serial Ports on page 280
Configuring TCM Network Ports on page 282
Configuring TCM Peer-To-Peer Ports on page 287
Configuring TCM Modbus TCP Ports on page 289
Configuring TCM Routing on page 291
Configuring TCM Protocols (Tricon v10.3 and Later Only) on page 292
For additional information on configuring the TCM, see these topics:
Configuring Tricon Time Synchronization on page 298 for instructions on configuring

the TCM to synchronize time.
Controlling Access to the TCM on page 386 for instructions on controlling access to the
TCM on a per-client level.
Configuring a Tricon TCM Port for Printing on page 397 for instructions on configuring
the TCM for use with a printer.
Exporting and Importing a TCM Configuration

Once you have configured a TCM, you can export its configuration to an XML file. This file can
then be used to quickly configure other TCMs by importing the saved configuration settings.
For detailed instructions, see Exporting the TCM Configuration to a File on page 296.
Changing TCM Models

Once TCM ports have been configured, but prior to downloading the configuration to the controller,
you can change the existing TCM model to a different model TCM without losing your port
settings. See Inserting and Removing Tricon Modules on page 265.
Only the following model changes will retain your port settings:
4351A to
4352A
4351B to
4352B
4353 to
4354
4352A to
4351A
4352B to
4351B
4354 to
4353
Any other TCM model changes will result in all port settings being reset to their default values.
However, once the configuration has been downloaded to the controller, you cannot change the
TCM model installed in the Tricon without downloading a new configuration.
280
Chapter 3
Configuring TCM Serial Ports

This procedure explains how to configure serial ports on a Tricon TCM.
Procedure
1

Allocation.
Double-click the slot where the TCM module is installed and then click Setup.
The TCM Setup dialog box appears.
Click the Serial Ports tab.
Specify these properties.

Property
Action
Port Selection
Click the port to be configured. Ports can be configured

only for a slot with an installed module.
Port Write Enabled
Available only if Modbus Slave (ASCII or RTU) is selected

as the communication protocol. Select this check box if
you want to allow Modbus writes to this slave port. The
default is cleared (the port is read-only).
Property
Action
Protocol
Select the communication protocol for the port:
281
All ports can use Modbus Master, Modbus Slave

ASCII, Modbus Slave RTU.
Only port 1 can use GPS. This port is automatically
configured for GPS when you enable time
synchronization. See Using a Tricon TCM to
Synchronize Time on page 303.
Only port 4 can use TriStation.
If you selected Modbus Slave RTU or ASCII, enter the

number of the Modbus slave device (1-247). The default is
1.
Baud Rate
Enter the communication rate for the port. The default is

9600.
Data Bits
Select 8 or 7 bits. The default is 8. Available only with

Modbus Slave ASCII.
Stop Bits
Select 1 or 2 bits. The default is 1 bit.
Parity
Select the type of parity for the port. The default is Odd.
Transceiver Mode
Select RS-485 or RS-232. The default is RS232. On port 4

when TriStation is selected as the protocol, RS-485 is not
available.
Handshake
Select None or Hardware; the default is None.
Termination Options
Select the type of termination used with cables. Only

available with RS-485 Transceiver Mode. The default is
None.
FP Ordering
Select the order to be used with floating point numbers.

Determines whether the most significant bits in a 32-bit
address are the first 16 (high) or the last 16 (low). The
default is Low 16 Bits First.
Modbus (Minimum and

Maximum) Range
Enter the minimum and maximum values to be used for

the Modbus data range. The default minimum is 0. The
default maximum is 32,767.
Master Logical Port
Enter the port number (1-32) that the TCM will use in
Modbus Master functions to access the port. Only
available for Modbus Master.
282
Chapter 3
Configuring TCM Network Ports

This procedure explains how to configure network ports on a Tricon TCM.
Network port configuration options differ depending on the target system version configured
for the project. Use the procedure that applies to your Tricon system version:
Procedure for Tricon v10.1 or v10.2 (Models 4351A/4352A) on page 282
Procedure for Tricon v10.3 and Later (Models 4351A/B, 4352A/B, and 4353/4354) on
page 284
For more information about the target system version, see Configuring the Tricon Target
System Version on page 252.
Procedure for Tricon v10.1 or v10.2 (Models 4351A/4352A)

1

Allocation.
The TCM/A Setup dialog box appears.
Specify these properties on the Network tab.
Property
Action
Slot Selection
Select the physical slot where the TCM module you want to
configure is installed.
283
If the TCM you are configuring is installed in the COM slot,

you must select the Left slot.
If the TCM is installed in any other available logical slot, you
can select either the Left or Right slot.
Each logical slot can hold two TCMsone in the Left
physical slot, and one in the Right physical slot. A TCM can
be configured in the Right slot only if a TCM in the Left slot
has already been configured.a
See the Planning and Installation Guide for Tricon v9-v10 Systems
for more information about slot locations.
Not Installed,
Installed
Click Installed to enable configuration of the module. Clicking

Not Installed resets all options to their default state and makes
them unavailable for configuration. The default is Not Installed.
Transceiver Mode
Select the communication mode.

For the model 4352A with fiber connectors, the default is 100
Mbps Half Duplex. The 4352A module cannot connect at 10
Mbps.
For the model 4351A, the default is Auto-Negotiate.
IP Address
Enter the IP Address for the port. The addresses for NET 1 and
NET 2 do not need to be unique.
The default values are:
NET 1: 192.168.0.x
NET 2: 192.168.1.x
where x is the node number.
The highest and lowest IP addresses in a subnet (addresses
where the last number is 0 or 255, such as 192.168.1.255) are
reserved for broadcast messaging and cannot be used as a valid
IP address.
IP Subnet Mask
If needed, enter the IP address for the subnet. The default is

255.255.255.0.
Default Gateway IP
Address
If needed, enter the IP address for the default gateway. The

default is 0.0.0.0. Typically, this is the IP address of the network
router.
The default gateway address must be part of the subnet.
TriStation Port
Number
Enter the UDP port to use for the TriStation connection. The
default is 1502. See UDP Base Port Number on page 632 for
additional information.
284
Chapter 3
Property
Action
TSAA Port Number
Enter the UDP port to use for TSAA connections, including DDE
Server, SOE Recorder, and OPC Server. The default is 1500. See
UDP Base Port Number on page 632 for additional information.
Port Write Enabled
Select this check box if you want to allow TSAA writes to this
port. Applies to all TSAA connections on this port. The default is
cleared (the port is read-only).
a. If you have configured TCMs in both the left and right slots, and you then uninstall the TCM in
the left slot, you will no longer be able to change the configuration of the TCM installed in the
right slot. You must re-install a TCM in the left slot before you can modify the configuration of
the TCM in the right slot.
4
Note

Changes to TCM IP addresses are not effective until the existing connection is closed and
a new connection is opened. Once a connection is opened, it remains open until you
close it, even if the IP address is changed via a download changes operation.
Procedure for Tricon v10.3 and Later (Models 4351A/B, 4352A/B, and 4353/4354)
1

Allocation.
The TCM/OPC or TCM/B Setup dialog box appears.
Property
Action
Slot Selection
Select the physical slot where the TCM module you want to
configure is installed.
285
If the TCM you are configuring is installed in the COM

slot, you must select the Left slot.
If the TCM is installed in any other available logical slot,
you can select either the Left or Right slot.
Each logical slot can hold two TCMsone in the Left
physical slot, and one in the Right physical slot. A TCM
can be configured in the Right slot only if a TCM in the
Left slot has already been configured.a
See the Planning and Installation Guide for Tricon v9-v10
Systems for more information about slot locations.
Not Installed,
Installed
Click Installed to enable configuration of the module.

Clicking Not Installed resets all options to their default state
and makes them unavailable for configuration. The default
is Not Installed.
Transceiver Mode

For a model 4352A/B or 4354 with fiber connectors, the
default is 100 Mbps Half Duplex. These modules cannot
negotiate the connection speed or connect at 10 Mbps.
For a model 4351A/B or 4353, the default is AutoNegotiate.
If you have a model 4353 TCM, you cannot select 10 Mbps
as the communication mode on NET 2. Connections to the
TCMs embedded OPC server can be made only at 100
Mbps.
IP Address
Enter the IP Address for the port. The addresses for NET 1
and NET 2 do not need to be unique.
The default values are:
NET 1: 192.168.0.x
NET 2: 192.168.1.x
where x is the node number.
reserved for broadcast messaging and cannot be used as a
valid IP address.
IP Subnet Mask

255.255.255.0.
Default Gateway IP
Address

default is 0.0.0.0. Typically, this is the IP address of the
network router.
286
Chapter 3
a. If you have configured TCMs in both the left and right slots, and you then uninstall the
TCM in the left slot, you will no longer be able to change the configuration of the TCM
installed in the right slot. You must re-install a TCM in the left slot before you can modify
the configuration of the TCM in the right slot.
To configure the TCM for operation behind a firewall, click Show Advanced Options
and then specify the properties shown in the table below for NET 1 and NET 2.
Setting these properties restricts the ports that the TCM can use for TCP connections to
the specified range. This allows the TCM to operate behind a firewall that has
implemented port restrictions.
For most networks, the default settings should be sufficient. Invensys recommends that
only advanced users change these settings.
Note
If these settings are misconfigured, Modbus TCP and OPC will be unable to
connect. If this occurs, reset the values to the default settings to fix the problem
and re-enable Modbus TCP and OPC.
If you need to use this feature, please contact Invensys Technical Support for
assistance with configuring these settings.
Property
Action
Lowest TCP Port

Number
Enter the lowest TCP port number to use for an outgoing

connection from the TCM. Can be from 1024 to 65535. The default
value is 49152.
Applicable to Modbus/TCP and OPC ports.
Highest TCP Port

Number
Enter the highest TCP port number to use for an outgoing

connection from the TCM. Can be from 1024 to 65535. The default
value is 65535.
Applicable to Modbus/TCP and OPC ports.
5
Note

close it, even if the IP address is changed via a download change operation.
287
Configuring TCM Peer-To-Peer Ports

This procedure explains how to configure the IP addresses for controllers communicating on a
Peer-to-Peer network through a Tricon TCM.
Note
Because NET 2 is reserved for OPC communication, the Peer-to-Peer protocol is not
available on NET 2 for model 4353 and 4354 TCMs. Peer-to-Peer communication can be
configured on NET 1 only for these TCMs.
Procedure
1

Allocation.
Click the Peer-to-Peer tab.
Under Slot Selection, select the module (slot) you want to configure Peer-to-Peer ports
for.
Select a node (controller), and specify these properties.
288
Chapter 3
Property
Action
Destination UDP Port
Enter the UDP port number for each controller to be

communicated with on the Peer-to-Peer network. This
must be the same number that the controller uses as its
UDP Base Port Number.
The default is 1503, 1504. You should not need to change
this setting unless the TCM is located behind a firewall.
Network
Click the network port that the TCM uses to

communicate with the selected Peer-to-Peer node. The
default is NET 1.
NET 2 is not available for model 4353 and 4354 TCMs.
IP Address
Enter the IP address for the controller.
Click Update to save the new settings for the selected node.
If you forget to click Update before selecting another node, your settings will be lost.
Repeat steps 4 through 6 for each node to be included in the network.

Note
If necessary, click Reset All to reset all node settings for the selected slot to their
default, unconfigured state.
Once all nodes have been configured, specify these properties (applicable to all nodes on
the Peer-to-Peer network).
Property
Action
UDP Base Port Number
For each network port, enter the UDP base port number for
the controller. Enter 0 to disable Peer-to-Peer over UDP/IP
on the network.
The default is 1503,1504 on both NET 1 and NET 2
(meaning Peer-to-Peer is enabled on both ports). UDP port
numbers do not need to be unique, as long as the IP
addresses for each port is unique. See UDP Base Port
Number on page 632 for reserved values.
Available only for NET 1 on model 4353 and 4354 TCMs.
Enable Communication
with Tricon V8 and V9
Peer-to-Peer Systems on
NET 1
Select the check box to enable communication with Tricon

version 8 and 9 systems on the NET 1 port. The default is
cleared.
Available only for a module installed in the left slot.
289
Configuring TCM Modbus TCP Ports

This procedure explains how to configure Modbus TCP ports on a Tricon TCM, which enables
Modbus communication through network ports.
For model 4351A/B and 4352A/B TCMs, 16 ports are available for Modbus TCP
communication. For model 4353 and 4354 TCMs, four ports are available on NET 1 only.
Note
Because NET 2 is reserved for OPC communication, Modbus TCP is not available on
NET 2 for model 4353 and 4354 TCMs.
Procedure
1

Allocation.
Click the Modbus TCP tab.
Under Slot Selection, select the module (slot) you want to configure Modbus TCP ports
for.
Select a port and specify these properties.
290
Chapter 3
Property
Action
Protocol
Select the communication protocol for the port. Options

include Modbus TCP Master and Modbus TCP Slave Net.
Port Write Enabled
Available only if Modbus TCP Slave is selected as the

communication protocol. Select this check box if you want
to allow Modbus writes to this slave port. The default is
Master Logical Port
Enter the number of the Modbus Master node (1-32).

Available only with Modbus TCP Master protocol. Must
be unique for each TCM installed in a system.
TCP Port Number
Enter the number for the TCP port. The default is 502.
Network
Click the network that the selected port is connected to.

For models 4351A/B and 4352A/B, the default is NET 2.
For models 4353 and 4354, the default is NET 1 (NET 2 is
not available for these TCMs).
IP Address
If the port uses Modbus Master protocol, enter the IP

address of the slave node.
If the port uses Modbus Slave protocol, enter either of
these:
To accept communication from any Modbus Master,
leave the IP address as 0.0.0.0.
To accept communication only from a defined
Modbus Master, enter the specific master IP address.
FP Ordering
Select the ordering to use for floating point numbers. The

Modbus (Minimum
and Maximum) Range
Enter the minimum and maximum for the Modbus data

range. Available only with Modbus TCP Slave Net.
291
Configuring TCM Routing

This procedure explains how to configure routing on a Tricon TCM. Up to 10 different routes
can be configured for each network; each slot (module) has two networks (NET 1 and NET 2).
Procedure
1

Allocation.
Click the Routing tab.
Select the module (slot) you want to configure routing for.
Select the network (NET 1 or NET 2) you want to configure routing for.
Select a destination route and then specify these properties.

Property
Action
Destination IP
Address
Enter the IP address which is used if the controller is not on the

same subnet as other devices.
Destination IP
Subnet Mask
Enter the IP address of the subnet mask.

If the gateway address is on NET 2, then the subnet mask must
be the same as the NET 2 subnet mask defined on the Network
tab. If the gateway address is on NET 1, then the subnet mask
must be the same as the NET 1 subnet mask defined on the
Network tab. See Configuring TCM Network Ports on page 282.
292
Chapter 3
Property
Action
Destination
Gateway IP
Address
Enter the IP address of the gateway to which the controller is

connected. The gateway address must always be on NET 1 or
NET 2.
Click Update Destination to apply the settings.

Note
If necessary, click Reset All to change all destination settings for the selected slot
to their default, unconfigured state.
Configuring TCM Protocols (Tricon v10.3 and Later Only)

This procedure explains how to configure the TSAA, TriStation, and OPC protocols used for
TCM communication in Tricon v10.3 and later systems.
The OPC protocol is available only with model 4353 and 4354 TCMs, and is supported on NET
2 only. Additionally, because NET 2 is reserved for OPC communication, the TSAA protocol is
not available on NET 2 for model 4353 and 4354 TCMs.
Note
The Protocols tab in the TCM Setup dialog box appears only when the target system
version is configured for Tricon v10.3 or later. For Tricon v10.1 and v10.2, the TSAA and
TriStation protocols are configured on the Network tab (see Configuring TCM Network
Ports on page 282).
Procedure
1

Allocation.
The TCM/OPC or TCM/B Setup dialog box appears.
Click the Protocols tab.
Select the module (slot) you want to configure protocols for.
Specify these properties for the protocol(s) you will be using with the TCM.
Protocol
Property
Action
TriStation
TriStation
Port Number
Enter the UDP port to use for TriStation connections

on NET 1 and NET 2. The default for both ports is
1502.
293
Cannot be the same as the Management or TSAA port

numbers.
See UDP Base Port Number on page 632 for
additional information.
Management
Management
Port Number
Enter the UDP port to use for the Enhanced

Diagnostic Monitors connection to TCM
communication status information on NET 1 and NET
2. The default for both ports is 1510.
This must be the same value as the Management UDP
Port Number property in the Enhanced Diagnostic
Monitors Network Configuration dialog box.
Cannot be the same as the TriStation or TSAA port
numbers.
Monitor Users Guide.
294
Chapter 3
Protocol
Property
Action
TSAA
TSAA Port
Number
Enter the UDP port to use for TSAA connections,

including DDE Server and SOE Recorder, on NET 1
and NET 2. The default for both ports is 1500.
Available only for NET 1 on model 4353 and 4354
TCMs.
Cannot be the same as the TriStation or Management
port numbers.
A value of 0 indicates that TSAA communication is
disabled on that port. See UDP Base Port Number on
page 632 for additional information.
Multicast IP
Address
Enter the IP address that TSAA multicasts should be

sent to. The default is 0.0.0.0 (IP multicasting is
disabled).
TCMs.
Bin data and/or SOE data available messages will be
sent to the specified address, so that all members of
the group will receive the data.
Note: To use TSAA multicasting, your network
hardware (such as routers) must also support
multicasting. See your Network Administrator or IT
department for more information.
Multicast
Update Rate
Enter the update rate, in milliseconds, for TSAA IP

multicasting. Can be from 250 to 2,000. The default
value is 1000.
TCMs.
sent to the multicast IP address at the specified
update rate (for example, by default, bin data will be
multicast every 1,000ms).
OPC A&E
SOE
SOE Block
Number
Enter the SOE block number used when events are

retrieved by an OPC client. Can be from 0 to 14. The
default value is 0 (not configured). Must be unique for
each TCM installed in a system.
Available with TCM models 4353 and 4354 only.
SOE Severity
Enter the severity (priority) level for SOE events (state

changes obtained from the SOE block). Can be from 1
to 1,000. The default value is 500.
Available with TCM models 4353 and 4354 only.
Protocol
Property
Action
OPC A&E
System
Events
Info Severity
Severity levels identify the urgency of an event.
295
Enter a number to represent the severity level for

informational system events. Can be from 1 (lowest)
to 1,000 (highest). Enter 0 if you do not want the TCM
to send notifications of informational system events to
OPC clients.
The default value is 100.
Minor
Severity

minor system events. Can be from 1 (lowest) to 1,000
(highest). Enter 0 if you do not want the TCM to send
notifications of minor system events to OPC clients.
Major
Severity

major system events. Can be from 1 (lowest) to 1000
notifications of major system events to OPC clients.
Fatal Severity
Enter a number to represent the severity level for fatal

system events. Can be from 1 (lowest) to 1000
notifications of fatal system events to OPC clients.
Disable All
Click to prevent the TCM from sending system event

notifications to OPC clients. Sets the severity levels for
all system event types to 0.
Reset All
Click to reset all OPC severity levels to their default

values.
CAUTION
the TCM access control list. See Controlling Access to the TCM on
page 386.
296
Chapter 3
Exporting the TCM Configuration to a File

Once TCM configuration is complete, you may want to export it to an XML file. Not only does
this provide a backup of your configuration settings, it also allows you to import the settings to
other TCMs, saving time and effort, and ensuring that all TCMs in a system have the same
configuration. Invensys technical support may also ask for an exported configuration file to
assist in troubleshooting TCM problems.
Note
An exported TCM configuration file cannot be modified outside of TriStation. If the

XML file is changed after export, you will be unable to import it into TriStation.
Procedure
1

Allocation.
Click Export.
If the TCM configuration has been changed, but not saved, you are asked if you want to
include the unsaved changes in the exported file.
4
Note
Navigate to the folder you want to save the exported configuration file in, enter a file
name, and click Save.
A TCM configuration file exported from a model 4351A/4352A TCM installed in a
Tricon v10.3 or later system cannot be imported to the same model TCM installed in a
Tricon v10.2 or earlier system.
297
Importing the TCM Configuration From a File

If you have already configured a TCM, and exported the configuration to a file, you can import
the saved configuration to another TCM.
If a configuration item exists in the exported file, but is not applicable to the TCM it is being
imported to, that item will be ignored. For example, if OPC configuration information is
included in the exported file, but the TCM the file is being imported to does not support OPC,
all OPC settings will be ignored.
If a configuration item exists in the TCM, but not in the file being imported, the default value
will be used. For example, if the TCM supports OPC, but OPC configuration items are not
included in the exported file, all OPC settings will be set to the default values. These values will
need to be manually configured.
In all cases, once the import is complete, you should review the TCM configuration to ensure
that all settings have been correctly configured for your implementation.
Procedure
1

Allocation.
Click Import.
If the TCM configuration has been changed, but not yet saved, you are asked if you want
to overwrite the existing configuration, including the unsaved changes, with the
imported settings.
Navigate to the folder where the exported configuration file is located, and click Open.
TCM configuration settings are imported from the selected file.
Click each tab of the TCM Setup dialog box to review and verify that all settings have
been correctly configured.
298
Chapter 3
Configuring Tricon Time Synchronization

This section explains how to use the Time Synchronization communication protocol with Tricon
controllers. Time synchronization enables a network of Triconex controllers to synchronize time
with each other or with external devices, such as a DCS or the Global Positioning System.
Topics include:
About Tricon Time Synchronization on page 298
Using a Tricon ACM to Synchronize Time on page 299
Using a Tricon NCM to Synchronize Time on page 300
Using a Tricon NCM/G to Synchronize Time on page 301
Using a Tricon SMM to Synchronize Time on page 302
Using a Tricon TCM to Synchronize Time on page 303
About Tricon Time Synchronization

This table summarizes the ways Tricon controller time can be synchronized to an external
device or to the Tricon master node in a Peer-to-Peer network.
Table 33
Tricon Time Synchronization
Module
ACM
Time Synchronization Options

To a Foxboro DCS.
To the Tricon master node in a Peer-to-Peer network.
ACM or NCM
To an OPC client. For more information, see the Communication Guide for Tricon
v9-v10 Systems.
By writing aliased data to the TIMESET or TIMEADJ function blocks in a
TriStation 1131 application. For assistance with the specialized programming
that is required, contact Invensys Technical Support.
NCMG
To the GPS (Global Positioning System).

SMM
To the Honeywell Universal Control Network (UCM).
TCM
To the GPS (Global Positioning System).

To SNTP.
To the Tricon master node in a Peer-to-Peer network (Triconex Time
Synchronization).
299
Using a Tricon ACM to Synchronize Time

This procedure explains how to use a Tricon ACM to enable time synchronization based on:
The Foxboro I/A Series nodebus system time
The Tricon master node in a Peer-to-Peer network
Procedure
1
Expand the Configuration tree, double-click Configuration, and expand Hardware

Allocation.
Double-click the ACM slot, and then click Setup.
Specify these properties on the ACM Setup screen.

Property
Action
Privilege
For synchronization on NET 2, specify Read/Write. The

default is Read.
Select On NET 1 enable time synchronization with

external source to allow time synchronization with a
Foxboro I/A DCS.
Select NET 2 to enable time synchronization with the
Tricon Master node (controller).
300
Chapter 3
Using a Tricon NCM to Synchronize Time

This procedure explains how to use a Tricon NCM to enable time synchronization with the
Tricon master node in a Peer-to-Peer network.
Procedure
1

Allocation.
Double-click the NCM slot, and then click Setup.
Select the On NET 1 enable time synchronization with Tricon Master Node check box.
301
Using a Tricon NCM/G to Synchronize Time

This procedure explains how to use a Tricon NCM/G to enable time synchronization through
the Global Positioning System (GPS) by using the Trimble Acutime Gold Smart GPS Antenna.
If the Tricon NCMG is in a Peer-to-Peer network, it can be used as the master node for time
synchronization of the controllers on the network.
For information on installing the kit, see the Communication Guide for Tricon v9-v10 Systems.
CAUTION
To ensure the accuracy of GPS time adjustments, the Tricon clock must be
set to within 10 minutes of the correct local time.
Procedure
1

Allocation.
Double-click the NCM/G slot, and then click Setup.
Specify these properties on the NCM Setup screen.

Property
Action
Global Positioning
System Installed
Select this check box to enable time synchronization through

the GPS.
If selected, other controllers can also be synchronized to the
Tricon master controller.
For a network of Triconex controllers, select the On NET 1

enable time synchronization with the Tricon Master Node
check box.
302
Chapter 3
Using a Tricon SMM to Synchronize Time

This procedure explains how to configure a Tricon SMM module to synchronize time based on
the Honeywell Universal Control Network (UCM).
For more information, see the SMM Users Guide.
Procedure
1

Allocation.
Double-click the SMM slot, and then click Setup.
Select the Enable time synchronization with external source check box.
303
Using a Tricon TCM to Synchronize Time

The information in this section explains how to enable time synchronization on a TCM. Time
synchronization can be enabled using the following protocols:
GPS
SNTP
Triconex Time Synchronization via DLC (NET 1 only) or UDP/IP (NET 1 or NET 22) on
a Peer-to-Peer network
In a redundant network of Triconex controllers that each have two TCMs installed, you can
implement redundant time synchronization by configuring time synchronization for both TCM
modules (both left and right slots). Time synchronization can be enabled only for a single logical
slot.
If the TCM is installed in the COM slot, you configure time synchronization only for the left slot
(there is no redundancy when installed in the COM slot).
Note
The information and procedures in this section do not apply to model 4351 and 4352
TCMs. If you have one of these older model TCMs installed in your system, please see
Appendix C, TCM Model 4351/4352 Configuration.
Topics include:
Configuring GPS Time Synchronization on the TCM on page 303
Configuring SNTP Time Synchronization on the TCM on page 305
Configuring Triconex Time Synchronization on the TCM on page 307
Configuring GPS Time Synchronization on the TCM

This procedure explains how to configure a TCM to enable time synchronization through the
Global Positioning System (GPS) by using the Trimble Acutime Gold Smart GPS Antenna. For
information on installing the kit, see the Communication Guide for Tricon v9-v10 Systems.
CAUTION
If the TCM is in a Peer-to-Peer network, it can also be used as the master node for time
synchronization of other controllers on the network. In this configuration, the master node TCM
synchronizes time with the GPS, and any slave nodes on the Peer-to-Peer network synchronize
their time with the master TCM. In this way, all nodes on the Peer-to-Peer network are
synchronized with GPS time.
If the TCM is acting as a slave node on a Peer-to-Peer network, it cannot be configured for GPS
time synchronization. Slave nodes synchronize their time only to the master node on the Peerto-Peer network, and reject all other time change requests.
GPS time synchronization uses Serial Port 1 on the TCM.
2.
NET 2 is not available for Triconex Time Synchronization with model 4353 and 4354 TCMs.
304
Chapter 3
Procedure
1

Allocation.
Double-click the slot where the TCM module is installed and then click Setup. The TCM
Setup dialog box appears.
Click the Time Sync tab.
Under Slot Selection, click Left Slot. You must configure the module in the left slot first.
Under Time Synchronization Configuration, select GPS.

If you previously configured Port 1 to use a Modbus protocol, selecting GPS will reset
Port 1 to use the GPS protocol. See Configuring TCM Serial Ports on page 280 for more
information.
(Optional) If you have a redundant TCM installed in the right slot, under Slot Selection,
click Right Slot, and then select GPS Redundant.
Note
The module in the right slot can be configured only if it has been installed (see
Configuring TCM Network Ports on page 282) and if the module in the left slot
has already been configured for GPS time synchronization.
Enabling the TCM as a Master Node for Triconex Time Synchronization (Optional)
If you also want the TCM to be able to act as a master node for time synchronization of other
controllers on a Peer-to-Peer network (using Triconex Time Synchronization) do the following:
1
In the Configuration tree, click Operating Parameters (see Setting Tricon Operating
Parameters on page 249).
Select the Enable Tricon Node Time Synchronization check box.
305
Configuring SNTP Time Synchronization on the TCM

This procedure explains how to configure TCM time synchronization to an SNTP server.
synchronizes time with the SNTP server, and any slave nodes on the Peer-to-Peer network
synchronize their time with the master TCM. In this way, all nodes on the Peer-to-Peer network
are synchronized with SNTP time.
If the TCM is acting as a slave node on a Peer-to-Peer network, it cannot be configured for SNTP
Note
SNTP time synchronization is less accurate than GPS time synchronization. Because the
SNTP server resides on a PC, network load issues or PC performance can result in delays
in processing time update requests from the Tricon.
Procedure
1

Allocation.
Select these properties.
306
Chapter 3
Property
Action
Configuration
Select SNTP. The default is None.
SNTP Master Network
Click the network the SNTP server is located on.
SNTP Master IP Address
Enter the IP address of the SNTP server to synchronize

time with.
click Right Slot, and then select these properties.
Property
Action
Configuration
Select SNTP Redundant.
SNTP Master Network
Click the network the SNTP server is located on. This

can be different than the master network selected for
the left slot.
Enter the IP address of the SNTP server to

synchronize time with.
Note
has already been configured for SNTP time synchronization.
1
307
Configuring Triconex Time Synchronization on the TCM

In a Peer-to-Peer network, Triconex Time Synchronization can be used to synchronize time
across controllers on a network. The controller with the lowest node number serves as the
master node.
The master node can also synchronize its time with a GPS or an SNTP server. In this
configuration, the master node synchronizes time with the GPS or SNTP server, and any slave
nodes on the Peer-to-Peer network synchronize their time with the master node. In this way, all
nodes on the Peer-to-Peer network are synchronized with GPS or SNTP time.
Configuring a Master Node

This procedure describes how to configure the TCM as a master node on the Peer-to-Peer
network when GPS or SNTP time synchronization is not being used.
If you want the master node to synchronize to a GPS or SNTP server, use the procedures in the
these sections:
Procedure
1

Allocation.
Under Time Synchronization Configuration, select None.

This allows the controller to participate as a master node in time synchronization across
the Peer-to-Peer network.
Configuring a Slave Node

This procedure describes how to configure the TCM as a slave node on the Peer-to-Peer
network.
Procedure
1

Allocation.
308
Chapter 3

Property
Action
Configuration
Select Peer-to-Peer. The default is None.
Peer-to-Peer Master
Network
Click the network you want to enable Triconex Time

Synchronization for. The default is NET 2.This
property applies to the modules installed in both the
left and right slots simultaneously.
Note
If you have a redundant TCM installed in the right slot, Time Synchronization
Configuration is automatically set to Peer-to-Peer and cannot be changed.

This allows the controller to participate as a slave node in time synchronization across
Printing the Tricon Module Configuration
309
Printing the Tricon Module Configuration

Once Tricon controller configuration is complete, you may want to print the module
configuration information. Not only does this provide a backup of your configuration settings,
it also can assist Invensys technical support when troubleshooting configuration problems.
Procedure
1
Hardware Module ConfigurationPrints a report listing the controller hardware

(MPs, CMs, I/O modules) currently configured in the project.
Module Configuration SettingsPrints a report listing the current configuration

settings for each applicable module in the projects hardware configuration. Only
modules that require configuration in TriStation are included in this report. For
example, TCM and EPI module configuration details are included, but the AI/DI
module is not, as it does not require configuration in TriStation.
Note
box.
310
Chapter 3
4
Trident and Tri-GP Controller
Configuration
Overview 312
Setting Trident or Tri-GP Operating Parameters 315
Allocating Memory for Trident or Tri-GP Points 317
Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Target System Version 318
Configuring Trident and Tri-GP Hardware 327
Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Communication Module 342
Configuring Trident or Tri-GP Time Synchronization 362
Using Trident or Tri-GP System and Module Attributes 369
Printing the Trident or Tri-GP Module Configuration 370
312
Chapter 4
Overview
This figure shows the main steps for configuring the Trident or Tri-GP controller, and their
typical order in the project cycle. The controller must be configured before an application can be
downloaded and implemented on a controller.
Set Up the Project
Develop the
Application
Test with the

Emulator
Fix Errors
Yes
Errors?
No
- Set operating parameters
C onfigure the
C ontroller
- Allocate memory and configure hardware

- C onfigure communication to external devices
- Set up Time Synchronization (optional)
Set Up TriStation
C ommunication
Implement on
the C ontroller
Trident and Tri-GP Controller Configuration Steps

This list includes the steps that can or should be done during Trident or Tri-GP controller
configuration. Controller configuration must be completed before an application is downloaded
to the controller.
Description
See
Set the operating parameters.
Setting Trident or Tri-GP Operating

Parameters on page 315
Allocate memory and hardware.
Allocating Memory for Trident or Tri-GP

Points on page 317
Configure hardware.
Configuring Trident and Tri-GP Hardware on

page 327
Configure communication to external devices.
Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP

Communication Module on page 342
Set up time synchronization.
Configuring Trident or Tri-GP Time

Synchronization on page 362
Overview
313
The Trident and Tri-GP Controller Workspace

This section explains the Controller Workspace, which is where you specify the configuration
for the project. Topics include:
The Trident and Tri-GP Controller Trees on page 313
The Trident and Tri-GP Configuration Trees on page 313
The Trident and Tri-GP Controller and Emulator Panels on page 314
The Trident and Tri-GP Controller Trees

The Trident and Tri-GP Controller trees include the
elements (operating parameters, communication settings,
memory allocation, and hardware allocation) that can be
configured. The tree also includes the Controller and
Emulator Panels used to emulate and run an application.
The Trident Controller tree is shown at right.
The Trident and Tri-GP Configuration Trees

The Trident and Tri-GP Configuration trees include
operating parameters, communication, memory
allocation, hardware allocation, and Status Attributes.
314
Chapter 4
The Trident and Tri-GP Controller and Emulator Panels

The Trident and Tri-GP Controller and Emulator Panels display programs running in emulation
or in the controller.
Controller and
Emulator tree
Setting Trident or Tri-GP Operating Parameters
315
Setting Trident or Tri-GP Operating Parameters

This procedure explains how to specify Trident or Tri-GP operating parameters, which are
settings that affect the general operation of the controller, including settings to restrict access to
the controller from a TriStation PC and from remote devices.
You can view Trident or Tri-GP operating parameters by clicking Operating Parameters on the
Trident or Tri-GP Configuration tree. However, you cannot make changes to the operating
parameters from that screen. You must access the Operating Parameters tab on the MP Setup
dialog box (as described below) to set or change operating parameters.
Note
The target system version displayed on the Operating Parameters screen is the target
system version currently configured in the project. This value is not obtained from a
connected controller. To view the actual system version of your Trident or Tri-GP
system, see Determining Your Trident or Tri-GP Controllers System Version on
page 318.
Procedure
1
Specify these properties on the Operating Parameters tab.

Property
Action
Password Required
for Connection
Select the check box to restrict access by requiring a password

when connecting to the controller. The default is cleared.
Password
Enter the password required to access the controller. The default is

PASSWORD.
316
Chapter 4
Property
Action
Restart on Power
Up
Select the check box to have the application restarted after a power
failure. The default is cleared.
Disable Remote
Changes to
Outputs
Clear the check box to allow remote devices to write to output

points. The default is selected.
Allow Disabling of
Points
Select the check box to allow points to be disabled from TriStation

1131. The default is cleared.
This property can be changed only when your project is in the
Download All state.
If you change this property (by selecting or clearing the check
box), you must perform a Download All to apply your changes to
the controller. TriStation will automatically rebuild the application
before it is downloaded.
Enable
Trident/Tri-GP
Node Time
Synchronization
(Trident 2.x or
Tri-GP only)
Select the check box to allow the controller to participate in time

synchronization across the Peer-to-Peer network as a master node
or a slave node (see Configuring Triconex Time Synchronization
on the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM on page 367).
Use Local Time
Clear the check box if you do not want to use local time. The
default is selected.
Prevent Restart
Following Fatal
Error
(Trident 2.x or
Tri-GP only)
Select the check box to prevent the MPs from restarting

automatically after a fatal error occurs.
Applicable to Trident 2.x and Tri-GP systems only. The default is

cleared.
By default, when a Trident or Tri-GP MP detects a fatal error

condition, it will automatically restart, and when possible, reeducate from the other active MPs. This allows the system to
overcome temporary problems without user intervention.
When this property is selected, if the MP detects a fatal error, it
will shut down without a restart attempt, requiring user
intervention to restart the MP. This will cause the controller to go
to either DUAL or SINGLE mode.
In all cases, if an MP attempts to automatically restart more than
three times in 30 minutes, all future restart attempts will be
disabled, to prevent the MP from continually restarting.
If all three MPs shut down, user intervention will be required to
restart the system.
Applicable to Trident 2.x and Tri-GP systems only. The default is
cleared.
Note: The default restart behavior described above applies to
Trident 1.x systems, but cannot be changed.
4
Note
Click OK to save.
Using the Print All command, you can print a report listing the current Operating
Parameters settings. See Printing Project Documents on page 91.
Allocating Memory for Trident or Tri-GP Points
317
Allocating Memory for Trident or Tri-GP Points

This procedure explains how to change the amount of memory used for input, output, and
memory points (tagnames) in the application.
Initially, the amount of memory for input and output points is determined by the number and
type of I/O modules configured in the TriStation 1131 project. The amount of memory for
memory points is set when a TriStation 1131 project is created. You can change these allocations
at any time before building and downloading the application.
CAUTION
After an application has been downloaded to the controller or Emulator,

changes to memory allocation require a Download All (see Using the
See What Are Undeclared Tagnames? on page 184 for more information about memory
allocation for points.
Procedure
1
Expand the Controller tree, double-click Configuration, and then expand Memory
Allocation.
Double-click the type of point you want to change.
Move the slider up or down to change the memory allocated for the selected point.
Repeat for all points to be changed.
Note
Using the Print All command, you can print a report listing the current memory
allocation settings. See Printing Project Documents on page 91.
318
Chapter 4
Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Target System

Version
This procedure explains how to change the target system version in your project. The target
system version determines which Trident or Tri-GP controller features and modules can be
configured in a project. You originally set the target system version when you created a new
project, or when you converted an existing project to TriStation 1131 v4.6 or later.
Note
TriStation 1131 v4.9.0 supports only one version of the Tri-GP controllerversion 2.1.x.
Thus, you cannot change the target system version for a Tri-GP controller.
If you change the system version of your Trident controller (for example, you upgrade your
Trident system from v1.4 to v2.0), you must logically configure the change in the TriStation 1131
project. This change requires a Download All.
Before committing to the target system version change, you are allowed to back up your project.
Configuring the target system version is a three-step process:
Determine the system version of the Trident or Tri-GP controller the project will be
downloaded to.
Validate the target system version change to review the changes that will be made to
the project before committing to the change.
Change the target system version in the project.
Topics include:
Determining Your Trident or Tri-GP Controllers System Version on page 318
Validating a Trident Target System Version Change on page 320
Changing the Trident Target System Version on page 321
Results of a Trident Target System Version Change on page 324
Determining Your Trident or Tri-GP Controllers System Version

Before changing the target system version in your TriStation 1131 project, you should determine
the system version of the Trident or Tri-GP controller you will be downloading the project to.
You need to know the following:
The model number of the Main Processor modules installed in the Trident or Tri-GP
(3101)
The Trident or Tri-GP system version (for example, v1.2, v1.5, v2.0, etc.)
The target system version currently configured in the project is displayed on the Operating
Parameters screen and at the top of the Select Main Processor dialog box.
Procedure
1
If any of the following scenarios are true, go to step 2:
Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Target System Version
319
You know you have a Trident 1.x system.

You are unable to connect to the Trident or Tri-GP controller.
For a Trident controller, you do not have the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor
v2.2 or later. The Trident target system version is not available in Enhanced
Diagnostic Monitor v2.1 and earlier.
For a Tri-GP controller, you do not have the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor
v2.5.0 or later. The Tri-GP target system version is not available in Enhanced
Diagnostic Monitor v2.4.0 and earlier.
If the above scenarios do not apply to your situation, go to step 3.
Refer to your sales order paperwork, which should specify your Trident or Tri-GP
controllers system version. You do not need to continue with this procedure.
Open the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor (for more detailed instructions, see the Enhanced
Diagnostic Monitor User's Guide).
Connect to the node (controller) whose system version you want to find.
In the System Overview tree, click System Overview. The System Overview window
appears.
Trident System Version
View the system version information, located at the top of the System Overview
window.
Note
System version information is not available for Trident 1.x controllers. This
property will display 0 when you are connected to a Trident 1.x controller.
320
Chapter 4
Validating a Trident Target System Version Change

determine what effect it will have on your project. Validation allows you to plan ahead for the
changes that will occur when you switch from one target system version to another.
For detailed information about the changes that occur when switching from one target system
version to another, see the Trident Target System Version Change Matrix on page 325.
Procedure
1

Allocation.
Double-click the IOP whose target system version you want to change, and then click
Replace MP.

Property
Description
Model
The Main Processor model installed in the controller that this

Target System
Version
The system version of the Tridenta controller that this project

will be downloaded to. Use the on-screen descriptions to help
you determine the correct version to select, based on your
controller configuration.
a. TriStation 1131 v4.9.0 does not support Trident controller versions v1.1 and earlier. For a list
of TriStation 1131 versions compatible with your Trident controller, see the applicable
Trident Product Release Notice (available on the Invensys Global Customer Support web
site).
Note
321
If you arent sure which Trident system version to select, use the Enhanced
Diagnostic Monitor or your sales paperwork to verify your controllers system
version information. See Determining Your Trident or Tri-GP Controllers
System Version on page 318 for more information.
Select the Validate Only check box.
Click OK.
TriStation 1131 analyzes your project settings and current controller configuration to
determine the modifications that will be made to the project if you change to the selected
target system version.
In the Messages pane, review the results of the validation to determine if you want to
commit to the target system version change.
Changing the Trident Target System Version

The target system version determines which Trident controller features and modules can be
configured in a project. You selected the target system version for your project when you
created it, or when you converted the project from a previous version of TriStation 1131.
If you have upgraded your Trident system to a newer version, you also need to change the
target system version in your TriStation 1131 project.
When changing the target system version, you can upgrade or downgrade the version number
of the Trident system (for example, upgrade from v1.5 to v2.0, or downgrade from v1.5 to v1.3).
You cannot be connected to the controller while you are changing the target system version.
If time synchronization has been enabled on the Trident CM or MP (as described below), it will
be disabled during a target system version change from 1.x to 2.x, or vice-versa.
On the Trident 2.x controller, time synchronization is enabled if the Enable

Trident/Tri-GP Node Time Synchronization check box is selected on the Operating
Parameters tab of the MP Setup dialog box.
On the Trident 1.x controller, time synchronization is enabled if either the On NET 1
Enable Time Synchronization or the On NET 2 Enable Time Synchronization properties
are selected on the Network tab of the CM Setup dialog box.
You will need to re-enable time synchronization after the target system version change is
complete. See Configuring Trident or Tri-GP Time Synchronization on page 362 for more
information.
Upgrading or downgrading within a major Trident controller version (for example, from 1.2 to
1.6) will NOT change your time synchronization settings.
322
Chapter 4
CAUTION
If you are upgrading from Trident 1.x to Trident 2.x, the configuration
settings for the CM will be reset to their default values during the target
system version change.
We recommend writing down your Trident 1.x CM onfiguration details
before changing the target system version, so that you can use them to
reconfigure the Trident 2.x CM after the target system version change is
complete.
determine what effect it will have on your project. See Validating a Trident Target System
Version Change on page 320.
Procedure
1
Verify that you are not connected to the controller.
If needed, change the project state to Download All.
On the Commands menu, click Change State to Download All.
In the Change Project State to Download All dialog box, click Change State.

Allocation.
Double-click the IOP whose system version you want to change, and then click Replace
MP.
Note
If the Replace MP button is unavailable, the project is in the Download Changes

state. Go back to step 2 to change the project state before continuing.
323

Property
Description
Model
The Main Processor model installed in the Trident controller

that this project will be downloaded to.
Target System
Version
The system version of the Tridenta controller that this project

will be downloaded to. Use the on-screen descriptions to help
you determine the correct version to select, based on your
Trident configuration.
a. TriStation 1131 v4.9.0 does not support Trident controller versions 1.1 and earlier. For a list
of TriStation 1131 versions compatible with your Trident controller, see the applicable
Trident Product Release Notice (available on the Invensys Global Customer Support web
site).
Note
If you arent sure which Trident system version to select, use the Enhanced
Diagnostic Monitor to verify your Trident system version information. See
Determining Your Trident or Tri-GP Controllers System Version on page 318 for
more information.
Click OK.
When asked to confirm your selection, click Yes to continue.
When asked to backup your project before changing the target system version, do one
of the following:
(Recommended) Click Yes and then specify the folder to save the backup file to. Use
the suggested name, or specify a new one. The file extension (.bt2) does not have to
be included in the name.
Click No to continue without creating a backup file.
TriStation 1131 reconfigures your project to the selected target system version. All
current configuration settings are maintained; however, any parameters that did not
exist in the previous version are set to their default values.
324
Chapter 4
In the Messages pane, review the results of the target system version change. For more
information, see the Trident Target System Version Change Matrix on page 325.
10
To finish the process, you must build the application and download it to the controller.
Results of a Trident Target System Version Change

The following table describes the changes that are made to your project when changing from
one target system version to another.
To use the Trident Target System Version Change Matrix:

1
Find the column for your current system version on the top.
Then move down to locate the row (on the left) for the system version you want to
change your project to.
The box where your selected column and row meet describes the changes that will be
made to your project if you change to the new target system version.
Table 34
Trident Target System Version Change Matrix

ORIGINAL
VERSION
NEW
VERSION
v1.0 or v1.1
v1.5.x or v1.6.x
v2.0.x
v2.1.x
Note: A target system version change (upgrade or downgrade) requires that the project state be changed to Download All, with one
exceptionwhen you are converting a project created in a version of TriStation prior to v4.6. During project conversion, projects created with
a previous version of TriStation will remain in the Download Changes state regardless of a target system version change. For more
information, see Converting Existing Projects to Version 4.9.0 on page 11.
v1.0 or v1.1
v1.2,
v1.3.x, or
v1.4.x
v1.2, v1.3.x, or
v1.4.x
NOT ALLOWED
UPGRADE
Add support for model 3381 PI
module.
Add support for model 3481
AO module.
AI module.
CM.
v2.0.x
UPGRADE
module.
AO module.
AI module.
AI /DI module.
Add support for original and
enhanced model 3201 CM.
UPGRADE
Add support for model
3361 AI /DI module.
Add support for enhanced
model 3201 CM.
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
DOWNGRADE
Remove model 3361 AI /DI
module.
DOWNGRADE
module.
Remove support for
DOWNGRADE
module.
3381 PI module.
Remove model 3382 EPI
module.
Remove model 3411 SDO
module.
Remove model 3311 HRDI
module.
Remove support for
DOWNGRADE
Remove support for
DOWNGRADE
module.
3381 PI module.
module.
module.
Remove support for
UPGRADE
model 3201 CM.
DOWNGRADE
module.
3381 PI module.
module.
module.

325
UPGRADE
3361 AI /DI module.
v1.5.x or
v1.6.x
UPGRADE
module.
AO module.
AI module.
AI /DI module.
CM.
NOT ALLOWED
Trident Target System Version Change Matrix (continued)

v1.0 or v1.1
v1.2, v1.3.x, or
v1.4.x
v2.0.x
UPGRADE
Replace model 3381 PI
module with model 3382
EPI module.
3382 EPI module.
3411 SDO module.
3311 HRDI module.
model 3201 CM.
UPGRADE
EPI module.
3382 EPI module.
3411 SDO module.
3311 HRDI module.
NEW
VERSION
v2.1.x
UPGRADE
Replace model 3381 PI module
with model 3382 EPI module.
AO module.
AI module.
AI /DI module.
EPI module.
SDO module.
HRDI module.
Add support for original and
UPGRADE
EPI module.
3361
AI /DI module.
3382 EPI module.
3411 SDO module.
3311 HRDI module.
model 3201 CM.
v2.1.x
v1.5.x or v1.6.x
Chapter 4
ORIGINAL
VERSION
326
Table 34
Configuring Trident and Tri-GP Hardware
327

This section explains how to configure the hardware allocation for a Trident or Tri-GP
controller. Topics include:
Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Main Processors (MPs) on page 327
Inserting a Trident or Tri-GP Module on page 334
Removing a Trident or Tri-GP Module on page 335
Configuring a Trident or Tri-GP SDO Module on page 335
Configuring a Trident or Tri-GP HRDI Module on page 336
Configuring a Trident or Tri-GP PI or EPI Module on page 339
Note
For information on configuring the CM, see Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP
Communication Module on page 342.
Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Main Processors (MPs)

This section explains how to configure the Trident or Tri-GP MP properties, network ports, and
serial ports. Topics include:
Specifying Trident or Tri-GP MP Module Properties on page 327
Displaying Trident or Tri-GP MP Attribute Properties on page 329
Configuring Trident 1.x MP Network Ports on page 330
Configuring Trident 2.x or Tri-GP MP Network Ports on page 331
Configuring Trident or Tri-GP MP Serial Ports on page 332
Specifying Trident or Tri-GP MP Module Properties

This procedure explains how to view and specify properties on the Trident or Tri-GP MP
Module tab. This procedure applies to Trident 1.x, Trident 2.x, and Tri-GP MPs.
Procedure
1
On the Controller tree, double-click Configuration.
an MP. The Item Properties dialog box appears.
328
Chapter 4
4
Note
Specify these properties on the Module tab.

Property
Action
Model
Select the model used in the physical system.
Description
Enter a description, if desired.
Node Name
Displays the node name and number.
Scan Time
Displays the scan time, if it has been specified.
Remote Access to
Aliased Tagnames
Select to have remote access only to aliased tagnames.
Remote Access to
All Tagnames
Select to have remote access to all tagnames.
Click Confirm to save your changes.

You cannot specify point properties for a Trident or Tri-GP MP.
329
Displaying Trident or Tri-GP MP Attribute Properties

This procedure explains how to display MP attribute properties (status and control attributes).
Procedure
1
an MP. The Item Properties dialog box appears.
Click the Attributes tab.

These properties are displayed on the Attributes tab.
Property
Description
Tagname
The name of the status or control attribute.
Data Type
The data type.
Location
The memory location for the attribute.
Description
The description of the attribute.
330
Chapter 4
Configuring Trident 1.x MP Network Ports

This procedure explains how to configure network ports on a Trident 1.x MP, which supports
network connections to a TriStation PC.
Each port must be configured separately and can operate independently with different Modbus
Masters. Or, they can operate as redundant serial ports, connected to redundant ports of the
same Modbus Master.
Procedure
1

Allocation.
Double-click the MP slot, click Setup, and then click the Network Ports tab.
Specify these properties on the Network Ports tab.
Property
Action
Mode
Set to TriStation; cannot be changed.
Transceiver Port
Set to RJ-45; cannot be changed.
Transceiver Mode
Select half or full duplex depending on the installation.
331
Configuring Trident 2.x or Tri-GP MP Network Ports

This procedure explains how to configure network ports on a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP MP, which
supports network connections to a TriStation PC.
Each port must be configured separately and can operate independently with different Modbus
Masters. Or, they can operate as redundant serial ports, connected to redundant ports of the
same Modbus Master.
Note
The first time you connect to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP controller to download your
application, you must connect either via serial port, or via a network connection to the
Left MP, using the default IP address. IP addresses configured for the Middle and Right
MP network ports are not valid for the initial connection to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP
controller. See Connecting to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Controller for the First Time on
page 411 for more information.
Procedure
1

Allocation.
Double-click the MP slot, click Setup, and then click the Network Ports tab.
Specify these properties on the Network Ports tab.

Property
Action
Mode
Set to TriStation; cannot be changed.
Transceiver Port
Set to RJ-45; cannot be changed.
Transceiver Mode
Select half or full duplex depending on the installation.
332
Chapter 4
Property
Action
IP Address
Specify the IP address of the controller.

The default IP address is 192.168.255.n, where n is the
node number of the controller. The default IP address
is for connection to the Left MP only.
Configuring Trident or Tri-GP MP Serial Ports

This procedure explains how to configure serial ports on a Trident 1.x, Trident 2.x, or Tri-GP
MP, which supports serial connections using Modbus Slave RTU protocol.
Procedure
1

Allocation.
Double-click the MP slot, click Setup, and then click the Serial Ports tab.
Specify these properties on the Serial Ports tab.

Property
Action
Port Selection
Select the port to be configured.
Protocol
Only Modbus Slave RTU is available.
Property
Action
Enter the slave address of the serial port on the MP

Baseplate.
Baud Rate
Select the rate used in the installation.
Data Bits
Set at 8 bits; cannot be changed.
Stop Bits
Select 1 Bit or 2 Bits.
Parity
Select a parity option.
Transceiver Mode
Select RS-232 or RS-485, depending on the physical

connection.
Handshake
Set to none; cannot be changed.
Wire Type
Set to 4 wire; cannot be changed.
Modbus (Minimum and

Maximum) Range
Enter a minimum value (0 is default) and maximum

value (32,767 is maximum).
Signal Delays
Set to 0; cannot be changed.
Copy Current Setup to Other

Serial Ports Command
Click to have the settings for the selected port copied

to the other two serial ports on the MP.
333
334
Chapter 4
Inserting a Trident or Tri-GP Module

This procedure explains how to insert a Trident or Tri-GP module in a configuration.
If a CM is added to a configuration after the application has been downloaded to the controller,
you must use the Download All command to download the change.
Note
If you already have a model 3301 DI module installed, you can quickly change it to a
model 3311 HRDI module (and vice-versa) by double-clicking on the module in the
configuration pane, selecting the model 3311 HRDI module from the Model list in the
Item Properties dialog box, and then clicking Confirm. This configuration shortcut can
also be used when switching between the model 3481 and 3482 AO modules.
Procedure
1
On the Controller tree, double-click

Configuration.
On the Configuration tree, open the

Hardware Allocation node, and then click
the MP slot.
On the Tools menu, click Insert Module.

The Insert Module dialog box appears.
Select the type of module you want to add

to the configuration, and click OK.
The mouse pointer changes to look like
this:
Click on the configuration pane to add the

module to the configuration.
Configuration
pane
Module being
added
If you added an SDO, HRDI, EPI, PI, or CM module, configure the module using the
instructions specific to that module:
Configuring a Trident or Tri-GP SDO Module on page 335
Configuring a Trident or Tri-GP HRDI Module on page 336
Configuring a Trident or Tri-GP PI or EPI Module on page 339
Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Communication Module on page 342
335
Removing a Trident or Tri-GP Module

This procedure explains how to remove a module from a Trident or Tri-GP controller
configuration.
If a CM is removed from a configuration after the application has been downloaded to the
controller, you must use the Download All command to download the change.
Procedure
1
On the Configuration tree, click Hardware Allocation.
On the configuration pane, click the icon that represents the module, and then press the
Delete key.
Configuring a Trident or Tri-GP SDO Module

This procedure explains how to configure a Trident (model 3411) or Tri-GP (model 3411S2)
Supervised Digital Output (SDO) module, which provides loop supervision to field devices in
fire and gas applications. 16 points are available; each point can be independently configured.
The model 3411 SDO module is compatible only with Trident v2.1 and later systems. See the
Planning and Installation Guide for Trident v2 Systems for more information.
The model 3411S2 SDO module is compatible only with Tri-GP v2.1 and later systems. See the
Planning and Installation Guide for Tri-GP v2 Systems for more information.
Procedure
1
On the Configuration tree, expand the Hardware Allocation node, and then expand the
MP node the SDO module is installed in.
Double-click the SDO module, and then click Setup.
336
Chapter 4
Select the tagname (point) to be configured, and then select how you want the point to
be configured:
If you want to inhibit supervision for the selected point, select the Inhibit
Supervision check box This will suppress reporting of supervisory alarms (i.e.
open-loads).
If you want the selected point to be supervised, clear the Inhibit Supervision check
box. This will provide detection and alarming of supervisory (i.e. open-load)
conditions.
The default for each point is Supervised (the check box is cleared).
WARNING
5
Using the SYS_OVD_INHIBIT function block to inhibit OVDs on a point

overrides the supervisory configuration and results in loss of supervision
of that point. See the TriStation Libraries Reference for more information
about the SYS_OVD_INHIBIT function block.
Press Shift and click to select multiple contiguous tagnames.
Press Ctrl and click to select multiple non-contiguous tagnames.
Configuring a Trident or Tri-GP HRDI Module

This procedure explains how to configure a Trident (model 3311) or Tri-GP (model 3311S2)
High-Resolution Digital Input (HRDI) module, which allows you to enable highly-accurate
sequence of events (SOE) recording for point transitions at a resolution of up to 1 msec.
A point transition (or event) is the state change of a Boolean variable from True to False or from
False to True. The HRDI has 32 points available; each point can be independently configured.
Note
For more information about using sequence of events in your application, see SOE
Development on page 222.
The model 3311 HRDI module is compatible only with Trident v2.1 and later systems. See the
Planning and Installation Guide for Trident v2 Systems for more information.
The model 3311S2 HRDI module is compatible only with Tri-GP v2.1 and later systems. See the
Planning and Installation Guide for Tri-GP v2 Systems for more information.
Procedure
1
MP node the HRDI module is installed in.
Double-click the HRDI module, and then click Setup.
337
Select the tagname to be configured, and then specify these properties in the HRDI Setup
dialog box.
Property
Action
SOE Trigger State
Determines if SOE is enabled for the selected point. When SOE is

enabled, the HRDI module will time stamp and record point
transitions for the selected point.
Select the option to be used for the selected point.
Disabled: SOE is not enabled for the point. Point transitions
will not be reported.
Rising: SOE is enabled for the point. Point transitions will be
reported when the Boolean value changes from False to True
(0 to 1).
Falling: SOE is enabled for the point. Point transitions will be
reported when the Boolean value changes from True to False
(1 to 0).
Rising/Falling: SOE is enabled for the point. Point transitions
will be reported for both Rising and Falling changes (False to
True, or True to False).
The default is Disabled.
338
Chapter 4
Property
Action
SOE Trigger Time
Defines the number of milliseconds (with an accuracy of 1 msec or

less) a signal must be stable before its change in state (transition)
causes the reporting of an event. Also known as the debounce
period.
A longer trigger time results in a longer debounce period, so that
pulse widths that fall within the debounce period will not be
reported as an event.
Enter the trigger time in milliseconds. The available range is 0 to
250 msec.
If any trigger with a pulse width larger than x msec needs to
be reported as an event, then enter x-1 msec. For example, to
report a pulse width larger than 75, enter 74 as the trigger time
(because 75-1=74).
If any trigger with a pulse width smaller than x msec needs to
be filtered out (not reported as an event), then enter x+1 msec.
For example, to filter out a pulse width smaller than 30, enter
31 as the trigger time (because 30+1=31).
The default is 0, meaning there is no debounce period, and:
A trigger with a pulse width larger than 1 msec will always
generate an event.
A trigger with a pulse width smaller than 1 msec may or may
not generate an event.
Only available if SOE has been enabled for the point.
SOE Dead Time
Defines the length of time after a transition before a subsequent

transition will be reported. Once a transition on the selected point
has occurred, any subsequent transitions will be reported only
after the dead time interval has elapsed.
A longer dead time interval is better able to prevent the higherlevel SOE application from being flooded with events, but it also
means there is a higher chance of losing subsequent transition
events.
Enter the amount of dead time in seconds. The available range is 0
to 250 sec, with an accuracy of 10 msec or less.
The default is 0, meaning any subsequent transition will generate
an event as long as the previous transition on the same point has
been collected and cleared. It does not mean that every transition
on the same point will generate an event, as a transition on the
same point that occurs too soonbefore the previous event is
clearedmay be missed.
Only available if SOE has been enabled for the point.
339
Configuring a Trident or Tri-GP PI or EPI Module

This procedure explains how to configure the following Trident or Tri-GP modules:
Model 3381 Trident Pulse Input (PI) module (compatible only with Trident v2.0 and
earlier systems)
Model 3382 Trident Enhanced Pulse Input (EPI) module (compatible only with Trident
v2.1.x and later systems)
Model 3382S2 Tri-GP Enhanced Pulse Input (EPI) module (compatible only with Tri-GP
v2.1.x and later systems)
These modules are used for speed and RPM inputs. Six points are available; each point can be
independently configured. Acceleration and jerk measurements for each point are available on
the EPI module only.
Note
The number of points for the EPI (model 3382 or 3382S2) module displays as 24 in the
Insert Module dialog box (see Inserting a Trident or Tri-GP Module on page 334). This
is because each of the six available points provides speed, acceleration, and jerk
measurements as separate logical points (for a total of 18 logical points); six additional
points are also included in the total, but are reserved for future use.
A maximum of 5 EPI modules can be configured in a Trident 2.1 or later, or Tri-GP, project. For
information about system configuration restrictions and validated I/O module configurations
in earlier Trident versions, please see the Product Release Notice for your Trident version.
If you have a PI module installed in a Trident 2.0 or earlier project, please note the following:
Upgrading the target system version for your project to Trident 2.1 or later will
automatically upgrade the PI module to an EPI module.
The existing PI module point configuration is retained for the EPI module during a
target system version upgrade to Trident 2.1 or later.
TriStation 1131 will not allow you to upgrade the projects target system version to
Trident 2.1 or later if more than five PI modules are installed in the project. You must
remove the excess PI modules from your project prior to starting a target system
version change. See Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Target System Version on
page 318 for more information about changing the target system version.
If you have more than five PI modules installed in your Trident v2.0 or earlier system,
you will need to physically remove the excess modules from the Trident chassis, rewire
the PI points that were connected to those modules, and reprogram your application
accordingly. All of these tasks should be completed prior to upgrading to Trident 2.1.
Because the EPI module requires a greater memory allocation than the PI module, the
automatic upgrade from a PI module to an EPI module may not be successful in cases
where not enough memory is available to be allocated to the EPI module(s).
Procedure
1
MP node the PI or EPI module is installed in.
340
Chapter 4
Double-click the PI or EPI module, and then click Setup.
Select the tagname (point) to be configured, and then specify these properties in the PI
Setup dialog box.
Property
Action
Field Power
Select Field Power Present if the installed system has field

power connected to the Pulse Input Baseplate. The default is
Field Power Absent.
Min Field
Enter the minimum range for field power in volts. The

default is 0 volts.
Available only when Field Power Present is selected.
Max Field
Enter the maximum range for field power in volts. The

default is 33 volts.
Available only when Field Power Present is selected.
Rate Type
Select Speed or RPM to specify the type of rate applied to

pulse input signals.
Speed: Used for pulses measured in seconds, minutes, or
hours.
RPM: Used for pulses measured in the number of
revolutions per minute of the shaft that connects a gear
to the rotating equipment.
Not available if an Acceleration or Jerk point is selected (EPI
module only).
Property
Action
Triggering Mode
Select Rising Edge or Falling Edge depending on the

installation.
341

module only).
Number of Gear Teeth
Enter the number of gear teeth that are counted in each

revolution.
The Rate Type property must be specified as RPM to enable
this property.
module only).
Scale Factor
Specifies how to convert pulse input signals into engineering

units. For:
Pulses per second, set to 0.016667.
Pulses per minute, set to 1.0 (default).
Pulses per hour, set to 60.0
module only).
342
Chapter 4
Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Communication

Module
This section explains how to configure the Trident or Tri-GP Communication Module (CM) for
communication with external devices.
Note
In addition to configuring ports on the communication module(s), you also need to

configure the Trident or Tri-GP controllers network and/or serial connection to the
TriStation PC, in order connect to the controller and download your application. For
more information, see Chapter 6, Trident and Tri-GP Communication with TriStation
1131.
Topics include:
Configuring the Trident v1.x Communication Module on page 342
Configuring the Trident v2.x or Tri-GP Communication Module on page 346
See Configuring Trident or Tri-GP Controller Printing on page 439 for instructions on
configuring the Trident or Tri-GP CM for use with a printer.
Configuring the Trident v1.x Communication Module

These procedures explain how to configure the network and serial ports on a CM installed in a
Trident v1.x system. Topics include:
Configuring Trident v1.x CM Network Ports on page 342
Configuring Trident v1.x CM Serial Ports on page 344
Configuring Trident v1.x CM Routing on page 345
Configuring Trident v1.x CM Network Ports

This procedure explains how to configure network ports on a Trident v1.x CM, which supports
these connections:
To a TriStation PC
To a Peer-to-Peer network of Triconex controllers
To an external device or network
Procedure
1

Allocation.
Double-click the CM, click Setup, and then click the Network tab.
Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Communication Module
343

Property
Action
Slot Selection
Select the slot to be configured.
Mode
Select Open Network or Peer-to-Peer for either NET 1 or NET

2.
You cannot use the same mode on both ports.
Privilege
Select Read to restrict access from external devices. Not

available with Peer-to-Peer. The default is Read/Write.
Transceiver Port
Select the type of port used.
Transceiver Mode
Select the mode used. Not available with Peer-to-Peer.
IP Address
Enter the IP address of the controller. Not available with Peerto-Peer.
IP Subnet Mask
Enter the subnet mask, if needed. Not available with Peer-toPeer.
Default Gateway IP
Address
Enter the default gateway, if needed. Not available with Peerto-Peer.
Select to enable time synchronization on NET 1 or NET 2.
344
Chapter 4
Configuring Trident v1.x CM Serial Ports

This procedure explains how to configure serial ports on a Trident v1.x CM, which supports
connections using Modbus slave, master, and master/slave protocols.
Procedure
1

Allocation.
Double-click the CM slot, click Setup, and then click the Serial Ports tab.
Specify these properties on the Serial Ports tab.

Property
Action
Port Selection
Select the port to be configured.
Protocol
Select the protocol to use.
Modbus Station
Enter the slave address of the serial port on the MP

Baseplate. Not used with Master protocol. See Modbus Slave
Address on page 563.
Baud Rate
Select the rate used in the installation.
Data Bits
Select 7 or 8 bits; only available with slave ASCII protocol.

Set to 8 bits for all other protocols.
Stop Bits
Select 1 Bit or 2 Bits.
Parity
Select the parity option.
Transceiver Mode
Select RS-232 or RS-485, depending on the physical

connection.
Handshake
Select Hardware to use signal delays to determine if the

connection is valid.
Wire Type
Select 2 or 4 wire, depending on the installation.
345
Property
Action
Modbus (Minimum
and Maximum) Range
Enter a minimum value (0 is default) and maximum value

(32,767 is maximum). Only available with Modbus.
Signal Delays
Enter the number of milliseconds to adjust timing of the data

transmission.
Configuring Trident v1.x CM Routing

This procedure explains how to configure routing information for network communication on
a Trident v1.x CM. This procedure is optional, depending on your network configuration. For
more information, see your network administrator.
Procedure
1

Allocation.
Double-click the CM slot, click Setup, and then click the Routing tab.
Specify these properties on the Routing tab.

Property
Action
Slot Selection
Select the slot to configure.
Destination IP Address
Enter the destination address.
Destination IP Subnet Mask
Enter the address for the subnet mask.
Destination Gateway IP Address
Enter the address for the gateway.
Repeat for each route required on your network.
346
Chapter 4
Configuring the Trident v2.x or Tri-GP Communication Module

These procedures explain how to configure an enhanced CM installed in a Trident v2.x or
Tri-GP system.
Note
To configure a CM installed in a Trident v1.x system, see Configuring the Trident v1.x
Communication Module on page 342.
A single Trident v2.x or Tri-GP controller supports a maximum of two CMs on one CM
baseplate. For detailed CM installation guidelines, see the Planning and Installation Guide for
your controller.
The following table lists the protocols supported by both the enhanced Trident CM (model 3201)
and Tri-GP CM (model 3201S2) on network and serial ports.
Protocol or Standard
Network Ports
Serial Ports
TriStation
NET 1, NET 2
Port 3 only
TSAA (UDP/IP)
NET 1, NET 2
TSAA with IP Multicast (UDP/IP)
NET 1, NET 2
NET 1, NET 2
Peer-to-Peer (DLC)
NET 1, NET 2
Any port
Modbus Master (RTU)
Any port
NET 1, NET 2
Any port
NET 1
Triconex Time Synchronization via UDP/IP
NET 1, NET 2
NET 1, NET 2
NET 1, NET 2

Triconex Time Synchronization via DLC
Note
While the preferred means for connecting the TriStation PC to the Trident or Tri-GP
controller is via a network connection, Invensys recommends configuring a serial
connection to the CM first, because it is less complex and easier to successfully connect
to the CM through the serial port.
Once you have successfully connected to the CM and downloaded the initial
configuration to the Trident, you can go back and configure the more complex network
connection, without worrying about losing the ability to communicate with the
controller altogether. See Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller for the First
Time on page 412 for more information.
347
To configure specific types of CM ports, see these topics:
Configuring Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM Serial Ports on page 348
Configuring Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM Network Ports on page 350
Configuring Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM Peer-To-Peer Ports on page 352
Configuring Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM Modbus TCP Ports on page 355
Configuring Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM Routing on page 356
Configuring Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM Protocols on page 358
For additional information on configuring the CM, see these topics:
Using a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM to Synchronize Time on page 364 for instructions on
configuring the CM to synchronize time.
Controlling Access to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM on page 434 for instructions on
controlling access to the CM on a per-client level.
Configuring Trident or Tri-GP Controller Printing on page 439 for instructions on

configuring the CM for use with a printer.
Exporting and Importing a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM Configuration

Once you have configured a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM, you can export its configuration to an
XML file. This file can then be used to quickly configure other Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CMs by
importing the saved configuration settings. For detailed instructions, see Exporting the Trident
v2.x or Tri-GP CM Configuration to a File on page 360.
348
Chapter 4
Configuring Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM Serial Ports

This procedure explains how to configure serial ports on a Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM.
Procedure
1

Allocation.
Double-click the CM, and then click Setup. The CM Setup dialog box appears.
Click the Serial Ports tab.

Property
Action
Port Selection
Click the port to be configured. Ports can be configured

only for a slot with an installed module.
Protocol

All ports can use Modbus Master, Modbus Slave
ASCII, or Modbus Slave RTU.
Port Write Enabled
Available only if Modbus Slave (ASCII or RTU) is

selected as the communication protocol. Select this
check box if you want to allow Modbus writes to this
slave port. The default is cleared (the port is read-only).

number of the Modbus slave device (1-247). The default
is 1.
Property
Action
Baud Rate

9600.
349
For a TriStation connection, the default is 115200 and

cannot be changed.
Data Bits

Modbus Slave ASCII.
Stop Bits
Parity
Transceiver Mode
Select RS-485 or RS-232. The default is RS-232. On port 3

when TriStation is selected as the protocol, RS-485 is not
available.
Handshake
Termination Options

available with RS-485 Transceiver Mode. The default is
None.
FP Ordering

address are the first 16 (high) or the last 16 (low). The
Note: If you select Modbus Master as the
communication protocol, this property is
automatically set to High 16 Bits First and
cannot be changed.
Modbus (Minimum and

Maximum) Range

the Modbus data range. The default minimum is 0. The
default maximum is 32,767.
Master Logical Port
Enter the port number that the CM will use in Modbus

Master functions to access the port (1-15). Only available
for Modbus Master.
350
Chapter 4
Configuring Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM Network Ports

This procedure explains how to configure network ports on a Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM.
Procedure
1

Allocation.
Double-click the CM, and then click Setup.

The CM Setup dialog box appears.
Property
Action
Slot Selection
Select the physical slot where the CM module you want to

configure is installed, Left or Right.
351
The CM baseplate can hold two CMsone in the Left

physical slot, and one in the Right physical slot. A CM can be
configured in the Right slot only if a CM in the Left slot has
already been configured.
For more information about slot locations, see the Planning
and Installation Guide for your controller.
Note: If you have configured CMs in both the left and right
slots, and you then uninstall the CM in the left slot,
you will no longer be able to change the
configuration of the CM installed in the right slot.
You must re-install a CM in the left slot before you
can modify the configuration of the CM in the right
slot.
Not Installed,
Installed
Click Installed to enable configuration of the module.

Clicking Not Installed resets all options to their default state
and makes them unavailable for configuration. The default is
Not Installed.
Transceiver Mode

For NET 1, the default is 10 Mbps Half Duplex.
For NET 2, the default is Auto-Negotiate.
IP Address
Enter the IP Address for the port. The addresses for NET 1
and NET 2 do not need to be unique.
The default values are 0.0.0.0.
Note: Your own IP addresses cannot be used for connecting
to the controller until your applicationwith the IP
address configurationhas been downloaded to the
controller at least once, using the Download All
command. See Connecting to the Trident 2.x or
Tri-GP Controller for the First Time on page 411 for
more information.
valid IP address.
IP Subnet Mask

255.255.255.0.
Default Gateway IP
Address

network router.
To configure the CM for operation behind a firewall, click Show Advanced Options and
then specify the properties in the following table for NET 1 and NET 2.
352
Chapter 4
Setting these properties restricts the ports that the CM can use for TCP connections to
the specified range. This allows the CM to operate behind a firewall that has
implemented port restrictions.
For most networks, the default settings should be sufficient. Invensys recommends that
only advanced users change these settings.
Note
If these settings are misconfigured, Modbus TCP will be unable to connect. If this
occurs, reset the values to the default settings to fix the problem and re-enable
Modbus TCP. If you need to use this feature, please contact Invensys Technical
Support for assistance with configuring these settings.
Property
Action
Lowest TCP Port

Number
Enter the lowest TCP port number to use for an outgoing

connection from the CM. Can be from 1024 to 65535. The default
value is 49152.
Applicable to Modbus/TCP ports.
Highest TCP Port

Number
Enter the highest TCP port number to use for an outgoing

connection from the CM. Can be from 1024 to 65535. The default
value is 65535.
Applicable to Modbus/TCP ports.
5
Note

Changes to CM IP addresses are not in effect until the existing connection is closed and
close it, even if the IP address is changed via a download changes operation.
Configuring Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM Peer-To-Peer Ports

This procedure explains how to configure the IP addresses for controllers communicating on a
Peer-to-Peer network through a CM.
Procedure
1

Allocation.

353
for.

Property
Action

communicated with on the Peer-to-Peer network. This must
be the same number that the controller uses as its UDP Base
Port Number.
The default is 1503. You should not need to change this
setting unless the CM is located behind a firewall.
Network
Click the network port that the CM uses to communicate

with the selected Peer-to-Peer node. The default is NET 1.
IP Address
Click Update to save the new settings for the selected node.
If you forget to click Update before selecting another node, your settings will be lost.

Note
354
Chapter 4
Property
Action
For each network port, enter the UDP base port number for
the controller. Enter 0 to disable Peer-to-Peer over UDP/IP on
the network.
The default is 1503 on both NET 1 and NET 2 (meaning Peerto-Peer is enabled on both ports). UDP port numbers do not
need to be unique, as long as the IP address for each port is
unique. See UDP Base Port Number on page 632 for reserved
values.
with Tricon V8, Tricon
V9, and Trident v1
Peer-to-Peer Systems
Select the portNET 1 or NET 2on which you want to

enable Peer-to-Peer communication with Tricon version 8 and
9 systems, and/or Trident version 1 systems. The default is
None.
Available only for a module installed in the left slot.
355
Configuring Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM Modbus TCP Ports

This procedure explains how to configure Modbus TCP ports on a CM, which enables Modbus
communication through network ports.
Four ports are available for Modbus TCP communication.
Procedure
1

Allocation.

for.

Property
Action
Protocol

Port Write Enabled

communication protocol. Select this check box if you want
to allow Modbus writes to this slave port. The default is
356
Chapter 4
Property
Action
Master Logical Port
Enter the number of the Modbus Master node (1-15).

Available only with Modbus TCP Master protocol. Must
be unique for each CM installed in a system.
TCP Port Number
Network
Click the network that the selected port is connected to.

The default is NET 2.
IP Address

If the port uses Modbus Slave protocol, enter either of
these:
To accept communication only from a defined
Modbus Master, enter the specific master IP address.
FP Ordering

address are the first 16 (high) or the last 16 (low).
The default is Low 16 Bits First.
Note: If you select Modbus TCP Master as the
communication protocol, this property is
automatically set to High 16 Bits First and cannot
be changed.
Modbus (Minimum
and Maximum) Range

the Modbus data range.
The default minimum is 0. The default maximum is
32,767.
Available only with Modbus TCP Slave Net.
Configuring Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM Routing

This procedure explains how to configure routing on a CM. Up to 10 different routes can be
configured for each network; each slot (module) has two networks (NET 1 and NET 2).
Procedure
1

Allocation.

Select the network (NET 1 or NET 2) you want to configure routing for.
Property
Action
Destination IP
Address
Enter the IP address which is used if the controller is not on the

same subnet as other devices.
Destination IP
Subnet Mask
Destination
Gateway IP
Address

NET 2.
If the gateway address is on NET 2, then the subnet mask must

be the same as the NET 2 subnet mask defined on the Network
tab. If the gateway address is on NET 1, then the subnet mask
Network tab. See Configuring Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM
Network Ports on page 350.
Click Update Destination to apply the settings.

Note
357
If necessary, click Reset All to change all destination settings for the selected slot
to their default, unconfigured state.
358
Chapter 4
Configuring Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM Protocols

This procedure explains how to configure the TSAA and TriStation protocols used for CM
communication.
Procedure
1

Allocation.

Click the Protocols tab.
Select the module (slot) you want to configure protocols for.
Specify these properties for the protocol(s) you will be using with the CM.
Protocol
Property
Action
TriStation
TriStation
Port Number
Enter the UDP port to use for TriStation connections

on NET 1 and NET 2. The default for both ports is
1502.
Cannot be the same as the Management or TSAA port
numbers.
See UDP Base Port Number on page 632 for additional
information.
359
Protocol
Property
Action
Management
Management
Port Number
Enter the UDP port to use for the Enhanced Diagnostic

Monitors connection to CM communication status
information on NET 1 and NET 2. The default for both
ports is 1510.
This must be the same value as the Management UDP
Port Number property in the Enhanced Diagnostic
Monitors Network Configuration dialog box.
Cannot be the same as the TriStation or TSAA port
numbers.
Monitor Users Guide.
TSAA
TSAA Port
Number
Enter the UDP port to use for TSAA connections,

including DDE Server and SOE Recorder, on NET 1
and NET 2. The default for both ports is 1500.
Cannot be the same as the TriStation or Management
port numbers.
A value of 0 indicates that TSAA communication is
disabled on that port. See UDP Base Port Number on
page 632 for additional information.
TSAA
Multicast IP
Address
Enter the IP address that TSAA multicasts should be

sent to. The default is 0.0.0.0 (IP multicasting is
disabled).
sent to the specified address, so that all members of the
group will receive the data.
Note: To use TSAA multicasting, your network
hardware (such as routers) must also support
multicasting. See your Network Administrator
or IT department for more information.
Multicast
Update Rate
Enter the update rate, in milliseconds, for TSAA IP

multicasting. Can be from 250 to 2,000. The default
value is 1,000.
sent to the multicast IP address at the specified update
rate (for example, by default, bin data will be multicast
every 1,000ms).
CAUTION
on the Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM. Depending on your configuration, this
may create a security issue.
the CM access control list. See Controlling Access to the Trident 2.x or
360
Chapter 4
Exporting the Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM Configuration to a File

Once CM configuration is complete, you may want to export it to an XML file. Not only does
this provide a backup of your configuration settings, it also allows you to import the settings to
other Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CMs, saving time and effort, and ensuring that all CMs in a system
have the same configuration. Invensys technical support may also ask for an exported
configuration file to assist in troubleshooting CM problems.
Note
An exported CM configuration file cannot be modified outside of TriStation 1131. If the

XML file is changed after export, you will be unable to import it into TriStation 1131.
Procedure
1

Allocation.

Export
Button
Click Export.
If the CM configuration has been changed, but not saved, you are asked if you want to
include the unsaved changes in the exported file.
4
Note
Navigate to the folder you want to save the exported configuration file in, enter a file
name, and click Save.
A CM configuration file exported from a CM installed in a Trident v2.x or Tri-GP system
cannot be imported to a CM installed in a Trident v1.x system.
361
Importing the Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM Configuration From a File

If you have already configured a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM, and exported the configuration to a
file, you can import the saved configuration to another Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM.
Once the import is complete, you should review the CM configuration to ensure that all settings
have been correctly configured for your implementation.
Procedure
1

Allocation.

Click Import.
If the CM configuration has been changed, but not yet saved, you are asked if you want
to overwrite the existing configuration, including the unsaved changes, with the
imported settings.
Navigate to the folder where the exported configuration file is located, and click Open.
CM configuration settings are imported from the selected file.
Click each tab of the CM Setup dialog box to review and verify that all settings have been
correctly configured.
362
Chapter 4
Configuring Trident or Tri-GP Time Synchronization

This section explains how to use the Time Synchronization communication protocol with
Trident or Tri-GP controllers. Time synchronization enables a network of Triconex controllers
to synchronize time with each other or with external devices, such as a DCS.
Topics include:
About Trident and Tri-GP Time Synchronization on page 362
Using a Trident 1.x CM to Synchronize Time on page 363
Using a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM to Synchronize Time on page 364
About Trident and Tri-GP Time Synchronization

This table summarizes the ways Trident or Tri-GP controller time can be synchronized to an
external device or to the master node in a Peer-to-Peer network.
Table 35
Trident and Tri-GP Time Synchronization
Module
CM (Trident v1.x)
Time Synchronization Feature

To an OPC client. For more information, see the Communication Guide for
Trident Systems.
TriStation 1131 application. For assistance with the specialized
programming that is required, contact Technical Support.
To the Trident master node in a Peer-to-Peer network.
CM (Trident v2.x
and Tri-GP)
All of the v1.x CM capabilities, plus:

To SNTP.
To the Tricon, Trident, or Tri-GP master node in a Peer-to-Peer network
(Triconex Time Synchronization).
MP

TriStation 1131 application. For assistance with the specialized
programming that is required, contact Technical Support.
363
Using a Trident 1.x CM to Synchronize Time

This procedure explains how to use a Trident 1.x CM to synchronize Trident controllers to the
master node in a Peer-to-Peer network.
Procedure
1

Allocation.
Double-click the CM slot, click Setup, and then click the Network tab.
Select one of the following:
On NET 1 Enable Time Synchronization with Trident Master Node
On NET 2 Enable Time Synchronization with Trident Master Node
364
Chapter 4
Using a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM to Synchronize Time

The information in this section explains how to enable time synchronization on a Trident 2.x or
Tri-GP CM. Time synchronization can be enabled using the following protocols:
SNTP
Triconex Time Synchronization via DLC (NET 1 only) or UDP/IP (NET 1 or NET 2) on
a Peer-to-Peer network
In a redundant network of Trident or Tri-GP controllers that each have two CMs installed, you
can implement redundant time synchronization by configuring time synchronization for both
CM modules (both left and right slots). Time synchronization can be enabled only for a single
logical slot.
Note
The information and procedures in this section apply only to Trident 2.x or Tri-GP
CMs. If you are configuring a Trident 1.x CM, please see Using a Trident 1.x CM to
Synchronize Time on page 363.
Topics include:
Configuring SNTP Time Synchronization on the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM on page 364
Configuring Triconex Time Synchronization on the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM on

page 367
Configuring SNTP Time Synchronization on the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM

This procedure explains how to configure Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM time synchronization to an
SNTP server.
If the CM is in a Peer-to-Peer network, it can also be used as the master node for time
synchronization of other controllers on the network. In this configuration, the master node CM
synchronize their time with the master CM. In this way, all nodes on the Peer-to-Peer network
If the CM is acting as a slave node on a Peer-to-Peer network, it cannot be configured for SNTP
Note
Because the SNTP server resides on a PC, network load issues or PC performance can
result in delays in processing time update requests from the controller.
Procedure
1

Allocation.

365
Property
Action
Configuration
SNTP Master Network
Click the network the SNTP server is located on.

time with.
(Optional) If you have a redundant CM installed in the right slot, under Slot Selection,
Property
Action
Configuration
SNTP Master Network
Click the network the SNTP server is located on. This can
be different than the master network selected for the left
slot.

time with.
Note
Configuring Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM Network Ports on page 350) and if the
module in the left slot has already been configured for SNTP time
synchronization.
366
Chapter 4
Enabling the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM as a Master Node for Triconex Time
Synchronization (Optional)
If you also want the CM to be able to act as a master node for time synchronization of other
1
the MP.
Click Setup.
The MP Setup dialog box appears.
Select the Enable Trident/Tri-GP Node Time Synchronization check box.
367
Configuring Triconex Time Synchronization on the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM

master node.
The master node can also synchronize its time with an SNTP server. In this configuration, the
master node synchronizes time with the SNTP server, and any slave nodes on the Peer-to-Peer
network synchronize their time with the master node. In this way, all nodes on the Peer-to-Peer
network are synchronized with SNTP time.
Configuring a Master Node

This procedure describes how to configure the CM as a master node on the Peer-to-Peer
network when SNTP time synchronization is not being used.
If you want the master node to synchronize to a SNTP server, use the procedures in Configuring
SNTP Time Synchronization on the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM on page 364.
Procedure
1

Allocation.

the MP.
Click Setup.

Configuring a Slave Node

This procedure describes how to configure the CM as a slave node on the Peer-to-Peer network.
Procedure
1

Allocation.
368
Chapter 4

3

Property
Action
Configuration
Select Peer-to-Peer. The default is None.
Peer-to-Peer Master
Network
Click the network you want to enable Triconex Time

Synchronization for. The default is NET 1.This property
applies to the modules installed in both the left and right
slots simultaneously.
Note
If you have a redundant CM installed in the right slot, Time Synchronization

Configuration is automatically set to Peer-to-Peer and cannot be changed.
the MP.
Click Setup.

This allows the controller to participate as a slave node in time synchronization across
Using Trident or Tri-GP System and Module Attributes
369
Using Trident or Tri-GP System and Module Attributes

System and module attributes are variables that can be used to monitor status, and control
Trident or Tri-GP controller operations. You can add an alias number so the variable can be read
or written to.
Specifying an Alias Number for a Trident or Tri-GP Attribute

This procedure explains how to specify an alias number for a system or module attribute, which
allows you to read or write to the attribute.
Procedure
1
Expand the Controller tree and double-click Configuration.
Expand Status Attributes and double-click the attribute to be assigned an alias.
Click Get Default, or enter a number for the Modbus Alias and click Confirm Alias.
The alias number is assigned to the attribute.
370
Chapter 4
Printing the Trident or Tri-GP Module Configuration

Once Trident or Tri-GP controller configuration is complete, you may want to print the module
configuration information. Not only does this provide a backup of your configuration settings,
it also can assist Invensys technical support when troubleshooting configuration problems.
Procedure
1
Hardware Module ConfigurationPrints a report listing the controller hardware

(MPs, CMs, I/O modules) currently configured in the project.
Module Configuration SettingsPrints a report listing the current configuration

settings for each applicable module in the projects hardware configuration. Only
modules that require configuration in TriStation 1131 are included in this report.
For example, CM configuration details are included, but the AI module is not, as it
does not require configuration in TriStation 1131.
Note
box.
5
Tricon Communication with
TriStation 1131
Overview 372
Configuring the TriStation PC 373
Connecting to the Tricon Controller via a Serial Connection 376
Connecting to the Tricon Controller via a Network Connection 379
Specifying the Tricon Default Connection Type 385
Controlling Access to the TCM 386
Configuring Tricon Controller Printing 392
Setting Tricon Controller IP Addresses 399
372
Chapter 5
Overview
This figure shows the main steps for setting up TriStation 1131 communication and the typical
order in the project cycle. Communication setup can be done anytime before implementation.
Set Up the Project
Develop the
Application
Test with the

Emulator
Fix Errors
Errors?
C onfigure the
C ontroller
- Establish the physical connection

Set Up TriStation
C ommunication
- C onfigure the connection to the TriStation PC

- Set node and IP address of the controller
Implement on
the C ontroller
TriStation 1131 Communication Steps

This checklist includes the items that can be or should be performed to set up communication
between a TriStation PC and a Tricon controller.
Description
See
Connect to a Tricon EICM
Connecting to the Tricon Controller via a Serial

Connection on page 376
Connect to a Tricon ACM, NCM, or TCM
Connecting to the Tricon Controller via a

Network Connection on page 379, or
Configure user access to the Tricon TCM
Controlling Access to the TCM on page 386
Set up printing
Configuring Tricon Controller Printing on page 392
Configuring the TriStation PC
373

This section explains the setup required for a network connection from the TriStation PC.
Topics include:
Installing a NIC Card in a TriStation PC on page 373
Installing the TCP/IP Protocol on a TriStation PC on page 374
Note
If you will only be connecting to the Tricon controller via a serial connection, you can
skip this section. Please note, however, that the preferred method of connecting the
TriStation PC to the Tricon controller is via a network connection.
Installing a NIC Card in a TriStation PC

This procedure explains how to install a network interface card (NIC) in a TriStation PC to be
connected to a Tricon ACM, NCM, or TCM.
Procedure Tricon TCM

1
Install the network interface card by following the manufacturers instructions. Do not
change the factory default settings on the NIC card.
If the network interface card has an RJ-45 connector, you can connect it to the NET 1
or NET 2 port on the TCM (model 4351/4351A/4351B/4353) via a router or hub
using a patch cable.
If the network interface card has a MTRJ (fiber) connector, you can connect it to the
NET 1 or NET 2 port on the TCM (model 4352/4352A/4352B/4354) via a router or
hub using a patch cable.
If the network interface card does not have the appropriate connector for your TCM
model, connect the network interface card to a media converter that is connected to
the NET 1 or NET 2 port.
Note
See the Communication Guide for Tricon v9v10 Systems for more information
about the differences between the TCM model 4351/4351A/4351B/4353
(copper) and model 4352/4352A/4352B/4354 (fiber).
Run the diagnostics provided with the network interface card according to the
manufacturers instructions.
Procedure Tricon ACM or NCM

1
If the network interface card has a BNC connector, connect it directly to the NET 2
port.
374
Chapter 5
If the network interface card does not have a BNC connector, connect the network
interface card to a media converter that is connected to the NET 2 port.
Installing the TCP/IP Protocol on a TriStation PC

These procedures explain how to install the TCP/IP protocol on a TriStation PC. The TCP/IP
protocol is required for Tricon ACM, NCM, and TCM connection.
Installing TCP/IP on Windows 2000

1
On the Start menu, click Settings, then click Network and Dial-up Connections.
Right-click the network connection where you want to install the protocol, then click
Properties.
On the Networking tab, if the protocol is checked on the list of installed

components, it means the protocol is installed and you are finished with this
procedure.
If the protocol is not checked, go to the next step to continue the installation.
Click Install, click Protocol, then click Add.
On the Select Network Protocol screen, click the protocol on the Network Protocol list,
and then click OK.
Verify the check box for the protocol is checked, and then click OK.
Installing TCP/IP on Windows XP or Windows Server 2003

1
On the Start menu, click Control Panel, and then double-click Network Connections.
Properties.
On the General tab, if the TCP/IP protocol is checked on the list of installed
procedure.
If the TCP/IP protocol is not checked, go to the next step to continue the
installation.
On the General tab, click Install.
In the Select Network Component Type dialog box, click Protocol, and then click Add.
Click the TCP/IP protocol, and then click OK.
375
Installing TCP/IP on Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2

1
On the Start menu, click Control Panel, open Network and Internet, and then click
Network and Sharing Center.
In the Network and Sharing Center, click Manage Network Connections.
Right-click the network connection you want to change, and then click Properties.
If prompted, enter the administrators password or confirm the operation.
On the Networking tab, under This connection uses the following items, click Internet
Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4), and then click OK.
Note
Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) must be installed to allow a TriStation

1131 application to connect to a Tricon controller. Do not install Internet Protocol
Version 6 (TCP/IPv6).
376
Chapter 5

Connection
This section explains how to make a direct (point-to-point) serial connection between a Tricon
EICM or TCM and a TriStation PC. You cannot use both an EICM and TCM module in the same
Tricon system. Additionally, the TCM can be used only with a Tricon v10.x controller.
By default, both the EICM and the TCM use port 4 for the TriStation connection. Invensys
strongly recommends you use the default setting. If port 4 on the EICM fails, port 1, 2, or 3 can
be used by changing settings on the module switch block. If port 4 on the TCM fails, you can
connect to TriStation 1131 using the NET 1 or NET 2 port; see the Communication Guide for Tricon
v9v10 Systems for more information.
Topics include:
When to Use the Tricon Serial Connection on page 376
Connecting a Tricon Serial Port to a TriStation PC on page 377
Configuring the TriStation 1131 Serial Connection on page 378
When to Use the Tricon Serial Connection

The preferred means for connecting the TriStation PC to the Tricon controller is via a network
connection. Invensys recommends connecting the TriStation PC to the EICM or TCM via a serial
connection only in the following scenarios.
Connecting to the Tricon Controller for the First Time

The first time you connect to the Tricon controller, Invensys recommends making a serial
connection to the EICM or TCM, because it is less complex to configure and thus easier to
successfully connect to the communication module through the serial port.
Once you have successfully connected to the EICM or TCM and downloaded the initial
configuration to the Tricon controller via the serial connection, you can go back and configure
the more complex network connection, without worrying about losing the ability to
communicate with the controller altogether.
Connecting to the Tricon Controller When the Network Is Down

When network communication has been interrupted due to hardware or other problems with
the network, the serial connection can be used as a backup means of communicating with the
Tricon controller. Once the network problems have been resolved, you should restore the
network connection to the Tricon controller.
Connecting to the Tricon Controller When the Access Control List Has Been
Misconfigured (Tricon 10.x Only)
If you misconfigure the Access Control List, you could accidentally lock yourself out of a
network connection to the Tricon controller. Once you enable TCM client access control by
Connecting to the Tricon Controller via a Serial Connection
377
selecting the Enable Access List check box, you must configure at least one client with TriStation
Read/Write access before you save the configuration.
If this is not done, you will be unable to connect to the Tricon controller again after your next
download, preventing you from making further changes to the application running on the
controller, including changes to the TCM access control list. If this happens, you can use the
serial connection to connect to the Tricon controller and download changes to the access control
list.
See Controlling Access to the TCM on page 386 for more information.
Connecting a Tricon Serial Port to a TriStation PC

This procedure explains how to connect a Tricon EICM or TCM serial port to a TriStation PC.
Invensys provides a serial cable that has a 9-pin connector on each end. If the COM port on the
PC has a 25-pin connector, you can use a Triconex 25-pin to 9-pin adapter. If you need other
parts, you can purchase them from another manufacturer. For more information, see the
Communication Guide for Tricon v9v10 Systems.
Procedure
1
Connect one end of the serial cable to a serial port on the EICM or TCM. This is typically
port 4.
Connect the other end of the serial cable to a COM port on the TriStation PC. The COM
port is typically numbered COM1, COM2, COM3, or COM4.
Figure 25 Connecting a Tricon Serial Port to the TriStation PC
378
Chapter 5
Configuring the TriStation 1131 Serial Connection

This procedure explains how to configure the serial connection from the TriStation PC to the
Tricon EICM or TCM.
Procedure
1
Expand the Controller tree, doubleclick Configuration, and then click

TriStation Communication.
Specify these properties on the

TriStation Communication screen.
Property
Action
Serial Connection
Select this check box.
Node Name
Enter the name of the Tricon controller. You can use a default name,
or enter your own user-defined name. The default names are
TRINODE01 through TRINODE31.
TriStation Port
Number
Enter the UDP port to use for the TriStation 1131 connection. The
default is 1502. Should be the same number specified on the TCM
Setup Network tab.
Serial Port
Select the COM port on the TriStation PC to which the serial cable is
connected.
Baud Rate
Specify the data transmission speed. The default is 9600. Available

only when a TCM is installed.
Note
The data displayed on this screen is used by TriStation 1131 only to connect to a
Tricon communication port. The data that you enter will not be downloaded to
the Tricon controller.
To complete the connection, you must configure a Tricon EICM or TCM module. See
Configuring Tricon Communication Modules on page 271.
Connecting to the Tricon Controller via a Network Connection
379
Connecting to the Tricon Controller via a Network

Connection
This section explains how to make a network connection between an ACM, NCM, or TCM
communication module and a TriStation PC.
This can be a direct connection from the communication module to the PC; or a connection
through a router, hub, or media converter. A router or hub is not required if you do not need to
connect any additional devices besides the communication module and the PC.
You cannot use both an NCM and TCM module in the same Tricon system.
To set up the connection, you must:
Install a network interface card and the TCP/IP protocol on the PC.
Set the node number of the controller.
Connect the TriStation PC to a network port on the communication module.
Configure the connection in the TriStation 1131 project.
CAUTION
The node setting (on the ACM or NCM module or the 3008 MP Front
Panel) must match the node number specified in the TriStation 1131
project. For instructions on changing the MP node setting, see the
Planning and Installation Guide for Tricon v9-v10 Systems.
For instructions on installing a network interface card and the TCP/IP protocol on the TriStation
PC, see Configuring the TriStation PC on page 373.
Topics include:
Directly Connecting an ACM or NCM Network Port to a TriStation PC on page 380
Connecting a TCM Network Port to a TriStation PC Using a Router or Hub on page 381
Connecting a Tricon Network Port Using a Media Converter on page 382
Configuring the TriStation 1131 Network Connection on page 384
Note
If you are connecting the TCM or EICM to the TriStation PC via serial port, see
Connecting to the Tricon Controller via a Serial Connection on page 376.
380
Chapter 5
Directly Connecting an ACM or NCM Network Port to a TriStation PC

This procedure explains how to directly connect an ACM or NCM to a TriStation PC if the
network interface card in the PC has a BNC connector.
The connection requires a 10Base2 coaxial cable. Invensys provides an accessory kit that
includes a 10Base2 coaxial cable, BNC T-connectors, and 50-ohm terminators for unused
connectors (see the Communication Guide for Tricon v9-v10 Systems for more information).
Procedure
1
To each end of a 10Base2 cable, attach a BNC T-connector and a terminator.
Attach one of the T-connectors to a BNC connector on NET 2 of the communication

module. An NCM is used as an example in the following figure.
Attach the other T-connector to the BNC connector on the network interface card in the
TriStation PC.
Figure 26
Directly Connecting an ACM or NCM to a TriStation PC
Terminate the BNC connectors on all communication modules that are installed in the
Tricon controller.
To terminate an unused BNC connector, you can attach a T-connector with 50-ohm
terminators on each end to produce a 25-ohm parallel resistance. Ask your network
administrator for information about other termination methods.
381
Connecting a TCM Network Port to a TriStation PC Using a Router or Hub

This procedure explains how to connect a TCM to a TriStation PC if the network interface card
in the PC has an RJ-45 connector or a MTRJ fiber connector. You must use an Ethernet router or
hub between the Tricon and the TriStation PC.
The RJ-45 connection requires twisted-pair straight-through cables. The fiber connection
requires 62.5/125 um multimode fiber cables. See the Communication Guide for Tricon v9v10
Systems for more information about the required cables and how some may be purchased from
Invensys.
Procedure
1
Attach one end of the first cable to the NET 2 port on the TCM.
Attach the other end of the first cable to the connector on the Ethernet router or hub.
Attach one end of the second cable to the connector on the network interface card in the
TriStation PC.
Attach the other end of the second cable to the connector on the router or hub.
Figure 27
Connecting a TCM (Copper or Fiber) to a TriStation PC Using a Router or Hub
If the correct cable is connected to the TCM and the TCM is installed in a powered Tricon
chassis, the green LED indicator turns on. If the LED indicator is not on, there is a problem with
the physical cable connection.
382
Chapter 5
Connecting a Tricon Network Port Using a Media Converter

This procedure explains how to connect an ACM, NCM, or TCM to a TriStation PC if the
network interface card in the PC requires a media converter because it does not have the
appropriate connector.
The connection to an ACM or NCM requires a 10Base2 cable, a media converter, and
another appropriate cable, such as a twisted-pair cable.
The connection to a TCM (model 4352/4352A/4352B/4354 - Fiber) requires a 62.5/125

um multimode fiber cable, a media converter, and another appropriate cable, such as a
twisted-pair cable.
Procedure for Connecting an ACM or NCM

1
To each end of a 10Base2 cable, attach a BNC T-connector and a terminator.
Attach one of the T-connectors to a BNC connector on the NET 2 port on the
communication module.
Attach the other T-connector to a BNC connector on the media converter.

For the TriStation PC, you can use a 10BaseT or 100BaseTX twisted-pair cable for faster
communication.
Attach one end of the twisted-pair cable to an RJ-45 connector on the network interface
card in the TriStation 1131 PC.
Attach the other end of the twisted-pair cable to an RJ-45 connector on the media
converter.
Figure 28
Connecting an ACM or NCM to the TriStation PC Using a Media Converter
383
Procedure for Connecting a TCM (Model 4352/4352A/4352B/4354 - Fiber)

1
Attach one end of the fiber cable to the NET 1 or NET 2 port on the TCM.
Connect one end of the twisted-pair cable to the RJ-45 connector on the network
interface card in the TriStation PC.
Attach the other end of the twisted-pair cable to an RJ-45 connector on the media
converter.
Attach the other end of the fiber cable to a MTRJ fiber connector on the media converter.
Figure 29
Connecting a TCM (Model 4352/4352A/4352B/4354) to the TriStation PC Using a Media

Converter
If the correct cable is connected to the TCM and the TCM is installed in a powered Tricon
chassis, the green LED indicator turns on. If the LED indicator is not on, there is a problem with
the physical cable connection.
384
Chapter 5
Configuring the TriStation 1131 Network Connection

This procedure explains how to configure the Tricon network connection to a TriStation PC.
Before beginning this procedure, you must determine which IP address to use for the
communication module. Typically, you can get an IP address from your network administrator
or Information Technology department. See Setting Tricon Controller IP Addresses on
page 399.
Procedure
1
In TriStation 1131, expand the Controller

tree, and double-click Configuration.
On the Configuration tree, click TriStation

Communication.
Specify these properties on the TriStation

Communication screen.
Property
Action
Network
Connection
Select the Network Connection check box.
Node Number
For ACM and NCM, enter the number represented on the rotary
switches.
For TCM, enter the number represented by the Network Node
Address setting on the MP front panel.
Click the browse button to select a node from the list of default node
names and numbers.
Node Name
Enter a name containing eight or fewer characters to identify the

Tricon controller.
IP Address
Enter the physical address of the controller on the network.
UDP Base Port

Number
Enter the UDP port to use for the TriStation 1131 connection. The
default is 1502. Should be the same number specified on the TCM
Setup Network tab. Available only when a TCM is installed.
Note
Tricon communication port. The data that you enter will not be downloaded to
To complete the connection, you must configure a Tricon ACM, NCM, or TCM module.
See Configuring Tricon Communication Modules on page 271.
Specifying the Tricon Default Connection Type
385
Specifying the Tricon Default Connection Type

This procedure explains how to specify the default connection setting in the Connect To dialog
box, which appears when you establish communication between a TriStation PC and the Tricon
controller. The connection settingNetwork or Serial Connectionis an initial setting and can
be changed when you use the Connect command.
Procedure
1
Expand the Configuration tree, double-click Configuration, and then click TriStation
Communication.
Verify that the Network Connection Setup (for a network connection) or TriStation PC
(for a serial connection) properties are correctly configured. See the following for
additional information:
Under Default Connection, select one of the following:
Network Connection
Serial Connection
The next time you establish communication between the TriStation PC and the Tricon
controller, the default connection setting you selected will be used.
Note
If only one connection type is selected under Selected Connections, the default
connection is automatically set based on it, and cannot be changed.
386
Chapter 5
Controlling Access to the TCM

The Tricon Communication Module (TCM) gives you the ability to control who can access TCM
resources through the modules network ports, and each users level of access.
Note
Access control is supported on models 4351A/B, 4352A/B, 4353, and 4354 only. TCM
models 4351 and 4352 do not support access control.
Topics include:
What Are TCM Resources? on page 386
How Is Access Controlled? on page 387
What Are Access Levels? on page 387
Configuring the Access Control List on page 390
What Are TCM Resources?

A resource is any service or information provided by the TCM through the supported
communications protocols. Examples of these resources include:
Access to the controller via TriStation 1131 (ability to perform a Download Changes or
Download All).
Access to Tricon controller diagnostic information via the Enhanced Diagnostic

Monitor.
Access to Tricon tagnames and system variables via OPC Data Access (DA). The OPC
protocol is supported only by TCM models 4353 and 4354.
Access to OPC Alarms and Events (A&E) data (models 4353 and 4354 only). Write
access to OPC A&E is not currently supported; only read access is provided, to allow
the retrieval of events.
Access to information provided in applications such as SOE Recorder or DDE Server

that use the TSAA protocol.
Access to any other applications that use the TSAA protocol.
CAUTION
the TCM access control list.
387
How Is Access Controlled?

Access is controlled via client IP addresses. You can control access for a single IP address (one
client), or for a group of IP addresses (a group of clients).
If you want to group clients into a single access list entry, they must be physically separated in
a sub-network, and a network address mask must be used to group them in the access list. A
network address mask of 255.255.255.255 restricts an access list entry so that it applies only to
the specific IP address identified in the entry. A network address mask of 255.255.255.0 applies
an access list entry to any client on the same subnet as the IP address identified in the entry.
Other network address masks may also be used, depending on your network structure.
For example, if you want two clients with IP addresses of 192.168.1.134 and 192.168.1.65 to share
the same access permissions, and there are no other clients on the same subnet, you can group
them in the access list by setting the IP address for a single entry as 192.168.1.x and the network
address mask to 255.255.255.0.
For each IP address or group of IP addresses, you can set the access level, the protocols the client
can use to access the TCM, and the network ports the client can use to access the TCM.
What Are Access Levels?

There are three levels of access:
Deny Access: Prevents all access to resources provided by the TCM. Connections to the
Tricon controller are not allowed.
Read Only: Allows client to connect to the Tricon controller and view information
provided via the TCM. Does not allow the client to change any settings or perform
certain commands. For TCM/OPC, allows an OPC DA client to read tagnames, and
allows an OPC A&E client to retrieve events.
Read/Write: Full access. Allows client to view information provided by the TCM,
change settings, and perform all commands (including Download Changes or
Download All for TriStation 1131). For TCM/OPC, allows an OPC DA client to write to
tagnames. This access level should only be provided to trusted clients.
Access levels are configured by adding entries to the access control list. A maximum of 10
entries can be provided in the access control list.
The same access level is applied to all selected protocols in a single access control list entry. If
you want to provide different access levels for a selected client depending on which protocol
they are using, you will need to create two separate entries in the access control list, one for each
protocol.
Access levels apply to all users using the PC assigned the IP address entered in the access control
list. This means if multiple users are using the same PC, they will all have the same access rights.
For example, every user using TriStation 1131 on a PC with a particular IP address would have
the same access rights to the TCM. Individual user access should be controlled via workstation
security; TCM access is controlled only at the IP address level.
388
Chapter 5
CAUTION
Once you enable TCM client access control by selecting the Enable Access
List check box, you must configure at least one client with TriStation
Read/Write access before you can save the configuration.
This ensures you will be able to connect to the Tricon controller again
after your next download, and allows you to make further changes to the
application running on the controller, including changes to the TCM
access control list.
If necessary, you can also connect via a TriStation 1131 serial connection
to reconfigure the access control list. See Connecting to the Tricon
Controller via a Serial Connection on page 376.
Note
If you are using the TSAA and/or TriStation protocols, you must enable and use access
list control to manage read/write access to specific ports. If you are using the serial
and/or Modbus TCP protocols, you can also use the Port Write Enabled property to
manage read/write access to specific ports. See Port Write Enabled on page 581.
Sample Access Control List and Resulting Access Control

The following table is a sample access control list, with the access control scenarios that would
result if enabled on a model 4353 or 4354 TCM.
Table 36
Sample TCM (Model 4353/4354) Access Control List

IP Address
Subnet Mask
Protocol
Network
Access Level
Resulting Access Control Scenario
206.216.1.12
255.255.255.0
TriStation
NET 2
Read/Write
A client with an IP address of 206.216.1.12 (or any client on the

same subnet) attempting to access the TCM using the
TriStation protocol on NET 2 would be granted Read/Write
access.
206.216.1.12
255.255.255.0
TSAA
NET 1
Read Only

same subnet) attempting to access the TCM using the TSAA
protocol on NET 1 would be granted Read Only access.
192.168.1.05
255.255.255.255
TriStation
and OPC
NET 1
NET 2
Deny Access
A client with an IP address of 192.168.1.05 attempting to access

the TCM using the TriStation protocol on NET 1 or NET 2, or
OPC on NET 2, would be denied access.a
192.168.1.09
255.255.255.255
TSAA
NET 1
NET 2
Deny Access

the TCM using TSAA on NET 1 or NET 2 would be denied
access.b
192.168.1.05
255.255.255.0
OPC and
TriStation
NET 2
Read Only

same subnet) attempting to access the TCM using OPC or
TriStation 1131 on NET 2 would be granted Read Only access.
192.168.1.05
255.255.255.0
TriStation
NET 2
Read Only

same subnet) attempting to access the TCM using the
TriStation protocol on NET 2 would be granted Read Only
access.c
192.168.1.09
255.255.255.0
OPC
NET 2
Read/Write

same subnet) attempting to access the TCM using OPC on
NET 2 would be granted Read/Write access.
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
All
All
Deny Access
Access is denied for all IP addresses not included in entries

17, using any protocol on NET 1 or NET 2.
NULL
NULL
NULL
NULL
NULL
None
a. OPC is supported only on NET 2. As a result, a client attempting to access the TCM using OPC on NET 1 will always be denied. An access control list entry configured
with only OPC and NET 1 is an invalid combination that will not have any effect on client access to the TCM via OPC.
b. On the model 4353 and 4354 TCM, TSAA is supported only on NET 1. As a result, a client attempting to access the TCM using TSAA on NET 2 will always be denied.
An access control list entry configured with only TSAA and NET 2 is an invalid combination that will not have any effect on client access to the TCM via TSAA.
c. If a client with the specific IP address of 192.168.1.05 attempts to access the TCM using the TriStation protocol on NET 2, the TCM will deny access. This is because the
TCM evaluates the access control list beginning from the top, and continuing through the list until it encounters an entry that applies to the IP address requesting
access. In this case, entry 3 specifically denies access to a client with the IP address of 192.168.1.05, so the TCM will deny access and not evaluate the list any further.

389
Entry
390
Chapter 5
Configuring the Access Control List

This section describes how to enable access control on the TCM and configure the access control
list for your selected clients. This does not apply to model 4351 or 4352 TCMs.
When configuring the access control list, take care to organize your entries so that the most
specific are at the top, and the least specific are at the bottom. The last entry in the list should be
used to define the access level for unspecified clients.
The TCM evaluates the access control list from top (Entry 1) to bottom (Entry 10). The first match
that the TCM makes (between the clients network parameters and those listed in an access
control list entry) determines which entry is used to authorize or deny access. If no match is
found, the TCM automatically denies all access.
Once you have enabled access control and configured the access control list, you must perform
a Download Changes for the access control to take effect.
Note
After a Download Changes or Download All has been performed so that access control
on the TCM is enabled, all existing connections will remain connected, even if the clients
access has been changed to Read Only or Deny Access. The new access levels will not
take effect until the client disconnects and attempts to reconnect.
Procedure
1

Allocation.
Click the Access List tab.
391

Property
Action
Slot Selection
Select the slot where the TCM module you want to

configure an access control list for is installed.
In most cases, you should create identical access control
lists for the modules in both slots.
Enable Access List

Command
Click to enable access control for this TCM. If cleared,

access control will be disabled and all users can access
TCM resources. The default is cleared.
Client Access List
Click on the entry for the client you want to configure or

change.
Client IP Address
Specify the IP address of the client that you want to allow,

restrict, or deny access to the TCM.
Can be used in conjunction with the Client IP Subnet Mask
property to create groups of IP addresses with the same
access levels.
Client IP Subnet Mask
This property allows you to group IP addresses, so that

you can create a single entry in the access control list for all
IP addresses on the subnet.
If needed, enter the IP address for the subnet. The default
is 255.255.255.0.
Permission
Click the level of access to the TCM you want to provide

for the selected client.
If the application includes safety-critical outputs, you
should not set this property to Read/Write.
Protocol
Select the protocol(s) that the selected client can use to

access the TCM. The OPC protocol is supported on NET 2
only, and applies only for model 4353 or 4354 TCMs.
Network
Select the network(s) on which the selected client can

access the TCM.
Click Update Client Entry to save the settings for the selected client.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each client to be included in the access control list.
Note
If necessary, click Reset Client Entry to reset the settings for the selected client to
the default, unconfigured state. Click Reset All to reset all entries in the access list
to the default, unconfigured state.
If a TCM is installed in the right slot, do one of the following:
In most cases, you should configure identical access control lists for the modules in
both slots. To do so, click Copy Current Setup to Other Slot.
To configured different access control lists for the modules in the right and left
slots, repeat steps 4 through 6 for the module installed in the right slot.
392
Chapter 5
Configuring Tricon Controller Printing

A Tricon controller can print brief ASCII text messages if a communication port is connected to
a printer and the TriStation 1131 application includes standard print function blocks.
Print messages are typically used for alarms, status, and maintenance. A sample alarm message
might include the name of an analog input point, its time stamp and value, and a statement that
the value is out of range. If the Tricon system includes numerous controllers or is connected to
a DCS, alarms are typically displayed on an operator workstation.
To print from a Tricon controller with an EICM, you must connect an EICM parallel port to a
Centronics-compatible printer, configure the port in the TriStation 1131 project, and use print
function blocks in the TriStation 1131 application.
To print from a Tricon controller with a TCM, you must connect a TCM Ethernet port to a print
server that is connected to a printer, configure these devices in the TriStation 1131 project, and
use print function blocks in the TriStation 1131 application.
Topics include:
Effect of Printing on Scan Time on page 392
Connecting a Tricon EICM Port to a Printer on page 393
Configuring a Tricon EICM Port for Printing on page 394
Connecting a TCM to Printing Devices on page 395
Connecting a TCM to Printing Devices Using a Hub on page 396
Configuring a Tricon TCM Port for Printing on page 397
About Function Blocks for Printing on page 398
See the Communication Guide for Tricon v9v10 Systems for more information about the types of
devices that can be used for printing from the Tricon controller.
Effect of Printing on Scan Time

Each time a message is printed, the print function blocks in the TriStation 1131 application are
executed and the scan time increases. Typically, the print function blocks are subject to
conditional execution, which means they are not executed every scan. When you set the scan
time in TriStation 1131, make sure it includes the execution time for all conditional statements
in the application.
If the scan time is not long enough, the execution of all conditional statements (when the
conditions are True) could result in scan-time overruns. You can minimize this problem by
limiting the amount of printer output. An alternative is to use a PC event logger such as the
Triconex SOE Recorder. For more information, see the SOE Recorder Users Guide.
Connecting a Tricon EICM Port to a Printer

This procedure explains how to set up a Centronics-compatible printer and connect it directly
to a Tricon EICM parallel port.
You can use a standard PC printer cable with a maximum cable length of 5 to 6 meters (15 to 20
feet), depending on the quality of the cable
Procedure
1
If the printer package has an installation program, copy the program to the TriStation
PC.
Follow the instructions, and run the diagnostic routine, if available.

You do not need the printer driver that may have come with the package.
Connect one end of the cable to the printer, and connect the other end to port 5 or 10 on
the EICM. (Other EICM ports cannot be used for printing.)
Go to the next section to configure the EICM port for printing.
Figure 30
Connecting an EICM to a Centronics-Compatible Printer
394
Chapter 5
Configuring a Tricon EICM Port for Printing

This procedure explains how to configure a Tricon EICM port that is connected to a Centronicscompatible printer.
Procedure
1
In TriStation 1131, open your project, expand the Controller tree, and double-click
Configuration.
On the Configuration tree under Hardware Allocation, double-click EICM, and then
click Setup.
Specify these properties on the EICM Setup screen.
Property
Action
Port Selection
Select Port 5 or Port 10. Other ports cannot be used for

printing.
Protocol
Select Printer from the Protocol list.
Rows
Enter the number of lines (rows) to be displayed on a page.
Columns
Enter the number of characters per line.
Click OK.
Connecting a TCM to Printing Devices

This procedure explains how to directly connect a TCM to an HP JetDirect-compatible print
server and printer.
You can use standard communication cables for these connections.
Procedure
1
If the print server and printer packages have installation programs, install them on the
TriStation PC.
Follow the instructions, and run the diagnostic routines if available.

You do not need the printer drivers that came with the packages.
Record the IP address of the print server. You will need the IP address when configuring
the TCM printer.
Connect the printer to the print server, and connect the print server to a TCM Ethernet
port (NET 1 or NET 21).
Figure 31
1.
Connecting a Tricon TCM to a Printer and Print Server
TCM models 4351/4351A/4351B and 4352/4352A/4352B only. NET 2 is reserved for OPC
communication on model 4353 and 4354 TCMs.
396
Chapter 5
Connecting a TCM to Printing Devices Using a Hub

This procedure explains how to connect a TCM to an HP JetDirect-compatible print server and
printer by using a hub. You can use standard communication cables for these connections.
You do not need to install the printer drivers that may have come with the print server and
printer packages.
Procedure
1
TriStation PC.
Follow the instructions that came with the packages, and run the diagnostic routines, if
available.
Record the IP address of the print server. You will need the IP address when configuring
the TCM printer.
Connect the printer to the print server, and connect the print server to a hub. Connect
the hub to a TCM Ethernet port (NET 1 or NET 22).
Figure 32
2.
Connecting the Tricon TCM to a Printer Server and Printer Using a Hub
TCM models 4351/4351A/4351B and 4352/4352A/4352B only. NET 2 is reserved for OPC
communication on model 4353 and 4354 TCMs.
Configuring a Tricon TCM Port for Printing

This procedure explains how to configure a Tricon TCM port that is connected to a Centronicscompatible printer. You do not need the printer driver that may have come with the printer
package.
Note
Because NET 2 is reserved for OPC communication, you cannot configure this port for
printing with model 4353 and 4354 TCMs. The printer port can be configured on NET 1
only for these TCMs.The information and procedures in this section do not apply to
model 4351 and 4352 TCMs. If you have one of these TCMs installed in your system,
please see Appendix C, TCM Model 4351/4352 Configuration.
Procedure
1
In TriStation 1131, open your project, expand the Controller tree, double-click
Configuration, and expand Hardware Allocation.
Click the Printer tab.
Specify these properties for the module installed in the Left Slot.
Property
Action
Printer Number
Enter the number for the printer; can only be 5 or 10. Both slots
cannot have the same printer number. The default is 0, meaning a
printer is not configured.
Line Width
Enter the number of characters to be printed on a line. The valid

range is 80132 characters. The default is 80 characters.
TCP Port
Number
Enter the number of the TCP port for the print server. The default
is 9100 for an HP printer.
398
Chapter 5
Property
Action
Network
Click the network that the print server is connected to. For model
4351A/4352A and 4351B/4352B TCMs, the default is NET 2.
For model 4353 and 4354 TCMs, the default is NET 1 (NET 2 is not
available for printing on these TCMs).
IP Address
Enter the IP address of the print server.
If a module is also installed in the Right Slot, repeat step 4 for that module.
Click OK.
About Function Blocks for Printing

A TriStation 1131 application must use print function blocks to send messages to a printer.
Each print function block has a PRINTER parameter which specifies the port number where the
printer cable is connected.
For a Tricon EICM or TCM port, the PRINTER parameter must be 5 for a left EICM or
TCM port, or 10 for a right EICM or TCM port. (Other EICM or TCM ports cannot be
used for printing.)
The PRINTER parameter must be the same number as is defined in TriStation 1131.
executed and the scan time increases.
This table lists the print function blocks in the Tricon libraries.
Print Function Block
Purpose
PRINT_BOOL
Prints a three-character field containing either Off or On.
PRINT_CDT
Prints the current date and time.
PRINT_CRLF
Prints a new line (carriage return and line feed).
PRINT_CTOD
Prints the current time of day.
PRINT_DINT
Prints a DINT value.
PRINT_REAL
Prints a REAL value.
PRINT_STRING
Prints a string of text.
PRINTR_FLUSH
Clears the print buffer.
See the TriStation 1131 Libraries Reference for more detailed information about the print function
blocks.
Setting Tricon Controller IP Addresses
399

When communication between a TriStation PC and a Tricon controller occurs over a network,
the IP address of the controller must be specified on the communication module.
If the controller is not part of a larger network, it may be possible to use the default IP address
set when the TriStation 1131 project is downloaded (assuming the correct node number and
default IP address are specified in the project).
If you cannot use a default address, there are other ways to set an IP address on a network. All
begin with asking the network administrator for the intended IP addresses. The easiest way is
to use a Reverse ARP (RARP) server that has been programmed in advance with the intended
addresses. Other ways include temporary connection of the TriStation PC to a non-Ethernet
module during downloading.
All the procedures for setting the IP address are based on the assumption that the Tricon
controller includes at least one communication module with an Ethernet port connected to a
network.
To use the procedures, you should know how to:
Connect the Tricon controller to a network
Connect the TriStation PC to the controller
Configure the TriStation 1131 project with the node number of the controller and the IP
address
For more information, see the Communication Guide for Tricon v9-v10 Systems.
Note
Typically, Triconex controllers are located on their own subnet which is connected to a
larger network such as a DCS. Your network administrator can set up the subnet for
compatibility with the Triconex default IP addresses and can program any routers that
lie between the DCS and the Triconex subnet with addressing information about the
Triconex controllers.
Topics include:
Using the Default IP Address for TriStation Communication on page 400
Setting a Tricon Controller IP Address Using a RARP Server on page 401
Setting a Tricon Controller IP Address Using an EICM or TCM on page 402
Testing a Network Connection on page 403
400
Chapter 5
Using the Default IP Address for TriStation Communication

This procedure explains how to use the default IP address for network communication between
a Tricon controller and a TriStation PC.
Procedure
1
Connect the Tricon controller to the network using the NET 2 port on the ACM, NCM,
or TCM.
Power up the controller.
Connect the TriStation PC to the network, or directly to a NET 2 port on the ACM, NCM,
or TCM.
In the TriStation 1131 project, expand the Controller tree, double-click Configuration,
and then click TriStation Communication.
On the TriStation Communication screen, verify the IP Address is:
192.168.1.1 (Tricon ACM, NCM, or TCM)
If the controller includes two communication modules, the default address applies to
both modules.
Note
The left and right modules in ACM or NCM slots use the same 48-bit physical
MAC address and cannot be connected to the same network.
On the Controller tree, click Configuration.
Expand Hardware Allocation, click the slot where the communication module is
installed, and then click Setup.
If a communication module is not installed, insert a communication module, and then
click Setup.
In the Setup dialog box, enter the same IP address specified on the TriStation
If the Tricon controller includes a redundant communication module, enter the same IP
address for the other slot.
10
On the Controller tree, click the Controller Panel. From the Commands menu, click
Connect.
11
Wait about 40 seconds for the module to reset and become active.
When the module is active, the Active indicator is green.
12
On the Commands menu, click Download All to download the TriStation 1131 project
to the Tricon controller.
13
On the TriStation PC, from the Start menu, click the MS-DOS Command Prompt.
14
Type the command ping followed by the IP address to be tested.
401
For example, for an IP address of 206.32.216.43, enter this:

ping 206.32.216.43
If the network connection is made, the reply includes the IP address followed by byte
and time information.
If the connection is not okay, the reply is Request timed out.
Note
If you receive a Request timed out reply, check your network cable and port connections
to verify they are securely connected, verify your configuration settings are correct, and
then retry the ping command.
Setting a Tricon Controller IP Address Using a RARP Server

This procedure explains how to set the IP address of a communication module using a RARP
server on the local network. To use this procedure, the network administrator must program the
RARP server with the intended IP address for the controller. If this is not possible, use another
method to set the IP address.
Procedure
1
Give the network administrator the MAC address, which is:

40-00-00-00-00-00 (Tricon)
Ask the network administrator for the IP address that is to be used for the Tricon
controller.
Connect the Tricon controller to the network through a network port on the

During initialization, the communication module sends a request to the RARP server for
an IP address that has been mapped to its own 48-bit MAC address.
Note
The left and right modules in ACM or NCM slots use the same 48-bit physical
MAC address and cannot be connected to the same network.
Enter the command ping followed by the IP address to be tested. For example, for an IP
address of 206.32.216.43, enter this:
ping 206.32.216.43
Note
If you receive a Request timed out reply, check your network cable and port
connections to verify they are securely connected, verify your configuration
settings are correct, and then retry the ping command.
Connect the TriStation PC to the network, or directly to a network port on the

402
Chapter 5
In the TriStation 1131 project, expand the Controller tree, click Configuration, and then
click TriStation Communication.
On the TriStation Communication screen, specify the Node Number of the controller
and the intended IP address.
10
On the Commands menu, click Connect. Wait until the connection is made.
11
to the controller.
Setting a Tricon Controller IP Address Using an EICM or TCM

This procedure explains how to set the IP address of the Tricon controller by initially connecting
the TriStation PC to an EICM or TCM serial port, and downloading the TriStation 1131 project.
After the address is set, you can disconnect the TriStation PC from the EICM or TCM serial port,
and reconnect it to a NET 2 port on the ACM, NCM, or TCM.
Procedure
1
Ask the network administrator for the IP address to be used for the ACM, NCM, or
TCM.
Connect the TriStation PC to a serial port on the EICM or TCM.
Connect the controller to the network using the NET 1 or NET 2 port on the TCM. On
the ACM or NCM, use the NET 2 port.
In the TriStation 1131 project, configure the following:
The EICM or TCM serial port and NET 2 Ethernet ports
The node number and node name of the controller
The intended IP address
On the Controller tree, click Controller Panel.
On the Command menu, click Connect To.
On the Connect To screen, select the Serial Port option and the COM port to which the
TriStation cable is connected.
Connect to the Tricon controller and download the TriStation 1131 project.
The ACM, NCM, or TCM initializes (resets) and accepts the IP address that you specify
in the TriStation 1131 project.
10
11
ping 206.32.216.43
Note
12
403
If the IP address is set, you can disconnect the TriStation PC from the EICM or TCM
serial port, and connect it to a NET 2 port or to the network.
Testing a Network Connection

This procedure explains how to test a connection from a Tricon communication module to a
network by using the ping command from an MS-DOS command prompt.
The test is performed on the TriStation PC. Before doing the test, you must have set the IP
address of the communication module on the network.
Procedure
1
Type the command ping followed by the IP address to be tested. For example, for an IP
ping 206.32.216.43
404
Chapter 5
6
Trident and Tri-GP Communication with
TriStation 1131
Overview 406
Configuring the TriStation PC 408
Connecting to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Controller for the First Time 411
Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller via a Serial Connection 412
Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller via a Network Connection 416
Specifying the Trident or Tri-GP Default Connection Type 433
Controlling Access to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM 434
Configuring Trident or Tri-GP Controller Printing 439
Setting Trident or Tri-GP Controller IP Addresses 446
406
Chapter 6
Overview
This figure shows the main steps for setting up TriStation 1131 communication and the typical
order in the project cycle. Communication setup can be done anytime before implementation.
Set Up the Project
Develop the
Application
Test with the

Emulator
Fix Errors
Errors?
C onfigure the
C ontroller
- Establish the physical connection

Set Up TriStation
C ommunication
- Configure the connection to the TriStation PC

- Set node and IP address of the controller
Implement on
the Controller
TriStation 1131 Communication Steps

This checklist includes the items that can be or should be performed to set up communication
between a TriStation PC and a Trident or Tri-GP controller.
Description
See
Connect to a Trident v1.x MP
Connecting the Trident 1.x MP to a TriStation

PC on page 417
Connect to a Trident v1.x CM
Connecting the Trident 1.x CM to the TriStation

PC on page 421
Overview
Description
Connect to a Trident v2.x CM or MP
407
See
Connecting to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP
Controller for the First Time on page 411
Connecting the Trident v2.x or Tri-GP
Controller to a TriStation PC on page 426
Connect to a Tri-GP CM or MP
Connecting to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP

Controller for the First Time on page 411
Connecting the Trident v2.x or Tri-GP
Controller to a TriStation PC on page 426
Configure user access to the Trident v2.x

or Tri-GP CM
Controlling Access to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP

CM on page 434
Set up printing
Configuring Trident or Tri-GP Controller

Printing on page 439
408
Chapter 6

This section explains the setup required for a network connection from the TriStation PC.
Topics include:
Installing a NIC Card in a TriStation PC on page 408
Installing DLC or TCP/IP Protocol on a TriStation PC on page 408
Note
If you will only be connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP controller via a serial connection,
you can skip this section. Please note, however, that the preferred method of connecting
the TriStation PC to the Trident or Tri-GP controller is via a network connection.
Installing a NIC Card in a TriStation PC

This procedure explains how to install a network interface card (NIC) in a TriStation PC to be
connected to a Trident or Tri-GP MP or CM.
Procedure
1
Connect the network interface card directly to a CM or MP network port on the Trident
or Tri-GP controller, or to an Ethernet hub.
Installing DLC or TCP/IP Protocol on a TriStation PC

These procedures explain how to install DLC or TCP/IP protocol on a TriStation PC.
The DLC protocol is required only for connecting to a Trident 1.x MP.
The TCP/IP protocol is required for Trident or Tri-GP CM connection.
Installing TCP/IP on Windows XP or Windows Server 2003

1
Properties.
On the General tab, if the TCP/IP protocol is checked on the list of installed
procedure.
If the TCP/IP protocol is not checked, go to the next step to continue the
installation.
409
Click the TCP/IP protocol, and then click OK.
Installing TCP/IP on Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2

1
On the Start menu, click Control Panel, open Network and Internet, and then click
Network and Sharing Center.
In the Network and Sharing Center, click Manage Network Connections.
Right-click the network connection you want to change, and then click Properties.
If prompted, enter the administrators password or confirm the operation.
On the Networking tab, under This connection uses the following items, click Internet
Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4), and then click OK.
Note
Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) must be installed to allow a TriStation

1131 application to connect to a Trident or Tri-GP controller. Do not install
Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/IPv6).
Installing DLC on Windows XP, Windows Server 2003/2008 or Windows 7

Installing the DLC protocol on a Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008 R2
(32-bit only), or Windows 7 (32-bit only) workstation is a 3-step process. The DLC protocol
cannot be installed on Windows 64-bit systems. As a result, you cannot connect to a Trident 1.x
MP on a Windows 64-bit system.
Note
If you have already installed the DLC protocol on your workstation, you can configure
it to start automatically each time you start your workstation by changing a registry
value. Go to HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\ControlSet001\Services\Dlc, and
then change the Start value to 1.
Step 1: Download the DLC Protocol Installation Program

1
Open your Internet browser, and enter the following URL in the address field:
http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/
In the Search for a Download section, perform a search for DLC Protocol and then go
to the download page for the DLC protocol for Windows XP.
Follow the instructions on the download page to start the download process.
When prompted, save the dlc.exe file to your local drive.
When the download is complete, double-click the self-extracting dlc.exe file to unzip the
five DLC protocol files.
Save the files to a location on your local drive that will be easy to remember (for example,
C:\DLC).
410
Chapter 6
Step 2: Modify the .INF File

1
Go to the location where you saved the DLC protocol files in step 4 of the previous
section.
Right-click on NetDLC.inf, and select Open with from the shortcut menu that appears.
Then select Notepad from the Open with dialog box and click OK. The .inf file opens in
Notepad.
Scroll down until you see the following section:
Change the value for StartType from 3 to 1. This ensures that the DLC protocol will start
automatically each time you start your workstation.
Save the file and then exit Notepad.
Step 3: Configure the DLC Protocol Network Connection

1
Go to the location where you saved the DLC protocol files in Step 1.
Double-click install.cmd to start the installation script.
Properties.
Click the DLC Protocol, and then click OK.
Once installation is complete, you can close the Network Connections dialog box.
Connecting to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Controller for the First Time
411
Connecting to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Controller for

the First Time
The first time you connect to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP controller, you are limited to the
following two connection options:
Serial connection to the CM or MP (recommended), or
Network connection to the Left MP, using the default IP address only
You cannot connect to the controller via a network connection to the CM or the Right or
Middle network ports on the MP until you have completed all of the following tasks:
Configure the CM and/or MP (Right and Middle ports) network connection in

TriStation 1131, including configuring your own IP addresses for the desired network
port(s).
Successfully connect to the controller via the first-time connection options described
above.
Download your application to the controller using the Download All command.
Once your applicationwith the IP addresses for the other MP and/or CM network ports
correctly configuredhas been downloaded to the controller, you can disconnect from the
Trident or Tri-GP controller and reconnect using your desired network connection.
Note
After you have successfully configured your network configuration for the CM and/or
the Right and Middle MP, you can change the default IP address for the Left MP to your
desired IP address for future network connections.
Connecting Via the Serial Connection (Recommended)

Invensys recommends using the serial connection for the initial connection to the Trident 2.x or
Tri-GP controller because it is less complex to configure and thus easier to successfully connect
to the CM through the serial port.
Once you have successfully connected to the CM and downloaded the initial configuration to
the Trident or Tri-GP controller via the serial connection, you can go back and configure the
more complex network connection, without worrying about losing the ability to communicate
with the controller altogether. See Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller via a Serial
Connection on page 412 for more information.
Connecting via the Left MP Network Port

If you need to use a network connection for the initial connection to the controller, you must
connect using the default IP address (192.168.255.n) with the Left MP.
Your own IP addresses for other MP and CM modules cannot be used for connecting to the
controller until your applicationwith the IP addresses for the other MP and/or CM network
ports correctly configuredhas been downloaded to the controller at least once, using the
Download All command. See Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller via a Network
Connection on page 416 for more information.
412
Chapter 6
Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller via a

Serial Connection
This section explains how to make a direct (point-to-point) serial connection between a Trident
2.x or Tri-GP CM and a TriStation PC.
Note
You cannot connect the TriStation PC to the Trident 1.x controller via a serial connection.
See Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller via a Network Connection on
page 416 for instructions on connecting the TriStation PC to a Trident 1.x.
Port 3 on the CM is the only serial port that supports TriStation communication. If port 3 on the
CM fails, you can connect to TriStation 1131 using the NET 1 or NET 2 port; see the
Communication Guide for Trident v2 Systems for more information.
Topics include:
When to Use the Trident or Tri-GP Serial Connection on page 412
Connecting a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Serial Port to a TriStation PC on page 414
When to Use the Trident or Tri-GP Serial Connection

The preferred means for connecting the TriStation PC to the Trident or Tri-GP controller is via
a network connection. Invensys recommends connecting the TriStation PC to the Trident or
Tri-GP controller via a serial connection only in the following scenarios.
Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller for the First Time

The first time you connect to the Trident or Tri-GP controller, Invensys recommends making a
serial connection to the CM, because it is less complex to configure and thus easier to
successfully connect to the CM through the serial port.
Once you have successfully connected to the CM and downloaded the initial configuration to
the Trident or Tri-GP controller via the serial connection, you can go back and configure the
more complex network connection without worrying about losing the ability to communicate
with the controller altogether.
See Connecting to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Controller for the First Time on page 411 for more
information.
Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller When the Network Is Down

When network communication has been interrupted due to hardware or other problems with
the network, the serial connection can be used as a backup means of communicating with the
Trident or Tri-GP controller. Once the network problems have been resolved, you should
restore the network connection to the Trident or Tri-GP controller.
Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller via a Serial Connection
413
Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller When the Access Control List
has Been Misconfigured
If you misconfigure the access control list, you could accidentally lock yourself out of a network
connection to the Trident or Tri-GP controller. Once you enable CM client access control by
selecting the Enable Access List check box, you must configure at least one client with TriStation
Read/Write access before you save the configuration.
If this is not done, you will be unable to connect to the Trident or Tri-GP controller again after
your next download, preventing you from making further changes to the application running
on the controller, including changes to the CM access control list. If this happens, you can use
the serial connection to connect to the Trident or Tri-GP controller and download changes to the
access control list.
See Controlling Access to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM on page 434 for more information.
414
Chapter 6
Connecting a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Serial Port to a TriStation PC

This procedure explains how to connect serial port 3 on the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM to a
TriStation PC.
Invensys provides a serial cable that has a 9-pin connector on each end. If the COM port on the
PC has a 25-pin connector, you can use a Triconex 25-pin to 9-pin adapter. If you need other
parts, you can purchase them from another manufacturer. For more information, see the
Communication Guide for Trident v2 Systems.
Procedure
1
Connect one end of the serial cable to serial port 3 on the CM.
Connect the other end of the serial cable to a COM port on the TriStation PC. The COM
port is typically numbered COM1, COM2, COM3, or COM4.
Figure 33
Connecting a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Serial Port to the TriStation PC
Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller via a Serial Connection
415
Configuring the TriStation 1131 Serial Connection

This procedure explains how to configure a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM serial port that is
connected to a TriStation PC.
Procedure
1
Expand the Controller tree, double-click

Configuration, and then click TriStation
Communication.

Note
The data displayed on this screen is

used by TriStation 1131 only to connect
to a Trident or Tri-GP communication
port. The data that you enter will not be
downloaded to the Trident or Tri-GP
controller.
Property
Action
Serial Connection
(Trident/Tri-GP v2.x only)
Select this check box.
Node Name
Enter the name of the Trident or Tri-GP controller. You

can use a default name, or enter your own user-defined
name. The default names are TRINODE01 through
TRINODE31.
Serial Port
Select the COM port on the TriStation PC to which the

serial cable is connected.
You cannot change the default baud rate of 115200.
On the Configuration tree, expand Hardware Allocation, double-click CM, and then
click Setup.
Specify these properties on the Serial Ports tab of the CM Setup dialog box.
Property
Action
Port
Select the port that the TriStation PC is attached to. You must
select port 3, as this is the only serial port supported for TriStation
1131 connection.
Protocol
Select TriStation.
Click OK.
416
Chapter 6
Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller via a

Network Connection
This section explains how to make a network connection between a Trident or Tri-GP
communication module (CM) or main processor (MP), and a TriStation PC. This can be a direct
connection from the Trident or Tri-GP controller to the PC, or a connection through a router,
hub, or media converter. A router or hub is not required if you do not need to connect any
additional devices besides the Trident or Tri-GP controller and the PC.
To set up the connection, you must:
Install a network interface card and the TCP/IP protocol on the PC.
Set the node number of the controller.
Connect the PC to a network port on the CM or MP.
Configure the connection in the TriStation 1131 project.
CAUTION
The node setting (on the MP Baseplate) must match the node number
specified in the TriStation 1131 project. For instructions on changing the
MP node setting, see the Planning and Installation Guide for Trident v2
Systems.
For instructions on installing a network interface card and the TCP/IP protocol on the TriStation
PC, see Configuring the TriStation PC on page 408.
Topics include:
Connecting the Trident 1.x MP to a TriStation PC on page 417
Connecting the Trident 1.x CM to the TriStation PC on page 421
Connecting the Trident v2.x or Tri-GP Controller to a TriStation PC on page 426
Note
If you are connecting the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP controller to the TriStation PC via serial
port, see Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller via a Serial Connection on
page 412.
Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP Controller via a Network Connection
417
Connecting the Trident 1.x MP to a TriStation PC

This section explains how a Trident 1.x MP can be used for a network connection to a TriStation
PC using the DLC protocol. This can be a direct connection from the MP to the PC, or a
connection through a hub on a network.
Communication between the Trident 1.x MP and the TriStation PC requires the DLC protocol
to be installed on the PC. For more information, see Configuring the TriStation PC on page 408.
Topics include:
Directly Connecting a Trident 1.x MP to a TriStation PC on page 417
Connecting a Trident 1.x MP to a TriStation PC Using a Hub on page 418
Configuring the TriStation 1131 Connection on page 419
Note
If you are connecting the Trident 1.x controller to the TriStation PC via the CM, see
Connecting the Trident 1.x CM to the TriStation PC on page 421.
Directly Connecting a Trident 1.x MP to a TriStation PC

This procedure explains how to directly connect a TriStation PC to a network port on a Trident
1.x MP Baseplate using a 10BaseT cross-over cable.
Procedure
1
Attach one end of the cross-over cable to one of the RJ-45 connectors on the MP
Baseplate. This is typically MP A, as shown in the figure.
Attach the other end of the cross-over cable to the network interface card in the PC.
DSP1
PASS
DSP2
PASS
FAULT
MODE
ACTIVE
MODE
REM
OTE
REMOTE
REM
OTE
RUN
RUN
RUN
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
PROGRAM
HALT
HALT
STATUS
PS1
STATUS
PS1
PS2
SYSTEM ALARM
PROGRAM ALARM
COMMUNI
CATIONS
IO BUS
COMM BUS
SERIAL
TX
RX
TX
RX
TX
RX
PS1
PS2
SYSTEM ALARM
PROGRAM ALARM
OVER
TEMPE
RATURE
LOCK
PS2
SYSTEM ALARM
PROGRAM ALARM
OVER
TEMPE
RATURE
LOCK
COMMUNI
CATIONS
IO BUS
COMM BUS
SERIAL
LINK
TX
RX
TX
RX
TX
RX
LOCK
COMMUNI
CATIONS
IO BUS
TRIS
TATION TX
RX
RX
MP3101
TX
RX
TX
COMM BUS
RX
SERIAL
LINK
TRIS
TATION TX
MP3101
HALT
STATUS
OVER
TEMPE
RATURE
FAULT
ACTIVE
MODE
DSP4
PASS
FAULT
ACTIVE
DSP3
TX
RX
LINK
TRIS
TATION TX
RX
MP3101
TX
Figure 34
Connecting the TriStation PC to a Trident 1.x Main Processor
418
Chapter 6
Connecting a Trident 1.x MP to a TriStation PC Using a Hub

This procedure explains how to connect a Trident 1.x MP to a TriStation PC using a 10BaseT
straight-through cable and a hub.
Procedure
1
Attach at least one 10BaseT straight-through cable from an RJ-45 connector on an MP

Baseplate to the hub.
Note
Using more than one cable provides redundancy for the TriStation connection. If
you use only one cable during live operation, you have to unplug it and move it
to another RJ-45 connector if the original connection fails.
Attach the network interface card in the TriStation PC to the hub using another 10BaseT
straight-through cable.
V SP1
P ASS
V SP2
PASS
F A U LT
P ASS
FAU L T
A CTIVE
F A U LT
A CTIVE
A CTIVE
ALARM1
MODE
MODE
ALARM2
MODE
REM O TE
REM O TE
RUN
RUN
PROG RAM
PROG RAM
HA LT
HA L T
ST ATUS
HA LT
STA TUS
S TATUS
PS1
PS1
PS2
PS1
PS2
SY STEM ALARM
PS2
SY STEM ALARM
SY STEM ALARM
PROG R AM ALARM
PROG RAM ALARM
PROG RAM ALARM
OVER TEMPE RATURE
OVER TEMPE RA TURE
OVER TEMPE RA TURE
L OCK
C OMMUNI
C A TIONS
LOCK
COMMUNI
CA TIONS
TX
IO BUS
COMMUNI
RX
RX
TX
RX
LINK
RX
LINK
TX
TRIS TA TION
RX
MP3101
TX
SERIAL
RX
TX
RX
COMM BUS
TX
SERIAL
TRIS TA TION
TX
TX
COMM BUS
T X
SERIAL
C A TIONS
IO BUS
RX
TX
RX
L OCK
TX
IO BUS
RX
COMM BUS
REM OTE
RUN
PROG RAM
LINK
TRIS TA TION
RX
MP3101
TX
RX
MP3101
TX
COAX
8X
1X
MDI
MDIX
POWER
Figure 35
16
10BASE-T
9X
Connecting the TriStation PC to the Trident 1.x Main Processor Using a Hub
419
Configuring the TriStation 1131 Connection

This procedure explains how to configure a Trident 1.x MP connection to a TriStation PC.
Procedure
1
Expand the Controller tree, and doubleclick Configuration.
On the Configuration tree, click


Property
Action
Select Connection
Select the Main Processor Connection (Trident 1.x only)

check box.
Node Number
Enter the number specified on the address plug on the MP

Baseplate.
Node Name
Enter a name with eight or fewer characters to identify the

Trident controller.
Main Processor
Setup
Select Left, Middle, or Right to specify which MP port is

connected to the TriStation PC.
NIC Index
Enter the index position of the network interface card in the

TriStation PC.
Note
Trident communication port. The data that you enter will not be downloaded to
the Trident controller.
On the Configuration tree, expand Hardware Allocation, and then double-click the Main
Processors (MP/IOP1).
In the Properties dialog box, click Setup.
In the MP Setup dialog box, click the Network Ports tab.

420
Chapter 6
For the port that is physically connected to the TriStation PC (Left, Middle, or Right)
specify the Transceiver Mode to match the installed hardware.
421
Connecting the Trident 1.x CM to the TriStation PC

This section explains how to configure a Trident 1.x CM connection to the TriStation PC. Topics
include:
Directly Connecting a Trident 1.x CM to a TriStation PC on page 421
Connecting a Trident 1.x CM to a TriStation PC Using a Hub on page 422
Configuring the TriStation 1131 Connection on page 423
Note
If you are connecting the Trident 1.x controller to the TriStation PC via the MP, see
Connecting the Trident 1.x MP to a TriStation PC on page 417.
Directly Connecting a Trident 1.x CM to a TriStation PC

This procedure explains how to directly connect a Trident v1.x CM to a TriStation PC using a
cross-over cable.
For a NET 1 port, you must use a 10BaseT cable. For a NET 2 port, you can use either a 10BaseT
or 100BaseTX cable. On the CM baseplate, you can attach the cable to an RJ-45 connector or to a
MAU. For information about MAUs, see the Communication Guide for Trident v1 Systems.
Procedure
1
Attach one end of a cross-over cable to a NET 1 or NET 2 connector on the CM baseplate,
as shown in this example.
Attach the other end of the cross-over cable to the network interface card in the
TriStation PC.
Figure 36 Connecting the TriStation PC Directly to a Trident 1.x CM
422
Chapter 6
Connecting a Trident 1.x CM to a TriStation PC Using a Hub

This procedure explains how to connect a Trident 1.x CM to a TriStation PC using a straightthrough cable and a hub.
For a NET 1 port, you must use a 10BaseT cable. For a NET 2 port, you can use either a 10BaseT
or 100BaseTX cable. On the CM baseplate, you can attach the cable to an RJ-45 connector or to a
MAU. For information about MAUs, see the Communication Guide for Trident v1 Systems.
Procedure
1
Attach one end of a straight-through cable to a NET 1 or NET 2 connector on the CM

baseplate.
Attach the other end of the straight-through cable to a network hub, as shown in the
example below.
Connect the TriStation PC to the hub using another straight-through cable.
PASS
PASS
FAULT
FAULT
ACTIVE
ACTIVE
LOCK
COMMUNICATIONS
SERIAL
SERIAL
SERIAL
LOCK
COMMUNICATIONS
TX
SERIAL
RX
TX
SERIAL
RX
TX
SERIAL
RX
TX
RX
LINK
RX
LINK
LINK
NET 2 TX
NET 2 TX
RX
CM 3201
1X
8X
16
RX
NET 1 TX
RX
MDI
MDIX
TX
LINK
CM 3201
COAX
RX
NET 1 TX
RX
POWER
TX
10BASE-T
9X
Figure 37 Connecting the TriStation PC to a Trident 1.x CM Using a Hub
423
Configuring the TriStation 1131 Connection

This procedure explains how to configure a Trident 1.x CM connection to a TriStation PC.
Before you begin this procedure, you must determine the IP address to use for the CM. If the
connection goes through a gateway or a router, you also need IP addresses for those devices.
Typically, you can get the necessary IP addresses from your network administrator or
Information Technology department. See Setting Trident or Tri-GP Controller IP Addresses on
page 446.
Procedure
1
Expand the Controller tree, and

double-click Configuration.
On the Configuration tree, click

Specify these properties on the

TriStation Communication screen.
Property
Action
Select Connection
Node Number

baseplate.
Node Name
Enter a name that contains eight or fewer characters to

identify the Trident controller.
IP Address
Enter the IP address.
Note
Trident communication port. The data that you enter will not be downloaded to
the Trident controller.
On the Configuration tree, double-click the CM (COM: CM).
424
Chapter 6
Specify these properties for the NET 1 or NET 2 port, depending on which is connected
to the TriStation PC.
Property
Action
Slot Selection
Select Left Slot or Right Slot, depending on which slot contains

the module that is connected to the TriStation PC.
Mode
For the TriStation connection, select Open Network.

For each CM on a baseplate, you can select Open Network for
either NET 1 or NET 2, but not for both ports.
Privilege
Select Read or Read/Write to specify access privileges for

external devices on the network.
A TriStation 1131 application must use the Privilege option in
conjunction with the MP.REMOTE_WRT_ENBL control
attribute (and possibly other write controls) to enable writes by
external devices.
Transceiver Port
Select RJ-45 or MAU depending on the type of CM baseplate

port to which you have physically attached the TriStation cable.
Property
Action
Transceiver
Mode
Select the Auto mode if the TriStation cable can auto-negotiate

to either 10 or 100 megabits per second.
425
If your cable operates at only one speed, select the appropriate

speed from the list.
IP Address
If using the default node number, do not change this property

(leave blank).
If using a different node number, enter the IP address that
identifies the controller on the network. This must be the same
address you entered in step 2.
IP Subnet Mask
Get the subnet mask from your network administrator.
Default Gateway
IP Address
If the CM connection to the TriStation PC goes through a

default gateway, enter the IP address of the gateway.
Time
Synchronization
Select None. This property does not apply to TriStation

communication.
426
Chapter 6
Connecting the Trident v2.x or Tri-GP Controller to a TriStation PC

This section explains how to connect the Trident v2.x or Tri-GP controller to the TriStation PC
via a network port on the CM or MP.
If you will be using the default IP address for the Trident or Tri-GP controller
(192.168.255.<node>), you must connect the controller to the TriStation PC via a network port on
the Left MP. The network ports on the Middle MP, Right MP, and CM do not have default IP
addresses; you must configure the IP addresses for these ports based on your network
configuration.
If you want to be able to retrieve communication status information from the CM, you must
connect the controller to the TriStation PC via a network port on the CM.
Note
If the TriStation PC is connected only to the MP, you will not be able to view
communication status information in the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor. See the
Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor Users Guide for more information.
CAUTION
If you will be connecting to the Trident v2.x or Tri-GP controller for the
very first time via a network connection, you must use the default IP
address (192.168.255.<node>), and connect to the controller via the Left
MP.
See Connecting to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Controller for the First Time
Topics include:
Directly Connecting a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Network Port to a TriStation PC on

page 427
Connecting a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Network Port to a TriStation PC Using a Hub on

page 428
427
Directly Connecting a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Network Port to a TriStation PC

This procedure explains how to directly connect a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM or MP network port
to a TriStation PC using a cross-over cable.
On the CM, for a NET 1 port, you must use a 10BaseT cable. For a NET 2 port, you can
use either a 10BaseT or 100BaseTX cable.
On the MP baseplate, for a TriStation port, you must use a 10BaseT cable.
Procedure
1
Attach one end of a cross-over cable to a NET 1 or NET 2 connector on the CM baseplate,
as shown in this example, or to a TriStation port on the MP baseplate.
Attach the other end of the cross-over cable to the network interface card in the
TriStation PC.
DSP1
PASS
DSP2
PASS
FAULT
MODE
REMOTE
RUN
RUN
PROGRAM
HALT
PS2
SYSTEM ALARM
STATUS
PS1
PROGRAM ALARM
OVER
TEMPE
RATURE
LOCK
COMMUNICATIONS
TX
RX
TX
RX
TX
RX
PS2
SYSTEM ALARM
PROGRAM ALARM
OVER
TEMPE
RATURE
LOCK
COMMUNI
CATIONS
IO BUS
COMM BUS
SERIAL
TX
RX
TX
RX
TX
RX
LINK
LINK
TRIS
TATION TX
TRIS
TATION TX
RX
MP3101
PS1
PS2
SYSTEM ALARM
PROGRAM ALARM
OVER
TEMPE
RATURE
SERIAL
RUN
PROGRAM
HALT
STATUS
PS1
IO BUS
REM
OTE
PROGRAM
HALT
COMM BUS
ACTIVE
MODE
REM
OTE
STATUS
FAULT
ACTIVE
MODE
DSP4
PASS
FAULT
ACTIVE
DSP3
LOCK
COMMUNI
CATIONS
IO BUS
COMM BUS
SERIAL
TX
RX
TX
LINK
TRIS
TATION TX
RX
MP3101
TX
RX
RX
RX
MP3101
TX
Figure 38 Connecting the TriStation PC Directly to a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP MP (left) or CM

(right) Using a Hub
428
Chapter 6
Connecting a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Network Port to a TriStation PC Using a

Hub
This procedure explains how to connect a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM or MP network port to a
TriStation PC using a straight-through cable and a hub.
On the CM, for a NET 1 port, you must use a 10BaseT cable. For a NET 2 port, you can
use either a 10BaseT or 100BaseTX cable.
On the MP baseplate, for a TriStation port, you must use a 10BaseT cable.
Procedure
1
Attach one end of a straight-through cable to a NET 1 or NET 2 connector on the CM

baseplate, or to a TriStation port on the MP baseplate.
Attach the other end of the straight-through cable to a network hub, as shown in the
example below.
Connect the TriStation PC to the hub using another straight-through cable.
PASS
V SP1
PASS
V SP2
PASS
F AU LT
PASS
FAULT
FAULT
ACTIVE
ACTIVE
PASS
FAU L T
A CTIVE
F AU LT
A CTIVE
A CTIVE
ALARM1
MODE
MODE
ALARM2
MODE
REM O TE
REM O TE
RUN
RUN
PROG RAM
PROG RAM
HA LT
REM OTE
RUN
PROG RAM
HA L T
ST A TUS
HA LT
STA TUS
STA TUS
PS1
PS1
PS2
PS1
PS2
S Y STEM ALARM
PS2
SY STEM ALARM
SY STEM ALARM
PROG R AM ALARM
PROG RAM ALARM
PROG RAM ALARM
OVER TEMPE RA TURE
OVER TEMPE RA TURE
OVER TEMPE RA TURE
LOCK
L OCK
LOCK
COMMUNICATIONS
SERIAL
C OMMUNI
C ATIONS
COMMUNI
CA TIONS
TX
IO BUS
COMMUNI
SERIAL
C ATIONS
TX
IO BUS
TX
RX
COMMUNICATIONS
SERIAL
RX
SERIAL
TX
COMM BUS
RX
TX
COMM BUS
SERIAL
TX
SERIAL
TX
RX
RX
LINK
TX
LINK
TRIS TA TION
TX
RX
MP3101
TX
NET 1 TX
SERIAL
TX
RX
RX
RX
TX
RX
LINK
NET 1 TX
SERIAL
RX
TRIS TA TION
RX
RX
LINK
T X
SERIAL
TX
TX
RX
TX
RX
TX
RX
IO BUS
RX
COMM BUS
LOCK
L OCK
LINK
TRIS TA TION
RX
MP3101
TX
RX
RX
LINK
LINK
NET 2 TX
NET 2 TX
RX
MP3101
CM 3201
RX
CM 3201
TX
COAX
COAX
8X
MDI
MDIX
16
10BASE-T
9X
POWER
1X
8X
1X
MDI
MDIX
POWER
16
10BASE-T
9X
Figure 39 Connecting the TriStation PC to a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP MP (left) or CM (right) Using
a Hub
429
Configuring the TriStation 1131 Network Connection

This procedure explains how to configure a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP network connection to a
TriStation PC.
Before you begin this procedure, you must determine the IP address to use for the CM or MP.
If the connection goes through a gateway or a router, you also need IP addresses for those
devices. Typically, you can get the necessary IP addresses from your network administrator or
Information Technology department. See Setting Trident or Tri-GP Controller IP Addresses on
page 446.
Procedure
1
On the Configuration tree, click TriStation Communication.
Specify these properties on the TriStation Communication screen.

Property
Action
Select Connection
Node Number

baseplate.
Node Name
Enter a name that contains eight or fewer characters to

identify the Trident or Tri-GP controller.
430
Chapter 6
Property
Action
IP Address
Enter the IP address for the CM or MP network port you

will be connecting to. Each node has seven connection
options:
Left MP
Middle MP
Right MP
Left CM - NET 1
Left CM - NET 2
Right CM - NET 1
Right CM - NET 2
The default IP address is 192.168.255.n, where n is the node
number of the controller. The default IP address is for
connection to the Left MP only.
To use the default IP address, click the browse
button,
and in the dialog box that appears, select the IP address for
the node you are configuring.
Note: Your own IP addresses for other MP and CM
modules cannot be used for connecting to the
controller until the control programwith the IP
address configurationhas been downloaded to
the controller at least once, using the Download All
Command. See Connecting to the Trident 2.x or
Tri-GP Controller for the First Time on page 411 for
more information.
TriStation UDP Port

Number
Specify the UDP port to use for the connection to a Trident

2.x or Tri-GP controller with a CM installed. The default is
1502.
This must be the same value as the TriStation UDP Port
Number property in the CM Setup dialog box.
Required only for a connection to a Trident v2.x or Tri-GP
node with a CM installed.
Note
Trident or Tri-GP communication port. The data that you enter will not be
downloaded to the Trident or Tri-GP controller.
If the TriStation PC is connected to the CM, go to step 5.
If the TriStation PC is connected to the MP, go to step 8.
On the Configuration tree, expand Hardware Allocation, double-click CM, and then
click Setup.
431
On the Network tab of the CM Setup dialog box, specify these properties for the NET 1
or NET 2 port, depending on which is connected to the TriStation PC.
Property
Action
Slot Selection
Select Left Slot or Right Slot, depending on which slot

contains the module that is connected to the TriStation
PC.
Installed
Select this property for all installed modules.
IP Address
If using a default IP address, leave blank.

If not, enter the IP address that identifies the controller
on the network. This must be the same IP address
entered on the TriStation Communication screen.
IP Subnet Mask
If using a default IP Subnet Mask, leave blank.

Otherwise, get the subnet mask from your network
administrator.
Default Gateway IP
Address
If the CM connection to the TriStation PC goes through

a default gateway, enter the IP address of the gateway.
Go to step 13.
On the Configuration tree, expand Hardware Allocation, and then double-click the Main
Processors (MP/IOP1).
10
In the MP Setup dialog box, click the Network Ports tab.
432
Chapter 6
11
For the port that is physically connected to the TriStation PC (Left, Middle, or Right)
specify the Transceiver Mode to match the installed hardware.
12
Specify the IP address for the port. This must be the same IP address entered on the
TriStation Communication screen in step 3.
13
Specifying the Trident or Tri-GP Default Connection Type
433
Specifying the Trident or Tri-GP Default Connection

Type
This procedure explains how to specify the default connection setting in the Connect To dialog
box, which appears when you establish communication between a TriStation PC and a
controller. The connection settingNetwork, Serial, or Main Processor Connectionis an
initial setting and can be changed when you use the Connect command.
Procedure
1
Expand the Configuration tree,

double-click Configuration, and
then click TriStation
Communication.
Verify that the Network

Connection Setup (for a network
connection), Main Processor
Connection Setup (for a MP
connection), or TriStation PC (for
a serial connection) properties
are correctly configured.
See the following for additional
information:
Connecting to the Trident or

Tri-GP Controller via a Serial
Connecting to the Trident or

Tri-GP Controller via a
Network Connection on
page 416
Under Default Connection, select

one of the following:
Network Connection
Main Processor (for Trident 1.x only)
Serial Connection (for Trident 2.x or Tri-GP only)
The next time you establish communication between the TriStation PC and the Trident
or Tri-GP, the default connection setting you selected will be used.
Note
If only one connection type is selected under Select Connections, the default connection
is automatically set based on it, and cannot be changed.
434
Chapter 6
Controlling Access to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM

The Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Communication Module (CM) gives you the ability to control who can
access CM resources through the modules network ports, and each users level of access. Topics
include:
What Are CM Resources? on page 434
How Is Access Controlled? on page 434
What Are Access Levels? on page 435
Configuring the Access Control List on page 437
What Are CM Resources?

A resource is any service or information provided by the CM through the supported
communications protocols. Examples of these resources include:
Access to the controller via TriStation 1131 (ability to perform a Download Changes or
Download All).
Access to Trident or Tri-GP diagnostic information via the Enhanced Diagnostic

Monitor.
Access to information provided in applications such as SOE Recorder or DDE Server

that use the TSAA protocol.
Access to any other applications that use the TSAA protocol.
CAUTION
on Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CMs. Depending on your configuration, this may
create a security issue. To disable write access by TSAA clients, you must
enable and configure the CM access control list.
How Is Access Controlled?

Access is controlled via client IP addresses. You can control access for a single IP address (one
client), or for a group of IP addresses (a group of clients).
If you want to group clients into a single access list entry, they must be physically separated in
a sub-network, and a network address mask must be used to group them in the access list. A
network address mask of 255.255.255.255 restricts an access list entry so that it applies only to
the specific IP address identified in the entry. A network address mask of 255.255.255.0 applies
an access list entry to any client on the same subnet as the IP address identified in the entry.
Other network address masks may also be used, depending on your network structure.
For example, if you want two clients with IP addresses of 192.168.1.134 and 192.168.1.65 to share
the same access permissions, and there are no other clients on the same subnet, you can group
them in the access list by setting the IP address for a single entry as 192.168.1.x and the network
address mask to 255.255.255.0.
435
For each IP address or group of IP addresses, you can set the access level, the protocols the client
can use to access the CM, and the network ports the client can use to access the CM.
What Are Access Levels?

There are three levels of access:
Deny Access: Prevents all access to resources provided by the CM. Connections to the
Trident are not allowed.
Read Only: Allows client to connect to the Trident or Tri-GP, and view information
provided via the CM. Does not allow the client to change any settings or perform
certain commands.
Read/Write: Full access. Allows client to view information provided by the CM, change
settings, and perform all commands (including Download Changes or Download All
for TriStation 1131).
Access levels are configured by adding entries to the access control list. A maximum of 10
entries can be provided in the access list.
The same access level is applied to all selected protocols in a single access control list entry. If
you want to provide different access levels for a selected client depending on which protocol
they are using, you will need to create two separate entries in the access control list, one for each
protocol.
Access levels apply to all users using the PC assigned the IP address entered in the access control
list. This means if multiple users are using the same PC, they will all have the same access rights.
For example, every user using TriStation 1131 on a PC with a particular IP address would have
the same access rights to the CM. Individual user access should be controlled via workstation
security; CM access is controlled only at the IP address level.
CAUTION
Once you enable CM client access control by selecting the Enable Access
List check box, you must configure at least one client with TriStation
Read/Write access before you can save the configuration.
This ensures you will be able to connect to the Trident or Tri-GP again
after your next download, and allows you to make further changes to the
application running on the controller, including changes to the CM access
control list.
If necessary, you can also connect via a TriStation serial connection to
reconfigure the access control list. See Connecting to the Trident or Tri-GP
Controller via a Serial Connection on page 412.
Note
If you are using the TSAA and/or TriStation protocols, you must enable and use access
list control to manage read/write access to specific ports. If you are using the serial
and/or Modbus TCP protocols, you can also use the Port Write Enabled property to
manage read/write access to specific ports. See Port Write Enabled on page 581.
436
The following table is a sample access control list, with the access control scenarios that would result if enabled on
a Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM.
Chapter 6
Sample Trident v2.x or Tri-GP CM Access Control List
Entry
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Protocol
Network
Access Level
Resulting Access Control Scenario
206.216.1.12
255.255.255.0
TriStation
NET 2
Read/Write

same subnet) attempting to access the CM using the TriStation
protocol on NET 2 would be granted Read/Write access.
206.216.1.12
255.255.255.0
TSAA
NET 1
Read Only

same subnet) attempting to access the CM using the TSAA
protocol on NET 1 would be granted Read Only access.
192.168.1.05
255.255.255.255
TriStation
NET 1
NET 2
Deny Access

the CM using the TriStation protocol on NET 1 or NET 2
would be denied access.
192.168.1.09
255.255.255.255
TSAA
NET 1
NET 2
Deny Access

the CM using TSAA on NET 1 or NET 2 would be denied
access.
192.168.1.05
255.255.255.0
TriStation
NET 2
Read Only

same subnet) attempting to access the CM using TriStation on
NET 2 would be granted Read Only access.a
192.168.1.05
255.255.255.0
TSAA
NET 2
Read Only

same subnet) attempting to access the CM using the TSAA
protocol on NET 2 would be granted Read Only access. b
192.168.1.09
255.255.255.0
TriStation
NET 2
Read/Write

same subnet) attempting to access the CM using TriStation or
TSAA on NET 2 would be granted Read/Write access.
TSAA
8
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
All
All
Deny Access
Access is denied for all IP addresses not included in entries

17, using any protocol on NET 1 or NET 2.
NULL
NULL
NULL
NULL
NULL
None
a. If a client with the specific IP address of 192.168.1.05 attempts to access the CM using the TriStation protocol on NET 2, the CM will deny access. This is because the
CM evaluates the access control list beginning from the top, and continuing through the list until it encounters an entry that applies to the IP address requesting
access. In this case, entry 3 specifically denies access to a client with the IP address of 192.168.1.05, so the CM will deny access and not evaluate the list any further.
b. If a client with the specific IP address of 192.168.1.05 attempts to access the CM using the TSAA protocol on NET 2, the CM will deny access. In this case, entry 4
specifically denies access to a client with the IP address of 192.168.1.05, so the CM will deny access and not evaluate the list any further.
Table 37
Sample Access Control List and Resulting Access Control
437
Configuring the Access Control List

This section describes how to enable access control on the CM and configure the access control
list for your selected clients. This does not apply to Trident 1.x systems.
When configuring the access control list, take care to organize your entries so that the most
specific are at the top, and the least specific are at the bottom. The last entry in the list should be
used to define the access level for unspecified clients.
The CM evaluates the access control list from top (Entry 1) to bottom (Entry 10). The first match
that the CM makes (between the clients network parameters and those listed in an access
control list entry) determines which entry is used to authorize or deny access. If no match is
found, the CM automatically denies all access.
Once you have enabled access control and configured the access control list, you must perform
a Download Changes for the access control to take effect.
Note
After a Download Changes or Download All has been performed so that access control
on the CM is enabled, all existing connections will remain connected, even if the clients
access has been changed to Read Only or Deny Access. The new access levels will not
take effect until the client disconnects and attempts to reconnect.
Procedure
1

Allocation.
Double-click the CM, and then click Setup in the Item Properties dialog box.
Click the Access List tab.
438
Chapter 6

Property
Action
Slot Selection
Select the slot where the CM module you want to configure

an access control list for is installed.
In most cases, you should create identical access control lists
for the modules in both slots.
Enable Access List

Command
Click to enable access control for this CM. If cleared, access

control will be disabled and all users can access CM
resources. The default is cleared.
Client Access List
Click on the entry for the client you want to configure or

change.
Client IP Address
Specify the IP address of the client that you want to allow,

restrict, or deny access to the CM.
Can be used in conjunction with the Client IP Subnet Mask
property to create groups of IP addresses with the same
access levels.
Client IP Subnet
Mask
This property allows you to group IP addresses, so that you

can create a single entry in the access control list for all IP
addresses on the subnet.
255.255.255.0.
Permission
Click the level of access to the CM you want to provide for

the selected client.
If the application includes safety-critical outputs, you should
not set this property to Read/Write.
Protocol
Select the protocol(s) that the selected client can use to access
the CM.
Network
Select the network(s) on which the selected client can access

the CM.
Click Update Client Entry to save the settings for the selected client.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each client to be included in the access control list.
Note
If necessary, click Reset Client Entry to reset the settings for the selected client to
the default, unconfigured state. Click Reset All to reset all entries in the access
control list to the default, unconfigured state.
If a CM is installed in the right slot, do one of the following:
In most cases, you should configure identical access control lists for the modules in
both slots. To do so, click Copy Current Setup to Other Slot.
To configured different access control lists for the modules in the right and left
slots, repeat steps 4 through 6 for the module installed in the right slot.
Configuring Trident or Tri-GP Controller Printing
439

A Trident or Tri-GP controller can print brief ASCII text messages if a communication port is
connected to a printer and the TriStation 1131 application includes standard print function
blocks.
Print messages are typically used for alarms, status, and maintenance. A sample alarm message
might include the name of an analog input point, its time stamp and value, and a statement that
the value is out of range. If the Trident or Tri-GP system includes numerous controllers or is
connected to a DCS, alarms are typically displayed on an operator workstation.
To print from a Trident or Tri-GP controller, you must connect a CM network port to a print
server that is connected to a printer; configure these devices in the TriStation 1131 project; and
use print function blocks in the TriStation 1131 application.
Topics include:
Effect of Printing on Scan Time on page 439
Devices for Trident or Tri-GP Controller Printing on page 439
Directly Connecting a Trident or Tri-GP CM to Printing Devices on page 440
Connecting a Trident or Tri-GP CM to Printing Devices Using a Hub on page 441
Configuring a Trident or Tri-GP CM for Printing Devices on page 442
About Function Blocks for Printing on page 445
Effect of Printing on Scan Time

executed and the scan time increases. Typically, the print function blocks are subject to
conditional execution, which means they are not executed every scan. When you set the scan
time in TriStation 1131, make sure it includes the execution time for all conditional statements
in the application.
If the scan time is not long enough, the execution of all conditional statements (when the
conditions are True) could result in scan-time overruns. You can minimize this problem by
limiting the amount of printer output. An alternative is to use a PC event logger such as the
Triconex SOE Recorder. For more information, see the SOE Recorder Users Guide.
Devices for Trident or Tri-GP Controller Printing

At a minimum, the printing devices you can use with a Trident or Tri-GP controller are an HP
JetDirect-compatible print server and a line printer for ASCII text. You can also use a router or
a hub.
Print Server and Cables

A print server that is connected to a Trident or Tri-GP CM must use the HP JetDirect print
protocol and operate at speeds of 10 or 100 megabits per second. Standard communication
cables are suitable for this connection.
440
Chapter 6
You can purchase communication cables from other manufacturers. You must purchase print
servers elsewhere because Invensys does not supply them. Black-box cables and HewlettPackard print servers are examples of dependable network printing devices.
Invensys has tested these Hewlett-Packard print servers and can recommend them.
HP JetDirect Ex Plus
HP JetDirect 500X Series, model J3265A
Printers
You must select a printer that is compatible with your print server. The Trident or Tri-GP
controller prints ASCII text only, which does not include formatting or graphics, so a
Centronics-compatible printer is adequate. Laser printers are also suitable.
For more information, see the Communication Guide for Trident Systems.
Directly Connecting a Trident or Tri-GP CM to Printing Devices

This procedure explains how to directly connect a Trident or Tri-GP CM to an HP JetDirectcompatible print server and printer.
You can use standard communication cables for these connections.
Procedure
1
TriStation PC.
Follow the instructions, and run the diagnostic routines if available.

You do not need the printer drivers that came with the packages.
Connect the printer to the print server, and connect the print server to a CM Ethernet
port (NET 1 or NET 2).
Trident or Tri-GP
Controller
HP JetDirect-Compatible
Print Server
Centronics-Compatible
Printer
Standard
Printer Cable
Ethernet
Cross-Over Cable
Figure 40 Connecting a Trident or Tri-GP CM to a Printer and Print Server
441
Connecting a Trident or Tri-GP CM to Printing Devices Using a Hub

This procedure explains how to connect a Trident or Tri-GP CM to an HP JetDirect-compatible
print server and printer by using a hub. You can use standard communication cables for these
connections.
You do not need to install the printer drivers that may have come with the print server and
printer packages.
Procedure
1
If the print server and printer packages have installation programs, copy the programs
to the TriStation PC.
Follow the instructions that came with the packages, and run the diagnostic routines, if
available.
Connect the printer to the print server, and connect the print server to a hub. Connect
the hub to a CM Ethernet port (NET 1 or NET 2).
Trident or Tri-GP
Controller
HP JetDirect-Compatible
Print Server
Centronics-Compatible
Printer
Ethernet Cable
Standard
Printer Cable
Ethernet Cable
Ethernet Hub
COAX
1X
8X
MDI
MDIX
POWER
16
10BASE-T
9X
Other Network
Connections
Figure 41 Connecting the Trident or Tri-GP CM to a Print Server and Printer Using a Hub
442
Chapter 6
Configuring a Trident or Tri-GP CM for Printing Devices

These procedures explain how to configure a Trident or Tri-GP CM port that is connected to a
print server and printer.
Network port configuration options differ depending on the target system version configured
for the project. Use the procedure that applies to your Trident or Tri-GP system version:
Procedure for Trident 1.x Controllers on page 442
Procedure for Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Controllers on page 443
For more information about the target system version, see Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP
Target System Version on page 318.
Procedure for Trident 1.x Controllers

1
On the Configuration tree, expand Hardware Allocation, double-click CM (COM: CM),

and then click Setup.
Specify these properties on the CM Setup Network tab.

Property
Action
Slot Selection
Select Left Slot or Right Slot depending on where the CM is

installed on the baseplate.
Mode
For the NET 1 or NET 2 port, whichever is connected to the

printer, select the Open Network mode.
Specify these properties on the CM Setup Printer tab.

Property
Action
Not Configured
or Configured
Select Configured for the slot in which the CM is installed.
Printer Number
Enter a number from 1 to 10. This must be the same number that
is declared for the PRINTER parameter in print function blocks.
Line Width
Enter the maximum printable line width for your printer, based
on the manufacturers specifications.
443
The most typical line widths are 80 characters and 132 characters.
TCP Port
Number
Enter the TCP/IP Port number that was defined by the

manufacturer of the print server.
IP Address
Enter the 32-bit IP address of the print server on the network.

If the print server is not on the same subnet as the controller, you
must specify the destination address on the Routing tab of the CM
Setup dialog box.
Click OK to save the configuration.
Procedure for Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Controllers

1
In TriStation, open your project, expand the Controller tree, double-click Configuration,
and expand Hardware Allocation.
Double-click the CM, and then click Setup in the Item Properties dialog box.
444
Chapter 6
Property
Action
Printer Number
Enter the number for the printer; can only be 5 or 10. Both slots
cannot have the same printer number. The default is 0, meaning a
printer is not configured.
This must be the same number that is declared for the PRINTER
parameter in print function blocks.
Line Width
Enter the number of characters to be printed on a line. The valid

range is 80132 characters. The default is 80 characters.
TCP Port
Number
Enter the number of the TCP port for the print server. The default is
9100 for an HP printer.
Network
Click the network that the print server is connected to. The default is
NET 2.
IP Address
Enter the IP address of the print server.
Click OK to save the configuration.
445
About Function Blocks for Printing

A TriStation 1131 application must use print function blocks to send messages to a printer.
Each print function block has a PRINTER parameter which specifies the port number where the
printer cable is connected.
For the Trident 1.x controller, the valid range is 1 through 10.
For the Trident v2.x or Tri-GP controller, the PRINTER parameter must be 5 or 10. The
Left and Right CM ports cannot have the same PRINTER parameter.
The PRINTER parameter must be the same number as is defined in TriStation 1131.
executed and the scan time increases.
This table lists the print function blocks in the Trident/Tri-GP library.
Print Function Block
Purpose
PRINT_BOOL
Prints a three-character field containing either Off or On.
PRINT_CDT
Prints the current date and time.
PRINT_CRLF
Prints a new line (carriage return and line feed).
PRINT_CTOD
Prints the current time of day.
PRINT_DINT
Prints a DINT value.
PRINT_REAL
Prints a REAL value.
PRINT_STRING
Prints a string of text.
PRINTR_FLUSH
Clears the print buffer.
See the TriStation 1131 Libraries Reference for more detailed information about the print function
blocks.
446
Chapter 6
Setting Trident or Tri-GP Controller IP Addresses

When communication between a TriStation PC and a Trident or Tri-GP controller occurs over a
network, the IP address of the controller must be specified on the communication module.
If the controller is not part of a larger network, it may be possible to use the default IP address
set when the TriStation 1131 project is downloaded (assuming the correct node number and
default IP address are specified in the project).
Note
The Trident 2.x or Tri-GP default IP address applies to the Left MP only. See Connecting
to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Controller for the First Time on page 411 for more
information.
If you cannot use a default address, there are other ways to set an IP address on a network. All
begin with asking the network administrator for the intended IP addresses. The easiest way is
to use a Reverse ARP (RARP) server that has been programmed in advance with the intended
addresses. Other ways include temporary connection of the TriStation PC to a non-Ethernet
module during downloading.
All the procedures for setting the IP address are based on the assumption that the controller
includes at least one communication module with an Ethernet port connected to a network.
To use the procedures, you should know how to:
Connect the Trident or Tri-GP controller to a network
Connect the TriStation PC to the controller
Configure the TriStation 1131 project with the node number of the controller and the IP
address
For more information, see the Communication Guide for Trident Systems.
Note
Typically, Triconex controllers are located on their own subnet which is connected to a
larger network such as a DCS. Your network administrator can set up the subnet for
compatibility with the Triconex default IP addresses and can program any routers that
lie between the DCS and the Triconex subnet with addressing information about the
Triconex controllers.
Topics include:
Using the Default IP Address for TriStation Communication on page 447
Setting an IP Address Using a RARP Server on page 448
Setting a Trident or Tri-GP Controller IP Address Using an MP Connection on page 449
Setting a Trident 1.x Controller IP Address Using a CM Connection on page 450
Specifying a Trident or Tri-GP CM Default Gateway on page 451
Specifying a Trident or Tri-GP CM for Network Routing on page 452
Testing a Network Connection on page 452
447
Using the Default IP Address for TriStation Communication

This procedure explains how to use the default IP address for network communication between
a controller and a TriStation PC.
Note
If you have a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP controller, the default IP address applies only to the
Left MP network port. See Connecting to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Controller for the
First Time on page 411 for more information.
Procedure
1
Do one of the following, depending on your Trident or Tri-GP system version:
Connect the Trident 1.x controller to the network using the NET 1 or NET 2 port on
the CM.
Connect the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP controller to the network using the Left MP
network port.
Do one of the following, depending on your Trident or Tri-GP system version:
Connect the TriStation PC to the network (Trident 1.x, Trident 2.x, or Tri-GP)
Connect the TriStation PC directly to an Ethernet port on the CM using a cross-over

cable (Trident 1.x)
Connect the TriStation PC to the Left MP network port using a cross-over cable
(Trident 2.x or Tri-GP)
In the TriStation 1131 project, expand the Controller tree, double-click Configuration,
and then click TriStation Communication.
On the TriStation Communication screen, verify the IP Address is:
192.168.1.1 (Trident 1.x CM NET 1)
192.168.2.2 (Trident 1.x CM NET 2)
192.168.255.n, where n is the node number of the controller (Trident 2.x or Tri-GP
Left MP)
If the Trident 1.x controller includes two communication modules, the default address
applies to both modules.
Note
The Left CM and Right CM use the same 48-bit physical MAC address and
cannot be connected to the same network.
On the Controller tree, click Configuration.
Expand Hardware Allocation, and then do one of the following:
(Trident 1.x) Click the slot where the communication module is installed, and then
click Setup. If a communication module is not installed, insert a communication
module, and then click Setup.
(Trident 2.x or Tri-GP) Double-click the MP, click Setup, and then click the Network
Ports tab.
448
Chapter 6
In the Setup dialog box, enter the same IP address specified on the TriStation
If the Trident 1.x controller includes a redundant communication module, enter the
same IP address for the other slot.
9
10
On the Controller tree, click the Controller Panel. From the Commands menu, click
Connect.
Wait about 40 seconds for the module to reset and become active.
When the module is active, the Active indicator is green.
11
to the controller.
12
13
Type the command ping followed by the IP address to be tested.

ping 206.32.216.43
Note
If you receive a Request timed out reply, check your network cable and port connections
to verify they are securely connected, verify your configuration settings are correct, and
then retry the ping command.
Setting an IP Address Using a RARP Server

This procedure explains how to set the IP address of a communication module using a RARP
server on the local network. To use this procedure, the network administrator must program the
RARP server with the intended IP address for the controller. If this is not possible, use another
method to set the IP address.
Procedure
1
Give the network administrator the MAC address, which is:

40-00-00-00-x-03 (where x is the Trident or Tri-GP controller node number).
Ask the network administrator for the IP address that is to be used for the controller.
Connect the controller to the network through a network port on the communication
module.

During initialization, the communication module sends a request to the RARP server for
an IP address that has been mapped to its own 48-bit MAC address.
Note
The Left CM and Right CM use the same 48-bit physical MAC address and
cannot be connected to the same network.
449
ping 206.32.216.43
Note
Connect the TriStation PC to the network, or directly to a network port on the CM.
In the TriStation 1131 project, expand the Controller tree, click Configuration, and then
click TriStation Communication.
On the TriStation Communication screen, specify the Node Number of the controller
and the intended IP address.
10
On the Commands menu, click Connect. Wait until the connection is made.
11
to the controller.
Setting a Trident or Tri-GP Controller IP Address Using an MP Connection

This procedure explains how to set the IP address of the Trident or Tri-GP controller by initially
connecting the TriStation PC to an MP port and downloading the TriStation 1131 project. After
the address is set, you can disconnect the TriStation PC from the MP port, and reconnect it to a
network port on the CM.
Note
If you have a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP controller, the default IP address applies only to the
Left MP network port. See Connecting to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Controller for the
First Time on page 411 for more information.
Procedure
1
Ask the network administrator for the IP address to be used for the controller.
Connect the TriStation PC to a TriStation port on the MP Baseplate.
Connect the controller to the network through a network port on the CM.
In the TriStation 1131 project, configure the following:
The MP and CM ports
The node name and node number of the controller
The intended IP address
On the Controller tree, click Controller Panel.
On the Command menu, click Connect To.
450
Chapter 6
On the Connect To screen, click Main Processor Module Port and Left, Middle, or Right
for the MP port to which the TriStation cable is connected.
After connecting to the controller, download the TriStation 1131 project.

The CM initializes (resets) and accepts the IP address you specified in the TriStation 1131
project.
10
11
ping 206.32.216.43
12
If the IP address is set, you can disconnect the TriStation PC from the MP port, and
connect it to a network port on the CM or to the network.
Setting a Trident 1.x Controller IP Address Using a CM Connection

This procedure explains how to set the IP address for a Trident 1.x CM by temporarily
configuring a default IP address for the CM, and assigning a default IP address to the TriStation
PC.
Procedure
1
Ask the network administrator for the IP address to be used for the CM.
Connect the Trident controller to the network using a network port (NET 1 or NET 2) on
the CM.
Connect the TriStation PC to a network port on the CM, using a direct or network
connection.
On the TriStation PC, use Windows procedures to set the IP address of the PC to either
of the following:
192.168.1.x if the PC is physically connected to a NET 1 port, where x is any unused

host number.
192.168.2.x if the PC is physically connected to a NET 2 port, where x is any unused

host number.
Wait for the TriStation PC to reset.
Open the TriStation 1131 project.
Expand the Configuration tree, click Configuration, and then click TriStation
Communication.
Specify the node name, node number, and the default IP address of the controller.
Use the Network tab on the CM Setup screen to specify the intended IP address for the
Ethernet port that is connected to the network.
451
10
Power up the Trident controller.
11
On the Controller tree, click Controller Panel. On the Command menu, click Connect To.
12
On the Connect To screen, click the Serial Port option and the COM port to which the
TriStation cable is connected.
13
Verify that Communication Module Port is selected and the default IP address is
displayed.
14
Connect to the controller and download the TriStation 1131 project. Wait for the
download to complete.
After the download is complete, TriStation 1131 displays the message, Connection
failed. The default IP address you specified in the node definition is invalid, and the
intended IP address of the CM is set.
15
On the TriStation PC, use Windows procedures to set the IP address of the PC to its
actual address on the network.
16
17
Enter the command ping followed by the IP address to be tested.

ping 206.32.216.43
and time information. If the connection is not okay, the reply is Request timed out.
18
In the TriStation 1131 project, change the default IP address to the newly set IP address
of the TriStation Communication screen.
19
Use the Controller Panel to reconnect the TriStation 1131 project to the controller.
20
After the IP address is set on the network, you must reconfigure the IP address in the
TriStation 1131 project, and assign a valid IP address to the TriStation PC.
Specifying a Trident or Tri-GP CM Default Gateway

This procedure explains how to set the address of a default gateway for a controller that must
communicate with devices on another network. A default gateway is a router that forwards all
messages not addressed to stations within the local subnet.
Procedure
1
On the Configuration tree, click Hardware Allocation to display the modules that are
configured for this system.
Double-click the CM icon to open the Properties dialog box, and click Setup to display
the configuration options for the CM.
On the Network tab, select Left Slot or Right Slot depending on which CM you are
configuring.
452
Chapter 6
If you have a Trident 1.x controller, for NET 1 or NET 2 (depending on which one is
connected the network), select Open Network from the list under Mode.
If you have a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP controller, go to the next step.
In Default Gateway IP Address, enter the IP address of the default gateway that is
connected to the local subnet.
Specifying a Trident or Tri-GP CM for Network Routing

This procedure explains how to specify routes to destinations outside the local network for
controllers that do not have access to a default gateway.
Each route must include an IP address for the destination, a subnet mask, and a gateway
address.
Procedure
1
On the Configuration tree, click Hardware Allocation to display the modules that are
configured for this system.
Double-click the CM icon to open the Properties dialog box, and click Setup to display
the configuration options for the CM.
For a Trident 2.x or Tri-GP controller, click the Routing tab. For each route you need
to specify, enter an IP address in Destination IP Address, Destination IP Subnet
Mask, and Destination Gateway IP Address, and then click Update Destination.
For a Trident 1.x controller, click the Routing tab and enter an IP address under
Destination Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway Address for each route that you
need to specify.
Testing a Network Connection

This procedure explains how to test a connection from a CM to a network by using the ping
command from an MS-DOS command prompt.
The test is performed on the TriStation PC. Before doing the test, you must have set the IP
address of the communication module on the network.
Procedure
1
Type the command ping followed by the IP address to be tested. For example, for an IP
ping 206.32.216.43
453
454
Chapter 6
7
Implementation
Overview 456
Controlling the Operational Mode 458
Using the Triconex Emulator for Testing 459
Controller Testing 460
Maintenance 469
456
Chapter 7
Implementation
Overview
This figure shows the main steps for implementing an application, which is the last step in a
TriStation 1131 project.
Set Up the Project
Develop the
Application
Test with the

Emulator
Fix Errors
Yes
Errors?
No
C onfigure the
C ontroller
Set Up TriStation
C ommunication
- Test application on emulator

Implement on
the C ontroller
- Test application on offline system

- C ommission the application
- Maintain the application
Overview
457
Implementation Steps
This list includes steps for testing and maintaining an application.
Step
Test on the Emulator
See
Using the Triconex Emulator for Testing on page 459
The Triconex Emulator Users Guide.
Test on the controller
Downloading to the Controller on page 460

Monitoring Variables on the Controller on page 463
Monitoring the Program Execution on page 464
Adding Annotation for Variables on page 465
Displaying Hardware Allocation Exceptions on page 468
Maintain an application
Steps for Downloading Changes on page 470

Planning and Controlling Changes on page 471
Commands Required with Application Changes on page 472
Disabling Points on page 474
Using the Download Changes Command on page 478
Using the Download All Command on page 480
458
Chapter 7
Implementation
Controlling the Operational Mode

This section describes the operational modes available on a controller. Although the
functionality is the same for Tricon, Trident, and Tri-GP controllers, the method of executing the
mode may be different. This table describes the mode and method.
Table 38
Tricon, Trident, and Tri-GP Controller Operational Modes
Mode
Description
Run
Controller runs the downloaded application with read-only capability.

Attempts to write to program variables by TriStation 1131, Modbus masters, or external
devices are rejected; however, an application may call gated access functions to enable
external writes during a designated window of time. For more information, see the
GATDIS and GATENB function blocks in the TriStation 1131 Libraries Reference.
For Tricon controllers, the keyswitch must be set to RUN and the Run command
used.
For Trident and Tri-GP controllers, the Run command must be used and the Set
Programming Mode option must be set to Disable Programming Control
Operations.
Program
Controller allows application loading, verification, and write access.

Allows Download All and Download Changes commands from TriStation 1131. Also
allows writes to program variables by Modbus masters and external devices.
For Tricon controllers, the keyswitch must be set to PROGRAM.
For Trident and Tri-GP controllers, the Set Programming Mode option must be set to
Enable Programming and Control Operations. (This is the default setting.)
Halt
Controller stops running the application and retains the values of tagnames.
For Tricon controllers, the Halt command is used.
For Trident and Tri-GP controllers, the Halt command or the SYS_APP_HALT
function can be used.
Stop
Controller stops reading inputs, forces non-retentive digital and analog outputs to zero,
and halts the application.
Retentive outputs return to the value they had before the Stop was issued. Stop mode is
recommended for installation and service of process-related equipment, but is not
required for service of the controller.
For Tricon controllers, the keyswitch must be set to STOP.
For Trident and Tri-GP controllers, the Stop command must be used.
Remote
Controller runs the downloaded application and allows writes to program variables by
TriStation 1131, Modbus masters, and external devices.
Download All and Download Changes by TriStation 1131 are not allowed.
For Tricon controllers, the keyswitch must be set to PROGRAM.
For Trident and Tri-GP controllers, the Set Programming Mode option must be set to
Enable Programming and Control Operations. (This is the default setting.)
Using the Triconex Emulator for Testing 459
Using the Triconex Emulator for Testing

The Triconex Emulator is software that allows you to emulate, execute, and test TriStation 1131
applications without connecting to a Tricon, Trident, or Tri-GP controller.
Using the Emulator, you can test your applications in an offline environment, without exposing
your online processes to potential application errors.
The latest version of the Emulator is installed with TriStation 1131; however, because the
Emulator is a separate application from TriStation 1131, you can update it at any time without
having to re-install TriStation 1131.
You access the Emulator via the Emulator Control Panel in TriStation 1131. Using the Emulator,
you can emulate the following Triconex controller modules, communication modes, and
TriStation 1131 application features:
Tricon Communication Module (TCM)
Trident or Tri-GP Communication Module (CM)
TSAA protocol communication, including support for DDE and SOE clients, and
multicasting (DDE clients only)
Sequence of Events (SOE) blocks, data generation, and response
Modbus TCP Master and Slave communication
Peer-to-Peer communication over UDP
Process alarm function blocks
System status function blocks for MP and I/O modules, including system state
transitions
Disabling of points
Download Changes and Download All commands
For detailed information and instructions for testing your application using the Triconex
Emulator, see the Triconex Emulator Users Guide, included on the TriStation 1131 CD, or
available from the Invensys Global Customer Support web site.
460
Chapter 7
Implementation
Controller Testing
This section explains how to test on the controller, which is usually done when the controller is
physically connected to field instruments either in a test facility that simulates the system
(Factory Acceptance Test), or at the site while the control process is offline (Site Acceptance
Test).
The logical hardware configuration in TriStation 1131 must be completed and must match the
physical configuration.
Topics include:
Downloading to the Controller on page 460
Monitoring Variables on the Controller on page 463
Monitoring the Program Execution on page 464
Adding Annotation for Variables on page 465
Determining the Scan Surplus on page 466
Displaying Hardware Allocation Exceptions on page 468
Downloading to the Controller

This procedure explains how to use the Download All command to load an application to the
controller. A best practice is to rebuild the application before downloading it.
This procedure can be used for testing when the controller is connected to simulation field
devices or the control process is offline. This procedure can also be used to run the application
when the control process is online.
CAUTION
Note
The first time you connect to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP controller to
download your application, you must connect either via a serial
connection or via the Left MP, using the default IP address. See
Connecting to the Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Controller for the First Time on
page 411 for more information.
If the target system version configured for the project does not match the system version
of the Tricon, Trident (v2.x only; does not apply to v1.x systems), or Tri-GP controller
you are trying to connect to, you will be unable to connect to the controller. The target
system version specified in the project must be the same as the system version of your
controller.
For instructions on changing the target system version in your project, see Configuring
the Tricon Target System Version on page 252 or Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP
Target System Version on page 318.
Procedure
1
Open the Controller workspace, expand the Configuration tree, and double-click the
Controller Panel.
Controller Testing
On the Commands menu, click Connect
461
The Connect To screen shows the default communication setting. If needed, change the
connection setting and click OK.
For more information, see Specifying the Tricon Default Connection Type on page 385
or Specifying the Trident or Tri-GP Default Connection Type on page 433.
3
Enter the connection password if required.
For Tricon controllers, ensure the keyswitch is turned to PROGRAM. This is the
factory setting.
For Trident or Tri-GP controllers, ensure the mode is Enable Programming and
Control Operations. This is the default setting. (To view this setting, on the
Commands menu, click Set Programming Mode, and then click Enable
Programming and Control Operations.)
On the Commands menu, click Download All
If the download is successful, a backup file of the project is automatically created with
the major version, minor version, time stamp, and the extension DWLD. For example,
EXCOUNTR_333_1_4120e077.DWLD. If needed, this file can be restored by using the
Restore Project To Last Download Command on page 594.
6
To start the application, click Run
For Tricon controllers, turn the keyswitch to RUN (to start the program on the
controller) or to REMOTE (to start the program and allow external devices to write
to tagnames or aliases).
For Trident or Tri-GP controllers, set the mode to Run and disable Download
commands by doing this: On the Commands menu, click Set Programming Mode,
and then click Disable Programming and Control Operations.
Changes to the Project Version and State After Downloading to the

Controller
Downloading to the controller changes the projects downloaded version and, if a Download
All was performed, its download state.
Note
See the Triconex Emulator Users Guide for detailed information about the impact of
downloading to the Emulator on the projects version.
Changes to the Projects Downloaded Version

After the download to the controller is complete, the major or minor downloaded version of
your project is incremented. (For example, in version 3.7, the major version is 3 and the minor
version is 7.)
462
Chapter 7
Implementation
A Download All operation increments the major version, and resets the minor version
to 0.
A Download Changes operation increments the minor version.
Project version changes made due to download operations can be viewed in the Project History
dialog box. See View Project History Command on page 640.
Note
Performing a download to the Emulator changes the downloaded version for the
Emulator, but not the downloaded version for the controller. A project that has not yet
been downloaded to the controller, but has been downloaded to the Emulator, will have
a project version of 0.0.x, where x is the EmulatorCount value.
Project Version Rules

The projects downloaded version is different for the Emulator and the controller.
The controller downloaded project version is the last version of the project file (.pt2)
downloaded to the controller. The version is provided in the format major.minor (for
example, in version 3.7, the major version is 3 and the minor version is 7).
The Emulator downloaded project version is the last version of the project file (.pt2)
downloaded to the Emulator. The version is provided in the format
major.minor.EmulatorCount (for example, in version 3.7.12, the major version is 3, the
minor version is 7, and the EmulatorCount is 12).
The major.minor version is the same as the last controller downloaded project
version.
The EmulatorCount value is incremented sequentially after either a Download All
or a Download Changes to the Emulator.
Changes to the Project Download State

After a Download All to the controller is complete, the download state of the project is changed
to the Download Changes state.
Downloading a project to the Emulator changes the projects downloaded version (by
incrementing the EmulatorCount value), but it does not change the projects download state.
The project state displayed in the Status Bar applies only to the controller; it has no impact on
the projects ability to be downloaded to the Emulator. However, the Download Changes
command will not be enabled for the Emulator until you have performed a Download All of the
project on the Emulator at least once. Thus, it is possible that a project is in the Download All
state for the controller, but can still be downloaded to the Emulator using the Download
Changes command.
When the controller is in the Download Changes state, all rules that pertain to projects in the
Download Changes state will apply (see Commands Required with Application Changes on
page 472).
Note
Using the Change State to Download All command will change the download state for
both the controller AND the Emulator to Download All. See Change State to Download
All Command on page 492.
Controller Testing
463
Monitoring Variables on the Controller

This procedure explains how to monitor and enable or disable variables while the application
is running on the controller.
CAUTION
Monitoring and disabling variables should only be done if the controller

is not connected to a live system or if maintenance is being performed.
Procedure
1
To connect and download an application, see Downloading to the Controller on

page 460 and Monitoring the Program Execution on page 464.
Drag the function blocks and variables you want to monitor to the sheet.
On the Commands menu, click Run

Note
or Single Step
When you click Single Step, the application executes for one scan only. As a
result, Modbus Master and Peer-to-Peer behavior can be unpredictable when
Single Step is applied.
To enable or disable a variable, double-click the variable and click Enable or Disable.
Continue testing, as needed.
Note
While monitoring variables on the controller, you may occasionally see a question mark
(?) instead of the variables actual value. This is normal and should resolve itself within
the next few scans. The question mark appears only when TriStation does not know the
actual value of the variable. This can occur in situations when the list of variables is being
updated (for example, when youve scrolled down the variables list, or resized the sheet
view) and TriStation 1131 doesnt have enough communications bandwidth to display
all the new values in one scan.
464
Chapter 7
Implementation
Monitoring the Program Execution

This procedure explains how to display the program execution, which shows the program
executing on the controller.
Procedure
1

page 460.
On the controller tree, expand Programs, and click the program you want to test.
Click Display Program Document
To view the program execution, click Run

Note
.
.
When you click Single Step, the program executes for one scan only. As a result,
Modbus Master and Peer-to-Peer behavior can be unpredictable when Single
Step is applied.
To quit running the program, click Disconnect

False Value
in Green
Figure 42
or Single Step
Sample Program Running on the Controller
.
True Value
in Red
Controller Testing
465
Adding Annotation for Variables

This procedure explains how to add an annotation to a variable, which allows you to specify
information displayed while the program is executing. The annotation can include text and
macros.
Procedure
1

page 460.
If needed, drag variables to be tested onto the sheet.
Double-click a variable, and select the Annotate check box on the Variable tab.
Click the Annotation tab.
Click the Macros button to change the macro identified with the annotation.
To copy a macro, click the macro name and press Ctrl+C. To paste the macro, close the
Edit Macros dialog box, click in the Annotation area, and press Ctrl+V. You can also
enter text with the macros.
Continue testing, as needed.
466
Chapter 7
Implementation
Determining the Scan Surplus

This section explains how to determine the scan surplus, which indicates whether the actual
scan time required to execute the application uses less time or more time than the requested scan
time in the project. The actual scan time will always be equal to or greater than the requested
scan time.
When the actual time is equal to the requested time, the scan surplus is positive, which
means the scan time setting can be decreased.
When actual time is more than the requested time, the scan surplus is negative, which
means the scan time should be increased to ensure that communication errors do not
occur.
For more information, see Setting the Scan Time for a Downloaded Application on page 467.
The Triconex Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor (sold separately) displays information to determine
scan surplus, including the Requested Scan Time, Actual Scan Time, and Scan Surplus for an
application. For more information, see the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor Users Guide.
Positive Scan Surplus

A positive scan surplus means the application executes in less time than the requested scan time.
For example, if the requested scan time is 150 milliseconds, and the actual scan time is 100
milliseconds, there is a positive scan surplus of 50 milliseconds.
If the surplus is 20 milliseconds or 10 percent of the actual scan time, do nothing.
If the surplus is greater than 20 milliseconds or 10 percent of the actual scan time,
decrease the number for the scan time. In this example, the scan time could be set to 130
milliseconds.
Note
Even when the actual scan time is less than the requested scan time, the Actual Scan
Time displayed in the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor will always appear as the same as
the Requested Scan Time. In this case, you should use the value displayed for the Scan
Surplus to determine if you can reduce your requested scan time.
Negative Scan Surplus

A negative scan surplus means the actual scan time is greater than the requested scan time. For
example, if the requested scan time is 150 milliseconds, and the actual scan time is 200
milliseconds, there is a negative scan surplus of 50 milliseconds.
If the surplus is negative, increase the number for the requested scan time by the
negative amount plus 20 milliseconds. In this example, the scan time should be set to
220 milliseconds.
Process Safety Time Requirements

You should determine the Process Safety Time (PST) required by the application. The PST is the
period of time during which the process could shift from a safe operating condition to a
dangerous condition. The scan time for an application should be half the PST. For example, a
burner management system has a PST of 1 second, which means the scan time should be 500
milliseconds.
Controller Testing
467
Setting the Scan Time for a Downloaded Application

This procedure explains how to set the scan time for a downloaded application running in the
controller. (The Emulator does not provide real-time information on scan time.) This should be
done if the scan time set in the project is less than the actual scan time required to run the
application. For more information, see Determining the Scan Surplus on page 466.
If you need a faster scan time than the low end of the range, you must redesign the application
or the process.
Procedure
1
On the Controller tree, double-click the Controller Panel and download the application.
On the Commands menu, click Set Scan Time.

This is the Tricon 3008 screen.
This is the Trident or Tri-GP screen.
Specify this property on the Set Scan Time screen.

Property
Action
Enter the scan

time in
milliseconds
Enter the number of milliseconds for the scan time used while the
application is running in the controller. The number must be in the
minimum to maximum range.
For Tricon 3006/3007, the range is 20 to 500 milliseconds.
For Tricon 3008, the range is 20 to 450 milliseconds.
For Trident or Tri-GP, the range is 10 to 450 milliseconds. The
minimum must be equal to or larger than the poll times.
This setting does not affect the requested scan time for the project. To
change the requested scan time in the project, you must set the scan
time on the Implementation screen.
Note
To guarantee that the controller provides a deterministic response time, the scan
time should always be set to a value greater than the I/O poll time (the
maximum time needed by the controller to obtain data from the input modules).
You can view the I/O poll time on the System Overview screen in the Enhanced
Diagnostic Monitor (sold separately). For more information, see the Enhanced
Diagnostic Monitor Users Guide.
468
Chapter 7
Implementation
Displaying Hardware Allocation Exceptions

This procedure explains how to display hardware allocation exceptions, which indicate that the
hardware configuration in the project does not match the physical hardware configuration.
Procedure
1
Download an application to the controller.

If the logical and physical configurations do not match, the Hardware Allocation
Exception dialog box appears.
Differences identified with an asterisk must be fixed in the project before the application
can be download. Other differences may allow you to download the application.
Identifier
Description
Asterisk (*)
A red asterisk identifies a module mismatch, which means the module

specified in the hardware configuration for the project is different from
the module in the physical system.
This error must be fixed by changing the hardware configuration in the
project.
Empty slot
An empty slot error indicates either of these:

The hardware configuration specifies a module that is empty in the
controller.
The controller contains a module that is not included in the
hardware configuration.
The application can be downloaded.
Maintenance
469
Maintenance
This section explains how to plan and manage changes to an application running on a controller
attached to a live system.
WARNING
Changing a safety-critical application that is running on a controller

should be avoided because an error in the application could cause a trip
or unpredictable behavior.
Topics include:
Steps for Downloading Changes on page 470
Planning and Controlling Changes on page 471
Commands Required with Application Changes on page 472
Disabling Points on page 474
Forcing Points on page 477
Using the Download Changes Command on page 478
Using the Download All Command on page 480
470
Chapter 7
Implementation
Steps for Downloading Changes

This list includes steps for making changes to an application running on a controller.
WARNING
For a safety-critical application running on a live system, you must use

extreme caution because a configuration error in the changed
application could cause unpredictable behavior or a trip.
When a Download Changes command is issued, the scan time is
doubled for one scan immediately following the command. For
example, if the normal scan time is 100 ms, the scan following a
Download Changes would be 200 ms.
Step
See
Verify the TriStation 1131 software is

correctly installed.
Verifying the TriStation 1131 Installation on

page 9
Plan for the change.
Planning and Controlling Changes on

page 471.
Determine whether a Download All or

Download Changes is required.
Commands Required with Application

Changes on page 472.
Review the hardware configuration. If

needed, correct the hardware
configuration to match the physical
configuration.
See the Hardware Module Configuration

report. See Generating Reports on page 80.
Compare the current project with the last

downloaded.
Compare Project to the Last Downloaded

Command on page 497
Test on the Emulator.
Using the Triconex Emulator for Testing on

page 459
Ensure the scan time has a surplus
Determining the Scan Surplus on page 466
Download the changed application.
Using the Download Changes Command on

page 478.
Using the Download All Command on
page 480
Backup the project and copy it to another

storage medium.
Backup Project Command on page 487
Maintenance
471
Planning and Controlling Changes

This section describes recommended procedures for planning and controlling changes to an
existing application. All changes to an application should be controlled by a change control
board or the equivalent, and should comply with strict control procedures.
Recommended Procedure
1
Generate a change request defining all changes to the application and the reasons for the
changes, then obtain approval for the changes from the board.
Develop a specification for changes, including a test specification, then obtain approval
for the specification from the board.
Make the appropriate changes to the application, including those related to design,
operation, or maintenance documentation.
Verify the application in the controller matches the last downloaded application. See
Verify Last Download to the Controller Command on page 637. If the applications do
not match, contact Invensys support.
Print the Hardware Module Configuration report to compare the current configuration
with the last one downloaded to the controller.
Print all user documents and thoroughly check all changed networks in each document
to ensure the changes do not affect other parts of the application.
Test the new application on the Emulator and write a test report.
Review and audit all changes and the test results with the board.
When approved by the board, download the changes to the controller.
10
Save the downloaded application and back up the appropriate files on a CD or other
storage medium.
11
Archive two copies of the .pt2 (project) file and all associated documentation.
472
Chapter 7
Implementation
Commands Required with Application Changes

After an application is downloaded to a controller or the Emulator, the state is set to accept
changes to the project which are allowed with the Download Changes command. If a change
requires the Download All command, it is either disabled or a message advises you to change
the state or cancel the change. For example, a program cannot be deleted unless the state is
changed to Download All (see Change State to Download All Command on page 492).
This table identifies whether a Download All or Download Changes command is required.
Table 39
Commands Required with Changes
Component
Command Required
Chassis
Download All: Required if a chassis is added, deleted, or the type is

changed.
Functions and
function blocks
Download All: Required if a function or function block is modified or

deleted.
Download Changes: Allowed if a function or function block is added.
IP Address
Download Changes: Allowed, but not advised, if the IP address of a

communication module is changed.
Library elements
Download Changes: Allowed, but only if the library (or selected library
elements, for partial changes) being added, updated, or deleted does not
change function blocks that have already been downloaded to the controller.
Download All: Required if the library (or selected library elements) being
added, updated, or deleted changes function blocks that have already been
downloaded to the controller.
Memory allocation
Download All: Required if memory allocation is increased.
Modules
Download All: Required if modules are deleted or moved in the

configuration.
Download Changes: Allowed if a module is added and the chassis has
empty slots, and there is sufficient memory allocated for the points.
Node Number
Download All: Required if the address plug and node number configuration
are changed.
Number of Send or
Receive function
blocks
Download All: Required if the number of send or receive function blocks is

increased or decreased.
Operating
Parameters
Download All: Required if the Allow Disabling of Points property is

changed.
Download Changes: Allowed if these properties are changed: Disable
Remote Changes to Outputs, Password Required for Connection, Restart on
Power-Up (Trident or Tri-GP only), Scan Time, and Use Local Time.
Programs
Download All: Required if a program is deleted from an application.

Download Changes: Allowed if a program is added to an application and
there is sufficient memory.
Maintenance
Table 39
473
Commands Required with Changes (continued)
Component
Command Required
Tagnames
Download Changes: Allowed if tagnames are added, modified, or deleted.

Tagnames can also be disconnected or connected to different points, if there
is enough memory allocated for the required point types. Points must be
enabled.
Target System
Version
Download All: Required if the target system version is changed (upgrade or

downgrade), unless you are converting a project created in a version of
TriStation 1131 prior to v4.6.
Download Changes: Allowed if you are changing the target system version
while converting a project created in a version of TriStation 1131 prior to
v4.6.
Variables
Download All: Required if changes to the Data Type or Alias Type require
additional memory allocation.
Download Changes: Allowed if changes to the Data Type does not require
additional memory allocation. Points must be enabled. Also allowed if the
variable Name, Description, or Initial Value is added or changed. Allowed,
but not advised, if changes are made to the Point Type, Alias Type, or Alias
Number of a memory variable; these changes will re-initialize the point to its
configured initial value, or 0 if no initial value is defined.
474
Chapter 7
Implementation
Disabling Points
This section explains how to disable points (tagnames) on an application running on a
controller, which should be used with care. When a point is disabled, inputs from field
instruments or the application running on the controller do not change the value of the point.
Disabling points is typically used when field instruments need to be replaced or repaired.
Once a point is disabled:
If the point is a physical input, field instruments cannot write to it. (The application
cannot write to it by definition, once the point is configured as an input.)
If the point is a physical output, the application cannot write to it.
If the point is a memory point, the application cannot write to it.
The value in the point when it was disabled is held. If desired, you can force the point
to a specific value (see Forcing Points on page 477).
External hosts (Modbus Masters, etc.) can still write directly into the disabled point if
the point is:
A memory read/write aliased tagname and the controller is write-accessible (the
keyswitch is in PROGRAM or REMOTE mode, or in RUN mode with gate access).
An output point and the Disable Remote Changes to Outputs property on the
Operating Parameters screen is not selected.
Note
Disabling points on the controller is completely separate from disabling points on the
Emulator. Points that are disabled in the program running on the Emulator will NOT
also be disabled in the application that is currently running on (or will be downloaded
to) the controller.
For Tricon v9.x controllers, a maximum of 64 points can be disabled at any one time. For Tricon
v10.x controllers, a maximum of 256 points can be disabled. There is no maximum to the
number of points that can be disabled for Trident or Tri-GP controllers; however, disabled
points are not recorded and are cleared after a power cycle.
When you disable one or more points, the number of disabled points output parameter
(POINTS_DISABLED) in the TR_PROGRAM_STATUS (Tricon) or SYS_MP_EXT_STATUS
(Trident or Tri-GP) function block is updated. Additionally, the alarm state for disabled points
is also changed to TRUE in the TR_SHUTDOWN (Tricon) or SYS_SHUTDOWN (Trident or
Tri-GP) function block. See the TriStation 1131 Libraries Reference for more information about
these function blocks.
The disabling (and subsequent re-enabling) of points is saved to the TriStation 1131 Project
History. To view information about when a point was disabledand who disabled itfrom the
Project menu, select View Project History.
In order to disable points from TriStation 1131, the Allow Disabling of Points property must be
selected on the Operating Parameters screen. See Setting Tricon Operating Parameters on
page 249 or Setting Trident or Tri-GP Operating Parameters on page 315 for more information.
Maintenance
WARNING
475
A project should not contain disabled points unless there is a specific

reason for disabling them, such as initial testing or maintenance.
Disabling points can increase the scan time.

Enabling the Allow Disabling of Points property can increase the scan
time, regardless of whether any points are actually disabled.
Topics include:
Disabling Points on the Controller on page 475
Viewing Disabled Points on page 476
Re-enabling Disabled Points on page 476
Disabling Points on the Controller

This procedure describes how to disable points in a program running on the controller.
Points are automatically re-enabled if you perform a Download All. Disabled points are
retained if you perform a Download Changes operation.
Procedure
1
Expand the Configuration tree, and click Controller Panel.
On the Commands menu, click the Connect command, and enter the connection
password if required.
Note
If the target system version configured for the project does not match the system
version of the controller you are trying to connect to, you will be unable to
connect to the controller. See Configuring the Tricon Target System Version on
page 252 or Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Target System Version on
page 318.
Double-click a point to be disabled, and click Disable.

Only one point can be disabled at a time.
If prompted, enter a comment (using 100 char caters or less) that describes why this
point was disabled, and then click OK. The comment will be placed in the project
history.
Note
Entering a comment is optional. You will be prompted to enter a comment only

if the corresponding option was selected in the Project Options dialog box. See
Specifying Forced Points Options on page 40.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all desired points have been disabled.
476
Chapter 7
Implementation
Viewing Disabled Points

You can view a list of all disabled points on the controller, including each points tagname,
location, and Modbus alias. Individual points in the list can be selected and enabled.
The application must be running on the controller in order to view the list of disabled points.
Procedure
1
Click Run
From the Commands menu, select List Disabled Points.
If desired, select the points you want to enable, and then click OK.
to execute the application on the controller.
Re-enabling Disabled Points

Note
Points that have been disabled can be re-enabled individually or all at once. You can also
enable points from the List of Disabled Points dialog box. See Viewing Disabled Points
on page 476.
To enable points individually:

1
Click Run
Double-click the point to be enabled, and click Enable.
point was re-enabled, and then click OK. The comment will be placed in the project
history.
Note

Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all desired points have been enabled.
To enable all disabled points at once:

1
Click Run
From the Commands menu, select Enable All Disabled Points.
When asked to confirm the operation, click Yes.
All points that are currently disabled on the controller are re-enabled.
Maintenance
477
Forcing Points
This section explains how to force points (tagnames) on an application running on a controller,
which should be used with care. Forcing a point is the act of putting a value into a point that has
been disabled.
When a point is disabled, inputs from field instruments or the application running on the
controller do not change the value of the point. Once you have disabled a point, you can then
force the point to a specific value by entering that value in the points Tagname Properties dialog
box.
Disabling and forcing points is typically used during maintenance operations, when field
instruments need to be replaced or repaired. For example, a digital output point drives a
solenoid/valve, which is normally energized during operation. When the solenoid requires
maintenance, the digital output point is disabled and then forced to the OFF state. This allows
maintenance personnel to safely disconnect the field device and perform the required
maintenance function.
Points can also be disabled and forced during factory or site acceptance testing (FAT/SAT),
when input conditions are set by disabling and forcing the input points because the field devices
have not yet been wired and connected to the controller. If a portion of your process is offline,
some points may remain in the disabled/forced state for a long period of time.
Note
Forcing points on the controller is completely separate from forcing points on the
Emulator. Points that are forced to a value in the program running on the Emulator will
NOT also be forced to the same value in the application that is currently running on (or
will be downloaded to) the controller.
Forced points are saved to the TriStation 1131 Project History. To view information about when
a point was forced, the value it was forced to, and the user who forced the value, from the Project
menu, select View Project History.
This procedure describes how to force points in a program running on the controller.
Procedure
1
Disable the point as described in Disabling Points on page 474.
Double-click the point to be forced, opening the Item Properties dialog box for the point.
In the Set Value field, enter the value you want to force the point to use, and click
Confirm.
Only one point can be forced at a time.
point was forced, and then click OK. The comment will be placed in the project history.
Note

478
Chapter 7
Implementation
Using the Download Changes Command

This procedure explains how to use the Download Changes command to download changes to
an application that has been downloaded and is running on a controller. For information on
changes that are allowed with this command, see Download Changes Command on page 518.
These warnings should be reviewed before proceeding.
WARNING

should be avoided because an error in the application could cause a
trip or unpredictable behavior.
If the application has a negative Scan Surplus, do not use the
Download Changes command because it could cause a trip or
unpredictable behavior.
When a Download Changes command is issued, the scan time is
doubled for one scan immediately following the command.
If a memory variables Point Type, Alias Type, or Alias Number is
changed, using the Download Changes command re-initializes the
variable to its configured initial value, or 0 if no initial value is defined.
If the IP Address is changed, the Fault indicator on the communication
module turns on during the reset, which temporarily compromises the
TMR status of the controller.
If an I/O module is added, the TMR status of the controller is
temporarily compromised for as much as 8 to 16 scans. For more
information, see Adding an I/O Module below.
If the AI module type for models 3703 or 3704 is changed, the TMR
status of the controller is temporarily compromised for as much as 8 to
16 scans.
If the DO module type for models 3611, 3613, 3614, 3615, or 3617 is
changed, the TMR status of the controller is temporarily compromised
for as much as 8 to 16 scans.
If in doubt about the effect of this command, contact Technical
Support.
Adding an I/O Module

If the application uses the following function blocks, the changed application should include
logic to accommodate the behavior.
For Tricon controllers, the IOMAIN and IOBAD parameters of the TR_MP_STATUS
function block turn off.
For Trident or Tri-GP controllers, the parameters for the SYS_IO_STATUS,

SYS_IOP_STATUS, and SYS_SYSTEM_STATUS function blocks turn off.
For more information, see the Tricon, Trident, or Tri-GP Safety Considerations Guide.
Maintenance
479
Procedure
1
Expand the Configuration tree, and double-click the Controller Panel.

required.
Note
, and enter the connection password if
version of the Tricon, Trident (v2.x only; does not apply to v1.x systems), or
Tri-GP controller you are trying to connect to, you will be unable to connect to
the controller. See Configuring the Tricon Target System Version on page 252 or
Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Target System Version on page 318.
On the Commands menu, click Download Changes
The changes are made while the application is running.
If the download failed, review the error messages on both the Controller and
Application tabs to determine the source of the failure.
480
Chapter 7
Implementation
Using the Download All Command

This procedure explains how to use the Download All command to download a changed
application to a controller. For information on changes that require this command, see
Download All Command on page 517.
See Changes to the Project Version and State After Downloading to the Controller on page 461
for information on the impact of performing a Download All operation on a controller.
WARNING
Using the Download All command requires the current application

running on the controller to be halted.
Procedure
1
Expand the Configuration tree, and double-click the Controller Panel.

Note
version of the Tricon, Trident (v2.x only; does not apply to v1.x systems), or
Tri-GP controller you are trying to connect to, you will be unable to connect to
the controller. See Configuring the Tricon Target System Version on page 252 or
Configuring the Trident or Tri-GP Target System Version on page 318.
If needed, change the connection setting. Click OK.
If required, enter the connection password.
If needed, change the state to Download All. On the Commands menu, click Change
State to Download All.
Click Halt to stop the application.
For Tricon controllers, turn the keyswitch to PROGRAM.
For Trident or Tri-GP controllers, ensure the mode is Enable Programming and Control
Operations, by doing this:
On the Commands menu, click Set Programming Mode, and then click Enable
Programming and Control Operations. (This is the default setting.)
Click Download All
If the download failed, review the error messages on both the Controller and
Application tabs to determine the source of the failure.
10
Click Run
11
For Tricon controllers, turn the keyswitch to RUN.
to start the application running on the controller.
A
Commands and Properties
This appendix provides descriptions of TriStation 1131 commands and properties.
Add File Command

The Add File command adds a custom Help file to the TriStation 1131 Help menu. A maximum
of 32 customized HTML Help files (.chm) may be added to the TriStation 1131 Help menu.
Applies To
Application
Location
Help menu > Options > Add or Remove Custom Help Files
Add Program to Execution List Command

The Add Program to Execution List command places the cursor inside the Program Execution
List box, which allows you to enter or select a program to be added to the list.
Applies To
Application
Location
Application tree > Implementation > Edit menu
Alias Number
The Alias Number property identifies the range of five-digit alias numbers that can be assigned
to the point. For Trident or Tri-GP controllers, the alias number can be set within a default range
or within a larger allowable range.
This table identifies Tricon, Trident, and Tri-GP controller alias ranges.
482
Appendix A
Table 40
Alias Number Information
Bin
Data
Type
Variable
Type
Message
Type
Tricon
Range
Trident/
Tri-GP
Default
Range
Trident/
Tri-GP
Allowable
Range
Bin
Size
BOOL
Output
Read/Write
00001 - 02000
00001 - 04999
00001 - 09999
2048
BOOL
Memory
Read/Write
02001 - 04000
05000 - 09999
00001 - 09999
2016
BOOL
Input
Read
10001 - 12000
10001 - 14999
10001 - 19999
4096
BOOL
Memory
Read
12001 - 14000
15000 - 19999
10001 - 19999
2016
DINT
Input
Read
30001 - 31000
30001 - 32499
30001 - 39999
1024a
DINT
Memory
Read
31001 - 32000
32500 - 34999
30001 - 39999
1000
REAL
Input
Read
32001 - 32120
35000 - 37499
30001 - 39999
120
REAL
Memory
Read
33001 - 34000
37500 - 39999
30001 - 39999
1000
10
DINT
Output
Read/Write
40001 - 40250
40000 - 42499
40001 - 49999
512
11
DINT
Memory
Read/Write
40251 - 41000
42500 - 44999
40001 - 49999
750
12
REAL
Memory
Read/Write
41001 - 42000
45000 - 49999
40001 - 49999
1000
a. For Tricon controllers only: While this bin size is 1024 points, only 1000 points are available to be aliased. The
remaining 24 points will be unaliased, because the alias range reserved for DINT input points is 30001 through
31000.
For more information about how alias numbers are assigned, see Assigning an Alias Number,
Alias Type, and Physical Address on page 174.
Applies To
Communication
Location
Application tree > Tagnames > Item Properties > Point Assignment tab
Alias Type
The Alias Type property identifies whether the memory point has an alias number and whether
the point is read or read/write. Settings include:
Unaliased: Means the point cannot be read or written to.
Read aliased: Means the point can be read by an external device. If specified, you can
accept the default alias, or enter a number for the alias.
Read/write aliased: Means the point can be read or written by an external device. If
specified, you can accept the default alias, or enter a number for the alias.
Applies To
Communication
483
Location
Application tree > Tagnames > Item Properties > Point Assignment tab
Alignment
The Alignment property specifies how the text for an annotation or comment is aligned in the
comment box; either left, center, or right. The default is left.
Applies To
Comments
Locations
Item Properties > Comment tab

Project menu > Project Options > Annotations tab

The Allow Disabling of Points property specifies whether points can be disabled from the
TriStation PC. A TriStation PC cannot write to disabled points, however, external devices such
as Modbus masters can write to disabled points unless you disable external device writes.
This property can be changed only when your project is in the Download All state. The default
is cleared, which means points cannot be disabled from the TriStation PC.
Once you have changed this property (by selecting or clearing the check box), you must perform
a Download All to apply your changes to the controller. TriStation 1131 will automatically
rebuild the application before it is downloaded. See Building or Rebuilding an Application on
page 241 and Using the Download All Command on page 480.
Applies To
Memory and Output Points
Locations
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Operating Parameters

Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > MP Setup > Operating Parameters tab
Allow Partial Changes to Libraries

The Allow Partial Changes to Libraries property specifies whether you can make changes to
selected elements in an existing library without having to add, update, or delete the entire
library. Partial library changes are defined as:
Adding individual elements to an existing library.
Updating individual elements in an existing library.
Deleting individual elements from an existing library.
TriStation 1131 Developers Guide v4.9.0
484
Appendix A
All partial changes must be compatible with the other elements in the library.
Applies To
Libraries
Locations
Application tree > right-click Library Documents > Manage command

Project menu > Library > Manage command
Annotate
The Annotate property specifies whether to add an annotation, which is similar to a comment,
to a variable. If selected, an annotation box is attached to the bottom of an input, output,
input/output, or local variable. You can change the size of the annotation box.
An annotation can include any of the following:
The monitor value (value of the variable as the configuration executes)
The default macro for the particular type of variable
Other standard macros
User-modified macros
Text that you type in
The default is cleared, which means an annotation is not included. If Annotate is cleared, no
properties are available to view when the application is run on the controller or Emulator.
Applies To
Variables
Location
Item Properties > Constant tab
Annotation on by Default
The Annotation on by Default property specifies whether to automatically add annotation
boxes to variables used with a program or function block.
Annotations allow you to include information that is displayed at the bottom of an input,
output, input/output, or local variable. If you enable annotation for the project, the annotation
display is automatically added to all the variables in the project.
The default is cleared, which means annotation is not automatically added.
Applies To
Variables
485
Location
Append Sheet Command

The Append Sheet command adds a new logic sheet after the sheet currently being viewed. You
must enter a title for the new sheet before it will be added.
Applies To
Logic sheets
Location
Sheets menu
Application Type
The Application Type property determines whether an application element (program, function,
function block, or tagname) is used with safety, control, or safety and control applications.
The default is Control.
Table 41
Application Types
Setting
Description
Safety
An application that is designed to take a process to a safe state when

predetermined conditions are violated. Also referred to as an Emergency
Shutdown System (ESD), Safety Instrumented System (SIS), and Safety Interlock
System.
Applies to programs and tagnames.
Control
An application that controls a process. Cannot be used in Safety programs.

Applies to programs, functions, function blocks, and tagnames.
Safety or Control
An application that includes a mixture of safety and control components.

Applies to functions and function blocks.
Applies To
Programs, Functions, Function Blocks, and Tagnames
Locations
Item Properties > Application tab

Declarations > Application tab
486
Appendix A
Apply Command
The Apply command allows you to save and apply changes you have entered. For example, if
you enter an initial value of 2 for a BOOL tagname and click Apply, a message indicates that the
value and data type are not compatible.
Applies To
Validation of application elements
Location
Item Properties > Constants or Point Assignment tab
Auto Indent Command

The Auto Indent Command toggles to allow you to use automatic indentation or set your own
indentation in Structured Text code.
Applies To
ST programs and functions
Location
Auto Indent button, or View menu
Auto Name Command

The Auto Name command names more than one
variable or constant according to a pattern that you
specify. You can specify a name, starting value, and
incremental value. You can also specify the order in
which to apply the names to the selected elements.
Properties include:
Formatted Name on page 537
Start Value and Increment on page 618
Name Order on page 566
Applies To
Variables
Locations
Auto Name button, or Tools menu

Item Properties > Constants or Selected tab
487
Auto Scroll Delay

The Auto Scroll Delay property specifies how many milliseconds to delay scrolling while
scrolling through the Structured Text.
Applies To
ST Language
Location
View menu > Set Editor Options
Backup Project Command

The Backup Project command saves a copy of the open project elements and settings, and
creates a backup file named <project_name>.bt2.
Procedure
1
On the File menu, click Backup Project.
Specify the folder to save the file to. Use the suggested name or specify a new one. The
file extension (.bt2) does not have to be included in the name.
Click Save.
Applies To
Project
Location
File menu
Base Address
For Tricon controllers, the Base Address property specifies the block address for the Tricon HIM
based on the Data Hiway memory map. Must be an integer between 5 and 31; the default is 5.
Applies To
Tricon HIM
Location
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > HIM Setup
488
Appendix A
Baud Rate
The Baud Rate property specifies the data transmission speed. Settings include:
For Tricon EICM: 19200, 9600, 4800, 2400, or 1200.
For Tricon TCM: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800, 2400, or 1200.
For Trident 1.x CM: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 2400, or 1200.
For Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM: 115200, 57600, 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800, 2400, or 1200.
The default is 9600.
Applies To
Tricon EICM, Tricon TCM, Trident MP, Trident CM, Tri-GP CM
Locations
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > EICM Setup
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Serial
Ports tab
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B
Setup > Serial Ports tab
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Serial Ports
tab
Controller tree > Configuration > TriStation Communication
Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > MP or CM
Block Collection
See SOE Block Collection Mode on page 612 and SOE Block Collection Type on page 613.
Block Type
See SOE Block Type on page 614.
Border
The Border property specifies whether to include a border around an annotation or comment
box. The border property can be specified for the project, or for individual annotations and
comments.
Options include None, Single, and Double. The default is Single.
Applies To
Annotations, Comments
489
Locations
Item Properties > Comment tab

Build Application Command

The Build Application command builds an application by compiling programs in the execution
list that have been modified since the last time they were compiled. The command then links
the object code, library routines, and configuration elements to create an executable application.
Each successive time you use the Build Application command, it compiles and links only
documents and items that have changed since the last build.
After using the Build Application command several times, you should use the Rebuild
Application command. A rebuild compiles and links all documents and items in the application,
not just the ones that have changed since the last build.
Applies To
Application
Location
Build Application button, or Project menu
Category
The Category property specifies a name for a category that can be associated with documents
(programs, functions, function blocks, and data types). By adding a category name, you can sort
elements by type.
Applies To
Documents
Location
Right-click a document > Document Properties > Summary tab
490
Appendix A
Cause Effect Matrix Support

The Cause Effect Matrix Support properties specify whether and how a function or function
block can be used in a CEM program. For user-defined functions, function blocks, and data
types, you can specify the setting. (For TriStation 1131 Library elements, the setting cannot be
changed.) Settings include:
Supports use in cause rows with ... inputs
Supports use in effect columns with ... outputs
Supports use in intersections
Supports application defined states
The default is cleared for all options.
Applies To
Functions and function blocks used in CEM programs
Location
Application tree > right-click a function or function block > click Attributes tab
Cause Header Functions On by Default

The Cause Header Functions On by Default property specifies whether an input and function
column are automatically included in the cause header when a CEM program is created. The
default is cleared.
Applies To
CEM programs
Location
Tools menu > TriStation 1131 Options > CEM Editor tab
CEM Monitor Colors

The CEM Monitor Colors property specifies the colors to display for cause, effect, and
intersection cells in a CEM program. These colors are used when the application is run on the
controller or Emulator.
The default for True is red. The default for False is white.
Applies To
CEM programs
Location
Project menu > Project Options > Monitor Colors tab
491
CEM Editor Options

The CEM Editor Options properties specify the initial settings used when a CEM program is
created. Settings on individual CEM programs can be changed by setting the CEM Element
Options on page 491. Properties include:
Cause Header Functions On by Default on page 490
Effect Header Functions On by Default on page 522
Intersection Functions On by Default on page 548
Default Number of Cause Rows on page 507
Default Number of Effect Columns on page 508
Applies To
CEM programs
Location
CEM Element Options

The CEM Element Options properties specify the settings for a specific CEM program. For
information on specifying initial properties, see Specifying CEM Element Options on page 148.
Properties include:
Enable Cause Header Functions on page 524
Enable Effect Header Functions on page 526
Enable Intersection Functions on page 527
Enable Floating Text in Intersection Cells on page 526
Evaluation Options on page 531
Applies To
CEM programs
Location
Open a CEM program > click the Document menu > click Options
Change Colors Command

The Change Colors command displays a color palette that allows colors to be used when an
element is displayed on a logic sheet.
Applies To
Project elements
492
Appendix A
Location
Tools menu > TriStation 1131 Options > Drawing Colors tab
Change Owner Command

The Change Owner command allows you to change the owner of a document. Normally, the
owner of a document is the user who created it.
Applies To
Programs and functions
Location
Right-click an element > Item Properties > Change Owner
Change State to Download All Command

The Change State to Download All command
changes the download state of the project so that
the Download All command can be used when
the application is downloaded.
Using this command changes the download
state for both the controller AND the Emulator
to Download All.
This command also sets the downloaded version for the controller and the Emulator to the same
version number, whichever of the two was greater. See Downloaded Version on page 519.
Once the state has been changed to Download All, you cannot perform a Download Changes
command until a Download All has been completed.
You cannot reverse this command. Before changing the state, you may want to make a backup
copy of the application so that you can use it if you decide that a Download All command is not
needed.
This command is only available after an application has been downloaded to the controller or
the Emulator. If the project is opened in a newer version of TriStation 1131, this dialog box may
be displayed to indicate that changes, such as adding new libraries, will require a Download All.
WARNING
The Download All command should not be used if the application on the
controller is running on a live system. If needed, the system should be
taken offline while the download is done.
Applies To
Downloaded application
Location
Project menu
493
Choose Another Tagname Command

The Choose Another Tagname command allows
you to select a tagname and specify a different
tagname to replace it. If there is more than one
occurrence of the selected tagname, all
occurrences are changed to the specified name.
Applies To
Tagnames in FBD editor
Location
FBD editor > right-click a tagname in the Tagname Declarations tree
Clear History Command

The Clear History command deletes the history of actions, which is a listing of all changes made
to a project. Each item includes the date, element, user, action, and comment for the change.
Applies To
Project
Location
Project menu
Client IP Address
The Client IP Address property specifies the IP address of the client that you want to allow,
restrict, or deny access to the TCM, or Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM. Also see IP Address on
page 550.
Can be used in conjunction with the Client IP Subnet Mask property to create groups of IP
addresses with the same access levels.
Does not apply to model 4351/4352 Tricon Communication Modules (TCMs), or Trident 1.x
CMs.
Applies To
Communication
Locations
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Access
List tab
Setup > Access List tab
Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup >
Access List tab
494
Appendix A
Client IP Subnet Mask

The Client IP Subnet Mask property allows you to group IP addresses, so that you can create a
single entry in the TCM, Trident 2.x CM, or Tri-GP CM access control list for all IP addresses on
the subnet. Does not apply to model 4351/4352 TCMs, or Trident 1.x CMs. See also IP Subnet
Mask on page 550.
Applies To
Communication
Locations
List tab
Access List tab
Client Protocols
The Protocols property in the TCM, Trident 2.x CM, or Tri-GP CM access control list specifies
the protocol(s) that the selected client can use to access the TCM, Trident 2.x CM, or Tri-GP CM.
Does not apply to model 4351/4352 Tricon Communication Modules (TCMs).
Table 42
TCM/Trident 2.x CM/Tri-GP CM Client Access Protocols
Protocol
Description
TSAA
Stands for Triconex System Access Application, which is a protocol that enables
client/server communication between Triconex controllers and PCs. OPC Server
and DDE Server use TSAA protocol to exchange data with Triconex controllers.
TSAA protocol can be used to write programs for accessing controller tagnames.
OPC
OLE for Process Control. The OPC protocol is supported on NET 2 only, and
applies only to model 4353 or 4354 TCMs.
TriStation
A Triconex master/slave protocol in which the master (a TriStation 1131 PC)

communicates with the slave (a Triconex controller) over an Ethernet network.
Applies To
Communication
Locations
List tab
Access List tab
495
Close Project Command

The Close Project command closes an open project and prompts you to save it if changes have
been made.
Applies To
Project
Location
File menu
Coil Tool Command

The Coil Tool Command allows you to add a coil, which represents the state of an output
variable.
Applies To
LD program or function
Location
Coil Tool button

Tools menu > Select Tools
Coil Type
The Coil Type property represents the output state of a coil used in an LD program or function.
Table 43
Coil Type Symbols and Descriptions
Coil Type
Symbol
Description
Normal (Momentary)
The state of the left link is copied to the associated Boolean

variable and to the right link.
Negated (Momentary)
(/ )
The inverse of the state of the left link is copied to the associated
Boolean variable and to the right link.
Positive Transition
(P)
The state of the associated Boolean variable is On from one

evaluation to the next if the left link changes from Off to On.
Negative Transition
(N)
The state of the associated Boolean variable is On from one

evaluation to the next if the left link changes from On to Off.
Set (Latch)
(S)
The associated Boolean variable is set to On if the left link is in

the On state and remains On until reset by the RESET coil.
Reset (Unlatch)
(R)
The associated Boolean variable is reset to Off if the left link is in

the On state and remains Off until set by the SET coil.
496
Appendix A
Applies To
LD program or function
Location
Item Properties > Selected tab
Comment Tool
The Comment Tool allows you to draw a text box for a non-executable comment, and then type
text inside the box.
Applies To
Logic sheets in user documents, test sheets in the Controller and Emulator Panels
Locations
Comment Tool button

Application tree > User Documents tree > Tools menu > Select Tool command
Configuration tree > Controller or Emulator Panel > Tools menu > Select Tool command
Communication Command
The Communication command displays the Communication screen on the Controller tree.
Applies To
Communication
Locations
Communication button
Controller tree > View menu > Go to > Communication
Communication Modules (CMs) for Modbus

The Communication Modules (CMs) for Modbus property defines the communication module
you want the Emulator to get Modbus configuration information from.
The Modbus configuration from the selected communication module will be used by the
Emulator so that you can test your Modbus functionality using emulated nodes.
Only one Modbus configuration can be used by the Emulator. If redundant communication
modules are installed in a single logical slot, you must select the physical communication
module (LEFT or RIGHT) with the configuration you want to use. The default is LEFT.
If no CM modules are listed, you have not configured any communication modules for Modbus
communication in your project.
497
Applies To
Emulator
Location
Project menu > Project Options > Emulator Options tab
Communication Modules (CMs) for Peer-to-Peer

The Communication Modules (CMs) for Peer-to-Peer property defines the communication
module you want the Emulator to get Peer-to-Peer configuration information from.
The Peer-to-Peer configuration from the selected communication module will be used by the
Emulator so that you can test your Peer-to-Peer functionality using emulated nodes.
Only one Peer-to-Peer configuration can be used by the Emulator. If redundant communication
modules are installed in a single logical slot, you must select the physical communication
module (LEFT or RIGHT) with the configuration you want to use. The default is LEFT.
If no CM modules are listed, you have not configured any communication modules for Peer-toPeer communication in your project.
Applies To
Emulator
Location
Compare Project to the Last Downloaded Command

The Compare Project to Last
Download command allows you to
compare the changes made in the
new application to-be-downloaded
with the application already
downloaded to a controller. You can
view the comparison online, or print
a report. Differences between the
project and the downloaded
application are identified with a red
asterisk (*).
This report should be run for all
safety applications.
Click each tab to compare
differences. A red asterisk marks
differences.
498
Appendix A
Applies To
Application and configuration elements
Location
Project menu
Compile Command
The Compile command compiles the selected document and displays any errors.
Applies To
Programs, functions, and function blocks
Locations
Compile button
Document menu
Compile All User Documents Command

The Compile All User Documents command compiles all the user-created documents in a
project.
Applies To
Application
Location
Project menu
Compiler Warning When Right Power Rail is Missing

The Compiler Warning When Right Power Rail is Missing property specifies whether to display
a warning if the right rail is missing on a Ladder Diagram program. The default is cleared,
which means a warning is not displayed if the right rail is missing.
Applies To
Ladder Diagram programs
Location
Tools menu > TriStation 1131 Options > LD Editor tab
499
Connect Command
The Connect command attempts to connect the TriStation PC to the controller or Emulator,
depending on whether the command is issued from the Controller or Emulator Panel.
When issued from the Controller Panel, you can change some default connection settings.
Table 44
Connect Properties for Communication Modules
Communication Module
Properties that can be set
Tricon EICM or NCM
Serial or Network port settings.
Tricon TCM
Serial or Network port settings, TriStation UDP Port Number,

and Baud Rate (for serial connection only).
Trident 1.x MP or CM
Serial or Network port settings.
Trident 2.x MP or CM
Serial or Network port settings, TriStation UDP Port Number.
Tri-GP MP or CM
Serial or Network port settings, TriStation UDP Port Number.
Applies To
Communication modules, controller
Locations
Connect button
Controller or Emulator Panel > Command menu
Contact Command
The Contact command allows you to add a contact to a Ladder Diagram. After adding a contact,
you can specify the Contact Type.
Applies To
Ladder Diagrams
Locations
Contact Tool button

500
Appendix A
Contact Type
The Contact Type property specifies the type of a contact used in a Ladder Diagram.
Table 45
Contact Type Symbols and Descriptions
Contact Type
Symbol
Description
Normally Open
The state of the left link is copied to the right link if the state of
the Boolean variable is On.
Normally Closed
| / |
The state of the left link is copied to the right link if the state of
the Boolean variable is Off.
Positive
Transition
| P |
The state of the right link is On from one evaluation to the next
when the associated variable changes from Off to On while the
state of the left link is On.
Negative
Transition
| N |
The state of the right link is On from one evaluation to the next
when the associated variable changes from On to Off while the
state of the left link is On.
Applies To
Contacts in Ladder Diagram programs
Location
Item Properties > Variable tab > Contact Type area
Continuous Refresh Command

The Continuous Refresh command continuously displays the current values of variables on test
sheets or on the program document display. The default is On.
Applies To
Controller or Emulator Panel
Locations
Continuous Refresh button

Controller tree > Controller or Emulator Panel > Commands menu
501
Copy Command
The Copy command copies the selected items from the current tree or sheet and places them on
the clipboard.
Applies To
Test sheets and elements in Controller or Emulator Panel
User documents and elements on logic sheets
Locations
Copy button
Edit menu
Copy Current Setup to Other Serial Ports Command

The Copy Current Setup to Other Serial Ports command copies the settings for the selected serial
port to the other serial ports on the MP.
Applies To
Trident or Tri-GP MP serial ports
Location
Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > MP Setup > Serial
Ports tab
Copy Current Setup to Other Slot Command

The Copy Current Setup to Other Serial Slot command copies the TCM, Trident 2.x CM, or
Tri-GP CM access control list configuration for the module in the selected slot to the
corresponding module installed in the other slot. This ensures that both TCMs or CMs have
identical access control lists (recommended).
CMs.
Applies To
Tricon TCM, Trident 2.x CM, and Tri-GP CM access control lists
Locations
List tab
Access List tab
502
Appendix A
Current Version
The Current Version property identifies the current version of the project under development.
This is how the version is determined:
The version of a newly created project is 0.0.
If it is changed and saved after being downloaded to the controller, the minor number
is increased by 1. For example, 1.1.
If the state is changed to Download All, the major number is increased by 1 and the
minor number is changed to 0. For example, version 1.1 is changed to 2.0.
Applies To
Projects
Location
Project menu > Project Description
Cut Command
The Cut command deletes the selected items from the current tree or sheet and places them on
the clipboard, erasing the previous clipboard contents.
Applies To
Test sheets and elements in Controller and Emulator Panels
User documents and elements on logic sheets
Location
Cut button, or Edit menu
Data Bits
The Data Bits property specifies whether the data format includes 7 or 8 data bits. To set this
property, you must use Modbus slave or Modbus slave ASCII protocol. The default is 8 bits.
Applies To
Tricon EICM, Tricon TCM, Trident CM, Tri-GP CM
Locations
Ports tab
503
tab
Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup >
Serial Ports tab
Data Files
The Data Files property specifies the path name for documents including user libraries,
configuration files, and custom report templates. The default path name and file extension is:

1131 4.9.0\Data.
Applies To
Project
Location
Tools menu > TriStation 1131 Options > Directories tab
Data Type
The Data Type property specifies the kind of data that can be stored in the variable. For more
information about TriStation 1131 data types, see Appendix B, Data Types. This table identifies
the data types available for variables.
Table 46
Variable Data Types
Variables
Data Types
Tagnames
BOOL, DINT, REAL
Constants and
local variables
DATE, DT, DWORD, INT, LREAL, STRING, TIME, TOD

User-defined data typessuch as arrays, structures, and enumerations that you
have defined in structured textcan also be selected as data types in local
variable declarations. However, you must successfully compile your user-defined
data type before it will appear in the Data Type list.
Applies To
Constants, local variables, and tagnames
Location
Item Properties > Constant or Declaration tab
504
Appendix A
Declarations Command
The Declarations command displays a dialog box that allows you to declare an input, output,
in/out, local, or tagname declaration. Variables must be declared to be used in programs and
functions.
Applies To
Variables
Location
Double-click a variable or right-click the Tagname Declarations folder
Default Colors Command

The Default Colors command returns the colors of drawing items to the default colors. The color
settings on your PC affect the default colors. This table describes the drawing items for which
colors can be changed.
Table 47
Drawing Item Default Colors
Drawing Item
Default Color
Element background
Medium gray
Element text and border
Black
Selected element background
Dark blue
Selected element text
White
Sheet background
White
Sheet background (read-only documents)
Medium gray
Zone division lines
Medium gray
Applies To
Logic sheets in user documents
Test sheets in Controller and Emulator Panels
Location
505
Default Connection
The Default Connection property specifies the initial setting used when the Connect dialog box
is displayed.
This setting can be changed in the Connect dialog box before connecting to the controller. This
property is only available when both types of connections are selected in the Select Connections
area.
Default settings are:
For Tricon, Trident 2.x, and Tri-GP controllers, the default is Network Connection.
For Trident 1.x controllers, the default is Main Processor.
Applies To
Application, controller, modules
Location
Configuration tree > TriStation Communication
Default Gateway IP Address

The Default Gateway IP Address property specifies the IP address of the gateway to which the
controller is connected. The default gateway address must be part of the subnet.Typically, this
is the IP address of the network router. This address can be obtained from your network
administrator or Information Technology department.
Applies To
Communication
Locations
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > ACM Setup
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup >
Network and Routing tabs
Setup > Network and Routing tabs
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Network
and Routing tabs
506
Appendix A
Default Language
The Default Language property specifies the programming language to use initially when
creating a user document. The default is Function Block Diagram.
Options include:
Function Block Diagram
Ladder Diagram
Structured Text
Cause Effect Matrix
Applies To
User documents
Location
Project menu > Project Options > Language tab
Default Macros or Text

The Default Macros or Text property specifies a default macro or text to include with a variable
in a program, function, or function block.
Variable
Program Defaults
Function Defaults
Tag Refs
%PGM_TAGNAME
Local variables
%PGM_LOCAL
%FB_LOCAL
I/O variables
%PG_IO
%FB_IO
Default Macros for Annotations

The default macros used with annotations vary depending on the element and variable type.
For example, the %PGM_TAGNAME macro expands to include the tagname
(P1.WATER_LOW), location on controller (03.04.13), and alias number (10018).
Table 48
Default Macros for Annotation
Macro Name
Default Value
Used With
Sample Expanded
Macro
%PGM_TAGNAME
%TAG_MEMORYADDRESS%
TAG_ALIAS
Program Externals
P1.WATER_LOW
03.04.13 10018
%PGM_LOCAL
%WHERE_USED
Program Locals
PROCESS_COUNT
1(C7) 3(D5) 4(A2)
%FB_INPUT
<no default>
Function Inputs
<no default>
%FB_OUTPUT
<no default>
Function Outputs
<no default>
507
Table 48
Default Macros for Annotation (continued)
Macro Name
Default Value
Used With
Sample Expanded
Macro
%FB_IO
<no default>
Function
Inputs/Output
<no default>
%FB_LOCAL
<no default>
Function Locals
<no default>
Macros Used in the Default Macros

Macros beginning with %TAG cannot be modified.
Table 49
%TAG Macros Used in the Default Macros
Macro Name
Description
%PGM_TAGNAME
The name of the point to which the program variable is connected.
%TAG_MEMORY
ADDRESS
The location of the point to which the program variable is connected. This
only applies to physical input and output points and is displayed in this
format:
For Tricon controllers: CC.SS.PP; where CC is the chassis, SS is the slot,
and PP is the point. For memory points, an empty string is returned.
For Trident or Tri-GP controllers: ii.ss.pp; where ii is the I/O processor
number, ss is the module baseplate address plug number, and pp is the
point number.
%TAG_ALIAS
The Modbus alias of the point to which the program variable is connected. If
the point has no alias, an empty string is returned.
Applies To
Location
Item Properties > Annotation or Comment tab > Macros button
Default Number of Cause Rows

The Default Number of Cause Rows property specifies the number of rows added when a
matrix is created using the CEM editor. The default is 22.
Applies To
CEM programs
Location
508
Appendix A
Default Number of Effect Columns

The Default Number of Effect Columns property specifies the number of columns added when
a program (matrix) is created using the CEM editor. The default is 25.
Applies To
CEM programs
Location
Delete Command
The Delete command deletes the selected item.
Applies To
Project elements
Location
Edit menu
Delete Columns Command

The Delete Columns command displays a dialog box that allows you to specify the number of
columns to delete in a CEM program and the beginning column position.
Applies To
CEM programs
Locations
Delete Columns button

Edit menu
Delete Rows Command

The Delete Rows command displays a dialog box that allows you to specify the number of rows
to delete and the beginning row position.
Applies To
CEM programs
Locations
Delete Rows button

Edit menu
509
Delete Sheet Command

The Delete Sheet command removes the currently displayed logic sheet from a program,
function, or function block.
Applies To
Logic sheets
Location
Sheets menu
Delete Unreferenced Tagnames Command

The Delete Unreferenced Tagnames command removes tagnames that are not used in programs
or functions.
Applies To
Tagnames
Location
Application tree > Tagname Declarations
Description
The Description property specifies descriptive text about the selected item. The maximum
number of characters is 131, which can include A to Z, and 0 to 9. The underscore character
( _ ) can also be used, but not as the first character in the description. To include this text in an
annotation or comment, use the %DESCRIPTION macro.
Applies To
Project elements
Locations
Item Properties > Selected or Declarations tab

Project menu > Security > New or Modify > Add User or Modify User
Destination IP Address
The Destination IP Address property specifies an IP address which is used if the controller is not
on the same subnet as other devices.
Applies To
Communication
510
Appendix A
Locations
Routing tab
Setup > Routing tab
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Routing tab
Routing tab
Destination Gateway IP Address

The Destination Gateway IP Address property specifies the IP address of the gateway device
which is used if the controller is not on the same subnet as other devices.
Applies To
Communication
Locations
Setup > Network and Routing tabs
and Routing tabs
Routing tab
Destination IP Subnet Mask

The Destination IP Subnet Mask property specifies the binary pattern that is matched with the
IP address to turn part of the host ID address field into a field for subnets.
Applies To
Communication
Locations
Routing tab
Setup > Routing tab
Routing tab
511

The Destination UDP Port property specifies the port number for other controllers on a Peer-toPeer network.
Applies To
Peer-to-Peer communication
Locations
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Peerto-Peer tab
Setup > Peer-to-Peer tab
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Peer-to-Peer
tab
Peer-to-Peer tab
Differential AI Input Type

The Differential AI Input Type property specifies the input type for an analog input point. Only
available with AI model 3721. Options include:
Unipolar: 0 to 5 volts with 6% over-range.
Bipolar: -5 to 5 volts with 6% under-range and over-range.
For detailed range information, see Resolution Type on page 592.

The default is Unipolar.
Applies To
Analog input points
Location
Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > Differential AI Setup
Directories
See:
Data Files on page 503
Project Files on page 586
Temporary Files on page 623
512
Appendix A
Disable OVD on All Modules Command

For Tricon controllers, the Disable OVD on All Modules command disables Output Voter
Diagnostics (OVD) on the points of all digital output modules in a controller (except Supervised
DO modules, which cannot have OVD disabled). The application must be running on a
controller to use this command.
For Trident or Tri-GP controllers, OVD is disabled for individual points by using the
SYS_OVD_INHIBIT function. For more information, see the TriStation 1131 Libraries Reference.
The default OVD state is enabled for all digital output points.
WARNING
A safety application may not disable the output voter diagnostic.
Applies To
Application
Location
Controller tree > Controller Panel > Commands menu
Disable OVD on Module... Command

For Tricon controllers, the Disable OVD on Module... command disables Output Voter
Diagnostics (OVD) for all points on specified digital output modules in the controller. The
application must be running on a controller to use this command.
OVD cannot be disabled for points on a Supervised Digital Output module.
For Trident or Tri-GP controllers, OVD is disabled for individual points by using the
SYS_OVD_INHIBIT function. For more information, see the TriStation 1131 Libraries Reference.
WARNING
Applies To
Application, modules
Location
Disable Programming and Control Operations

Trident or Tri-GP controllers only. See Set Programming Mode Command on page 603.
513
Disable Remote Changes to Outputs

The Disable Remote Changes to Outputs property specifies whether external devices can write
to output points in the TriStation 1131 application. If selected, external devices cannot write to
output points regardless of the settings for other properties. You should select this check box if
the application includes safety-critical outputs. The default is selected, which means output
points cannot be changed by external devices.
Applies To
Application
Locations
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Operating Parameters

Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > MP Setup >
Operating Parameters tab
Disable Scaling
For Trident or Tri-GP controllers, the Disable Scaling property specifies whether REAL numbers
are scaled to integers when they are transmitted from the controller. For Tricon controllers, this
option is not available because REAL values are always scaled. The default is cleared, which
means real numbers are not scaled.
When selected, two consecutive 16-bit aliases are assigned to each REAL tagname so that IEEE
754 single-precision, floating-point representation is used. This option is available because
Modbus has a 16-bit size limitation. Only the first alias of the two is displayed in the Modbus
Alias field of the Declaration tab.
When cleared, only one alias is used.
Applies To
Modbus communication
Location
Application tree > Tagname Declarations> Item Properties > Scaling tab
Disable Stop on Keyswitch

For Tricon controllers, the Disable Stop on Keyswitch property specifies whether to logically
disable the STOP position of the keyswitch on the Tricon Main Chassis so that the application
is not stopped if the key is turned to the STOP position. If selected, setting the keyswitch to
STOP does not halt the application.
The default is cleared, which means that the application is stopped if the keyswitch is turned to
STOP.
Applies To
Application
514
Appendix A
Location
Controller tree > Configuration > Operating Parameters
Disconnect Command
The Disconnect command disconnects an application from the controller or Emulator.
Applies To
Communication
Locations
Disconnect button
Display Program Document Command

The Display Program Document command allows you to monitor the execution (power flow)
of an FBD program or LD program while an application is emulated in TriStation 1131 or run
online on a controller.
You can perform monitoring using the default colors or custom colors, which you can change
online using the Project Options command. After changing the monitor colors, you must
perform a Download Changes for the new colors to take effect.
Applies To
Programs
Locations
Display Program Document button

Display Report Command

The Display Report command displays a selected report.
Applies To
Reports
Location
Project tree > Report viewer toolbar
515
Display Tabular View Command

The Display Tabular View command displays tagnames in a table format, which allows you to
change multiple tagnames at a time. To make sorting and changing easier, you can also change
the columns that are displayed and the order in which they are displayed.
Properties include: tagname, point type, alias type, data type, point address, description, S/C
(safety or control), retain (Retentive), alias #, Min Span, Max Span, Group 1, Group 2, and initial
value.
Applies To
Tagnames
Location
Application tree > right-click Tagname Declarations folder
DO Point Options
The DO Point Options property specifies the type of fault detection used for the point. Each
point can be specified with one of these options. Available only with the Tricon model 3625
Digital Output Module.
Table 50
DO Point Options
Option
Description
Not Used
Fault detection is the same as for Non-Supervised points, except reporting of

benign field fault conditions is suppressed.
Points configured as Not Used will be energized if the application commands
them on.
Non-Supervised
Fault detection includes:

Detection of all internal faults, including those in the output circuitry.
Detection of external faults associated with the field device or wiring
limited to loss of field power and shorted loads under most conditions.
Non-supervised is the default.
Supervised
Fault detection includes:

Detection of all internal faults, including those in the output circuitry.
Detection of all external faults associated with field device or wiring, such as,
loss of power, shorted loads, open loads, and so on.
516
Appendix A
Applies To
Tricon DO Points
Location
Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > DO Setup
Document Access
The Document Access property specifies whether the document can be read, read and written
to (changed), or is locked. Settings include:
Read: Any user can read the document, which means it can be viewed.
Read/Write: Any user can read or change the document. (Default)
Lock: Only users with the same or higher security level can read and write the
document.
Applies To
Programs, functions, function blocks, and data types
Location
Right-click a document > Properties > Summary tab
Document Type
The Document Type property specifies whether a document is a program, function, function
block, or data type.
Applies To
Document
Location
Project menu > New Document
Double Space
The Double Space property specifies whether to display double spaces between the terminals
(inputs and outputs) on a function or function block, which provides additional space for
annotations and comments. This setting specifies spacing on an individual function or function
block.
CAUTION
If you select Double Space after input and output variables have been
attached to the function or function block, the variables will have to be
reattached.
The default is cleared, which means the terminals are single spaced.
517
Applies To
Location
Item Properties > Function tab > Terminals > Double Space
Double Space Function (Block) Terminals by Default

The Double Space Function Block Terminals property specifies whether to display double space
between the terminals (inputs and outputs) on a function or function block, which allows space
for annotations and comments. This setting affects all new functions and function blocks created
in a project.
The default is cleared, which means the terminals are single spaced by default.
Applies To
Location
Tools menu > TriStation 1131 Options > FBD Editor tab and LD Editor tab
Download All Command

The Download All command downloads an application to the controller or Emulator.
WARNING
Table 51
A Download All command requires that the application on the controller

is halted.
Download All Required
Component
Description
Chassis
Required if adding, changing (the type), or deleting a chassis.

To avoid a Download All after the initial download, include the
maximum number of chassis in the application before downloading the
application.
Functions and function

blocks
Required if changing or deleting a function or function block.
Library elements
Required if changing (adding, updating, deleting) library elements that

have already been downloaded to a controller.
Memory allocation
Required if changing memory allocation.
Modules
Required if moving or deleting modules in the configuration.
Node Number
Required if changing the address plug and node number configuration.
518
Appendix A
Table 51
Download All Required (continued)
Component
Description
Number of Send or
Receive function blocks
Required if increasing or decreasing the number of send or receive

function blocks.
Operating Parameters
Required if changing the Allow Disabling of Points property.
Programs
Required if changes to a program exceed available memory. Required if

deleting a program.
Tagnames
Required if importing tagnames from an Excel or database file. Required

if changes to tagnames require additional memory allocation.
Target System Version
Required if the target system version is changed (upgrade or

downgrade), unless you are converting a project created in a version of
TriStation 1131 prior to v4.6.
Variables
Required if changes to variables require additional memory allocation.
Applies To
Application
Locations
Download All button

Controller > Controller or Emulator Panel > Commands menu
Download Changes Command

The Download Changes command downloads changes made to an application, while an
application is running on the controller or Emulator.
WARNING

should be avoided because an error in the application could cause a
trip or unpredictable behavior.
For additional warnings, see Using the Download Changes Command
on page 478.
Table 52
Download Changes Allowed
Element
Description
Functions and
function blocks
Allowed if adding a function or function block, but not if changing or deleting an

existing function or function block.
IP Address
Allowed, but not advised, if the IP address of a communication module is changed.
Modules
Allowed if adding a module to an empty slot, which has sufficient memory

allocated for the points. Not allowed if moving or deleting modules.
Library
elements
Allowed if changing (adding, updating, deleting) library elements that have not yet
been downloaded to a controller.
519
Table 52
Download Changes Allowed (continued)
Element
Description
Operating
Parameters
Allowed if changing these properties:

Disable Remote Changes to Outputs
Password Required for Connection
Restart on Power-Up (Trident or Tri-GP only)
Scan Time
Use Local Time
Programs
Allowed if adding or changing a program and there is sufficient memory. Not

allowed if deleting a program.
Tagnames
Allowed if adding, changing, or deleting tagnames.

Tagnames can also be disconnected or connected to different points, if there is
enough memory allocated for the required point types.
Points must be enabled.
Target System
Version
Allowed if you are changing the target system version (upgrade or downgrade)
while converting a project created in a version of TriStation 1131 prior to v4.6.
Variables
Allowed if changing variable properties does not require additional memory

allocation.
Allowed, but not advised, if changes are made to the Point Type, Alias Type, or
Alias Number of a memory variable; these changes will re-initialize the variable to
its configured initial value, or 0 if no initial value is defined.
If the Initial Value is changed, the value is not used until the application is stopped
and restarted.
Points must be enabled.
Applies To
Application changes
Locations
Download Changes button

Downloaded Version
The Downloaded Version property identifies the version of the application (project) that is
downloaded and running on the controller or Emulator.
If you are currently connected to the controller, the version shown here is for the
controller, even if the last download was to the Emulator.
If you are currently connected to the Emulator, the version shown is for the Emulator,
even if the last download was to the controller.
If you are not connected to the Emulator or the controller, the version shown here is for
the last download (which may be either the Emulator or the controller).
520
Appendix A
Use the View Project History Command on page 640 to see the complete list of downloaded
version changes.
When the Change State to Download All command is used, the downloaded version for the
controller and the Emulator are set to the same version number, which will be the next major
revision of the two current downloaded versions. For example, if the Emulators downloaded
version was 3.2, and the controllers downloaded version was 4.1, the downloaded version for
BOTH the controller and Emulator is set to 5.0 (the next larger major revision of the two).
Applies To
Projects
Location
Project menu
Drawing Item
The Drawing Item property specifies the colors to use to with elements on logic sheets.
Applies To
Logic sheets
Location
Drop Command
The Drop command drops all the logic elements enclosed by the comment box so they are not
part of the comment.
To drop, double-click the comment box, click the Pickup/Drop tab, and click Drop.
Applies To
Comments
Location
Item Properties > Pickup/Drop tab
521
Edit...Macros Commands
The Edit Document Macros, Edit Project Macros, and Edit Sheet Macros commands allow you
to specify text for macros that can be used in annotations and comments.
Applies To
Documents
Location
Document, Project, and Sheets menu
Edit Sheet Title Command

The Edit Sheet Title command displays a dialog box that allows you to enter a title for the logic
sheet.
Applies To
Logic sheets
Location
Sheets menu
Edit Title Block Command

The Edit Title Block command displays a dialog box that allows you to add information to the
title block that is used when the CEM program is printed.
Applies To
CEM programs
Location
Sheets menu
Edit/View Source Command

The Edit/View Source command displays the source code for the selected element. The source
code can be edited only for user-created functions and function blocks.
Applies To
CEM programs
Location
Application tree > User Documents > open a CEM program > right-click in the FBD Network
522
Appendix A
Effect Header Functions On by Default

The Effect Header Functions On by Default property specifies whether an output and function
column are automatically included in the effect header when a CEM program is created. The
default is cleared.
Applies To
CEM programs
Location
Emulator File Generation

The Emulator File Generation property defines the files to be generated each time you
download an application to the Emulator.
Select the BT2 check box if you want a backup project file (.BT2) generated (not
recommended).
Select the SOE check box if you want an SOE definition file (.SOE) generated. If you
want to be able to test your SOE configuration with the Emulator, you must select this
option.
The selected file(s) are generated in the same directory where the TriStation 1131 project is
located. The default setting is for the files to not be generated.
Applies To
Emulator
Location
Emulator Timeout
The Emulator Timeout property specifies the timeout value for the connection to the Emulator.
During a Download All or Download Changes operation on the Emulator, the processing time
required for applications with a very large number of variables (symbols) may exceed the
default Emulator timeout value of 4 seconds.
If you receive a download aborted message when downloading an application to the
Emulator, increase the Emulator timeout value and then try downloading again.
In most cases, you should not have to change this value. The default timeout value should be
adequate for the majority of applications.
The valid range is from 0 to 65,535 seconds. The default is 4 seconds.
523
Applies To
Emulator
Location
EN/ENO
The EN/ENO property specifies whether to include EN (an input parameter) and ENO (an
output parameter) in the function.
For the FBD language, the parameters are optional.
For the LD language, the parameters are required.
Usage
If EN/ENO is visible on any function in a network, then EN/ENO must be visible on

every function in the network.
If there is more than one function with EN/ENO visible in a network, then for every
function except the last function, you must connect the ENO output directly to the EN
input of the next function.
You must not connect an ENO output to more than one EN input.
Parameter
Description
EN
An input parameter that enables invocation of the function and carries power from the
left power rail.
If True, the function was called and ENO indicates whether the function detected
an error.
If False, the function was not called and the value of ENO is set to False.
ENO
An output parameter that indicates whether the function detected an error and
connects either to the EN input of the next function or to the ground rail.
If True, the function did not detected any errors.
If False, the function detected an error, and evaluation of the network stopsthe
return value is not written to any variable.
Applies To
Functions
Location
Item Properties > Function tab
524
Appendix A
Enable Access List Command

The Enable Access List command turns on user access control for the TCM, Trident 2.x CM, or
Tri-GP CM, so that access control list settings are used to determine which IP addresses can
access the TCM or CM, and whether that access is read-only, read/write, or denied. Does not
apply to model 4351/4352 Tricon Communication Modules (TCMs), or Trident 1.x CMs.
Applies To
Communication
Locations
List tab
Access List tab
Enable All Disabled Points Command

The Enable All Disabled Points command enables all disabled points on an application running
on the controller.
Applies To
Application, tagnames
Location
Configuration tree > Controller or Emulator Panel > Commands menu
Enable Cause Header Functions

The Enable Cause Header Functions property specifies whether an input and function column
are included in a cause header of a CEM program. The default is cleared, which means cause
header functions are not included.
Applies To
CEM programs
Location
Application tree > open a CEM program > Document menu > Options
525
Enable Color Monitoring

The Enable Color Monitoring property specifies whether color is used when the application is
run on the controller or Emulator. The default is cleared, which means that color monitoring is
not used.
Applies To
Programs
Location
Document Properties > Attributes tab
Enable Communication with Tricon V8 and V9 Peer-to-Peer Systems on

NET 1
The Enable Communication with Tricon V8 and V9 Peer-to-Peer Systems on NET 1 property
specifies whether communication is enabled with these systems on the NET 1 port.
Applies To
Locations
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Peer-to-Peer
tab
Enable Communication with Tricon V8, Tricon V9, and Trident v1

Peer-to-Peer Systems
The Enable Communication with Tricon V8, Tricon V9, and Trident v1 Peer-to-Peer Systems
property specifies whether communication is enabled with these systems on the selected port
(NET 1 or NET 2). By default, Peer-to-Peer communication with these systems is disabled.
Available on Trident v2.x or Tri-GP systems only.
Applies To
Locations
Trident v2.x or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup
> Peer-to-Peer tab
526
Appendix A
Enable Effect Header Functions

The Enable Effect Header Functions property specifies whether an output and function column
are included in an effect header of a CEM program.
The default is cleared, which means effect headers are not included.
Applies To
CEM programs
Location
Enable EN/ENO Terminals on Functions by Default

The Enable EN/ENO Terminals on Functions by Default property specifies whether to
automatically include EN (BOOL input) and ENO (BOOL output) parameters that detect and
isolate errors in FBD and LD logic.
The default is cleared, which means EN/ENO terminals are not automatically included.
Applies To
Functions
Location
Tools menu > TriStation 1131 Options > FBD Editor tab
Enable Floating Text in Intersection Cells

The Floating Text Functions property allows the name of the function or function block to be
displayed in a neighboring cell of the CEM matrix if it is empty. This may be useful if the name
of the function or function block is long. The default is cleared.
Applies To
CEM programs
Location
527
Enable Intersection Functions

The Intersection Functions property specifies whether a function column is included in the
intersection of a CEM matrix. The default is cleared, which means intersection functions are not
included.
Applies To
CEM programs
Location
Enable Macro Editing

The Enable Macro Editing property specifies whether you can change the value for a usermodifiable macro.
User-modifiable macros are identified with a pencil graphic
on the Edit Macros screen.
The default is cleared, which means the macro value cannot be changed.
Applies To
Location
Item Properties > Style tab
Enable Multiple Writes

The Enable Multiple Writes property specifies whether a tagname can be written to multiple
times from programs in the application. If this property is not selected and the tagname is
written to more than once, an error is displayed when the program is compiled.
The default is cleared, which means the tagname can only be written to once in an application.
Applies To
Tagnames
Location
Application tree > double-click a tagname > Point Assignment tab
528
Appendix A
Enable OVD on All Modules Command

For Tricon controllers, the Enable OVD on All Modules command enables Output Voter
Diagnostics (OVD) on the points of all digital output modules in a controller.
WARNING
Applies To
Location
Tricon Controller tree > Controller Panel > Commands menu
Enable OVD on Module... Command

For Tricon controllers, the Enable OVD on
Module... command enables Output Voter
Diagnostics (OVD) for all points on specified
digital output modules in the controller. The
default OVD state is enabled for all digital output
points.
Applies To
Location
Tricon Controller tree > Controller Panel >
Commands menu
Enable Programming and Control Operations

For Trident or Tri-GP controllers only. See Set Programming Mode Command on page 603.
Enable Time Synchronization with External Source

See Time Synchronization on page 625.
529
Enable Tricon Node Time Synchronization

For Tricon controllers, the Enable Tricon Node Time Synchronization property enables the
controller to participate in time synchronization across the Peer-to-Peer network as a Triconex
Time Synchronization master or slave node.
The default value is cleared, which means the controller will not synchronize time across the
Peer-to-Peer network. See also Time Synchronization on page 625.
Applies To
Communication
Location
Enable Trident/Tri-GP Node Time Synchronization

For Trident 2.x or Tri-GP controllers, the Enable Trident/Tri-GP Node Time Synchronization
property enables the controller to participate in time synchronization across the Peer-to-Peer
network as a Triconex Time Synchronization master or slave node.
The default value is cleared, which means the controller will not synchronize time across the
Peer-to-Peer network. See also Time Synchronization on page 625.
Applies To
Peer-to-Peer communication, time synchronization
Location
Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > MP Setup >
Enable UCN Test Mode

For Tricon controllers, the Enable UCN Test Mode property specifies whether UCN test mode
is enabled on the Tricon SMM module. The default is cleared.
Applies To
Tricon SMM
Location
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > SMM Setup
530
Appendix A
Enabled Features
The Enabled Features property specifies whether to allow programs, functions, function blocks,
data types, and multiple program to be created in the project. Options include:
Programs
Functions
Function Blocks
Data Types
Multiple Programs
The default is all options are selected, which means all options are enabled.
Applies To
Programs, functions, function blocks, data types, multiple programs
Location
Project menu > Project Options > Language tab
Enhanced Security
The Enhanced Security property sets the project-level security setting to Enhanced. When
selected, Windows and TriStation 1131 user authentications are required to log in.
See also Standard Security on page 618.
Applies To
User security
Location
Project menu > Security > Security dialog box > Security Setting tab
Enlarge Font Size Command

The Enlarge Font Size command increases the size of the font for the entire ST program or
function.
Applies To
Location
Larger Font button

View menu
531
Evaluation Options
The Evaluation Options property specifies how a matrix is evaluated when it includes multiple
intersections between a cause and effect. The evaluation can be based on AND or OR logical
processing. The default is OR.
OR Evaluation
If the matrix is based on an energize-to-trip system, such as a fire suppression system, an OR
evaluation is typically used because the normal state of inputs is False. If one of the inputs
changes to True, the related outputs also change to True.
AND Evaluation
If the matrix is based on a de-energize-to-trip (fail-safe) system, an AND evaluation is typically
used because the normal state of inputs is True. If one of the inputs changes to False, the related
outputs also change to False. This is why it is typically used with systems that are designed to
be fail-safe.
Applies To
CEM programs
Location
Exactly Once
The Exactly Once setting indicates that each function block instance should be executed exactly
once per scan because the function block contains internal data that must be updated exactly
once per scan.
Applies To
Library and user-defined function blocks
Location
Document Properties > Usage tab
532
Appendix A
Exit Command
The Exit command closes the current project and quits the TriStation 1131 application.
Applies To
Project
Location
Edit menu
Expand Macros
The Expand Macros property specifies whether the values or the name of the macro displays. If
selected, the value displays. For example, the macro %DATE_CREATED displays the month,
day, and year when the project was created. The default is cleared, which means the name, not
the value, of the macro is displayed.
Applies To
Location
Export Command
The Export command specifies a database or text file to export points to. If the file is to be
imported back to TriStation 1131, the filename must be eight characters or less.
Applies To
Tagnames
Location
Right-click the Tagname Declarations folder
Export (TCM or Trident 2.x/Tri-GP CM Configuration) Command

In the TCM Setup or Trident 2.x/Tri-GP CM Setup dialog box, the Export command exports the
TCM or CM configuration to an XML file. Does not apply to model 4351/4352 TCMs, or Trident
1.x CMs. See also Import (TCM or Trident 2.x/Tri-GP CM Configuration) Command on
page 544.
Applies To
TCM configuration
533
Locations
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A or TCM/B Setup
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup
Trident 2.x or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup
Export Destination
The Export Destination property specifies the destination to use when exporting a report file.
Settings include Disk file and Microsoft Mail. The default is Disk file.
Applies To
Reports
Location
Export Report button on Project tree > Reports toolbar
Export Format
The Export Format property specifies the format to use when exporting a report file. Formats
include:
Acrobat Format (PDF)
Excel 8.0 (XLS) (Extended)
Character-separated values
Paginated Text
Comma-separated values (CSV)
Rich Text (Exact) Format
Excel 5.0 (XLS)
Tab-separated text
Tab-separated values
Excel 7.0 (XLS)
Text
Word for Windows document
Excel 8.0 (XLS)
XML
The default is PDF.
Applies To
Reports
Location
534
Appendix A
Export Report Command

The Export Report command exports the viewed report to a file format and destination you
specify.
Applies To
Reports
Location
False Color
See Monitor Display Options on page 564.
False State Name

Fatal Severity
See System Events Severity on page 621.
FBD Editor Options

The FBD Editor options include:
Double Space Function (Block) Terminals by Default
Applies To
Location
535
Field Power
For Trident or Tri-GP controllers, the Field Power property specifies whether field power is
connected to the Pulse Input Baseplate for use by the field sensors. The default is cleared, which
means that field power is absent.
Setting
Description
Field Power Absent
Select if field power is not connected to the PI Baseplate. This setting is

typically chosen if all the field sensors are passive.
Field Power Present
Select if field power is connected to the PI Baseplate. This setting is typically

chosen if some or all the sensors are active.
Applies To
Trident or Tri-GP Pulse Input or Enhanced Pulse Input Setup
Location
Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > PI or EPI Setup
Field Power Monitoring

For Tricon controllers, the Field Power Monitoring property specifies whether the module
should monitor the 24V field power (also known as loop power) at the external termination
panel. When field power monitoring is on, the module will report when field power at the term
panel goes in or out of range.
Available only with the model 3720 and 3721 Analog Input Modules. Applicable only if you are
using a term panel that passes field power to the module. The default is Off.
If you are not using a term panel that passes field power to the module, you must select Off. If
you select On, and the term panel does not support field power monitoring, you will see Field
Power faults on the module.
Applies To
AI Modules
Location
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > Single-Ended and Differential
AI Setup
536
Appendix A
Find In Application Command

The Find In Application command finds the specified text by searching through the entire
application (project). Click the Options button to further narrow the search.
Applies To
Application elements
Location
Edit menu
Find Text Command

The Find Text command finds the specified text in the current program, function, or function
block. Click the Options button to narrow the search. If you select items on a sheet first, this
command will search for the specified text only in the selected items.
Applies To
Location
Edit menu
Find Text Options

The Find Text Options dialog box allows you to
narrow the search for text on a specific element
or in an application.
Applies To
Locations
Find Text button

View menu
537
Formatted Name
The Formatted Name property specifies a pattern to use when naming variables or tagnames.
The pattern includes:
Text: The text used as the base for the name. Should be 25 characters or less, to ensure
you do not exceed the 31-character limit on tagname and variable names.
Macro: The numbering scheme to use as an increment.

For theater numbering (A to Z, and AA to ZZ), use %A.
For normal numbering, (0-nnn), use %0.
For example, ALARM_%0 would result in names of ALARM_1 through ALARM_nnn.

ALARM_%A would result in ALARM_A ... ALARM_Z, depending on the start and increment
value, and the number of variables.
Applies To
Comments and variables in user documents
Locations
Item Properties > Auto Name > Auto Name button

Tools menu > Auto Name Selected Items
Application tree > Tagname Declarations > right-click, select New Tagnames
Font Size
The Font Size property specifies the size of the font displayed for Structured Text code.
Applies To
ST Language
Location
FP Ordering
The FP Ordering property specifies which 16-bit section of a 32-bit floating point number is read
first.
High 16 Bits First: the 16 most significant bits of the floating point number (the first 16)
are read first.
Low 16 Bits First: the 16 least significant bits of the floating point number (the last 16)
are read first.
The default value is Low 16 Bits First.
538
Appendix A
Note
On Trident 2.x or Tri-GP controllers only, if you select Modbus Master as the
communication protocol, this property is automatically set to High 16 Bits First and
cannot be changed.
Applies To
Locations
Ports and Modbus TCP tabs
Setup > Serial Ports and Modbus TCP tabs
and Modbus TCP tabs
Trident v2.x or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup
> Serial Ports and Modbus TCP tabs
Function Variables
See Default Macros or Text on page 506.
Full Name
The Full Name property specifies the name of the user.
Applies To
User Security
Location
Project menu > Security > Users tab > Modify button
Function Block Command

The Function Block command allows you to add multiple function blocks at the same time to a
program. If a function block has not been selected, a dialog box allows you to select the function
block.
Applies To
Programs
Locations
Function Block button

Tools menu > Select Tool > Function Blocks
539
General Monitor Colors

The General Monitor Colors property specifies the colors to display for the value of BOOL
variables and wires. The default for True is red. The default for False is green.
Applies To
Tagnames
Location
Project menu > Project Options > Monitor Colors tab
Global Positioning System Installed

For Tricon controllers, the Global Positioning System Installed property specifies whether a GPS
interface is installed. The default is cleared, which means GPS is not installed.
Applies To
Tricon communication, Time Synchronization
Location
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration Panel > NCM Setup
Go To Cell Command
The Go To Cell command allows you to go to a specific row and column in the matrix.
Applies To
CEM programs
Location
Application tree > User Documents > Programs > open a CEM program > Edit menu
Group 1 and Group 2

The Group 1 and Group 2 properties specify group names to use for tagnames. Group names
allow you to categorize tagnames by a name you define. Group 2 is subordinate to group 1. All
the tagnames in a group must be of the same data type. The name can be a maximum of 63
characters.
Applies To
Tagnames
Location
Tagname Declarations > Declaration tab
540
Appendix A
Halt Command
The Halt command stops the execution of an application in the controller or Emulator. In Halt
mode, tagnames retain the values they had in the scan during which the application was halted.
For Tricon controllers, the Halt command is used. For Trident or Tri-GP controllers, the Halt
command or the SYS_APP_HALT function can be used.
Applies To
Application
Locations
Halt button
Handshake
The Handshake property specifies whether to use signals to establish a valid connection. With
hardware handshake, a separate wire sends a signal when the receiving device is ready to
receive the signal, which ensures that a device transmits data only when the other device is
ready to receive it.
On the Tricon EICM, the switch settings determine whether handshaking is allowed.
On the Tricon TCM, Trident 2.x CM, or Tri-GP CM, the setting is configured on the
Serial Ports tab.
On the Trident 1.x CM, the setting of the Transceiver Mode property determines
whether hardware handshake is valid.
The default is None, which means hardware handshake is not used. Settings include:
Setting
Description
Hardware
Select for:
Any 2-wire configuration (required)
A multi-point configuration that uses the RS-485 transceiver mode (required)
A point-to-point configuration that uses an external modem with RS-232
transceiver mode (optional)
None
Select for configurations that do not allow or require Hardware Handshake.
Used with RS-232 Transceiver Mode

With the Handshake property set to Hardware, the Trident or Tri-GP CM asserts the Request to
Send (RTS) signal when it has a message to transmit. The CM begins transmission when it
receives a Clear to Send (CTS) signal from the Modbus master. The Trident or Tri-GP CM
ignores all characters unless the Modbus master asserts the Data Carrier Detect (DCD) signal.
This settings allows the Modbus master to use half-duplex modems.
With the Handshake property set to None (typically for point-to-point connections), the Trident
or Tri-GP CM asserts RTS at all times and ignores CTS and DCD. In other words, the CM
541
transmits characters even if the receiving device is not ready. This could result in an overrun
state, and the characters would have to be re-transmitted.
Used with RS-485 Transceiver Mode

With the Handshake property set to Hardware, the Trident or Tri-GP CM enables its RS-485
transmit driver only when it is sending data. Use this setting for all single-pair networks and for
slave ports in two-pair, multi-point networks.
With the Handshake property set to None, the Trident or Tri-GP CM enables its RS-485 transmit
driver at all times. Use this setting for a Modbus slave port in a two-pair, point-to-point
network.
Applies To
Communication
Locations
Ports tab
tab
Serial Ports tab
Serial Ports tab
Hardware Allocation Command

The Hardware Allocation command displays the Hardware Allocation screen in the Controller
tree.
Applies To
Configuration
Locations
Hardware Allocation button

View menu
542
Appendix A
Hide Causes Unrelated to Effects Command

The Hide Causes Unrelated to Effects command hides causes on a CEM program that are not
related to an effect.
Applies To
CEM programs
Location
View menu
Hide Effects Unrelated to Causes Command

The Hide Effects Unrelated to Causes command hides effects on a CEM program that are not
related to a cause.
Applies To
CEM programs
Location
View menu
Highest TCP Port Number

The Highest TCP Port Number property specifies the highest port number the TCM, Trident 2.x
CM, or Tri-GP CM can use for outgoing TCP connections. Allows the TCM or CM to operate
behind a firewall that has implemented port restrictions.
For most networks, the default setting should be sufficient.
Applicable only for:
Modbus/TCP and OPC ports on TCMs installed in Tricon v10.3 and later systems.
Modbus/TCP ports on CMs installed in Trident 2.x or Tri-GP systems.
Note
If this setting is misconfigured, Modbus TCP and/or OPC will be unable to connect. If
this occurs, reset the value to the default setting to fix the problem and re-enable Modbus
TCP and/or OPC. If you need to use this feature, please contact Invensys Technical
Support for assistance with configuring this setting.
Applies To
Communication
Locations
Network tab
543
Setup > Network tab
Network tab
Horizontal Network Divider Command

The Horizontal Network Divider command allows you to place a horizontal divider on a logic
sheet to divide networks.
Applies To
FBD logic sheets
Locations
Horizontal Network Divider button

Tools menu > Select Tool
IDLE State
IDLE is an application state which indicates that the TriStation PC is connected to a controller
or the Emulator, but the application has not been downloaded.
Applies To
Application
Location
Controller tree > Controller or Emulator Panel > Title bar
Import Command
The Import command provides a wizard that allows you to specify the fields to import, and how
to link them to tagname properties.
Applies To
Tagnames
Location
Right-click the Tagname Declarations folder
544
Appendix A
Import (TCM or Trident 2.x/Tri-GP CM Configuration) Command

In the TCM Setup or Trident 2.x CM Setup dialog box, the Import command imports all settings
from a previously exported TCM or CM configuration XML file. Does not apply to model
4351/4352 TCMs, or Trident 1.x CMs.
Applies To
TCM, Trident 2.x CM, or Tri-GP CM configuration
Locations
Include Monitor Value in Annotation

The Include Monitor Value in Annotation property specifies whether to display the value of the
variable in the annotation. The default is cleared, which means the value is not displayed in the
annotation.
Applies To
Variables
Location
Item Properties > Annotation tab
Info Severity
Initial Value
The Initial Value property specifies the beginning value assigned to a variable on the first scan
of the application. The value can be changed with a Download Changes command, however,
the value is not used until a first scan which is not issued with the Download Changes command.
A first scan occurs under any of these conditions:
The Download All and the Run command are issued
The Halt command and the Run command are issued
The application is restarted after a power failure
To identify whether a first scan has occurred, use the TR_SCAN_STATUS (Tricon) or
SYS_SYSTEM_STATUS (Trident/Tri-GP) function blocks.
545
In programs, only local variables are assigned an initial value. In functions and function blocks,
all variables are assigned an initial value. The value is either the value declared for the property
or zero. If you have selected a user-defined Data Type for a local variable, you cannot assign an
initial value to the variable.
Applies To
Tagnames, Variables
Location
Application tree > Tagname Declarations > Declaration tab
Insert Columns Command

The Insert Columns command displays a dialog box that allows you to insert columns in a CEM
program.
Applies To
CEM programs
Locations
Insert Columns button

Edit menu
Insert From File Command

The Insert From File command displays an Open dialog box that allows you to select a file to be
inserted in the ST program or function.
Applies To
Location
Edit menu
Insert Input Variable Command

The Insert Input Variable command inserts an input variable to a logic sheet.
Applies To
CEM, FBD, and LD functions
Locations
Input Variable Tool button

Edit menu
546
Appendix A
Insert In/Out Variable Command

The Insert In/Out Variable command inserts an in/out variable to a logic sheet. In Structured
Text language, VAR IN/OUT are added to the code, not inserted by a command.
Applies To
FBD and ST functions and function blocks
Locations
In/Out Variable Tool button

Edit menu
Insert Local Variable Command

The Insert Local Variable command inserts a local variable to a logic sheet.
Applies To
CEM, FBD, and LD programs
Locations
Local Variable Tool button

Edit menu
Insert Output Variable Command

The Insert Output Variable command inserts an input variable to a logic sheet.
Applies To
FBD and LD functions
Locations
Input Variable Tool button

Edit menu
547
Insert Module Command

The Insert Module command displays a dialog box that allows you to select a module to add to
the configuration.
Applies To
Hardware configuration
Locations
Insert Module button (on Trident or Tri-GP Configuration toolbar)

Tricon Configuration tree > Hardware Allocation > double-click slot
Trident or Tri-GP Configuration tree > Hardware Allocation > MP/IOP1 > Tools menu
Insert Rows Command

The Insert Rows command displays a dialog box that allows you to insert rows in a CEM
program.
Applies To
CEM programs
Locations
Insert Rows button

Edit menu
Insert Sheet Command

The Insert Sheet command adds a new logic sheet before the sheet currently being viewed. You
must enter a title for the new sheet before it will be added.
Applies To
Logic sheets
Location
Sheets menu
548
Appendix A
Insert Tagname Declaration Command

The Insert Tagname Declaration command inserts a tagname declaration to the program.
Applies To
FBD and LD programs
Locations
Tagname Declaration Tool button

Edit menu
Internal State
The Internal State setting means each function block instance may have an internal state which
is remembered from one execution to the next and from one scan to the next. There are no
restrictions on usage of a function block labeled internal state; that is, you can execute the
function block instance more than once per scan, or you can skip scans.
Applies To
Location
Intersection Functions On by Default

The Intersection Functions On by Default property specifies whether a function column is
automatically included in the intersection when a matrix is created. The default is cleared.
Applies To
CEM programs
Location
Invert Input
The Invert Input property specifies whether to invert the value of a BOOL input
that is connected to a function or function block. If selected, the value for the
input is changed to the opposite value when the function or function block is
executed. For example, if the value is True it is changed to False. The default is
cleared, which means the input value is not inverted.
549
When an input is inverted, a small circle (referred to as a fiducial) is displayed on the input
terminal of the function.
Applies To
BOOL input points
Location
Function and function blocks
Invert Input/Output
The Invert Input/Output property specifies whether to invert the value of a
BOOL input/output that is connected to a function block. If selected, the value
for the input/output is changed to the opposite value when the function block
is executed. For example, if the value is True it is changed to False. The default
is cleared, which means the input value is not inverted.
When an input/output is inverted, a small circle (referred to as a fiducial) is
displayed on the input terminal of the function.
Applies To
BOOL input points
Location
Function blocks
Invert Output
The Invert Output property specifies whether to invert the value of a BOOL
output that is connected to a function or function block. If selected, the value for
the output is changed to the opposite value when the function is executed. For
example, if the value is True it is changed to False. The default is cleared, which
means the output value is not inverted.
When an output is inverted, a small circle (referred to as a fiducial) is displayed
on the output terminal of the function.
Applies To
BOOL output points
Location
550
Appendix A
IP Address
The IP Address property specifies a unique 32-bit address of a computer attached to a network.
A network uses IP addresses to route messages to their destinations.
An IP address is formatted as four numbers separated by periods, where each number can be
zero to 255. An example is 1.160.10.240.
Every client and server in a network requires an IP address, which is either permanently or
dynamically assigned at startup. The defaults are as follows:
ACM/NCM: 192.168.1.<node number>
TCM: 192.168.0.<node number> for NET 1; 192.168.1.<node number> for NET 2
Trident 1.x: 0.0.0.0
Trident 2.x or Tri-GP: 192.168.255.<node number> for Left MP network port only; 0.0.0.0
for all other MP and CM network ports
Note
The highest and lowest IP addresses in a subnet (addresses where the last number is 0
or 255, such as 192.168.1.255) are reserved for broadcast messaging and cannot be used
as a valid IP address for a Triconex communication module.
Applies To
Communication
Locations
Controller tree > Configuration > Communication

Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > ACM or NCM Setup
Network, Peer-to-Peer, Modbus TCP, and Printer tabs
Setup > Network, Peer-to-Peer, Modbus TCP, and Printer tabs
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Network,
Peer-to-Peer, Modbus TCP, and Printer tabs
Network or Printer tab
Network Ports tab
IP Subnet Mask
The IP Subnet Mask property specifies a binary pattern that is matched with the IP address to
turn part of the host ID address field into a field for subnets.
For Tricon ACM and TCM, see your network administrator.
For Tricon NCM, do not change the default setting which is eight zeroes.
For Trident or Tri-GP CM, see your network administrator.
551
Applies To
Communication
Locations
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > ACM and NCM Setup
Network and Routing tab
Setup > Network and Routing tab
and Routing tab
Network and Routing tab
Item Properties Command

The Item Properties command displays an Item Properties dialog box, which varies depending
on the item currently selected.
Applies To
Chassis, modules, tagnames, variables
Locations
Item Properties button

View menu
Language
The Language property specifies the language to be used for the program, function, function
block, or data type. Settings include:
Function Block Diagram
Ladder Diagram
Structured Text
Cause Effect Matrix
Applies To
Programs, functions, function blocks, and data types
Location
Project menu > New Document
552
Appendix A
LD Editor Options
The LD Editor Options include:
Compiler Warning When Right Power Rail is Missing on page 498
Double Space Function (Block) Terminals by Default on page 517
Left-Handed Link Tool on page 552
Left-Handed Link Tool

The Left-Handed Link Tool specifies whether to have the link tool configured for left-handed
use for LD programs.
The default is cleared, which means the right-handed link tool is used.
Applies To
Ladder Diagrams
Location
Tools menu > TriStation 1131 Options > LD Editor tab

The Left-Handed Wire Tool specifies whether to have the wire tool configured for left-handed
use for FBD programs.
The default is cleared, which means the right-handed tool is used.
Applies To
Project
Location
Line Width
The Line Width property specifies the number of characters per line. The default is 80.
Applies To
Project
Locations
Printer tab
Setup > Printer tab
553
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Printer tab
Printer tab
Link Command
The Link command draws a horizontal or vertical link between power rails and logic elements.
The direction of the link determines how it is evaluated in the logic.
Link Direction
Description
Horizontal
Transmits the state of the element on its immediate left to the element on its
immediate right. The state represents the Inclusive OR of the On states of the
horizontal links on its left side.
Vertical
Intersects one or more horizontal link elements on each side. The state is copied to
all attached horizontal links on its right, but is not copied to attached horizontal
links on its left.
Is Off if the states of all attached horizontal links to its left are Off.
Is On if the state of one or more attached horizontal links to its left is On.
Applies To
LD programs
Locations
Link Tool button

List Disabled Points Command

The List Disabled Points command displays a list of all disabled points on a controller, so that
individual points can be selected and enabled. To use this command, the application must be
running on the controller.
Applies To
Tagnames
Location
554
Appendix A
Loc
The Loc property displays the coordinates for the location of an element in terms of cause row
and effect column in a CEM program. For example, C01 identifies cause 1 and C02E02 identifies
the intersection of cause 2 and effect 2.
Applies To
CEM programs
Location
Application tree > open a CEM program > Variable Detail Table
Location
The Location property specifies the location of the tagname based on the position in the Tricon
chassis, Trident system, or Tri-GP system. The address is a three-part number in this format:
CC.SS.PP
Identifier
Description
CC
Stands for Tricon chassis, or Trident/Tri-GP I/O Processor (IOP).
SS
Stands for slot (Tricon), or baseplate (Trident/Tri-GP).
PP
Stands for point number.
For example, 01.02.23 is the address for point 23, on the module in slot 2, in chassis 1.
Applies To
Tagnames
Locations
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > DO and PI Setup
Log On As New User Command

The Log On As New User command allows you to save and close the current project and log on
as a different user. You are prompted on whether to save project elements.
Applies To
Project
Location
File menu
555
Logon Name
The Logon Name property specifies the identifier used to log on to the TriStation 1131 project.
Applies To
User access
Location
Project menu > Security > Users tab > New or Modify button
Lowest TCP Port Number

The Lowest TCP Port Number property specifies the lowest port number the TCM, Trident 2.x
CM, or Tri-GP CM can use for outgoing TCP connections. Allows the TCM or CM to operate
behind a firewall that has implemented port restrictions. For most networks, the default setting
should be sufficient. Applicable only for:
Modbus/TCP and OPC ports on TCMs installed in Tricon v10.3 and later systems.
Modbus/TCP ports on CMs installed in Trident 2.x or Tri-GP systems.
Note
If this setting is misconfigured, Modbus TCP and/or OPC will be unable to connect. If
this occurs, reset the value to the default setting to fix the problem and re-enable Modbus
TCP and/or OPC. If you need to use this feature, please contact Invensys Technical
Support for assistance with configuring this setting.
Applies To
Communication
Locations
Setup > Network tab
Network tab
Network tab
Macros Command
The Macros command displays macros that can be included in an annotation or comment. You
can specify whether to display macros available by Project, Document, or Sheet.
To copy, click the macro and press Ctrl+C. To paste, close the Edit Macro dialog box, click in the
Comment area, and press Ctrl+V.
Applies To
Comments and variables
556
Appendix A
Locations
Document, Project, and Sheets menus

Annotation tab (tagnames and variables)
Comments tab (comments)
Main Processor Connection Setup

For Trident 1.x, the Main Processor Connection Setup property specifies which MP is connected
to the TriStation PC. The options are Left, Middle, and Right. The default is left.
Applies To
TriStation communication
Location
Trident 1.x Controller tree > Configuration > TriStation Communication
Major Severity
Manage Sheets Command

The Manage Sheets command displays a screen that allows you to manage logic sheets.
These commands are on the Sheets Manager screen:
Command
Action
Append
Adds a new sheet after an existing sheet.
Insert
Adds a new sheet before an existing sheet
Delete
Delete the selected sheet.
Title
Allows you to edit the title of the current sheet. The sheet title is displayed
in the title block, the window caption bar and the Window Menu list.
Go To
Click a sheet to be displayed, and then click Go To.
Applies To
Logic sheets
Location
Sheets menu
557
Manage Views Command

The Manage Views command allows you to save, load, and remove views of a CEM program.
These commands are on the View Manager screen.
Command
Action
Load
Click a view and click Load to have it displayed.
Save
Click to save the view currently displayed.
Remove
Click a view and click Remove to delete the view from the list.
Restore All Defaults
Click to restore the current view to show all causes and effects.
Close
Click to close the View Manager screen.
Cancel
Click to cancel the action.
Applies To
CEM programs
Location
View menu
Management Port Number

The Management Port Number property identifies the UDP port number used for the Enhanced
Diagnostic Monitors connection to the TCM, Trident 2.x CM, or Tri-GP CM communication
status information. The default number is 1510. Cannot be the same as the TriStation or TSAA
port numbers.
This must be the same value as the Management UDP Port Number property in the Enhanced
Diagnostic Monitors Network Configuration dialog box. For more information, see the
Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor Users Guide.
Applies To
Communication
Locations
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC or TCM/B
Setup > Protocols tab
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A Setup > Network
tab
Protocols tab
558
Appendix A
Master Logical Port

The Master Logical Port property specifies the logical port number that the TriStation 1131
application uses with Modbus Master Functions to access the port. Must be unique for each
TCM, Trident 2.x CM, or Tri-GP CM installed in a system. This property is only available for
Modbus Master.
For TCM, the valid range is 1-32. For Trident 2.x or Tri-GP CM, the valid range is 1-15.
Applies To
Modbus Communication
Location
Modbus TCP and Serial Ports tabs
Setup > Modbus TCP and Serial Ports tabs
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Modbus
TCP and Serial Ports tabs
Modbus TCP and Serial Ports tab
Max Field
For Trident or Tri-GP controllers, the Max Field property specifies the maximum range for
power, based on volts on the Pulse Input or Enhanced Pulse Input Module. The default is 33
volts.
Applies To
Trident or Tri-GP Pulse Input or Enhanced Pulse Input Module
Location

The Maximum Number of Peer-to-Peer Receives property specifies the maximum number of
Receive function blocks for each TriStation 1131 application.
To conserve memory and minimize scan time, set this number as low as possible. However, if
you plan to add Receive function blocks in the future, specify the anticipated maximum to avoid
having to perform a Download All later.
This number set for Receive and Send does not have to be the same. The default is 0.
559
Applies To
Location
Application tree > Implementation > Peer-to-Peer Configuration
Maximum Number of Peer-to-Peer Sends

The Maximum Number of Peer-to-Peer Sends property specifies the maximum number of Send
function blocks for each TriStation 1131 application. To conserve memory and minimize scan
time, set this number as low as possible. However, if you plan to add Send function blocks in
the future, specify the anticipated maximum to avoid having to perform a Download All later.
The number set for Send and Receive does not have to be the same. The default is 0.
Applies To
Location
Application tree > Implementation > Peer-to-Peer Configuration
Maximum RPM
The Maximum RPM property specifies the revolutions per minute for the device attached to the
Pulse Input Module. The number must be a positive floating point value. The default is 30,000.
Applies To
Tricon Pulse Input Module
Location
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > Pulse Input Setup
Maximum Speed
The Maximum Speed property specifies the speed for the device attached to the Pulse Input
Module. The number must be a positive floating point value. The default is 30,000.
Applies To
Tricon Pulse Input Module
Location
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > Pulse Input Setup
560
Appendix A
Maximum Value (Max Span)

The Maximum Value (Max Span) value identifies the maximum value for the range to scale a
REAL tagname to an integer; must be greater than the minimum value.
The maximum value and default value is 32,767. (For Honeywell, the maximum value is 9,999.)
Applies To
Tagnames with REAL data types
Location
Application tree > Tagname Declarations > Scaling tab
Memory Allocation Command

The Memory Allocation command displays the Memory Allocation screen in the Controller
tree.
Applies To
Configuration
Locations
Memory Allocation button

View menu
Message Options Command

The Message Options command allows you to
specify the type of messages to be sent between the
TriStation PC and controller, and is generally used
to troubleshoot problems.
The default for all options is cleared.
Applies To
Troubleshooting problems
Location
Configuration tree > Controller Panel > Tools
menu > Message Options
561
Message View Command

The Message View button displays a message area at the bottom of the TriStation 1131 screen.
Tabs in the area allow you to display information for Application, Controller, Find Results, and
Compare Results. You can toggle the Workspace View On or Off.
Applies To
View
Locations
Message View button

View menu > Messages
Min Field
For Trident or Tri-GP controllers, the Min Field property specifies the minimum range for
power, based on volts for the Pulse Input or Enhanced Pulse Input Module. The default is 0
volts.
Applies To
Location
562
Appendix A
Minimum Value (Min Span)

The Minimum Value (Min Span) value identifies the minimum value for the range used to scale
a REAL tagname to an integer; must be less than the maximum value. The minimum value and
default value is 32,767. (For Honeywell, the minimum value is 0.)
Applies To
Location
Minor Severity
Modbus (Minimum and Maximum) Range

The Modbus (Minimum and Maximum) Range property specifies the minimum and maximum
limits of values communicated via serial ports. This property is used with the Minimum Value
(Min Span) and Maximum Value (Max Span) to communicate REAL values using Modbus or
Honeywell protocol.
The minimum value is -32,768; the default is 0.
The maximum value is 32,767; the default is 32,767.
For Honeywell, the minimum is 0; the maximum is 9,999.
Applies To
Communication
Locations
Ports tab
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation >TCM/A or TCM/B
tab
Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > MP and CM
563

The Modbus Slave Address property specifies the number of the Modbus slave device which is
connected to the Modbus master. This property is only available if using Modbus slave, and
master/slave protocols. If using Modbus master protocol, the address of the slave is specified
in the Modbus Read and Write function blocks.
The address can be from 1 to 247; the default is 1.
Applies To
Communication
Locations
Ports tab
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation >TCM/A or TCM/B
tab
Mode
The Mode property specifies the type of communication, which can support one or more
communication protocols.
Table 53
Communication Modes
Modes
Supported Protocols
Open Network
TriStation, TSAA, OPC, DDE, and printer protocol
Peer-to-Peer
Peer-to-Peer and Time Synchronization
TriStation
TriStation
Applies To
Communication
Locations
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > NCM Setup
Trident 1.x Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > MP and CM Setup >
Network tab
Network tab
564
Appendix A
Model
The Model property specifies the model of Main Processor installed in the Tricon, Trident, or
Tri-GP controller that the project will be downloaded to.
For Tricon system versions 9.5.x, 9.51.x, or 9.52.x, select 3006/N, 3007.
For Tricon system versions 9.6 and later, select 3008.
For Trident system versions 1.2 and later, select 3101.
For Tri-GP system versions 2.x and later, select 3101S2.
Note
TriStation 1131 v4.6 does not support Tricon system versions v9.4.x and earlier, or
Trident system versions v1.1 and earlier. For a list of TriStation 1131 versions compatible
with your controller, see the applicable Tricon, Trident, or Tri-GP Product Release Notice
(available on the Invensys Global Customer Support web site).
See also Target System Version on page 622.
Applies To
Project
Locations
File menu > New Project or > Select Main Processor

File menu > Open Project > Select Main Processor
Tricon, Trident, or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation >
Replace MPs
Modify Banner Message Command

The Modify Banner Message command allows you to customize the security banner that
appears each time you start TriStation 1131.
Applies To
User security
Location
Edit menu
Monitor Display Options

The Monitor Display Options include properties that specify the names and colors for BOOL
variables. The display options can help an operator identify alarm conditions at a glance.
These options are used only when the tagname is displayed in SOE Recorder. For more
information, see the Triconex SOE Recorder Users Guide.
Properties include:
565
Property
Description
True State Name
Specifies the name to display for a variable in the true state.

The default is TRUE.
False State Name
Specifies the name to display for a variable in the false state.

The default is FALSE.
True Color
Determines the color used to display the true state of a variable.

The default is red.
False Color
Determines the color used to display the false state of a variable.

The default is Green.
Applies To
BOOL values
Location
Application tree > Tagname Declarations > Item Properties > Display tab
Monitor Value on by Default

The Monitor Value on by Default property specifies whether to display the value of the variable
when the program or function block is executed. The default is cleared, which means the
monitor does not display the value of the variable.
Applies To
Variables
Location
Move Behind Logic Elements

The Move Behind Logic Elements property moves a selected comment box behind a logic
element, which means the element is considered part of the comment and not executed with the
logic. The default is cleared, which means the element is not enclosed in a comment.
Applies To
Location
566
Appendix A
Multicast IP Address
See TSAA Multicast IP Address on page 631.
Name
The Name property specifies an identifier or description for an element.
Feature
Description
Restrictions
The name must begin with an alpha character (A to Z) and can include up to 31
alphanumeric characters (A to Z, and 0 to 9), including the underscore (_) character.
Letters are not case-sensitive.
Version
Numbers
Names of documents include a version number at the end of the name. The number
includes a major number, which is always 1 and a minor number, which changes
when the document is changed, saved, and closed.
Applies To
Variables, Contacts, Coils
Location
Item Properties
Name Order
The Name Order property specifies how automatic naming is applied to the selected variables.
Settings include:
RowsNames are applied vertically, from left to right.
ColumnsNames are applied horizontally, from top to bottom.
Selection orderNames are applied based on the order in which they were selected.
Applies To
Locations

Network
The Network property specifies the TCM, Trident 2.x CM, or Tri-GP CM network portNET 1
or NET 2 that the selected external device is connected to.
567
Applies To
Communication
Locations
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup
New Document Command

The New Document command opens a dialog box that allows you to specify the type of
document to create and the type of language to use.
Applies To
Application
Location
Project menu
New Project Command

The New Project command creates a new project.
Applies To
Project
Location
File menu
New Tagname Command

The New Tagname command opens a screen that allows you to specify a new tagname.
Applies To
Tagnames
Locations
Project menu
Application tree > right-click Tagname Declarations
568
Appendix A
New Tagnames Command

The New Tagnames command opens a screen that allows you to create multiple tagnames based
on a naming scheme. Properties include:
Formatted Name on page 537
Start Value and Increment on page 618
Name Order on page 566
Applies To
Tagnames
Locations
Project menu
Application tree > right-click Tagname Declarations
NIC Index
The NIC Index property specifies the index position of the network interface card in the
TriStation PC.
To determine the NIC index:

1
Open the Control Panel and click the System icon.
On the Hardware tab, click Device Manager, and then expand the Network Adapters
tree.
Starting with zero, count down the list of adapter cards to the one that is connected to
the TriStation PC. For example, if your adapter card is fifth in the list, its index position
is 4.
Applies To
Communication
Location
Trident 1.x Controller tree > Configuration > TriStation Communication
Node Name
The Node Name property specifies the name for a Triconex controller, which can be a default
name or a user-defined name. The default names are TRINODE01 through TRINODE31.
Applies To
Communication
569
Location
Node Number
The Node Number property specifies a number for a Triconex controller, which must be the
same as on the switch setting (Tricon) or the address plug (Trident or Tri-GP). The numbers can
be from 1 to 31 for Tricon controllers, or from 1 to 63 for Trident or Tri-GP controllers.
Applies To
Communication
Location
Number of Extended Block

For Tricon controllers, the Number of Extended Block property specifies a pair of HIM blocks
consisting of a base block and a secondary block (which is offset from the six-bit block address
by 32). The default is 4. For more information, see the HIM Users Guide.
Applies To
Tricon HIM
Location
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > HIM Setup
Number of Gear Teeth

For Trident or Tri-GP controllers, the Number of Gear Teeth property specifies the number of
gear teeth that are counted in each revolution for the Pulse Input or Enhanced Pulse Input
Module. The Point Options property must be specified as RPM to enable this property. The
default is 60.
Applies To
Location
570
Appendix A
Number of Inputs
The Number of Inputs property specifies the number of inputs to include with the function.
Only extensible functions, which are functions that can include additional inputs, have this
property.
For more information, see the TriStation 1131 Libraries Reference.
Applies To
Functions
Location
Item Properties > Function tab
Number of Instances
The Number of Instances property specifies how many instances of the Emulator you want
available at any one time.
If this option is set to Multiple, more than one instance of the Emulator can be running at the
same time. If this option is set to Single, only one instance of the Emulator can be running at any
one time.
The default is Single.
Applies To
Emulator
Location
OFFLINE State
The OFFLINE state is an application state which indicates the application is not connected to the
Emulator or to a controller.
Applies To
Application
Location
Controller tree > Controller or Emulator Panel > Title bar
On NET 1 Enable Time Synchronization

See Time Synchronization on page 625
571
On NET 2 Enable Time Synchronization

See Time Synchronization on page 625.
Only Once
The Only Once setting means each instance of a function block should be executed only once
per scan, but does not need to be executed every scan. This means the function block has internal
data that does not need to be updated on every scan, but should not be updated more than once
per scan. For user-defined function blocks, you can specify this setting. For Triconex Library
function blocks, the setting cannot be changed.
Applies To
Location
OPC System Events Severity

Open Document Command

The Open Document command opens an existing document.
Applies To
Application
Location
Project menu
Open Point Alarm Threshold

The Open Point Alarm Threshold property specifies the number of ohms above which values
are alarmed as an open load. This option is only available if the points are supervised. Typical
threshold values are 480 to 3,200 ohms. The available range is 0 to 65,535 ohms. The default is
2,400 ohms. Available only with the model 3625 Digital Output Module.
Applies To
Tricon DO points
Location
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > DO Setup
572
Appendix A
Open Project Command

The Open Project command allows you to specify an existing project to open.
CAUTION
TriStation 1131 projects must always be run from a local drive. Projects
may be saved to a network drive for backup purposes, but you must copy
the project to your local drive before you open it in TriStation 1131.
Applies To
Project
Location
File menu
Operation Type
The Operation Type property specifies whether the security selection is for controller operations
or TriStation 1131 operations. Depending on the selection, different operations are displayed.
Applies To
Project
Location
Project menu > Security command > Privileges tab
Operations
The Operations property specifies TriStation 1131 and controller operations that can be assigned
a security level. These tables describe the operations and default settings for security levels.
Table 54
Controller Operations
Default
Level
Operation
Description
Change point values
Permits use of the Set Value command for variables in the

Controller and Emulator Panels.
Download All
Permits use of the Download All command in the Controller

and Emulator Panels.
Download Changes
Permits use of the Download Changes command in the

Controller and Emulator Panels.
Enable and disable

points
Permits points to be disabled in the Controller Panel.
Change state to
Download All
Permits state to be changed from Download Changes to

Download All.
573
Table 54
Controller Operations (continued)

Default
Level
Operation
Description
Halt and run

mismatched application
Permits use of the Halt, Download All, and Run commands

when the project executing in the controller does not match the
application that is currently open in TriStation 1131.
Halt application
Permits use of the Halt command in the Controller and

Emulator Panels.
Modify configuration
Permits use of the Configuration editor and the Build Element,

Build Configuration, and Rebuild Configuration commands.
Modify Controller Panel
Permits use of the Controller Panel.
Open Configuration
Permits the Configuration editor to be opened.
Open Controller Panel
Permits use of the Controller Panel.
12
Pause and Single Step

application
Permits use of the Pause and Single Step commands in the

Controller or Emulator Panel.
Run Application
Permits use of the Run command in the Controller or Emulator

Panel.
Set Operating
Parameters
Permits the operating parameters to be set.
Open Emulator Panel
Permits use of the Emulator Panel.
13
Table 55
TriStation 1131 Operations

Default
Level
Type
Operation
Description
Elements
Change Access
Attributes
Permits changes to Access Attributes property,

which allows Read Only, Read/Write, or Lock
status.
13
Change Owner
Permits using the Change Owner command to

change the owner of a document.
13
Modify control elements
Permits creating, modifying, and deleting

programs, functions, and function blocks which
are defined for control applications.
15
Modify safety elements
Permits creating, modifying, and deleting

programs, functions, and function blocks which
are defined for safety applications.
15
View elements
Permits viewing of programs, functions, and

function blocks.
19
Export
Permits exporting project documents to a

shared library.
12
Import
Permits importing shared libraries.
12
Libraries
574
Appendix A
Table 55
TriStation 1131 Operations (continued)
Type
Operation
Description
Default
Level
Printing
Print reports
Permits printing of reports.
19
Update report database
Permits use of the Update Data command.
15
Change Project Options
Permits changes to properties in Project

Options.
13
Change state to
Download All
Permits use of Change State to Download All

command.
12
Clear history logs
Permits use of the Clear History command.
12
Add/Modify Users
Permits adding, modifying, and deleting users

if the user has equal or higher privileges than
the selected user.
12
Change level
descriptions
Permits changes to the names associated with

security levels.
12
Change level privileges
Permits changes to the privileges associated

with security levels if the user has equal or
higher privileges than the selected user.
12
Change TriStation
Options
Permits changes to properties in TriStation

Options.
12
Project
Security
Workbench
Applies To
Security
Location
Project menu > Security > Privileges tab
Organize Command
The Organize command allows you to organize the data types, functions, and function blocks
in the TriStation 1131 Libraries in these ways:
Property
Description
By Library
Organizes by the library where the elements are located.
By Type
Organizes by Functions and Data Types. This is the default selection.
By Category
Organizes by the typical usage. For example, Arithmetic, Data Type, Counter,
and so on.
By Name
Organizes alphabetically by name.
Applies To
TriStation 1131 Library data types, functions, and function blocks
575
Location
Application tree > right-click the Library Documents folder
Parity
The Parity property indicates whether to use parity checking, which is a way to detect data
communication errors on the transmitted data. Odd and Even parity counts the number of 1 bits
in a one-byte data item then sets the parity bit (9th bit) to 0 or 1 to result in an Odd or Even total
number of 1 bits. Mark and Space parity (also called high/low parity) set the parity bit to 1 or 0
regardless of the number of 1 bits in the data item.
Settings include:
Property
Description
Odd
Sets the parity bit to 0 or 1 to make the total number of 1 bits odd.
Even
Sets the parity bit to 0 or 1 to make the total number of 1 bits even.
Mark
Sets the parity bit to 1 for each data item.
Space
Sets the parity bit to 0 for each data item.
None
Deletes the parity bit.
The default is Odd.
Applies To
Communication
Locations
Ports tab
tab
Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > Trident MP or
CM Setup > Serial Ports tab
Password
The Password property specifies a code required to access the project or to perform certain
operations in the project.The default is PASSWORD.
Applies To
Security
576
Appendix A
Locations

Project menu > Security command > Users tab > Add or Modify button
Password Required for Connection

The Password Required for Connection property
specifies whether a password is required to
connect to the controller. If selected, you must
enter a password. This setting takes effect after
the application is downloaded to the controller.
The default is cleared, which means a password is
not required.
If selected, a dialog box displays that requires the
password to be entered before the connection can
be attempted.
Applies To
Security
Locations

Paste Command
The Paste command puts the current contents of the clipboard onto the current sheet.
Applies To
Editing
Locations
Paste button
Edit menu
Pause Command
The Pause command pauses the execution of an application in the controller or the Emulator. If
an application is paused, the Run command must be used to resume execution.
Applies To
Application
577
Locations
Pause button
Peer-to-Peer Time Synchronization Enabled

The Peer-to-Peer Time Synchronization Enabled property determines whether the Triconex
Time Synchronization protocol is used to synchronize time with controllers on the network.
Applies to TCM models 4351 and 4352 only.
Applies To
Communication
Location
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Time Sync tab
Permission
The Permission property specifies the level of access to the TCM, Trident 2.x CM, or Tri-GP CM
for the selected client IP address. If the application includes safety-critical outputs, you should
not set this property to Read/Write.
Setting
Description
Deny Access
Prevents all access to resources provided by the TCM or CM. Connections to the
controller are not allowed.
Read
Allows client to connect to the controller and view information provided via the
TCM or CM. Does not allow the client to change any settings or perform certain
commands.
Read/Write
Full access. Allows client to view information provided by the TCM or CM,
change settings, and perform all commands (including Download Changes or
Download All for TriStation 1131). This access level should only be provided to
trusted clients.
CMs.
Applies To
Communication
Locations
List tab
578
Appendix A
Access List tab
Physical Address
The Physical Address property specifies the physical point location on an input or output
module. The address is a three-part number in this format: CC.SS.PP
Identifier
Description
CC
Stands for Tricon chassis, or Trident/Tri-GP I/O Processor (IOP).
SS
Stands for slot (Tricon), or baseplate (Trident/Tri-GP).
PP
Stands for point number.
For example, 01.02.23 is the address for point 23, on the module in slot 2, in chassis 1.
Applies To
Input and output tagnames
Location
Application tree > Tagname Declarations > Item Properties > Point Assignment tab
Pickup Command
The Pickup command picks up all the elements enclosed by the comment box so they are
considered part of the comment and ignored by the compiler.
To pick up, move the comment box so it entirely covers the elements to be captured. Resize the
box if needed. To drop, double-click the comment box, click the Pickup/Drop tab, and click
Drop.
Applies To
Comments
Location
Item Properties > Pickup/Drop tab
Point Assignment
The Point Assignment properties specify whether the point uses an alias, and whether the point
has a physical or local address.
Properties include:
User alias: A number that can be assigned if the point is a Read or Read/Write Alias.
579
Default alias: A number is automatically assigned if the point is a Read or Read/Write

Alias.
No alias: Means the point is input, output, or an unaliased memory point.
Applies To
Tagnames
Location
Tagname References > Item Properties > Point Assignment tab
Point Options
The Point Options properties specify options on a Pulse Input or Enhanced Pulse Input Module.
Settings include:
Maximum RPM on page 559
Maximum Speed on page 559
Number of Gear Teeth on page 569
Scale Factor on page 598
Applies To
Pulse Input or Enhanced Pulse Input Setup
Location
Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > Pulse Input or EPI Setup
Point Type
The Point Type property specifies the type of tagname. Settings include Input, Output, and
Memory.
Applies To
Tagnames
Location
Item Properties > Point Assignment tab
580
Appendix A
Port Selection
The Port Selection property specifies the port to be configured. The default is port 1 or Left.
Table 56
Protocols Available with Specific Ports
Module
Selections
Tricon EICM
Ports 14 and 69: TriStation, Debug, Modbus Slave, Modbus Master,

and Modbus Master Slave.
Ports 5 and 10: Printer.
Tricon TCM
Ports 13 and 6: Modbus Slave RTU, Modbus Slave ASCII, Modbus

Master, and GPS.
Ports 4 and 9: Modbus Slave ASCII, Modbus Slave RTU, Modbus Master,
and TriStation.
Ports 5 and 10: Printer.
Trident MP
Left, Middle, and Right: Modbus Slave RTU.
Tri-GP MP
Left, Middle, and Right: Modbus Slave RTU.
Trident 1.x CM
Ports 13 and 68: Modbus Slave ASCII, Modbus Slave RTU, Modbus
Master, Modbus Master/Slave.
Trident 2.x CM
Ports 1-3: Modbus Slave RTU, Modbus Slave ASCII, Modbus Master.
Port 3: TriStation.
Tri-GP CM
Ports 1-3: Modbus Slave RTU, Modbus Slave ASCII, Modbus Master.
Port 3: TriStation.
Applies To
Communication
Locations
Ports tab
tab
Serial Ports tab
Serial Ports tab
581
Port Write Enabled

The Port Write Enabled property provides a fast and easy way to manage port security if you
dont want to configure an access control list (see Controlling Access to the TCM on page 386).
Select this property to allow writes to the selected port. The default value is cleared, meaning
the port is read-only.
Available for the following:
Modbus TCP and serial protocols on Tricon v10.1 and later systems
Modbus TCP and serial protocols on Trident 2.x or Tri-GP systems
TSAA protocol on Tricon v10.1 and v10.2 systems only.
Note
Projects converted from earlier versions of TriStation 1131 will have the default value
automatically set for this property, so that ports configured for TSAA, Serial Modbus
Slave, and TCP Modbus Slave will be read-only until selected otherwise.
CMs.
Applies To
Communication
Locations
Setup > Serial Ports and Modbus TCP tabs (Tricon v10.3 and later)
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A Setup > Network,
Serial Ports and Modbus TCP tabs (Tricon v10.1 and v10.2 only)
Serial Ports and Modbus TCP tabs
Precision
The Precision property specifies the number of decimals to use with a REAL point that has been
scaled. The default is 0.
Applies To
Location
Application tree > Tagname Declarations > Item Properties > Scaling tab
582
Appendix A
Prevent Restart Following Fatal Error

The Prevent Restart Following Fatal Error property specifies whether the Trident or Tri-GP MPs
should restart automatically after a fatal error occurs.
When this property is selected, if the MP detects a fatal error, it will shut down without a restart
attempt, requiring user intervention to restart the MP. This will cause the controller to go to
either DUAL or SINGLE mode.
Applicable to Trident 2.x or Tri-GP systems only. The default is cleared (the MPs will
automatically restart after a fatal error).
Note
The default restart behavior described above applies to Trident 1.x systems, but cannot
be changed.
Applies To
Trident 2.x or Tri-GP controllers
Location
Previous Sheet Command

The Previous Sheet command displays the previous logic sheet.
Applies To
Logic sheets
Locations
Previous Sheets button

Sheets menu
Print Command
The Print command prints the logic sheet, function block, or report displayed in the current
window.
Applies To
Logic Sheets, Function Blocks, Reports
Locations
Print button
Edit menu
583
Print All Command

The Print All command allows you to print multiple documents at one time. You have the
ability to select which documents you want to print.
Applies To
Logic Sheets, Module Configuration, Library Documents, Functions, Function Blocks, Reports,
Project History, Users, Programs, Tagnames
Location
Edit menu
Print Preview Command

The Print Preview command displays the sheets to be printed.
Applies To
Logic Sheets, Reports
Location
Edit menu
Print Report Command

The Print Report command allows you to print the selected report.
Applies To
Reports
Locations
Print Report button

Edit menu
Printer Number
The Printer Number property specifies the number used in the Printer parameter declared for
the print function blocks in the TriStation 1131 project.
For Trident 1.x, the value must be from 1 to 10.
For the TCM, Trident 2.x CM, or Tri-GP CM, the value must be either 5 or 10.
Applies To
Project
584
Appendix A
Locations
Printer tab
Setup > Printer tab
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation >TCM Setup > Printer tab
Printer tab
Privilege
The Privilege property specifies whether Read or Read/Write access is allowed by external
devices. You should set this property to Read, if the application includes safety-critical outputs.
Setting
Description
Read
An external device cannot write to any point, regardless of the settings for other
properties.
This is the default for Tricon ACM.
Read/Write
Other properties may need to be set to enable write access. See Disable Remote
Changes to Outputs on page 513.
This is the default for Tricon NCM and Trident 1.x CM.
Applies To
Communication
Locations
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > NCM Setup
Trident 1.x Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Network
tab
Program Execution List

The Program Execution List property identifies the programs included in the application.
Programs can be added, deleted, or moved up and down in order.
Applies To
Application
Location
Application tree > Implementation > Execution List
585
Program Command
The Program command allows you to implement or change an application in these ways:
Perform a Download All or Download Changes
Disable points
Change the values of points
For Tricon controllers, the Program command is set by turning the keyswitch to PROGRAM.
For Trident or Tri-GP controllers, the Program command is set with the Set Programming Mode
command in the Controller Panel, or the SYS_SET_APP_LOCK function in a program.
Applies To
Application, controller
Locations
Tricon keyswitch on PROGRAM

Trident or Tri-GP Configuration tree > Controller Panel > Set Programming Mode
command
Trident or Tri-GP Application tree > Programs > SYS_SET_APP_LOCK function
Prohibit Writes
For Tricon controllers, the Prohibit Writes property specifies whether to deny Honeywell
workstations from writing to the application running on the Tricon controller. The default is
cleared, which means Honeywell workstations can write to memory and output tagnames.
Applies To
Tricon HIM Module
Location
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > HIM Setup
Project Description Command

The Project Description command displays information about the project including the file
name and location, current and downloaded version, and controller type.
Applies To
Project
Location
Project menu
586
Appendix A
Project Files
The Project File property specifies the path name for documents including projects and related
files. The default path name and file extension is:

Data\Triconex\TriStation 1131 4.9.0\Projects
Windows Server 2008 and Windows 7: C:\Program Data\Triconex\TriStation 1131

4.9.0\Projects
Applies To
Project
Location
Protocol
The Protocol property specifies the communication protocol used with the port. This table
describes the protocols available with specific communication modules.
Table 57
Communication Module Available Protocols
Protocol
Description
Communication Module
GPS
Controller receives time synchronization via the

Global Positioning System.
Tricon TCM
Modbus Slave
Controller acts as a slave to a Modbus master.
Tricon EICM
Modbus Slave
ASCII
Controller acts as a slave to a Modbus master

with data sent in pairs of ASCII characters.
Tricon TCM, Trident CM,

Tri-GP CM
Modbus Slave
RTU
Controller acts as a slave to a Modbus master

with data sent in 8-bit binary characters.
Tricon TCM, Trident MP

and CM, Tri-GP MP and
CM
Modbus TCP
Slave Net
Controller acts as a slave to a Modbus master on

an open network.
Tricon TCM, Trident 2.x

CM, Tri-GP CM
Modbus Master
Controller acts as a Modbus master.
Tricon EICM, TCM

Trident CM, Tri-GP CM
Modbus TCP
Master
Controller acts as a Modbus master on an open

network.
Tricon TCM, Trident 2.x

CM, Tri-GP CM
Modbus
Master/Slave
Controller acts as a Modbus master or slave.
Tricon EICM, Trident CM,

Tri-GP CM
Peer-to-Peer
Controller communicates with other controllers

on an open network.
Tricon NCM, TCM

TriStation
Controller communicates with a TriStation PC.

The NCM/TCM/Trident 1.x CM communicates
on an open network. The EICM/TCM/Trident
2.x CM/Tri-GP CM connect on a serial port.
Tricon EICM, NCM, TCM

587
Applies To
Communication
Locations
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > EICM and NCM Setup
Setup > Serial Ports and Modbus TCP tabs
and Modbus TCP tabs
Setup
Protocols
The Protocols property specifies the protocol(s) that a selected client can use to access the TCM,
Trident 2.x CM, or Tri-GP CM: TriStation, OPC, and/or TSAA. Configured in the TCMs or
CMs access control list.
The OPC protocol is supported only by model 4353 or 4354 TCMs. Additionally, the TSAA
protocol is supported only on NET 1 for model 4353 and 4354 TCMs.
Does not apply to model 4351/4352 TCMs, or Trident 1.x CMs.
Applies To
Communication
Locations
List tab
Access List tab
Pulses Per Revolution

For Trident or Tri-GP controllers, the Pulses Per Revolution property specifies the number of
pulses per revolution of the measuring shaft for the Pulse Input or Module. The default is 1.
Applies To
Tricon or Tri-GP Pulse Input Module
Location
Tricon or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > Pulse Input Setup
588
Appendix A
Rate Type
The Rate Type property specifies how the Pulse Input or Enhanced Pulse Input Module is to
measure pulse inputs. Settings include:
Speed: Used for pulses measured in seconds, minutes, or hours.(Default)
RPM: Used for pulses measured in the number of revolutions per minute of the shaft
that connects a gear to the rotating equipment.
Applies To
Pulse Input or Enhanced Pulse Input Module
Location
Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > Pulse Input or EPI Setup
Read Only Command

The Read Only command toggles between read only and edit in Structured Text programs and
functions.
Applies To
Locations
Read Only button

View menu
Rebuild Application Command

The Rebuild Application command builds an application by compiling all documents required
by the programs in the execution list, then linking all the object code, library routines, and
configuration information to form an executable application.
Applies To
Application
Location
Project menu
Redo Command
The Redo command reverses the last Undo command. You must use this command before other
editing is done or the changes cannot be redone.
589
Applies To
Programs, functions, and function blocks
Location
Edit menu
Reduce Font Size Command

The Reduce Font Size command reduces the size of the font for the entire ST program or
function.
Applies To
Locations
Reduce Font Size button, or View menu
Redundant Mode
For Tricon controllers, the Redundant Mode property specifies whether there is a redundant
Tricon ACM module in the installation. The default is cleared, which means not redundant.
Applies To
Tricon ACM Module
Location
Refresh Command
The Refresh command replaces the data on a report that is currently displayed with data from
the reports database. If project changes are made, you must first update the report database, and
then click Refresh.
Applies To
Reports
Location
Refresh button on Project tree > Default Reports or User Reports folder
590
Appendix A
Remote Access to Aliased Tagnames

The Remote Access to Aliased Tagnames property specifies whether external devices using the
TSAA client/server protocol can write to output tagnames (points) that have aliases. (Read
access is always allowed for input, memory, and output points.)
This property must be used for DDE communication and can be used for OPC, TSAA, and Peerto-Peer communication.
In addition to setting this property, these properties must be set:
The Disable Remote Changes to Outputs property on the Trident or Tri-GP MP

Operating Parameters screen must be cleared. The default is selected.
The Privilege property must be set to Read/Write on the Trident CM or Tri-GP CM.
Applies To
Tagnames for outputs
Location
Trident or Tri-GP MP > Item Properties > Module tab
Remote Access to All Tagnames

The Remote Access to All Tagnames property specifies whether external devices using the
TSAA client/server protocol have read/write access to all tagnames (points) whether or not
they have aliases. This property can be used for OPC, TSAA, and Peer-to-Peer communication.
In addition to setting this property, these properties must be set:
The Disable Remote Changes to Outputs property on the Trident or Tri-GP MP

Operating Parameters screen must be cleared. The default is selected.
The Privilege property must be set to Read/Write on the Trident CM or Tri-GP CM.
Applies To
Application
Location
Trident or Tri-GP MP > Item Properties > Module tab
591
Remote Mode
The Remote mode enables external (remote) devices to have read/write access to aliases in an
application running on a controller.
For Tricon controllers, Remote mode is set by turning the keyswitch to REMOTE.
For Trident or Tri-GP controllers, Remote mode is set programmatically by enabling

write access with the SYS_SET_REMOTE_WRT_ENBL function block in a program.
The default is not enabled, which means external devices are not allowed to write to aliases.
Applies To
Application, controller, tagnames
Locations
Tricon keyswitch set to REMOTE

Trident or Tri-GP Application tree > Library Documents > Functions
Remove File Command

The Remove File command removes a custom Help file from the TriStation 1131 Help menu. A
maximum of 32 customized HTML Help files (.chm) may be added to the TriStation 1131 Help
menu.
Applies To
Application
Location
Help menu > Options > Add or Remove Custom Help Files
Remove Invalid Items (Red Xd)

The Remove Invalid Items (Red Xd) command removes, from all test sheets, any invalid
elements (each marked with a red X) that may be left over from previous builds or editing.
Applies To
Test sheets in the Emulator and controller
Location
Configuration tree > Controller or Emulator Panel > Tools menu
592
Appendix A
Replace Command
The Replace command searches and replaces specified text in programs, functions, function
blocks, or variable names
If you select items on a sheet first, this
command will search and replace the
specified text only in the selected items.
Applies To
Editing
Locations
Replace Text button

File menu
Resolution Type
The Resolution Type property specifies the resolution for the Tricon Single-Ended and
Differential AI Modules (models 3720 and 3721 only). The Single-Ended AI uses unipolar input.
Types include:
Standard Resolution: Data resolution is 12 bits.
High Resolution: Data resolution is 14 bits.
The default is Standard Resolution.

The value returned is based on the input voltage, the resolution type, and the module type. This
table identifies the ranges and returns.
Table 58
Resolution Type Ranges and Returns
Input
(volts)
Standard Resolution
(Unipolar Input)
High Resolution
(Unipolar Input)
High Resolution
(Bipolar Input)
<-5.3
32767
(out-of-range under)
-32767
-32767
-5.3
32767
-32767
-17366
(under-range)
-5
32767
-32767
-16383
(minimum range)
<0
32767
-32767
0
(minimum range)
0
(minimum range)
0
(minimum range)
4095
(maximum range)
16383
(maximum range)
16383
(maximum range)
593
Table 58
Resolution Type Ranges and Returns (continued)
Input
(volts)
Standard Resolution
(Unipolar Input)
High Resolution
(Unipolar Input)
High Resolution
(Bipolar Input)
5.3
4341
(over-range)
17366
(over-range)
17366
(over-range)
>5.3
32767
(out-of-range over)
32767
(out-of-range over)
32767
(out-of-range over)
Applies To
AI Modules
Location
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > Single-Ended and Differential
AI Setup
Restart on Power Up
For Trident or Tri-GP controllers, the Restart on Power Up property specifies whether the
controller automatically restarts on power up. The default is cleared, which means the controller
is not automatically restarted on power up.
Applies To
Trident or Tri-GP MP
Location
Restore Command
The Restore command returns the previous settings for the item, if the Apply command has not
been used. For example, if you changed the default values for a property such as the Initial
Value, you can go back to the defaults by clicking Restore.
Applies To
Project elements
Location
Item Properties
594
Appendix A
Restore Project Command

The Restore Project command allows you to open a backup file named project_name.BT2. You
can then save the file to a name with a project file extension, such as project_name.PT2.
Applies To
Project
Location
File menu
Restore Project To Last Download Command

The Restore Project To Last Download command restores the project that was last successfully
downloaded to the controller. When a download is successful, a backup file of the project is
automatically created with the major version, minor version, time stamp, and the extension
DWLD. For example, PEER_333_1_4120e077.DWLD.
Applies To
Project
Location
File menu
Retentive
The Retentive property specifies whether the value of a memory point is retained if a power
failure occurs. If selected, when the system is powered up the memory point uses the value it
had prior to the power failure. Only memory points can be specified as retentive. For input and
output points, the value retained after a power failure is either zero or the value set for the Initial
Value property. The default is cleared, which means the value is not retained.
Applies To
Memory points
Location
Application tree > Tagname Declarations > Item Properties > Declaration tab
595
Right Power Rail Command

The Right Power Rail command allows you to place a right power rail on a logic sheet to delimit
the LD network. The right power rail has an undefined status, and can be explicit or implicit.
The left power rail is automatically included when a new logic sheet is created. The first element
in every network must be linked to the left power rail, which is considered On at all times.
To change the height of the rail, double-click the rail and use the + or buttons.
Applies To
LD logic sheets
Locations
Right Power Rail button

Roll Backward or Forward Command

The Roll Backward or Forward command
displays all the project changes made since the
last save, and allows you to roll backward or
forward to a specific change.
After the project is saved, the changes are
incorporated and the listing is cleared.
Applies To
Project
Location
Edit menu
Routing Configuration
The Routing Configuration property displays the Destination IP Address, IP Subnet Mask, and
Default Gateway IP Address for the node.
Applies To
Communication
Locations
Routing tab
Setup > Routing tab
596
Appendix A
Routing tab
Run Command
The Run command executes an application in the controller or Emulator. Programs to be
executed must be included on the Program Execution List.
For Tricon controllers, the Run command is only available when the keyswitch is set to
the RUN or PROGRAM mode. The Run command is unavailable if the keyswitch is set
to STOP or REMOTE.
For Trident or Tri-GP controllers, the Run command is unavailable if the

SYS_APP_HALT function is set to halt execution programmatically.
Applies To
Application, programs
Locations
Run button
RUNNING State
The RUNNING state is an application state which indicates the application is downloaded and
running in the controller or Emulator.
Applies To
Application
Location
Controller tree > Controller or Emulator Panel > Commands menu or Title bar
Save As Command
The Save As command saves a project under a different name or folder.
CAUTION
TriStation 1131 projects must always be saved to a local drive. Projects

may be saved to a server or network drive for backup purposes, but you
must copy the project to your local drive before you open it in TriStation
1131.
Applies To
Project
597
Location
File menu
Save Element Command

The Save Element command saves an open element.
Applies To
Project
Location
Save Element button, or File menu
Save History Command

The Save History command exports the project history log to a text file. Each item includes the
date, element, user, action, and comment for the change.
Applies To
Project
Location
Project menu
Save Implementation
The Save Implementation command saves the changes made to the Implementation area, which
includes the Execution List, SOE Configuration, and Peer-to-Peer Configuration.
Applies To
Project
Location
File menu
Save Project Command

The Save Project command saves an open project.
CAUTION
TriStation 1131 projects must always be saved to a local drive. Projects

may be saved to a server or network drive for backup purposes, but you
must copy the project to your local drive before you open it in TriStation
1131.
598
Appendix A
Applies To
Project
Locations
Save Project button

File menu
Save View Command

The Save View command saves a view of a matrix, which is a display of a selected portion of the
matrix. You can create a view by hiding or showing columns and rows on the matrix, either by
using menu commands or by dragging columns and rows on the matrix. Saving the view allows
you to load it anytime.
Applies To
CEM programs
Location
Application tree > open a CEM program > View menu
Scale Factor
The Scale Factor property specifies how to convert pulse input signals into engineering units.
The default is 1. The number must be a positive real number.
This table shows the correct scale factor to use for converting pulse input signals into seconds,
minutes, and hours.
To Convert
Set Scale to
Pulses per second
0.016667
Pulses per minute
1.000000 (default)
Pulses per hour
60.000000
Speed Measurement
This formula converts speed measurement to different engineering units. The default is pulses
per minute.
Speed =(Pulses /Minute) x Scale
RPM Measurement
This formula scales RPM measurements under special circumstances. For example, the Scale
Factor property can be used to adjust the RPM measurement when the measuring shaft rotates
at a different rate from the output shaft.
Speed =((Pulses /Minute)/Number of Gear Teeth) x Scale
599
Applies To
Pulse Input Configuration
Location
Controller tree > Configuration Panel > Hardware Allocation > Pulse Input Setup
Scan Time
The Scan Time property specifies the requested number of milliseconds for a scan (execution of
the application) on the controller. The number is requested before an application is built. After
the application is built and downloaded, the controller determines an actual scan time range
and uses the specified scan time if it falls within these limits.
CAUTION
When a Download Changes command is issued, the scan time is doubled

for one scan immediately following the command. For example, if the
normal scan time is 100 ms, the scan following a Download Changes
would be 200 ms.
The controller determines a valid range for the scan time based on these operations:
Reads inputs
Executes the application
Processes messages
Writes outputs
If the application is running, the scan time can be set to a number different from the requested
number without downloading the application. To determine what the actual, requested and
surplus scan times are, see the Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor (sold separately).
For Tricon controllers (3006/3007 MP), the maximum scan time is 500 milliseconds.
For Tricon controllers (3008 MP), the maximum scan time is 450 milliseconds.
For Trident or Tri-GP controllers, the maximum scan time is 450 milliseconds.
For all controllers, the default is 200 milliseconds.
Applies To
Application
Location
Application tree > Implementation > Execution List
Search Text Command

The Search Text command allows you to search for text in a report.
600
Appendix A
Applies To
Reports
Location
Search Text button
Security Command
The Security command opens the Security dialog box, which allows user access to be created
and modified.
Applies To
User security
Locations
Security button
Project menu
Security Level
The Security Level property specifies the level of security for the user. Settings include:
Level 01 is the highest security level
Level 10 is the lowest security level
Each level allows access to its own operations and the operations associated with all lower
levels. For example, a user with security level 03 has access to operations for security levels 04,
05, 06, 07, 08, 0,9 and 10.
Applies To
Security
Location
Project menu > Security command > Users tab
Select Function Block Command

The Select Function Block command displays a dialog box that allows you to select a function
block to add to a program.
Applies To
Programs
Locations
Select Function Block Element button
601
Tools menu > Select Tool > Function Block
Select Network Contents Command

The Select Network Contents command selects all the elements in a network for the current
document. You must select at least one element (input, output variable) before using this
command.
Applies To
Editing
Location
Edit menu
Select Sheet Contents Command

The Select Sheet Contents command selects all the elements on the current logic sheet.
Applies To
Editing
Location
Edit menu
Selection Tool
The Selection Tool command changes the cursor to a selection tool, which allows you to select
elements.
Applies To
Logic sheets in user documents, test sheets in Emulator and controller
Locations
Selection Tool button

Serial Port
The Serial Port property specifies the port on the TriStation PC that is connected to the
controller.
Applies To
Communication
602
Appendix A
Location
Controller tree > Configuration tree > TriStation Communication
Set Calendar Clock Command

The Set Calendar Clock command sets the controller clock to the TriStation PC time. Before
using the Set Calendar Clock command, you should ensure the PC is set to the correct local time.
This command changes both the clock time and the time zone on the controller so that it matches
the clock time and time zone set on the TriStation PC.
Note
On the Tricon controller, if you want to change only the time zone location, you can also
use the Set Time Zone command (see page 604).
When you download and run a TriStation 1131 application, the controller automatically sets its
clock to the TriStation PC time. If the accuracy of the controller clock degrades over time, you
can reset the clock while the application is running, without having to download again.
Procedure
1
On the TriStation PC, right-click the time icon in the message bar or open the Date/Time
dialog box from the Control Panel.
Ensure the PC is set to the correct local time.
Open the TriStation 1131 project that is running in the controller.
On the Configuration tree, double-click the Controller Panel.
On the Commands menu, click Connect, and then click Set Calendar Clock.
Click Yes when asked whether to set the calendar clock to the current configuration.
Applies To
Controller
Location
Configuration tree > Controller Panel > Commands menu
Set Editor Options Command

The Set Editor Options command specifies how to set tabs, font size, and auto-scroll delay.
Properties include:
Tabs on page 621
Font Size on page 537
Auto Scroll Delay on page 487
Applies To
ST Language
603
Location
View menu
Set Programming Mode Command

For Trident or Tri-GP controllers, the Set Programming Mode command specifies whether
changes to the application are allowed. To use this command, the application must be
downloaded to the controller.
Setting
Description
Enable Programming and Control
Allowed changes include: Download Changes and Download

All commands, changing the values of variables, changing scan
time, and changing the operational mode.
Disable Programming and Control
Prohibits all changes to the application.
The Set Programming Mode command is unavailable if the SYS_SET_APP_LOCK function has
been set to prohibit (lock out) changes programmatically. The default setting is Enable
Programming and Control.
Applies To
Location
Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Controller Panel > Commands menu
Set Scan Time Command

The Set Scan Time command specifies, in milliseconds, how often the Emulator or controller
performs a scan. Changing the scan time on the Set Scan Time screen does not change the scan
time for the project. To change the time for the project, you must set the time on the Execution
List.
The minimum time is determined by the controller after the application is downloaded. The
maximum time is determined by the type of controller. The scan time must be within the
minimum and maximum range.
For Tricon 3006/3007 MPs, the maximum is 500 milliseconds.
For Tricon 3008 MPs, the maximum time is 450 milliseconds.
For Trident or Tri-GP systems, the maximum is 450 milliseconds.
For Trident or Tri-GP controllers, you can set the scan time between the minimum and
maximum times. The scan time must be larger than the AI and DI poll times.
Applies To
Application
604
Appendix A
Location
Set Time Zone Command

The Set Time Zone command sets the Tricon controller clock to the time zone you select. Before
using the Set Time Zone command, you should ensure the PC is set to the correct local time
zone.
Note
This command applies to the Tricon controller only. To change the time zone on the
Trident or Tri-GP controller, see Set Calendar Clock Command on page 602.
When you perform a Download All and run a TriStation 1131 application, the Tricon controller
automatically sets its time zone location to the time zone defined in the TriStation PC. However,
if you perform a Download Changes operation, the time zone is not set automatically. Use this
command to manually set or change the time zone on the Tricon controller.
Procedure
1
On the TriStation PC, right-click the time icon in the message bar or open the Date/Time
dialog box from the Control Panel.
Ensure the PC is set to the correct local time zone.
Open the TriStation 1131 project that is running in the controller.
On the Configuration tree, double-click the Controller Panel.
On the Commands menu, click Connect, and then click Set Time Zone.
Click Yes when asked whether to set the time zone to the current configuration.
Applies To
Controller
Location
Tricon Configuration tree > Controller Panel > Commands menu
Set Value
The Set Value property specifies the value for the variable during testing on the controller or
Emulator. To ensure the value is valid for the data type, click Confirm when specifying the value
on the Variable tab.
Applies To
Variables on test sheets in the Controller and Emulator Panels
Location
Item Properties > Variable tab
605
Shared Read
The Shared Read property specifies whether a program can read a tagname that is a different
Application type. For example, if the tagname is a Control type, it cannot be read by a Safety
program unless Shared Read is checked. The default is cleared, which means that programs can
only read tagnames that have the same Application type.
Applies To
Tagnames
Location
Application tree > Tagname Declarations > Item Properties > Declaration tab
Sheets Menu
The Sheets menu includes commands that allow you to change the properties of logic sheets,
which provide the workspace for developing programs, functions, and function blocks. The
Sheets menu includes these commands:
Command
Description
Sheet Title
Edits the title of the current sheet. The sheet title is displayed in the title block,
the window caption bar, and the Window Menu list.
Edit Sheet Macros
Allows you to change the text associated with macros which are identified by a
pencil icon.
Next Sheet
Displays the next sheet.
Previous Sheet
Displays the previous sheet.
Append Sheet
Adds a new sheet after an existing sheet.
Insert Sheet
Adds a new sheet before an existing sheet.
Delete Sheet
Deletes the selected sheet.
Manage Sheets
Allows you to append, insert, and delete sheets. Also allows you to change the
sheet title and to display (go to) the selected sheet.
Select Sheet
Template...
Includes the following sheet templates:

Sheet A 8.5" x 11"
Sheet B 11" x 17" (default)
Sheet C 17" x 22"
Sheet D 22" x 34"
Applies To
Logic sheets in user documents, test sheets in Controller and Emulator Panels
Locations
Sheet Manager button, or Sheets menu
606
Appendix A
Shorted Point Alarm Threshold

The Shorted Point Alarm Threshold property specifies the number of ohms below which values
are alarmed as a shorted load. This option is only available if the points are supervised. Typical
threshold values are 10 to 48 ohms. The available range is 0 to 65,535 ohms. The default is 10
ohms. Available only with the model 3625 Digital Output Module.
Applies To
Tricon DO points
Location
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > DO Setup
Show Causes for Selected Effect Command

The Show Causes for Selected Effects command displays the causes of all selected effects in a
CEM program.
Applies To
CEM programs
Location
View menu
Show Effects for Selected Causes Command

The Show Effects for Selected Causes command displays the effects of all selected causes in a
CEM program.
Applies To
CEM programs
Location
View menu
Show Grid Command

The Show Grid command toggles on and off to show or hide dotted grid lines.
Applies To
FBD and LD programs and functions
Location
View menu
607
Show IEC Representation

The Show IEC Representation command toggles between displaying the IEC (International
Electro-Technical Commission) representation and the TriStation 1131 graphical view.
Applies To
Location
View menu
Show Network Numbers Command

The Network Number command toggles on and off to show or hide network numbers.
Applies To
Location
View menu
Show Line Numbers Command

The Show Line Numbers command toggles to display or show line numbers in a ST program or
function.
Applies To
Locations
Line Numbers button

View menu
Show Zones Command

The Zones command toggles on and off to show or hide network zone lines.
Applies To
Location
View menu
608
Appendix A
Signal Delays
The Signal Delays property adjusts the timing of data transmission to Modbus devices that use
hardware handshake, which is a method of ensuring devices are ready to receive data. Signal
delays adjust the timing for CTS and RTS signals for Modbus devices that have slow throughput
or other limitations.
The RTS (Request to Send) signal opens and closes the data transmission channel. The RTS predelay setting specifies the number of milliseconds to wait before the data is transmitted.
The CTS (Clear to Send) signal indicates the transmitting station that it is ready to receive data.
The CTS Pre-delay setting specifies the number of milliseconds to keep the channel open after
data is transmitted.
The settings can be from 0 to 10,000 milliseconds; the default is 0.
Setting Signal Delays for Tricon EICM

Signal delays are set by using the MBWRITE function blocks in a program.
Procedure
1
Set the Handshake property to Hardware on the Tricon EICM Setup screen.
Add an MBWRITE function block for each type of delay (CTS and RTS) you want to
specify.
Specify these parameters in the function block.

Parameter
Action
Alias
For CTS, enter 40001.

For RTS, enter 40004.
Port
Enter the EICM port number.
Station
Enter the slave station address.
D01
Enter the delay in milliseconds; 0 to 10,000.
Applies To
Modbus Communication
Locations
Serial Ports tab
609
Single Step Command

The Single Step command executes a single scan of the application in the controller or Emulator.
Applies To
Application
Locations
Single Step button

Size/Alignment Command
The Size/Alignment command includes commands that specify whether to increase or decrease
the size of the element and how to align the element.
The commands apply actions to the other elements using the currently selected element as the
reference. For example, the Same Width command changes all other elements to the same width
as the selected element.
The subcommands include:
Same Width
Align Left
Align Bottom
Space Across
Same Height
Align Right
Center Horizontally
Space Down
Same Size
Align Top
Center Vertically
Applies To
Comments, constants, variables
Location
Right-click an element
Size/Hide Columns Command

The Size/Hide Columns command displays a dialog box that allows you to specify the font size
and hide or unhide the columns.
Applies To
CEM programs
Locations
Size/Hide Columns button

View menu
610
Appendix A
Size/Hide Comment Column Command

The Size/Hide Comment Column command displays a dialog box that allows you to specify the
font size and hide or unhide the comment.
Applies To
CEM programs
Location
View menu
Size/Hide Rows Command

The Size/Hide Rows command displays a dialog box that allows you to specify the font size and
hide or unhide the rows.
Applies To
CEM programs
Locations
Size/Hide Rows button

View menu
Slot Selection
The Slot Selection property specifies the physical slot where the communication module you
want to configure is installed.
Slot selection rules for the TCM:
If the TCM you are configuring is installed in the COM slot, you must select the Left
slot.
If the TCM is installed in any other available logical slot, you can select either the Left
or Right slot.
Each logical slot can hold two TCMsone in the left physical slot, and one in the right
physical slot. A TCM can be configured in the right slot only if a TCM in the left slot has
already been configured.
If you have configured TCMs in both the left and right slots, and then you uninstall the
TCM in the left slot, you will no longer be able to change the configuration of the TCM
installed in the right slot. You must re-install a TCM in the left slot before you can
modify the configuration of the TCM in the right slot.
Slot selection rules for the Trident v2.x CM or Tri-GP CM:
The logical COM slot can hold two CMsone in the Left physical slot, and one in the
Right physical slot.
611
A CM can be configured in the Right slot only if a CM in the Left slot has already been
configured.
If you have configured CMs in both the left and right slots, and you then uninstall the
CM in the left slot, you will no longer be able to change the configuration of the CM
installed in the right slot. You must re-install a CM in the left slot before you can modify
the configuration of the CM in the right slot.
Applies To
Communication
Locations

The SNTP Master IP Address property specifies the IP Address for the master node using the
Simple Network Time Protocol.
Applies To
Time synchronization
Locations
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation >TCM/OPC Setup > Time
Sync tab
Setup > Time Sync tab
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Time Sync
tab
Time Sync tab
SNTP Master Network

The SNTP Master Network property specifies the network on which the master node is located.
Applies To
Time synchronization
Locations
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Time
Sync tab
612
Appendix A
Time Sync tab
SOE Block
The SOE Block property identifies a data structure in the MP memory. The block header
contains the block type, the buffer size, and a list of the event variables assigned to the block.
The buffer stores the event entries, each containing a time stamp and one or more data entries.
There are 16 SOE blocks. For more information, see the Triconex SOE Recorder Users Guide.
Applies To
Sequence of Events (SOE)
Locations
Application tree > Implementation > SOE Configuration

Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > HMM Setup
SOE Block Assignments

The SOE Block Assignments property specifies the SOE blocks that the tagname is assigned to
for purposes of collecting SOE data. For more information, see the SOE Recorder Users Guide.
Applies To
Location
Application tree > Implementation > SOE Configuration > double-click the row for the tagname
SOE Block Collection Mode

The SOE Block Collection Mode property specifies the collection mode for the block. Primary
blocks are collected by an instance of SOE Recorder running in Primary mode. Redundant
blocks are copies of an existing Primary block, and are collected only by an instance of SOE
Recorder running in Redundant mode.
Each Primary block can have only one Redundant block. The default is Primary. For more
information, see the Triconex SOE Recorder v4.2 Users Guide.
Applies To
Location
Application tree > Implementation > SOE Configuration tree > double-click a block
613
SOE Block Collection Type

The SOE Block Collection Type property specifies the event collection behavior type for the
block.
Automatic blocks are automatically collected by an instance of SOE Recorder running in either
Primary or Redundant mode. Manual blocks are collected by an external DCS or an instance of
SOE Recorder running in Custom mode. The default is Automatic.
For more information, see the Triconex SOE Recorder v4.2 Users Guide.
Applies To
Location
SOE Block Name

The SOE Block Name property specifies the name of the SOE block. For more information, see
the Triconex SOE Recorder Users Guide.
Applies To
Location
SOE Block Number

The SOE Block Number property specifies the block number used when events are retrieved by
SOE Recorder or an OPC client. For more information on using SOE Recorder, see the Triconex
SOE Recorder Users Guide.
For OPC configuration, must be unique for each TCM installed in a system. The default value is
0 (not configured). Applies only to model 4353/4354 Tricon Communication Modules (TCMs).
Applies To
Sequence of Events (SOE), OPC communication
Locations

Protocols tab
614
Appendix A
SOE Block Type

The SOE Block Type property specifies how the events are saved, discarded, or cleared from the
buffer. Types include: External, First Out, Modified External, and Unassigned. The default is
Unassigned.
There are 16 SOE blocks available. Blocks 1 through 14 can use any combination of External,
First Out, or History types. Blocks 15 and 16 are modified external blocks that are reserved for
use with the Safety Manager Module (SMM).
For more information, see the Triconex SOE Recorder Users Guide.
External
The External Block Type setting is typically used when an external device, such as a Foxboro or
Honeywell DCS or PC running SOE Recorder, is retrieving events from a controller on a
continual basis. When events are collected by the external device, event data is cleared from the
block. When the buffer is full, new event entries are discarded.
First Out
The First Out Block Type setting is typically used to retrieve the first and subsequent events that
led to a trip. When the buffer is full, the Main Processors change the blocks status from
collecting to stopped. New events are discarded.
Historical
The Historical Block Type setting is typically used to monitor current events in SOE Recorder
application. An external device can collect events at any time, however, the collection does not
clear the block. If the TriStation 1131 application does not clear and restart recording, the oldest
event entries are overwritten when the buffer is full.
Modified External
The Modified External Block Type setting is used for event retrieval with the Safety Manager
Module (SMM). The SMM is the Triconex communication interface with the Honeywell
Universal Control Network (UCN), which is one of the principal networks of the Honeywell
TCD 3000 Distributed Control System. Only blocks 15 and 16 can be specified as Modified
External.
Applies To
Sequence of events (SOE)
Location
Application tree > Implementation > SOE Configuration tree > Blocks
615
SOE Buffer Size

The SOE Buffer Size property specifies the size of the buffer in the SOE block, based on the
number of events.The buffer stores the event entries, each containing a 8-byte time stamp and
one or more 8-byte data entries.
The maximum number is 20,000 events (320,000 bytes); the default is 0. The maximum buffer
size across all blocks is 60,000 events (1 MB).
You cannot change the SOE Buffer Size while the project is in the Download Changes state. You
must change the project state to Download All prior to changing the size of the SOE buffer.
Applies To
Location
Application tree > Implementation > SOE Configuration tree > Blocks
SOE Dead Time

Defines the length of time (in seconds) after a transition, before a subsequent transition will be
reported. Once a transition on the selected point has occurred, any subsequent transitions will
be reported only after the dead time interval has elapsed.
A longer dead time interval is better able to prevent the higher-level SOE application from being
flooded with events, but it also means there is a higher chance of losing subsequent transition
events.
The available range is 0 to 250 sec, with an accuracy of 10 msec or less. The default is 0, meaning
any subsequent transition will generate an event as long as the previous transition on the same
point has been collected and cleared. It does not mean that every transition on the same point
will generate an event, as a transition on the same point that occurs too soonbefore the
previous event is clearedmay be missed.
Applies To
Trident or Tri-GP HRDI Module, Sequence of Events (SOE)
Location
Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > HRDI Setup
616
Appendix A
SOE Severity
The SOE Severity property specifies the severity (priority) level for SOE system events retrieved
by an OPC client. The default is 500.
Applies only to model 4353/4354 Tricon Communication Modules (TCMs).
Applies To
Sequence of Events (SOE), OPC communication
Location
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Protocols
tab
SOE Trigger State

Determines if SOE is enabled for a selected point on the HRDI module. When SOE is enabled,
the module will time stamp and record point transitions for the selected point.
Disabled: SOE is not enabled for the point. Point transitions will not be reported.
Rising: SOE is enabled for the point. Point transitions will be reported when the
Boolean value changes from False to True (0 to 1).
Falling: SOE is enabled for the point. Point transitions will be reported when the
Boolean value changes from True to False (1 to 0).
Rising/Falling: SOE is enabled for the point. Point transitions will be reported for both
Rising and Falling changes (False to True, or True to False).
The default is Disabled.
Applies To
Location
SOE Trigger Time

Defines the number of milliseconds (with an accuracy of 1 msec or less) a signal must be stable
before its change in state (transition) causes the reporting of an event. Also known as the
debounce period.
A longer trigger time results in a longer debounce period, so that pulse widths that fall within
the debounce period will not be reported as an event.
The available range is 0 to 250 msec.
If any trigger with a pulse width larger than x msec needs to be reported as an event,
then enter x-1 msec.
617
If any trigger with a pulse width smaller than x msec needs to be filtered out (not
reported as an event), then enter x+1 msec.
The default is 0, meaning there is no debounce period:
A trigger with a pulse width larger than 1 msec will always generate an event.
A trigger with a pulse width smaller than 1 msec may or may not generate an event.
Applies To
Location
Sort by Group
The Sort by Group property organizes the tagnames table in an hierarchical list, where
tagnames are organized according to the groups they are assigned to. This table, with
information about the tagnames and system variables configured in the project, is downloaded
to the TCM/OPCs embedded OPC server during a Download All or Download Changes
operation. The sort order controls how the information is displayed in the OPC client.
Applicable only if a model 4353 or 4354 Tricon Communication Module (TCM) is installed in
Applies To
Tagnames (OPC)
Location
Project menu > Project Options > Download Options tab
Sort by Tagname
The Sort by Tagname property organizes the tagnames table alphabetically, in a single, nonhierarchical list, regardless of their group assignments.
This table, with information about the tagnames and system variables configured in the project,
is downloaded to the TCM/OPCs embedded OPC server during a Download All or Download
Changes operation. The sort order controls how the information is displayed in the OPC client.
Applicable only if a model 4353 or 4354 Tricon Communication Module (TCM) is installed in
Applies To
Tagnames (OPC)
Location
Project menu > Project Options > Download Options tab
618
Appendix A
Space Saver
The Space Saver property means a single instance can be executed more than once per scan to
reduce memory usage and increase performance.
Note
If a function block is not a space saver, using the same function block instance more than
once on a function block diagram results in a WF0031 warningwhereas there is no
such warning for a space saver function block.
For user-defined function blocks, you can specify this setting.
For Triconex Library function blocks, the setting cannot be changed.
Applies To
Location
Function Blocks > Document Properties > Usage tab
Standard Security
The Standard Security property sets the application-level security setting to Standard. When
selected, a user name and password is required to open TriStation 1131. No other user
authentication is required. This is the default setting.
See also Enhanced Security on page 530.
Applies To
User security
Location
Project menu > Security > Security dialog box > Security Setting tab
Start Value and Increment

The Start Value property specifies the beginning letter or number to use when naming multiple
variables or tagnames. The Increment property specifies the number to increase each time a
variable or tagname is named. The default value is 1 for both properties.
Applies To
Input, output, and memory points
Locations

Application tree > Tagname Declarations > right-click, select New Tagnames
619
Stop Bits
The Stop Bits property specifies whether to transmit 1 bit or 2 bits after each character to notify
the receiving computer that the transmission of a byte of data is complete. The default is 1 bit.
Applies To
Communication
Locations
Ports tab
tab
Stop Mode
Stop mode stops the TriStation 1131 application from reading field inputs and forces nonretentive digital and analog outputs to zero. Retentive outputs retain the values they had before
the application was halted.
Stop mode is useful for installation and service of external equipment, but is not required for
service of the controller. Before using the stopping the application, the Halt command should
be used to halt the application.
For Tricon controllers, Stop mode is set by turning the keyswitch to the STOP position.
For Trident or Tri-GP controllers, Stop mode is set by using the SYS_APP_HALT
function in a program.
Applies To
Locations
Tricon keyswitch set to STOP

Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Controller Panel > Commands menu
Trident or Tri-GP Application tree > Library Documents > Functions
620
Appendix A
Supports Application Defined States

The Supports Application Defined States property specifies whether to allow user-defined
functions to include a variable that stores application states.
If included, the variable stores application states and is evaluated in the same way as the cause,
intersection, and effect internal variables. The default is cleared, which means not enabled.
Application state inputs and outputs must be a DWORD data type 32-bit string.
Applies To
Functions, function blocks
Location
Document menu > Item Properties > Attributes tab
Supports Use in Cause Rows with... Inputs

The Supports Use in Cause Rows with... Inputs property specifies whether a specific userdefined function can be used in a cause row. Invensys-supplied functions do not have to be
enabled. The default is cleared, which means not enabled.
Applies To
Location
Supports Use in Effect Columns With... Outputs

The Supports Use in Effect Columns with... Outputs property specifies whether a specific userdefined function can be used in an effect column. Invensys-supplied functions do not have to
be enabled. The default is cleared, which means not enabled.
Applies To
Location
621
Supports Use in Intersections

The Supports Use in Intersections property specifies whether a specific user-defined function
can be used in an intersection. Invensys-supplied functions do not have to be enabled. The
default is cleared, which means not enabled.
Applies To
Location
System Events Severity

The System Events Severity properties identify the severity levels of the different types of Tricon
system events (Info, Minor, Major, and Fatal) available through the TCMs embedded OPC
server.
The severity level identifies the urgency or priority of an event, where 1 is the lowest and 1000
is the highest. Enter 0 to prevent the TCMs OPC server from sending event notifications for the
selected event type.
Applies only to model 4353/4354 TCMs.
Applies To
OPC communication
Location
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Protocols
tab
Tabs
The Tabs property specifies the number of tab settings used in the Structured Text code. The
default is 8.
Applies To
ST Language
Location
622
Appendix A
Tagname
The Tagname property specifies the name of an input, output, or memory point. The name
comes from the use of tags tied to field points. In TriStation 1131, it generally refers to points.
Tagnames can include up to 31 alphanumeric (A to Z and 0 to 9) characters and the underscore
(_) character. Tagnames cannot begin with an underscore.
Applies To
Input, output, and memory points
Location
Application tree > Tagname Declarations > Declaration tab
Target System Version

The Target System Version property specifies the version of the controller that the project will
be downloaded to. It also determines which controller features and modules can be configured
in a project. The target system version is configured when you create a project, or when you
convert a project from a previous version of TriStation 1131.
When changing the target system version, you cannot be connected to the controller.
Applies To
Project
Locations
File menu > New Project or > Select Main Processor

File menu > Open Project > Select Main Processor
Tricon, Trident, or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation >
Replace MPs
Tricon, Trident, or Tri-GP Controller tree > Operating Parameters
TCP Port Number

The TCP Port property specifies a port number used by a network device in a Modbus
configuration, or by a printer. There are no reserved TCP port numbers, and duplicate port
numbers are allowed in a Modbus configuration.
For a Modbus TCP port, the default is 502.
For a printer connected to the Tricon TCM, Trident 2.x CM, or Tri-GP CM, the default is
9100.
623
For the Trident 1.x CM, the TCP Port property specifies a port number specified by a
printer manufacturer. This information should be available with the printer
instructions. The default is blank.
An HP JetDirect print server with one port uses port number 9100.
An HP JetDirect print server with three ports uses port numbers 9100, 9101, and 9102.
Applies To
Communication
Locations
Printer and Modbus TCP tabs
Setup > Printer and Modbus TCP tabs
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Printer and
Modbus TCP tabs
Printer tab
TCP Port Restrictions

See Highest TCP Port Number on page 542 and Lowest TCP Port Number on page 555.
Temporary Files
The Temporary Files property specifies the path name for documents which include temporary
files created by TriStation 1131 or other utilities. The default path name is:

Data\Triconex\TriStation 1131 4.9.0\Temp

1131 4.9.0\Temp
Applies To
Project
Location
Terminal
The Terminal property displays the names of the input and output terminals for the function or
function block included with the selected cause, intersection, or effect. Extensible functions do
not have terminal names.
624
Appendix A
Applies To
CEM programs
Location
Terminals
See Double Space on page 516 and EN/ENO on page 523.
Termination Options
The Termination Options property specifies whether resistors are used to terminate the Modbus
cable connections. This option is only available with RS-485 Transceiver Mode.
Options include:
None: The cables are not terminated. This is the default.
Resistor: Resistors are used at each end of the cables.
Pull-Up/Pull-Down Resistors: Pull-up/pull-down resistors are used.
All: Both pull-up/pull-down and standard resistors are used.
Applies To
Locations
Ports tab
> Serial Ports tab
tab
Serial Ports tab
Text Size
The Text Size property specifies the point size for the text; from 3 to 24 points.
The defaults are: A=6, B=8, C=10, and D=10.
Applies To
Comments
625
Locations
Properties > Comment tab

Time After Trip

The Time After Trip property specifies the number of minutes after the trip to continue
collecting events for the trip snapshot. The minimum is two minutes; the maximum is 10
minutes. The default is two minutes.
Applies To
SOE
Location
Application > Implementation > double-click SOE Configuration branch
Time Before Trip

The Time Before Trip property specifies the number of minutes before the trip to begin
collecting events for the trip snapshot. The minimum is two minutes; the maximum is 10
minutes. The default is two minutes.
Applies To
SOE
Location
Application > Implementation > double-click SOE Configuration branch
The Time Synchronization properties specify whether and how time is synchronized for the
controller. Depending on the controller, the following properties can be specified. The default
is cleared, which means time synchronization is not used.
Controller
Property
Tricon ACM
On NET 1 enable time synchronization with external source
Tricon ACM
On NET 2 enable time synchronization with Tricon Master Node
Tricon NCM
On NET 1 enable time synchronization with Tricon Master Node
Tricon SMM
Enable time synchronization with external source
Tricon TCM
See Time Synchronization Configuration on page 626.
Trident 1.x CM
On NET 1 enable time synchronization with Trident Master Node

On NET 2 enable time synchronization with Trident Master Node
626
Appendix A
Controller
Property
Trident 2.x CM or
Tri-GP CM
See Time Synchronization Configuration on page 626.
Applies To
Controller
Locations
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > ACM, NCM, SMM, TCM
Setup
Trident 1.x Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Network
tab
Time Sync tab
Time Synchronization Configuration

The Time Synchronization Configuration property specifies the type of synchronization to be
performed by the TCM, Trident 2.x CM, or Tri-GP CM. These options are available.
Option
Description
None
No time synchronization.
GPS
Time synchronization based on the GPS interface and one TCM module.
Not applicable on the Trident 2.x CM or Tri-GP CM.
GPS Redundant
Time synchronization based on the GPS interface and two TCM modules.
Not applicable on the Trident 2.x CM or Tri-GP CM.
SNTP Redundant
Simple Network Time Protocol with two TCMs.
SNTP
Simple Network Time Protocol with one TCM or CM.
Peer-to-Peer
Triconex Time Synchronization based on the master node in the Peer-toPeer network.
Applies To
Communication
Locations
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/OPC Setup > Time
Sync tab
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Time Sync
tab
Time Sync tab
627
Toggle Terminal Inverter Command

The Toggle Terminal Inverter command toggles the inversion state of an input or output
terminal on the selected function or function block. When the terminal is inverted, a small circle
appears at the terminal connection.
Applies To
CEM programs
Location
Application tree > open a CEM program > right-click in the FBD Network
Transceiver Mode
The Transceiver Mode property specifies the type of physical connection.
Ethernet Port Settings

For TCM, Trident CM, or Tri-GP CM Ethernet ports, settings include:
Auto-Negotiate (Tricon TCM, Trident CM, or Tri-GP CM on NET 2, only)
10 Mbps Half Duplex
10 Mbps Full Duplex
100 Mbps Half Duplex (Tricon TCM, Trident CM, or Tri-GP CM on NET 2, only)
100 Mbps Full Duplex (Tricon TCM, Trident CM, or Tri-GP CM on NET 2, only)
Note
If you have a model 4352, 4352A, 4352B, or 4354 TCM with fiber connectors, you must
select 100 Mbps as the communication mode. These TCMs cannot negotiate the
connection speed or connect at 10 Mbps.
If you have a model 4353 TCM, you cannot select 10 Mbps as the communication mode
on NET 2. Connections to the TCMs embedded OPC server can be made only at 100
Mbps.
Choosing the Appropriate Ethernet Port Setting
If Auto-Negotiate is selected, the module will connect at either 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps,
depending on the speed of the connection. The TCM, Trident 2.x CM, and Tri-GP CM
will always negotiate to Half Duplex.
If Half Duplex is selected, only one network peer can transmit at a time. If you have a
network hub, you must select Half Duplex.
If Full Duplex is selected, both network peers can transmit at the same time. This
setting is typically used only for applications with high-bandwidth requirements. If
you have a switch, you can select Full Duplex or Half Duplex.
628
Appendix A
Serial Port Settings

For Serial Ports, settings include:
RS-232 for point-to-point communication over distances up to 50 feet
RS-485 for multi-point communication over distances up to 4,000 feet
RS-232 Transceiver Mode with Handshake

Hardware handshake is a method for controlling the flow of serial communication between two
devices which uses a separate wire to send a signal when the receiving device is read to receive
the signal. Hardware handshake can be used with Tricon TCM, Trident CM, and Tri-GP CM.
With the Handshake property set to Hardware, the communication module asserts the Request
to Send (RTS) signal when it has a message to transmit. The communication module begins
transmission when it receives a Clear to Send (CTS) signal from the Modbus master. The
communication module ignores all characters unless the Modbus master asserts the Data
Carrier Detect (DCD) signal. This settings allows the Modbus master to use half-duplex
modems.
With the Handshake property set to None (typically for point-to-point connections), the
communication module asserts RTS at all times and ignores CTS and DCD. In other words, the
communication module transmits characters even if the receiving device is not ready. This
could result in an overrun state, and the characters would have to be re-transmitted.
RS-485 Transceiver Mode with Handshake
With the Handshake property set to Hardware, the communication module enables its RS-485
transmit driver only when it is sending data. Use this setting for all single-pair networks and for
slave ports in two-pair, multi-point networks.
With the Handshake property set to None, the communication module enables its RS-485
transmit driver at all times. Use this setting for a Modbus slave port in a two-pair, point-to-point
network.
RS-485 cannot be used for a TriStation serial connection on TCM port 4, Trident 2.x CM port 3,
or Tri-GP CM port 3.
Applies To
Communication
Locations
Network and Serial Ports tabs
Setup > Network and Serial Ports tabs
and Serial Ports tabs
Serial Ports tab
629
Network and Serial Ports tab
Transceiver Port
For Trident 1.x, the Transceiver Port property specifies the type of connection to be used for the
port. Settings include RJ-45 and MAU. The default is RJ-45.
Applies To
Communication
Location
Trident 1.x Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > CM Setup > Network tab
Triggering Mode
For Trident or Tri-GP controllers, the Triggering Mode property specifies where the input signal
is triggered. For asymmetrical waveforms, select the option that corresponds to the sharper
edge. Settings include Rising Edge and Falling Edge.
The default is Rising Edge.
Applies To
Location
Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > PI Setup or EPI
Setup
Trip State
The Trip State property specifies the value on which to begin collecting events.
Applies To
SOE
Location
630
Appendix A
Trip Tagname
The Trip Tagname property specifies the tagname (variable) that identifies whether a trip has
occurred.
Applies To
SOE
Location
TriStation Port Number

The TriStation Port Number property identifies the UDP port number used for the TriStation
connection to the TCM, Trident 2.x CM, or Tri-GP CM. The default number is 1502.
Cannot be the same as the Managemen, Peer-to-Peer, Peer-to-Peer+1, TSAA port numbers,
or1505, 1506, 1507, 1508. See UDP Base Port Number on page 632 for the list of reserved values.
Applies To
Communication
Locations
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation >TCM or TCM/A Setup >
Network tab
Protocols tab
TriStation UDP Port Number

The TriStation UDP Port Number property identifies the UDP port number used for the
TriStation connection to the Trident v2.x CM or Tri-GP CM. The default number is 1502.
Cannot be the same as the Management or TSAA port numbers. See UDP Base Port Number on
page 632 for the list of reserved values.
Applies To
Communication
Location
Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > TriStation Communication
631
True Color
True State Name

TSAA Multicast IP Address

The TSAA Multicast IP Address property specifies the IP address that TSAA multicasts should
be sent to. The default is 0.0.0.0 (IP multicasting is disabled).
Bin data and/or SOE data available messages will be sent to the specified address, so that all
members of the group will receive the data.
Note
TSAA IP multicasting is available only with Tricon v10.3 and later systems, Trident 2.x
systems, or Tri-GP systems. Because NET 2 is reserved for OPC communication, the
TSAA protocol is available only on NET 1 for model 4353 and 4354 TCMs. Additionally,
your network hardware (such as routers) must also support multicasting. See your
Network Administrator or IT department for more information.
See also Update Rate on page 634.
Applies To
Communication
Locations
Protocols tab
Protocols tab
TSAA Port Number

The TSAA Port Number property identifies the UDP port number used with TSAA
client/server network communication. The default number is 1500.
For communication with DDE Server and SOE Recorder clients, the UDP port configured in
those applications must match the TSAA Port Number configured in TriStation 1131. Cannot be
the same as the Management or TriStation port numbers. See UDP Base Port Number on
page 632 for the list of reserved values.
Additionally, because NET 2 is reserved for OPC communication, the TSAA protocol is
available only on NET 1 for model 4353 and 4354 TCMs.
632
Appendix A
Applies To
Communication
Locations
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM/A Setup > Network
tab
Protocols tab
Type Over Command

The Type Over command toggles between typing over and inserting characters in a Structured
Text program or function.
Applies To
Locations
Type Over button

View menu
UCN Node Number

For Tricon controllers, the UCN Node Number property specifies an number on the Tricon
SMM, which can be any odd number from 1 to 63. Even numbers are used for hot-spare module
communication. The default is 1.
Applies To
Tricon SMM
Location
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > SMM Setup

The UDP Base Port Number property specifies the UDP port number for the controller where
the TriStation 1131 application is to be run. This number identifies the controller in a Peer-toPeer network.
Entering 0 as the UDP port number disables Peer-to-Peer over UDP/IP on the network. The
default is 1503 on both NET 1 and NET 2 (meaning Peer-to-Peer is enabled on both ports).
UDP port numbers do not need to be unique, as long as the IP addresses for each port is unique.
For example, you can assign 1600 as the TriStation UDP port number on NET 1, and 1600 as the
633
Peer-to-Peer UDP port number on NET 2, because the ports are on separate networks. However,
you cannot assign 1600 as the TriStation UDP port number on NET 1, and 1600 as the Peer-toPeer port number on NET 1, because the ports are on the same network.
Because NET 2 is reserved for OPC communication, the Peer-to-Peer and TSAA protocols are
available only on NET 1 for model 4353 and 4354 TCMs.
The following values are reserved:
Reserved Value(s)
Protocol
Notes
1500
TSAA
Can be changed via configuration
1502
TriStation
15031504
Peer-to-Peer
15051508
Firmware download
Cannot be changed; for Invensys use only
1510
Management
11023
Reserved by the Internet Assigned Numbers

Authority (IANA)
Also see Management Port Number on page 557, TriStation Port Number on page 630, and
TSAA Port Number on page 631.
Applies To
Communication
Locations
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > TCM Setup > Network tab
Tricon Controller tree > Configuration > TriStation Communication
Peer-to-Peer tab
Undo Command
The Undo command reverses the last action performed when editing a program, function, or
function block.
Applies To
Editing
Location
Edit menu
634
Appendix A
Update Rate
The TSAA Multicast Update Rate property specifies the update rate, in milliseconds, for TSAA
IP multicasting.
Bin data and/or SOE data available messages will be sent to the multicast IP address at the
specified update rate (for example, by default, bin data will be multicast every 1000ms).
TSAA IP multicasting is available only with Tricon v10.3 and later systems, Trident 2.x systems,
or Tri-GP systems. See also TSAA Multicast IP Address on page 631.
Applies To
Communication
Locations
Protocols tab
Protocols tab
Update Reports Database Command

The Update Reports Database command copies project information to a database used when
reports are generated.
Applies To
Reports
Location
Project tree > right-click the Default Reports or User Reports folder
Update Selected Function Cells Command

The Update Selected Function Cells command updates selected out-of-date elements which are
marked with a red X in the active window.
Applies To
CEM programs
Location
Tools menu
635
Usage
The Usage property specifies how function blocks can be used in a function or function block.
For library function blocks, the options determine the usage and cannot be changed. For userdefined function blocks, the settings can be specified. Settings include:
Exactly Once on page 531
Only Once on page 571
Space Saver on page 618
Internal State on page 548
Applies To
Location
Use Local Time

The Use Local Time property specifies whether to use local time or universal time. The default
is selected, which means local time is used.
Applies To
Application
Location
Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > MP > Setup >
Validate Only Command

The Validate Only command analyzes your project settings and current controller configuration
to determine the modifications that will be made to the project if you change to the selected
target system version. Results of the validation appear in the Messages pane.
Applies To
Project
Location
Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > Replace MPs
636
Appendix A
Value
The Value property specifies the value for the constant. To ensure the value agrees with the Data
Type, click Apply.
Applies To
Constants
Location
Properties > Constant tab
Value Range to Scale an Integer

The Value Range to Scale an Integer properties specify how a REAL number is scaled to an
integer so it can be transmitted using Modbus protocol, which does not use REAL numbers. The
values set for the scale range are used with the Modbus minimum and maximum range to
derive an integer value that represents the real value.
Properties include:
Minimum Value (Min Span) on page 562
Maximum Value (Max Span) on page 560
Precision on page 581
Disable Scaling on page 513
Applies To
Points with REAL data types
Location
Var/Const
The Var/Const property displays the names of the variables connected to the terminals of the
function or function block in a CEM program. Only user-defined variables are displayed.
Internal variables are hidden.
Applies To
CEM programs
Location
Application tree > open a CEM program > Variable Detail Table
637
Var Type
The Var Type property specifies the type of variable. Types include:
Type
Description
Input
A variable which provides a value to a program, function, or function block. Must be

connected to a point.
Output
A variable which returns the result of a program, function, or function block. Must be
connected to a point.
In/Out
A variable which is used as both an input and output variable. Must be connected to a
point.
Local
A variable used for internal logic. Cannot be connected to a point.
Tagname
A variable that references a point. Also known as a global variable.
Applies To
Variables
Location
Properties > Declarations tab
Verify Last Download to the Controller Command

The Verify Last Download to the Controller compares the application that was last downloaded
to the controller with the application running on the controller. If there is a difference, you
should contact Invensys support.
Applies To
Application
Location
Verify Password
The Verify Password property allows you to enter the password a second time to verify it is the
same as entered for the Password property.
Applies To
User access, Security
Location
638
Appendix A
Verify Version Command

The Verify Version command compares the version of the selected library in the project with the
most current version available. If the version in the project is out of date, you are prompted to
update it. Only libraries located in the default library directory are verified.
Applies To
Libraries
Location
Application tree > right-click Library Documents > Manage command
Vertical Network Divider Command

The Vertical Network Divider command allows you to place a vertical divider on a logic sheet
to divide networks.
Applies To
FBD logic sheets
Locations
Vertical Network Divider button

View Download History Command

The View Download
History command displays
version information for each
download for the current
project, which is a list of the
elements affected for the last
Download All and
subsequent Download
Changes commands. The
history is cleared and
restarted with each
Download All command.
These properties are
displayed on the Download
History screen.
639
Property
Description
St
An icon that indicates the status of the element. An arrow indicates that the
element was included in a Download All operation; an ellipsis (...) means it was
included in a Download Changes operation.
Element Name
The name of the program, function, or function block.
ID#
A system-generated identification for the program or function.
Ver
The version of the element.
Size
The size of the element in bytes.
Library
The library the element is included in.
Applies To
Project
Location
Project menu
View Intermediate FBD Command

The View Intermediate FBD command displays source code that is generated in the Function
Block Diagram language when the CEM program is compiled.
Applies To
CEM programs
Location
Document menu
View Intermediate ST Command

The View Intermediate ST command displays source code that is generated when the program
is compiled. You can copy the source code by using the Write to File command on the Edit
menu.
Applies To
Programs, Functions, and Function Blocks
Location
Document menu
640
Appendix A
View Manager Command

The View Manager command allows you to save, load, or remove views of a CEM matrix.
Applies To
CEM programs
Location
View menu
View Project History Command

The View Project History
command displays an
audit trail of user access
and modification of the
project.
This history is
automatically generated
during project
development.
Click the Save History
button to export the
project history to a text
file.
Applies To
Project
Locations
Project History button

Project menu
Width
The Width property specifies the width (horizontal space) of the variable or constant symbol.
By selecting either the plus (+) or the minus (-) buttons, you can expand or shrink the width of
the variable symbol so you can use a longer name or fit the symbol into a smaller space.
Applies To
Variables
Location
Properties > Selected tab
641
Wire Tool Command

The Wire tool command provides a pointer tool to a connect logic elements in FBD programs.
The signal flow is from an output of one function block, through a wire, to an input of a second
function block.
Settings include:
Normal: The first function block is always evaluated before the second function block.
For example, the first function block writes the value and the second function block
reads the value. Represented by a solid line.
Feedback: The first function block is always evaluated after the second function block.
Typically used to tie the output of a function block to an input of the same function
blockso that the value of the output is used to feed it back to the input. Also
useful for delaying a write from the first function block until after the second function
block has read a value. Represented by a dashed line.
The default is Normal. To set, double-click the wire and select either Normal or Feedback.
Note
Attempting to create a feedback loop without using the feedback wire will cause an
error.
Applies To
FBD programs
Locations
Wire Tool button

Wire Type
The Wire Type property specifies the type of wire used for serial communication.
Settings include:
2-Wire (half duplex) if using one pair of wires for Modbus reads and writes. (Only
available when the Transceiver Mode property is set to RS-485.)
4-Wire (full duplex) if using two pairs of wiresone pair for Modbus reads and the
other pair for Modbus writes. (Trident or Tri-GP MP serial ports must use this setting.)
The default is 4-Wire.
Applies To
Serial ports
Location
Trident or Tri-GP Controller tree > Configuration > Hardware Allocation > MP or CM Setup >
Serial Ports tab
642
Appendix A
Workspace View Command

The Workspace View command toggles to display or hide the Application and Controller
workspace tree.
Applies To
TriStation 1131 workspace
Locations
Workspace View button

View menu
Write To File Command

The Write To File command displays a dialog box that allows you to specify a file name and
location to save ST code as a text file.
Applies To
ST programs, ST functions, and intermediate ST for all programs and functions
Location
Edit menu
Zoom Command
The Zoom command enlarges or decreases the view
of an element.
Standard settings are: 50%, 75%, 100%, and 200%.
You can also enter a number or click Zoom To Fit to
size the elements to fit the current window. You can
enlarge the view of elements on a logic sheet by:
Using the Zoom button or Zoom command

from the View menu
Double-clicking an empty area to see a

Zoom Selection view.
Applies To
Logic sheets for user documents, test sheets for Controller and Emulator Panels
Locations
Zoom button
View menu
Double-click an empty area in a logic sheet
643
Zoom To Fit Command

The Zoom To Fit command toggles between a large and small view of the logic sheet.
Applies To
Logic sheets for user documents, test sheets for the Controller and Emulator Panels
Locations
Zoom To Fit button

View menu
Double-click an empty area in a logic sheet
Zoom To Region
The Zoom To Region command allows you to zoom into a region of the sheet.
Procedure
1
On the View menu, click Zoom to Region.

The cursor changes to a cross-bar.
Select the region to view by dragging the cross-bar across the area.
The region is magnified.
Applies To
FBD and LD editors
Location
View menu
644
Appendix A
B
Data Types
Overview 646
Elementary Data Types 647
Generic Data Types 658
646
Appendix B
Data Types
Overview
Data types, which adhere to the IEC 61131-3 standard, specify the type of data used for the
following:
Constants
Tagname declarations and references
Local, input, output, and I/O variables
Elementary Data Types
647

An elementary data type specifies the size and characteristics of most data used in a program,
function, or function block and the operations that can be applied to the data.
This table describes the elementary data types and how they can be used.
Table 59
Elementary Data Types and Usage
Data Type
Description
Tagnames
Constants and
Local Variables
BOOL
A Boolean, 1 bit in length
DATE
A specific date
DINT
A double integer, 32 bits in length
DT
A specific date and time
DWORD
A double word, 32 bits in length
INT
An integer, 16 bits in length
LREAL
A long real number, 64 bits in length
REAL
A real number, 32 bits in length
STRING
A sequence of up to 132 alphanumeric

characters delimited by single quotes
TIME
A period of time (duration) expressed in days,

hours, minutes, seconds, or milliseconds
TOD
A specific time of day
Only three data types can be declared as controller points: BOOL, DINT, and REAL. These
variables point to hardware addresses in the controller and are accessible to all programs in a
project.
648
Appendix B
Data Types
BOOL Data Type

A BOOL data type is one bit in length and has two possible values: false (0) or true (1).
Attribute
Description
Keyword/type
BOOL
Description
Boolean
Size
1 bit
Default value
False (0)
Lower limit
False (0)
Upper limit
True (1)
Result if intermediate value is less than lower limit
N/A
Result if upper limit is less than intermediate value
Intermediate Value MOD 2
Application Notes
Can be used in Safety or Control applications.
Can be used in CEM Cause, Effect, and Intersection cells.
DATE Data Type

A DATE data type refers to a specific date expressed as the year, month, and day.
Attribute
Description
Keyword/type
DATE
Description
Date
Size
64 bits
Syntax
D#CCYY-MM-DD
Default value
D#1970-01-01
Lower limit
D#1970-01-01
Upper limit
D#2029-12-31
Invalid date
Invalid date
Application Notes
649
DINT Data Type

A DINT data type is a double integer, 32 bits in length.
Attribute
Description
Keyword/type
DINT
Description
Double integer
Size
32 bits
Default value
Lower limit
2**31
Upper limit
2**311
2**31 or V modulo 2**32
2**311 or V modulo 2**32
Note
If the intermediate conversion value is out of range (for example, when converting
LREAL to DINT), the return value is the smallest or greatest double integer.
Application Notes
DT Data Type
A DT data type represents a date and time of day. To specify the time of day, you can use
fractions (FFF) of a second. Values are stored internally in microseconds and displayed in the
TriStation 1131 Controller Panel in milliseconds.
A DT data type cannot be used as a program input or output.
Attribute
Description
Keyword/type
DT
Description
Date and time of day
Size
64 bits
Syntax
DT#CCYY-MM-DD-HH:MM:SS
or
DT#CCYY-MM-DD-HH:MM:SS.FFF
or
DATE_AND_TIME#CCYY-MM-DD-HH:MM:SS
Default value
DT#1970-01-01-00:00:00
Lower limit
DT#1970-01-01-00:00:00
650
Appendix B
Data Types
Attribute
Description
Upper limit
DT#2029-12-31-23:59:59.999
Result if intermediate value is less than lower

limit
Invalid date
Result if upper limit is less than intermediate

value
Invalid date
Application Notes
DWORD Data Type

A DWORD data type is a double word, 32 bits in length. The result is always in the range from
0 to 16#FFFFFFFF. If the intermediate value is out of range, then the result is the least-significant
32 bits of the intermediate value. For example, if you shift 16#FFFFFFFF to the left once, the
intermediate value is 16#1FFFFFFFE and the result is 16#FFFFFFFE.
A DWORD data type cannot be used as a program input or output.
Attribute
Description
Keyword/type
DWORD
Description
Double word
Size
32 bits
Default value
Lower limit
Upper limit
16#FFFFFFFF
N/A
V and 16#FFFFFFFF
Application Notes
651
INT Data Type

An INT data type is an integer, 16 bits in length. Arithmetic operators ADD, SUB, and MUL are
implemented with 32-bit arithmetic and the container for INT is 32 bits. The ADD, SUB, and
MUL operations do not check the range of results and can have resultant values out of the
specified range (32768 and +32767). For example, using the SUB function to subtract 1 from
-32768 results in 32769 (clearly out of range) without clearing ENO or reporting a BADPARAM
error. However, an out-of-range value does display Inv INT on the Controller Panel.
To verify that output values from these functions are within range, connect the output terminal
to the INT_TO_DINT function, which converts the integer output to double integer and does a
range check for the integer output.
An INT data type cannot be used as a program input or output.
Attribute
Description
Keyword/type
INT
Description
Integer
Size
32 bits
Default value
Lower limit
2**15
Upper limit
2**151
InvINT
InvINT
Application Notes
LREAL Data Type

An LREAL data type is 64 bits in length and has 15 decimal digits of precision. In TriStation
1131, the LREAL data type follows the IEC-559 Standard floating-point format.
An LREAL data type cannot be used as a program input or output.
Attribute
Description
Keyword/type
LREAL
Description
Long-real number
Size
64 bits
Default value
0.0
Most positive number
1.7976931348623158 e +308
652
Appendix B
Data Types
Attribute
Description
Least positive number
4.9406564584124654 e 324
Least negative number
4.9406564584124654 e 324
Most negative number
1.7976931348623158 e +308
Infinity or HUGE
+Infinity or HUGE
Gradual Underflow for LREAL Data Types

In PCs and controllers, the floating-point implementation includes a standard feature called
gradual underflow that extends the range for an LREAL number and gradually changes the
precision as values approach zero.
This table compares the values obtained when gradual underflow is not present, to the values
obtained when it is present.
Without Gradual Underflow
With Gradual Underflow
The smallest positive number that can be

stored in an LREAL variable is:
The smallest positive number that can be stored in

an LREAL variable is:
21022 = 2.2250738585072014E308.
21074 = 4.9406564584124654E324.
The precision changes abruptly from 17 digits

to 0 digits when the value changes from a
number greater than 21023 to a number less
than 21023.
The precision changes gradually from 17 digits to 1

digit as the value changes from
21023 to 21074.
The maximum relative error changes abruptly

from 253 to 1 when the value changes from a
number greater than 21023 to a number less
than 21023.
The maximum relative error changes gradually from

253 to 1 as the value changes from 21023 to 21074.
For values from 21075 to 21022, the maximum

absolute error equals the value.

absolute error is a constant 21075.
This table shows how the precision changes as LREAL numbers approach zero.
If |x| Is Greater Than:
Then the Precision Is Greater Than:
5.0E308
17 digits
5.0E309
16 digits
5.0E310
15 digits
5.0E322
3 digits
5.0E323
2 digits
5.0E324
1 digits
Then the Precision Is Greater Than:
0.0
0 digits
653
Absolute error is the absolute value of x a, where x is the exact value and a is the actual value
stored.
Relative error is the absolute value of (x a)/x, where x is the exact value and a is the actual value
stored.
This table shows how gradual underflow affects absolute error and relative error as LREAL
numbers approach zero.
Range
Maximum
Absolute Error
Maximum Relative
Error
0 < |x| 21075
|x|
21075 < |x| 21022
21075
21075 / |x|
21022 |x| < 21024 2972
253 * |x|
253
Application Notes
REAL Data Type

A REAL data type is 32 bits in length and has 6 decimal digits of precision. In TriStation 1131,
the REAL data type follows the IEC-559 Standard Floating-Point format.
Attribute
Description
Keyword/type
REAL
Description
Real number
Size
32 bits
Default value
0.0
Most positive number
3.402823466 e +38
Least positive number
1.401298464 e 45
Least negative number
1.401298464 e 45
Most negative number
3.402823466 e +38
Infinity or HUGE
+Infinity or HUGE
654
Appendix B
Data Types
Gradual Underflow for REAL Data Types

In PCs and safety controllers, the floating-point implementation includes a standard feature
called gradual underflow. This feature extends the range of a REAL number and gradually
changes the precision as values approach zero.
This table compares the values obtained when gradual underflow is not present, to the values
obtained when it is present.
Without Gradual Underflow
With Underflow
The smallest positive number that can be stored

in a REAL variable is:
The smallest positive number that can be stored in

a REAL variable is:
2149 = 1.401298464E45.
2126 = 1.175494351E-38.
The precision changes abruptly from 7 digits to 0
digits when the value changes from a number
greater than 2127 to a number less than 2127.
The precision changes gradually from 7 digits to 1

digit as the value changes from 2127 to 2149.
The maximum relative error changes abruptly

from 224 to 1 when the value changes from a
number greater than 2127 to a number less than
2127.
The maximum relative error changes gradually

from 224 to 1 as the value changes from 2127 to
2149.

absolute error equals the value.

absolute error is a constant 2150.
This table shows how the precision changes as numbers approach zero.
Then the Precision Is

Greater Than:
1.5E39
7 digits
1.5E40
6 digits
1.5E41
5 digits
1.5E42
4 digits
1.5E43
3 digits
1.5E44
2 digits
1.5E45
1 digits
0.0
0 digits
Absolute error is the absolute value of x a, where x is the exact value and a is the actual value
stored.
Relative error is the absolute value of (x a)/x, where x is the exact value and a is the actual value
stored.
This table shows how gradual underflow affects absolute error and relative error as REAL
numbers approach zero.
Range
Maximum
Absolute Error
Maximum
Relative Error
0 < |x| 2150
|x|
2150 < |x| 2126
2150
2150 / |x|
2126 |x| < 2128 2103
224 * |x|
224
655
Application Notes
STRING Data Type

A STRING data type is an alphanumeric sequence, up to 132 characters in length, which is
delimited by single quotation marks ( ' ). The count of 132 characters does not include the null
terminator or the single quotation mark.
A STRING data type cannot be used as a program input or output.
Attribute
Description
Keyword/type
STRING
Description
Character string
Size
136 bytes
Default Value
Empty string (two single quotation marks not

separated by any characters)
Lower limit
0 characters
Upper limit
132 characters
Result if intermediate value is less than lower

limit
Truncated string
Result if upper limit is less than intermediate

value
N/A
Application Notes
656
Appendix B
Data Types
TIME Data Type

A TIME data type refers to a period of time (duration) in days, hours, minutes, seconds, and
milliseconds. The range is 9999 years and the precision is 0.1 milliseconds.
A TIME data type cannot be used as a program input or output.
Attribute
Description
Keyword/type
TIME
Description
Duration
Size
64 bits
Syntax
TIME#11d
or
TIME#22.2h
or
TIME#33.3m
or
TIME#44.4s
or
TIME#55.5ms
or
TIME#11d22h33m44s55.5ms
or
T#11d22h33m44s55.5ms
or
T#44.4s
Default value
TIME#0S
Lower limit
TIME#-3652134d
Upper limit
TIME#3652134d
Inv Time
Inv Time
Application Notes
657
TOD Data Type

A TOD data type refers to a specific time of day expressed in hours, minutes, seconds, and
fractions (FFF) of a second. The precision is 0.001 seconds.
A TOD data type cannot be used as a program input or output.
Attribute
Description
Keyword/type
TOD
Description
Time of day
Size
64 bits
Syntax
TOD#HH:MM:SS
or
TOD#HH:MM:SS.FFF
or
TIME_OF_DAY#HH:MM:SS
Default value
TOD#00:00:00
Lower limit
TOD#00:00:00
Upper limit
TOD#23:59:59.999
V modulo 24 hours
V modulo 24 hours
Application Notes
658
Appendix B
Data Types
Generic Data Types

Generic data types, identified by the prefix ANY, are used exclusively in the functions and
function blocks that are available in the TriStation Standard Library.
If a function specifies a generic data type for an argument, then the argument type must be one
of the data types represented by that generic data type. If a function specifies one generic data
type for more than one argument, then all such arguments must have the same data type.
For example, the function ADD specifies type ANY_NUM for all arguments and the return
value. You can add two double integers, or two integers, or two long real numbers, or two real
numbers, but you cannot add a real number to a long real number.
The TriStation generic data types are based on the IEC 61131-3 standard. The hierarchy for them
is shown in this figure.
Figure 43
Generic Data Types Hierarchy
This table lists the meaning of each generic data type and the standard data types it represents.
Table 60
Generic Data Types
Data Type
Standard Data Type Represented
ANY
Any of the standard data types: BOOL, DATE, DINT, DT, DWORD, INT, LREAL,
REAL, STRING, TIME, TOD, or Derived
ANY_NUM
Any number: DINT, INT, LREAL, or REAL
ANY_REAL
Any real number: LREAL or REAL
ANY_INT
Any integer: DINT or INT
ANY_BIT
Any bitwise data type: BOOL or DWORD
ANY_DATE
Any date or time of day or both: DATE, DT, or TOD
ANY_NOTE1
Any elementary data type: BOOL, DATE, DINT, DT, DWORD, INT, LREAL,
REAL, STRING, TIME, or TOD. Note that each of these types is ordered so that
values of the same type can be compared (see functions EQ, GE, GT, LE, LT, NE,
MIN, and MAX).
C
TCM Model 4351/4352 Configuration
Overview 660
Configuring TCM Ports 661
Using a Tricon TCM to Synchronize Time 673
Configuring a Tricon TCM Printer Port for Printing 678
660
Appendix C
Overview
If you have an older model 4351 or 4352 TCM installed in your system, some of the
configuration options are different than those for later model TCMs (models 4351A, 4352A,
4351B, 4352B, 4353, and 4354).
Note
Model 4351 and 4352 TCMs can be installed only in Tricon v10.0.x systems. Tricon v10.1
and later systems do not support the model 4351 and 4352 TCMs.
The procedures in this appendix apply specifically to configuring the ports on the model 4351
or 4352 TCM, and should be followed in place of the TCM configuration procedures provided
in Chapters 3 and 5 of this guide.
If you have a model 4351A, 4352A, 4351B, 4352B, 4353, or 4354 TCM, do not use the procedures
in this appendix. You should instead use the information found in the following sections:
Configuring TCM Ports on page 278
Using a Tricon TCM to Synchronize Time on page 303
Configuring a Tricon TCM Port for Printing on page 397
661

A single Tricon v10.0.x system supports a maximum of four TCMs, which must reside in two
logical slots.
Model 4351 and 4352 TCMs can be installed only in Tricon v10.0.x systems.
Model 4351/4352 TCMs cannot be installed in a system that also has 4351A/4352A or
4351B/4352B TCMs installed, even if they are installed in different chassis.
Model 4351/4352 TCMs cannot be installed in Tricon v9.x or earlier systems, or in

Tricon v10.1.x and later systems.
See the Planning and Installation Guide for Tricon v9-v10 Systems for detailed TCM installation
guidelines. For more detailed compatibility information, please see the Product Release Notice for
your Tricon system version.
TCM models 4351 (Copper)/4352 (Fiber) support the following protocols on network and serial
ports.
Protocol
Network Ports
Serial Ports
TriStation
NET 2
Port 4
TSAA (UDP/IP)
NET 2
NET 1
Peer-to-Peer (DLC)
NET 1
Any port
Modbus Master (RTU)
Any port
NET 2
Port 1

Triconex Time Synchronization via DLC or UDP/IP
NET 1
NET 2
NET 2
Note
Invensys recommends configuring a serial connection to the TCM first, because it is less
complex and easier to successfully connect to the TCM through the serial port.
Once you have successfully connected to the TCM and downloaded the initial
configuration to the Tricon, you can go back and configure the more complex network
connection, without worrying about losing the ability to communicate with the
controller altogether.
662
Appendix C
To configure specific types of ports, see these topics:
Configuring TCM Network Ports on page 665
Configuring TCM Modbus TCP Ports on page 669
Configuring TCM Routing on page 671
For additional information on configuring the TCM, see these topics:
Using a Tricon TCM to Synchronize Time on page 673 for instructions on configuring
the TCM to synchronize time.
Configuring a Tricon TCM Printer Port for Printing on page 678 for instructions on
configuring the TCM for use with a printer.
Changing TCM Models

Once TCM ports have been configured, but prior to downloading the configuration to the controller,
you can change the existing TCM model to a different model TCM without losing your port
settings (see Inserting and Removing Tricon Modules on page 265).
Only the following model changes will retain your port settings:
4351 to 4352
4352 to 4351
Any other TCM model changes will result in all port settings being reset to their default values.
However, once the configuration has been downloaded to the controller, you cannot change the
TCM model installed in the Tricon system without downloading a new configuration.
663
Configuring TCM Serial Ports

This procedure explains how to configure serial ports on a Tricon TCM.
Procedure
1

Allocation.
Click the Serial tab.

Property
Action
Port Selection
Click the port to be configured. Ports can be configured only

for a slot with an installed module.
Protocol

All ports can use Modbus Master, Modbus Slave ASCII,
Modbus Slave RTU.
Only port 1 can use GPS. This port is automatically
configured for GPS when you enable time
synchronization. See Using a Tricon TCM to Synchronize
Time on page 673.
664
Appendix C
5
Note
Property
Action
Port Write Enabled
Available only if Modbus Slave (ASCII or RTU) is selected as

the communication protocol. Select this check box if you
want to allow Modbus writes to this slave port. The default is

number of the Modbus slave device. The default is 1.
Baud Rate

9600.
Data Bits

Modbus Slave ASCII.
Stop Bits
Parity
Transceiver Mode
Select RS-485 or RS-232. The default is RS232. On port 4 when

TriStation is selected as the protocol, RS-485 is not available.
Handshake
Termination Options

available with RS-485 Transceiver Mode. The default is None.
FP Ordering

Determines whether the most significant bits in a32-bit
address are the first 16 (high) or the last 16 (low). The default
is Low 16 Bits First.
Modbus (Minimum and

Maximum) Range
Enter the minimum and maximum values to be used for the

Modbus data range. The default minimum is 0. The default
maximum is 32,767.
Master Logical Port
Enter the port number that the TCM will use in the Modbus
Master functions to access the port. Only available for
Modbus Master.

Even if port 4 is set to Not Configured (the default value), it can still be used to connect
to the Tricon controller via TriStation. This is useful when you are unable to connect via
a network connection.
665
Configuring TCM Network Ports

This procedure explains how to configure network ports on a Tricon TCM.
Procedure
1

Allocation.

Property
Action
Slot Selection
Select the slot where the TCM module you want to configure
is installed.
Not Installed,
Installed
Click Installed to enable configuration of the module. Clicking

Not Installed resets all options to their default state and makes
them unavailable for configuration. The default is Not
Installed.
Enable Network
Select the check box to enable the network port to be

configured.
666
Appendix C
Property
Action
Transceiver Mode

For a model 4352 with fiber connectors, the default is 100
Mbps Half Duplex. This TCM cannot negotiate the connection
speed or connect at 10 Mbps.
For a model 4351, the default is Auto-Negotiate.
IP Address
Enter the IP Address for the port. NET 1 and NET 2 cannot use
the same IP address. The default for NET 1 is 192.168.1.0; for
NET 2 is 192.168.1.1.
valid IP address.
IP Subnet Mask

255.255.255.0.
Default Gateway IP
Address

network router.
4
Note
TriStation
Configuration:
UDP Port Number
The UDP port to use for the TriStation connection. The default
is 1502. See UDP Base Port Number on page 632 for additional
information.
TSAA
Configuration:
UDP Port Number
The UDP port to use for TSAA connections, including DDE

Server, SOE Recorder, and OPC Server. The default is 1500.
See UDP Base Port Number on page 632 for additional
information.
Port Write Enabled
Select this check box if you want to allow TSAA writes to the
network ports. Applies to all TSAA connections on these
ports. The default is cleared (the ports are read-only).

close it, even if the IP address is changed via a Download Changes operation.
667
Configuring TCM Peer-To-Peer Ports

This procedure explains how to configure the IP address for controllers communicating on a
Peer-to-Peer network through a Tricon TCM.
Procedure
1

Allocation.
for.

Property
Action

communicated with on the Peer-to-Peer network. This must
be the same number that the controller uses as its UDP Base
Port Number.
IP Address
Click Update to apply the new settings for the selected node.
668
Appendix C
Note
8
Property
Action
Enter the UDP base port number for the controller. Enter 0 to
disable Peer-to-Peer over UDP/IP on the network.
The default is 1503. UDP port numbers must be unique. See
UDP Base Port Number on page 632 for reserved values.
with Tricon V8 and V9
Peer-to-Peer Systems on
NET 1
Select the check box to enable communication with Tricon

version 8 and 9 systems. The default is cleared. Available only
for a module installed in the left slot.
669
Configuring TCM Modbus TCP Ports

This procedure explains how to configure Modbus TCP ports on a Tricon TCM, which enables
Modbus communication through network ports.
Procedure
1

Allocation.
for.

Property
Action
Protocol

Port Write Enabled

communication protocol. Select this check box if you want to
allow Modbus writes to this slave port. The default is cleared
(the port is read-only).
Master Logical Port
Enter the number of the Modbus Master node. Available

only with Modbus TCP Master protocol. Must be unique for
each TCM installed in a system.
670
Appendix C
Property
Action
TCP Port Number
IP Address

If the port uses Modbus Slave protocol, enter either of these:
To accept communication only from a defined Modbus
Master, enter the specific master IP address.
FP Ordering
Select the ordering to use for floating point numbers.
Modbus (Minimum
and Maximum) Range
Enter the minimum and maximum for the modbus data

range. Available only with Modbus TCP Slave Net.
671
Configuring TCM Routing

This procedure explains how to configure routing on a Tricon TCM. Up to 10 different routes
can be configured for each module.
Procedure
1

Allocation.

Property
Action
Destination IP
Address
Enter the IP address which is used if the controller is not on

the same subnet as other devices.
Destination IP
Subnet Mask

If the gateway address is on NET 2, then the subnet mask
Network tab. If the gateway address is on NET 1, then the
subnet mask must be the same as the NET 1 subnet mask
defined on the Network tab. See Configuring TCM Network
Ports on page 665.
672
Appendix C
Property
Action
Destination
Gateway IP
Address

NET 2.
Click Update Destination to apply the settings. If necessary, click Reset All to reset all
destination settings for the selected slot to their default, unconfigured state.
673

This procedure explains how to enable time synchronization on a TCM. Time synchronization
can be enabled using the following protocols:
GPS
SNTP
Triconex Time Synchronization via DLC or UDP/IP on a Peer-to-Peer network
In a redundant network of Tricon controllers that each have two TCMs installed, you can
implement redundant time synchronization by configuring time synchronization for both TCM
modules (both left and right slots). Time synchronization can be enabled only for a single logical
slot.
If the TCM is installed in the COM slot, you configure time synchronization only for the left slot
(there is no redundancy when installed in the COM slot).
Topics include:
Configuring Triconex Time Synchronization on the TCM on page 677
Configuring GPS Time Synchronization on the TCM

This procedure explains how to configure a TCM to enable time synchronization through the
Global Positioning System (GPS) by using the Trimble Acutime Gold Smart GPS Antenna. For
information on installing the kit, see the Communication Guide for Tricon v9-v10 Systems.
CAUTION
synchronizes time with the GPS, and any slave nodes on the Peer-to-Peer network synchronize
their time with the master TCM. In this way, all nodes on the Peer-to-Peer network are
synchronized with GPS time.
If the TCM is acting as a slave node on a Peer-to-Peer network, it cannot be configured for GPS
GPS time synchronization uses Serial Port 1 on the TCM.
Procedure
1

Allocation.
674
Appendix C
Under Time Synchronization Configuration, select GPS.

If you previously configured Port 1 to use a Modbus protocol, selecting GPS will reset
Port 1 to use the GPS protocol. See Configuring TCM Peer-To-Peer Ports on page 667 for
more information.
click Right Slot, and then select GPS Redundant.
Note
has already been configured for GPS time synchronization.
1
675
Configuring SNTP Time Synchronization on the TCM

This procedure explains how to configure TCM time synchronization to an SNTP server.
synchronize their time with the master TCM. In this way, all nodes on the Peer-to-Peer network
If the TCM is acting as a slave node on a Peer-to-Peer network, it cannot be configured for SNTP
Note
SNTP time synchronization is less accurate than GPS time synchronization. Because the
SNTP server resides on a PC, network load issues or PC performance can result in delays
in processing time update requests from the Tricon controller.
Procedure
1

Allocation.
676
Appendix C
Property
Action
Configuration
Enter the IP address of the SNTP server to synchronize time

with.
Property
Action
Configuration
Enter the IP address of the SNTP server to synchronize time

with.
Note
has already been configured for SNTP time synchronization.
1
677
Configuring Triconex Time Synchronization on the TCM

master node.
The master node can also synchronize its time with a GPS or an SNTP server. In this
configuration, the master node synchronizes time with the GPS or SNTP server, and any slave
nodes on the Peer-to-Peer network synchronize their time with the master node. In this way, all
nodes on the Peer-to-Peer network are synchronized with GPS or SNTP time.
Configuring a Master or Slave Node

This procedure describes how to configure the TCM as a master or slave node on the Peer-toPeer network when GPS or SNTP time synchronization is not being used.
If you want the master node to synchronize to a GPS or SNTP server, use the procedures in the
these sections:
Procedure
1

Allocation.
Select the Peer-to-Peer Time Synchronization Enabled check box to enable Triconex
Time Synchronization across the Peer-to-Peer network.

678
Appendix C
Configuring a Tricon TCM Printer Port for Printing

This procedure explains how to configure a Tricon TCM port that is connected to a Centronicscompatible printer. You do not need the printer driver that may have come with the printer
package. See Configuring Tricon Controller Printing on page 392 for more information about
printing from the Tricon controller.
Procedure
1

Allocation.
Property
Action
Printer Number
Enter the number for the printer; can only be 5 or 10. The default
is 0, meaning a printer is not configured.
Line Width
Enter the number of characters to be printed on a line. The default

is 80 characters.
TCP Port Number
Enter the number of the TCP port for the print server. The default
is 9100 for an HP printer.
IP Address
Enter the IP address of the printer server.
D
Reserved Names
Names Reserved by TriStation 1131 680

Names Reserved by SQL 688
680
Appendix D
Reserved Names
Names Reserved by TriStation 1131

This section lists all names reserved by TriStation 1131. These reserved names cannot be used to
name variables, tagnames, custom function block names, programs, or program instances.
Names are not case-sensitive. For example, TriStation 1131 reserves all of the following names:
AT, At, aT, at
TriStation 1131 Reserved Names

.*
AT
_*
ATAN
ABS
BECOMES
ACOS
BLINK
ACTION
BLINK_I
ADD
BLINK_R
AIN
BOOL
AIN_BP
BOOL_TO_BYTE
AIN_BP12
BOOL_TO_DWORD
AIN_HR
BOOL_TO_STRING
AND
BOOL_TO_WORD
ANY
BY
ANY_BIT
BYTE
ANY_DATE
BYTE_TO_BOOL
ANY_INT
BYTE_TO_DWORD
ANY_NOTE1
BYTE_TO_WORD
ANY_NUM
C##B
ANY_REAL
C##F#
AOUT
CASE
AOUT_BP12
CEIL
ARRAY
CHK_ERR
ARRAY32_BOOL
CLR_ERR
ARRAY32_DINT
CONCAT
ARRAY32_REAL
CONCAT_DT
ASIN
CONCAT_STRING
ASSIGN
CONFIGURATION
681
TriStation 1131 Reserved Names (continued)

CONSTANT
DATE_AND_TIME
COS
DDEC
CSCHED
DEBUG_MODVARS
CSCHED_I
DELETE
CSCHED_R
DINC
CTD
DINT
CTU
DINT_TO_DWORD
CTUD
DINT_TO_INT
D_ADD
DINT_TO_LREAL
D_CMP
DINT_TO_REAL
D_CMPE
DINT_TO_SINT
D_DIV
DINT_TO_STRING
D_DTOF
DINT_TO_UDINT
D_DTOI
DINT_TO_UINT
D_DTOLL
DINT_TO_USINT
D_DTOQ
DIV
D_DTOU
DO
D_DTOULL
DPFABS
D_FEQ
DT
D_FGE
DT_TO_DATE
D_FGT
DT_TO_TOD
D_FLE
DWORD
D_FLT
DWORD_TO_BOOL
D_FNE
DWORD_TO_BYTE
D_ITOD
DWORD_TO_DINT
D_LLTOD
DWORD_TO_WORD
D_MUL
E##B
D_NEG
E##C##B
D_QTOD
E##C##F
D_SUB
E##F#
D_ULLTOD
ELSE
D_UTOD
ELSIF
DATE
EN
682
Appendix D
Reserved Names

END_ACTION
F_FLT
END_CASE
F_FNE
END_CONFIGURATION
F_FTOD
END_FOR
F_FTOI
END_FUNCTION
F_FTOLL
END_FUNCTION_BLOCK
F_FTOQ
END_IF
F_FTOU
END_PROGRAM
F_FTOULL
END_REPEAT
F_ITOF
END_RESOURCE
F_LLTOF
END_STEP
F_MUL
END_STRUCT
F_NEG
END_TRANSITION
F_QTOF
END_TYPE
F_SUB
END_VAR
F_TRIG
END_WHILE
F_ULLTOF
ENO
F_UTOF
EQ
FALSE
ERRNO
FDEC
EXIT
FINC
EXP
FIND
EXPFLTR
FLOOR
EXPT
FOR
EXTERN
FP_ROUND
F_ADD
FPFABS
F_CMP
FROM
F_CMPE
FUNCTION
F_DIV
FUNCTION_BLOCK
F_EDGE
GASDETR
F_FEQ
GATDIS
F_FGE
GATENB
F_FGT
GE
F_FLE
GETDELTA_DINT
683

GETDELTA_REAL
LESSEQUAL
GETDELTAT
LIMIT
GETTIMER
LINEMNTR
GREATEREQUAL
LINT
GT
LN
IDENT
LOG
IF
LOOPDETR
INFINITY_LREAL
LPT05BUF
INFINITY_REAL
LPT10BUF
INITIAL_STEP
LREAL
INSERT
LREAL_TO_DINT
INT
LREAL_TO_INT
INT_TO_DINT
LREAL_TO_REAL
INT_TO_LREAL
LREAL_TO_SINT
INT_TO_REAL
LREAL_TO_UDINT
INT_TO_SINT
LREAL_TO_UINT
INT_TO_STRING
LREAL_TO_USINT
INT_TO_UDINT
LSX_CLEAR_ALL_FAULTS
INT_TO_UINT
LSX_DI_POINT
INT_TO_USINT
LSX_II_POINT
INTERNAL
LSX_RI_POINT
INTGTOR
LT
INTGTOR_R
LWORD
ISFINITE_LREAL
MAX
ISFINITE_REAL
MBCTRL
ISNAN_LREAL
MBREAD_BOOL
ISNAN_REAL
MBREAD_DINT
L_EDGE
MBREAD_REAL
LE
MBREAD_REAL_TRD
LEADLAG
MBWRITE_BOOL
LEADLAG_R
MBWRITE_DINT
LEFT
MBWRITE_REAL
LEN
MBWRITE_REAL_TRD
684
Appendix D
Reserved Names

MEDSEL
PRINT_CRLF
MID
PRINT_CTOD
MIN
PRINT_DINT
MINUS_INFINITY_LREAL
PRINT_REAL
MINUS_INFINITY_REAL
PRINT_STRING
MOD
PRIORITY
MOVE
PRNTR_FLUSH
MUL
PROGRAM
MUX
R_EDGE
NAN_LREAL
R_TRIG
NAN_REAL
READ_ONLY
NE
READ_WRITE
NEG
READ_WRT
NIL
REAL
NOT
REAL_TO_DINT
NOTEQUAL
REAL_TO_INT
NUMBITS
REAL_TO_LREAL
NUMBITS_DWORD
REAL_TO_SINT
OF
REAL_TO_UDINT
ON
REAL_TO_UINT
OR
REAL_TO_USINT
OVDDISABLE
REPEAT
OVDENABLE
REPLACE
PACK16
REPORT_BAD_PARAM
PACK32
REPORTBADPARAM
PAGE_EJECT
RESOURCE
PERDEV
RETAIN
PID
RETURN
PID_R
RIGHT
POLY4
ROL
POLY5
ROR
PRINT_BOOL
RS
PRINT_CDT
RTC
685

SCALE
SYS_DI16_AI16_STATUS
SEL
SYS_DI32_STATUS
SEMA
SYS_DO16_STATUS
SET_ERR
SYS_EPI06_STATUS
SHL
SYS_HRDI32_STATUS
SHR
SYS_II_POINT
SIN
SYS_IO_STATUS
SINGLE
SYS_IOP_STATUS
SINT
SYS_MP_EXT_STATUS
SINT_TO_DINT
SYS_MP_RESET_PORTS
SINT_TO_INT
SYS_MP_STATUS
SINT_TO_LREAL
SYS_OVD_INHIBIT
SINT_TO_REAL
SYS_PI06_STATUS
SINT_TO_UDINT
SYS_RI_POINT
SINT_TO_UINT
SYS_RO32_STATUS
SINT_TO_USINT
SYS_SDO16_STATUS
SOECLR
SYS_SERIAL_PORT
SOESTAT
SYS_SET_APP_LOCK
SOESTOP
SYS_SET_PROG_ALARM
SOESTRT
SYS_SET_REMOTE_WRT_ENBL
SQRT
SYS_SHUTDOWN
SR
SYS_SYSTEM_STATUS
STEP
SYS_VOTE_MODE
STRING
TAN
STRUCT
TASK
SUB
TCJ_CONV
SYS_AI32_STATUS
TCK_CONV
SYS_AO04_STATUS
TDD_I
SYS_APP_HALT
TDD_R
SYS_CLEAR_FLTS
TDE_I
SYS_CM_STATUS
TDE_R
SYS_CRITICAL_IO
THEN
SYS_DI_POINT
TIME
686
Appendix D
Reserved Names

TIME_OF_DAY
TR_URCV_BOOL
TIME_TO_LREAL
TR_URCV_DINT
TIME_TO_SECS
TR_URCV_DINT_32
TIME_TO_SECS_REAL
TR_URCV_REAL
TIMEADJ
TR_URCV_REAL_32
TIMESET
TR_USEND_BOOL
TMR
TR_USEND_DINT
TMR_I
TR_USEND_DINT_32
TMR_R
TR_USEND_REAL
TO
TR_USEND_REAL_32
TOD
TR_VOTE_MODE
TOF
TRANSITION
TOGGLE
TRUNC_*_TO_*
TON
TRUNC_LREAL_TO_DINT
TP
TRUNC_LREAL_TO_INT
TP_I
TRUNC_LREAL_TO_SINT
TP_R
TRUNC_LREAL_TO_UDINT
TRUE
TRUNC_LREAL_TO_UINT
TR_64_POINT_STATUS
TRUNC_LREAL_TO_USINT
TR_CALENDAR
TRUNC_REAL_TO_DINT
TR_CHASSIS_STATUS
TRUNC_REAL_TO_INT
TR_CRITICAL_IO
TRUNC_REAL_TO_SINT
TR_LOG_EVENT
TRUNC_REAL_TO_UDINT
TR_LOG_EVENT_DINT
TRUNC_REAL_TO_UINT
TR_LOG_EVENT_DWORDS
TRUNC_REAL_TO_USINT
TR_MP_STATUS
TSCHED
TR_PEER_STATUS
TSCHED_I
TR_POINT_STATUS
TSCHED_R
TR_PORT_STATUS
TYPE
TR_PROGRAM_STATUS
UDINT
TR_SCAN_STATUS
UDINT_TO_DINT
TR_SHUTDOWN
UDINT_TO_INT
TR_SLOT_STATUS
UDINT_TO_LREAL
687

UDINT_TO_REAL
WHILE
UDINT_TO_SINT
WITH
UDINT_TO_UINT
WORD
UDINT_TO_USINT
WORD_TO_BOOL
UINT
WORD_TO_BYTE
UINT_TO_DINT
WORD_TO_DWORD
UINT_TO_INT
X_OF_N
UINT_TO_LREAL
XOR
UINT_TO_REAL
UINT_TO_SINT
UINT_TO_UDINT
UINT_TO_USINT
ULINT
UNPACK16
UNPACK32
UNTIL
UPTO
USINT
USINT_TO_DINT
USINT_TO_INT
USINT_TO_LREAL
USINT_TO_REAL
USINT_TO_SINT
USINT_TO_UDINT
USINT_TO_UINT
VAR
VAR_ACCESS
VAR_EXTERNAL
VAR_GLOBAL
VAR_IN_OUT
VAR_INPUT
VAR_OUTPUT
VAR_TEMP
688
Appendix D
Reserved Names
Names Reserved by SQL

This section lists names that should not be used to name data files when exporting tagnames to
Microsoft Excel (.xls) files. Using a reserved name results in the following error message:
If you receive this error message when exporting tagnames to Microsoft Excel files, check the
list to see if the name used is reserved. If the name is reserved, use a different name for exporting
tagnames.
For information on how to export tagnames, see Importing and Exporting Tagnames on
page 189.
Names are not case-sensitive. For example, all of the following words are reserved:
AS, As, aS, as
SQL Reserved Names

ABSOLUTE
AT
ACTION
AUTHORIZATION
ADA
AVG
ADD
BEGIN
ALL
BETWEEN
ALLOCATE
BIT
ALTER
BIT_LENGTH
AND
BOTH
ANY
BY
ARE
CASCADE
AS
CASCADED
ASC
CASE
ASSERTION
CAST
689
SQL Reserved Names (continued)

CATALOG
DECLARE
CHAR
DEFAULT
CHAR_LENGTH
DEFERRABLE
CHARACTER
DEFERRED
CHARACTER_LENGTH
DELETE
CHECK
DESC
CLOSE
DESCRIBE
COALESCE
DESCRIPTOR
COLLATE
DIAGNOSTICS
COLLATION
DISCONNECT
COLUMN
DISTINCT
COMMIT
DOMAIN
CONNECT
DOUBLE
CONNECTION
DROP
CONSTRAINT
ELSE
CONSTRAINTS
END
CONTINUE
END-EXEC
CONVERT
ESCAPE
CORRESPONDING
EXCEPT
COUNT
EXCEPTION
CREATE
EXEC
CROSS
EXECUTE
CURRENT
EXISTS
CURRENT_DATE
EXTERNAL
CURRENT_TIME
EXTRACT
CURRENT_TIMESTAMP
FALSE
CURRENT_USER
FETCH
CURSOR
FIRST
DATE
FLOAT
DAY
FOR
DEALLOCATE
FOREIGN
DEC
FORTRAN
DECIMAL
FOUND
690
Appendix D
Reserved Names

FROM
LEFT
FULL
LEVEL
GET
LIKE
GLOBAL
LOCAL
GO
LOWER
GOTO
MATCH
GRANT
MAX
GROUP
MIN
HAVING
MINUTE
HOUR
MODULE
IDENTITY
MONTH
IMMEDIATE
NAMES
IN
NATIONAL
INCLUDE
NATURAL
INDEX
NCHAR
INDICATOR
NEXT
INITIALLY
NO
INNER
NONE
INPUT
NOT
INSENSITIVE
NULL
INSERT
NULLIF
INT
NUMERIC
INTEGER
OCTET_LENGTH
INTERSECT
OF
INTERVAL
ON
INTO
ONLY
IS
OPEN
ISOLATION
OPTION
JOIN
OR
KEY
ORDER
LANGUAGE
OUTER
LAST
OUTPUT
LEADING
OVERLAPS
691

PAD
SQL
PARTIAL
SQLCA
PASCAL
SQLCODE
POSITION
SQLERROR
PRECISION
SQLSTATE
PREPARE
SQLWARNING
PRESERVE
SUBSTRING
PRIMARY
SUM
PRIOR
SYSTEM_USER
PRIVILEGES
TABLE
PROCEDURE
TEMPORARY
PUBLIC
THEN
READ
TIME
REAL
TIMESTAMP
REFERENCES
TIMEZONE_HOUR
RELATIVE
TIMEZONE_MINUTE
RESTRICT
TO
REVOKE
TRAILING
RIGHT
TRANSACTION
ROLLBACK
TRANSLATE
ROWS
TRANSLATION
SCHEMA
TRIM
SCROLL
TRUE
SECOND
UNION
SECTION
UNIQUE
SELECT
UNKNOWN
SESSION
UPDATE
SESSION_USER
UPPER
SET
USAGE
SIZE
USER
SMALLINT
USING
SOME
VALUE
SPACE
VALUES
692
Appendix D
Reserved Names

VARCHAR
VARYING
VIEW
WHEN
WHENEVER
WHERE
WITH
WORK
WRITE
YEAR
ZONE
Index
A
access
changing element owner 115
operations 572
to TCM, controlling 386
to Tricon, restricting 229
to Trident CM, controlling 434
to Trident, restricting 234
to Tri-GP CM, controlling 434
to Tri-GP, restricting 234
user 54
aliases
assigning 174
special for Tricon 212
Alignment property 483
allocating memory points
Tricon 251
Trident 317
Tri-GP 317
allocation, Peer-to-Peer memory 221
Allow Disabling of Points property 230, 474, 483
access control list

See CM access list
See TCM access list
Allow Partial Changes to Libraries property 483
access levels
CM 435
TCM 387
Annotation on by Default property 484
access list
See CM access list
See TCM access list
access logs, user
clearing 67
exporting 65
options 66
saving 65
viewing 64
ACM, See Tricon ACM
actual scan time 466
Add File command 481
Add Program to Execution List command 481
adding
custom Help file 52
custom reports 82
libraries 74
users 59
adding logic sheets 121
admin user, Windows 64
AI modules, Tricon 266
ALARMS 68
Alias Number property 481
Alias Type property 482
AND or OR, description 531

Annotate property 484
annotations
adding in FBD and LD 200
adding macros to 202
adding to variables 465
Annotate property 484
Annotation on by Default property 484
Border property 488
default macros 506
specifying default 37
specifying in FBD and LD 165, 171
specifying properties 202
using macros 206
ANY data type 658
ANY_BIT data type 658
ANY_DATE data type 658
ANY_INT data type 658
ANY_NOTE1 data type 658
ANY_NUM data type 658
ANY_REAL data type 658
Append Sheet command 485
appending logic sheets 121, 485
application
access 229, 234
building 241, 489
change requirements 472
changing document owner 115
694
Index
application (continued)
comparing to last download 497
definition 102
development steps 99
Download All command 517
Download Changes command 518
execution order list 239
function block usage 127
parts 102
Peer-to-Peer 219
planning changes 471
rebuilding 241
run mode 596
safety and control 104
setting scan time 467
specifying Application Type 113
testing with Emulator 459
types of 485
BOOL
definition 648
specifying colors for monitoring 39
Border property 488
BPAO module 175
buffer, SOE 225
Build Application command 489
building an application 241, 489
C
CASE statement 139
Category property 489
Cause and Effect Matrix, see CEM language
Cause Effect Matrix Support property 490
Cause Header Functions On by Default property 490
Application Workspace 100
cells, CEM 153
application-defined states 150, 151
CEM editor
FBD Network overview 145
language settings 50
managing views 162
matrix overview 145
overview 144
properties 147
specifying colors for monitoring 149
Variable Detail Table overview 146
Apply command 486

array data type definition 133
attempts, login 27
attributes
documents 113
status 369
audit comments 32
authentication, user 28, 55
Auto Indent command 486
CEM Editor Options properties 491

CEM Element Options properties 491
Automatic collection, SOE 225
CEM language
about 108
editor properties 147
editor settings 50
auto-negotiate transceiver mode 627
CEM Monitor Colors property 490
Auto Name command 486

Auto Scroll Delay property 487
B
backing up
CM configuration 360
project file 5, 461, 487
TCM configuration 296
backup file (.bt2) generation, Emulator 43
Backup Project command 487
bad password error 29
banner text, security 78
Base Address property 487
Baud Rate property 488
bipolar input 267, 592
block selection, Foxboro I/A DCS 223
BNC connectors, terminating 380
CEM programs
default settings 147
deleting columns 156
deleting rows 157
element options 148
inserting columns 155
inserting rows 156
intermediate FBD or ST code 241
options 150
planning 142
resizing cells 154
saving views 162
selecting cells 153
size/hide columns 158
size/hide comments 160
size/hide rows 159
title block 161
CEMPLE, overview 142
Index
Centronics printing
setup 439
using a Tricon EICM port 392, 393
Change Colors command 491
Change Owner Command 492
Change State to Download All command 492
changing
library elements 77
logic sheet size 120
logic sheet title 122
password, user 60
security setting 55
Tricon system version 255
Trident system version 321
user logon name 60
chassis, Tricon
adding or deleting 262
configuration rules 262
high-density 262
low-density 262
power usage 264
target system version 12
Choose Another Tagname command 493
Clear History command 493
clearing user access logs 67
Client IP Address property 391, 438, 493
Client IP Subnet Mask property 391, 438
Client Protocols property 391, 438, 494
clock, setting for controller 602
695
code, intermediate FBD or ST 241

Coil Tool Command 495
Coil Type property 495
colors
Default Colors command 504
Drawing Item property 520
Enable Color Monitoring property 525
specifying for monitoring 39
columns
comment 160
deleting 508
inserting 155
sizing and hiding 158
tagnames table 183, 184
Comment Tool 496
comments
adding in FBD and LD 203
audit trail 32
Border property 488
Comment Tool 496
dropping elements 205, 520
editing macros in 206
enclosing logic 565
forced points 40
picking up elements 205
style 204
using macros 206
Communication command 496
Close Project command 495
Communication Modules for Modbus property 44, 496
CM
See Trident CM
See Tri-GP CM
Communication Modules for Peer-to-Peer property 44,

497
Compare Project to Last Downloaded command 497
CM access list
access levels 435
configuring 437
controller access 61
Deny Access 435
description 236
grouping clients 434
IP addresses 434
maximum number of entries 435
order of evaluation 437
permissions 435
protocols 435
Read Only 435
Read/Write 435
resources, defined 434
sample list 436
subnet mask, using 434
troubleshooting 413
compatibility, TCM embedded OPC server 224

Compile All User Documents command 498
Compile command 498
Compiler Warning When Right Rail is Missing
property 498
compiling programs 240
configuration
AI modules, Tricon 266
changing Tricon modules 265
CM protocols 358
DO modules, Tricon 267
inserting Trident modules 334
inserting Tri-GP modules 334
Modbus, Emulator 44
Peer-to-Peer 221
Peer-to-Peer, Emulator 44
696
Index
configuration (continued)
removing Trident modules 335
removing Tri-GP modules 335
steps for controller 246, 312
target system version, Tricon 252
target system version, Trident 318
target system version, Tri-GP 318
TCM protocols 292
tree 247, 313
Tricon operating parameters 249
Trident operating parameters 315
Tri-GP operating parameters 315
copying (continued)
ST code 130
CTS Pre-Delay setting 608
Current Version property 502
custom Help files, See Help files, custom
custom reports 82
customer support xv
Cut command 502
Cyber Security, NERC 7, 60, 64
Connect command 499
constants
creating in FBD and LD 170
specifying in CEM 152
VAR CONSTANT 134
Data Bits property 502
Contact command 499

Contact Type property 500
Continuous Refresh command 500
control application, defined 485
controller
access 229, 234
adding and deleting a Tricon chassis 262
allocating Peer-to-Peer memory 221
changing target system version, Tricon 255
changing target system version, Trident 321
chassis types, Tricon 262
configuration 103
configuration checklist 246, 312
configuring Trident 1.x MP 330
configuring Trident 2.x MP 331
configuring Tri-GP MP 331
Connect command 499
download state changes 462
downloading to 460
program execution 464
project version after download 33, 461
restricting access to Tricon 229
restricting access to Trident 234
restricting access to Tri-GP 234
testing application on 460
tree 247, 313
Tricon chassis power usage 264
variables 463, 465
workspace 247, 313
converting projects to v4.8.0 11
Copy command 501
Copy Current Setup to Other Serial Ports command 501
copying
documents 110
SOE configuration 222
Data Files property 503

data transfer time, Peer-to-Peer 219, 220
Data Type property 503
data types
array 133
BOOL 648
creating 109
DATE 648
definition 103
DINT 649
DT 649
DWORD 650
elementary 647
enumeration 132
generic 658
INT 651
LREAL 651
REAL 653
STRING 655
structured 134
TIME 656
TOD 657
user-defined 163
databases, reports 83
date and time data type 649
DATE data type 648
DCS, time synchronization 299
dead time, SOE 338
debounce period, Trident HRDI 338
debounce period, Tri-GP HRDI 338
Declaration Tree 101
Declarations command 504
default
connection type, Tricon 385
connection type, Trident 433
connection type, Tri-GP 433
gateway, Trident CM 451
Index
disabled points
re-enabling 476
viewing 476
default (continued)
gateway, Tri-GP CM 451
IP address, Tricon 400
IP address, Trident 447
IP address, Trident 2.x 411
IP address, Tri-GP 411, 447
security banner text 8
security setting 11, 55
disabled points, maximum 474
Default Colors command 504
Display Report command 514
Default Connection property 505
Display Tabular View command 515
Default Gateway IP Address property 505
DLC protocol, installing 408
Default Language property 506
DO modules, configuring 267
Default Macros or Text property 506
DO Point Options property 268, 515
Default Number of Cause Rows property 507
Document Access property 114, 516
Default Number of Effect Columns property 508
Document Type property 516
definition file, SOE 43
documents
attributes 113
changing owner 115
copying 110
creating 109
printing 91
restricting access 114
summary information 112
version number 33
Delete Columns command 508

Delete command 508
Delete Rows command 508
Delete Sheet command 509
Delete Unreferenced Tagnames command 509
deleting
columns 156
libraries 76
logic sheets 121
rows 157
tagnames 182
unused tagnames 188
description
project 31
using the %DESCRIPTION macro 509
disabling points 230, 474475

Disconnect command 514
Display Program Document command 514
domain authentication, Windows 28, 55

Double Space Function Block Terminals by Default
property 517
Double Space property 516
downgrading target system version
Tricon 255
Trident 321
Destination IP Address 509
download 15
options 41
state 11, 16, 74, 75, 462, 492
to controller 460
Destination IP Subnet property 510
download aborted message 43
Destination UDP Port property 511
Download All
command 460, 517
procedure 480
Description property 509

Destination Gateway IP Address property 510
development steps 99
Differential AI Input Type property 267, 511
digital output points, specifying fault detection 515
DINT data type 649
directories, TriStation 1131 46
Disable OVD on All Modules command 512
Disable OVD on Module... command 512
Disable Remote Changes to Outputs property 513
Disable Scaling property 513
Disable Stop on Keyswitch property 513
697
Download Changes
command 518
procedure 478
steps for 470
download state 462
Download Version property 519
downloaded project version 33, 462
downloaded version 461
downloading
disabled points, affect on 475
698
Index
downloading (continued)
project version changes after 462
timeout value 43
drawing colors
properties 47
Drop command 520
DT data type definition 649
DWORD data type 650
E
E_LD_EXP chassis 262
Edit Sheet Title command 521
Edit Title Block command 521
Edit...Macros command 521
Edit/View Source command 521
editors
CEM properties 50, 147
FBD properties 48
LD properties 49
using FBD 117
using LD 118
using ST 130
Enable All Disabled Points command 524

Enable Color Monitoring property 113, 525
Enable Communication with Tricon V8 and V9 Peer-toPeer Systems property 525
Enable Communication with Tricon V8, Tricon V9, and
Trident v1 Peer-to-Peer Systems property 525
Enable Effect Header Functions property 526
property 526
Enable Floating Text in Intersection Cells property 526
Enable Intersection functions property 527
Enable Macro Editing property 527
Enable Multiple Writes property 527
Enable OVD on All Modules command 528
Enable OVD on Module... command 528
Enable Tricon Node Time Synchronization
property 250, 529
Enable Trident Node Time Synchronization
property 316
Enable Trident/Tri-GP Node Time Synchronization
property 529
Enable UCN Test Mode property 529
Enabled Features property 530
enabling disabled points 476
Effect Cause Header Functions property 524
enhanced low-density chassis 12, 262
Effect Header Functions On by Default property 522
Enhanced Security
changing to 55
defined 54
login 28
login attempts 27
passwords for 60
user names, rules for 60
elementary data types 647

elements, library 77
Emulator
accessing 459
download state 462
file generation 43
help file 51
installing 6
instances of 43
options 42
project version after download 33, 461
project version, downloaded 462
testing application on 459
timeout value 43
using Modbus configuration 44
using Peer-to-Peer configuration 44
emulator, maximum number of POUs 102
Emulator File Generation property 43, 522
Emulator Timeout property 43, 522
EmulatorCount value 462
EN/ENO property 523
Enable Access List command 391, 438, 524
Enhanced Security property 530

Enlarge Font Size command 530
enumeration data type 132
EPI module, configuring 339
EPI Point Options properties 579
error messages
login 29
security banner text, saving 8
Evaluation Options property 531
evaluation options, CEMPLE matrix 148
evaluation order
CEMPLE matrix 143
CM access list 437
functions 119
TCM access list 390
Index
evaluation, order of 131

Event Viewer, Windows 64
Exactly Once setting 531
example projects 5
Excel, import tagname file 192
execution flow, monitoring 514
execution list 239
Exit command 532
Exit statement 138
Expand Macros property 532
Export CM Configuration command 532
Export command 532
Export Destination property 533
Export Format property 533
Export Report command 534
Export TCM Configuration command 532
exporting
project elements 69
reports, how to 82
tagnames, file format for 190
user access logs 65
fiber
communication mode, TCM 283, 285
required cables for TCM 381
Field Power Monitoring property 267, 535
Field Power property 535
file generation, Emulator 43
files
data file location 503
project 586
Find In Application command 536
Find Text command 536
Find Text Options 536
firewall
using with CM 351
using with TCM 285
first-time connection
Tricon 376
Trident 411, 412
Tri-GP 411, 412
floating-point underflow
for LREAL data types 652
for REAL data types 654
Font Size property 537
forced points, options for 40
expressions, ST language 131
forcing points 477
extensible functions, specifying 125
ForLoop statement 138
Formatted Name property 537

Foxboro I/A Series DCS 223
False Color property 534
FP Ordering property 537
False Severity property 534
Full Name property 538
False State Name property 534
full-duplex transceiver mode 627
FBD Editor options 534
Function Block command 538
FBD language
about 105
adding annotations 200
adding comments 203
annotation 165, 171
creating constants 170
creating variables 163
declaring variables 164
editor 117
EN/ENO property 523
intermediate code 241
selecting library elements 124
terminals 119
using macros 206
function blocks
definition 102
printing, Tricon 398
printing, Trident 445
printing, Tri-GP 445
properties 126
space saver setting 128
SYS_OVD_INHIBIT 335
VAR_IN_OUT parameters in 74
FBD Network, overview 145
699
functions
creating 109
definition 102
EN/ENO property 523
enabling for a matrix 50, 147
enabling for CEM 148
properties 125
700
Index
functions (continued)
using in FBD 124
history (continued)
saving 597
viewing 640
Honeywell TDC 3000 DCS 223
GCS xv
Horizontal Network Divider command 543
General Monitor Colors property 539
HRDI module, configuring 336
generic data types 658
hub, using for TCM connection 381
Global Customer Support xv

Global Positioning System Installed property 539
global variables, See Tagnames
Go To Cell command 539
I
I/A Series DCS 299
IDLE state 543
GPS
property 539
synchronization with NCMG 301
synchronization with TCM 303
IEC 61131-3 standard 658
gradual underflow
effect on absolute and relative error 653, 654
for LREAL data types 652
for REAL data types 654
implementation, application 456, 457

Import CM Configuration command 544
Group 1 and Group 2 property 539
Import TCM Configuration command 544
Guest account, Windows 30, 64
Halt command 540
importing
libraries 68
points 196
tagnames, file format for 190, 193
Handshake property 540
Include Monitor Value in Annotation property 544
Hardware Allocation command 541
incorrect parameter error 29
hardware allocation exceptions 468
inhibiting supervision, SDO 335
Hardware Module Configuration report 91
Initial Value property 544
HD_EXP chassis 262
initialization table 242243
HD_MAIN chassis 262
input, invert 548
HD_RXM chassis 262
Insert Columns command 545
Help files, custom

adding 52
description 51
format of 51
maximum number 51
removing 53
viewing 52
Insert From File command 545
H
half-duplex transceiver mode 627
Hide Causes Unrelated to Effects command 542

Hide Effects Unrelated to Causes command 542
high-density chassis
adding to Tricon system 262
Highest TCP Port Number property 542
history
clearing 493
IEC-559 Standard Floating-Point format 653

implementation information 104
Implementation Tree 101
Import command 543
Insert In/Out Variable command 546

Insert Input Variable command 545
Insert Local Variable command 546
Insert Module command 547
Insert Output Variable command 546
Insert Rows command 547
Insert Sheet command 547
Insert Tagname Declaration command 548
inserting logic sheets 121
installing
.NET framework 6
Emulator 6
installing TriStation 1131 6
Index
instance name, described 119

Instance Variable Connections report 91
instances, Emulator 43
INT data type 651
integers, scaling from REALs 213
intermediate FBD or ST code 241
Internal State setting 548
Intersection Functions On by Default 548
Invensys contact information xiv
Invensys GCS xv
Invert Input property 548
Invert Input/Output property 549
Invert Output property 549
IOP 12, 578
LD language (continued)
Contact Type property 500
creating constants 170
creating variables 163
declaring variables 164
editor 118
EN/ENO property 523
power rails 595
selecting library elements 124
terminals 119
using macros 206
LD_EXP chassis 262
LD_MAIN chassis 262
LD_RXM chassis 262
Left-Handed Link Tool 552
IP address
default, Tricon 400
default, Trident 447
default, Tri-GP 447
for CM network port 351
for TCM network port 283, 285
methods for setting 446
setting with a Tricon EICM or TCM 402
setting, Tricon 400
setting, Trident 446451
setting, Tri-GP 446451
Trident 2.x 430
Tri-GP 430
Left-Handed Wire Tool 552
IP Address property 550
library
documents, copying 111
elements, selecting 124
functions, application usage 127
IP Subnet Mask property 550
levels, user access 63

libraries
adding 74
default directory for 68
deleting 76
exporting elements 69
importing 68
partial changes to 77
TriStation 1131 68, 73
unregistered 79
updating 11, 75
version numbers of 79
keyswitch, disable stop 513
Library Documents report 91
Link command 553
language
Default Language property 506
setting default 36
Loc property 554
Line Width property 552

List Disabled Points command 476, 553
languages, See CEM, FBD, LD, and ST languages
local variables
declaring 137
LD Editor Options properties 552
Location property 554
LD language
about 106
adding comments 203
annotation 165, 171
Coil Type property 495
Compiler Warning When Right Rail is Missing
property 498
locking application elements 114
Language property 551
701
Log On As New User command 554

logging in 2729
logging in to a project 27
logic colors for drawings 47
logic sheets 120123
702
Index
login
access logs, viewing 64
attempts, number of 27
Enhanced Security 28
error messages 29
first time 28
Standard Security 28
troubleshooting 29
Windows Guest user 30
matrix
enabling functions 151
evaluation 143
evaluation options 148
FBD Network overview 145
overview 145
planning 142
resizing cells 154
Variable Detail Table overview 146
Logon Name property 555
Max Field property 558
logon name, changing 60

property 558
long reals, precision when approaching zero 652

loop power, NGDO 535
loop supervision 335
Maximum Number of Peer-to-Peer Sends property 559

Maximum RPM property 559
low-density chassis
adding to Tricon system 262
Maximum Speed property 559
Lowest TCP Port Number property 555
media converter 382
LREAL data type 651

LREAL numbers, precision when approaching zero 652
M
macros
%DESCRIPTION 509
%TAG 507
adding to annotations 206
default for annotations 506
Default Macros or Text property 506
editing 521
editing text 208
enabling editing 527
expanding 532
with annotations and comments 206
Macros command 555
Main Processor Connection Setup property 556
Main Processors, upgrading 255, 321
maintenance, application 470
Major Severity property 556
major.minor version 33, 462
Manage Sheets command 556
Manage Views command 557
Management Port Number property 557
Management protocol, CM 359
Management protocol, TCM 293
Maximum Value 560

MaxSpan 560
Memory Allocation command 560
memory allocation, example 185
memory points
allocating, Tricon 251
allocating, Trident 317
allocating, Tri-GP 317
assigning alias 177
Message Options command 560
Message View command 561
Min Field property 561
Minimum Value 562
Minor Severity property 562
MinSpan 562
Modbus
assigning aliases 210
CM ports, configuring 355
Data Bits property 502
disabling scaling of REALs 218
scaling numbers 215
signal delays 608
TCM ports, configuring 289
Tricon and REAL numbers 211
Tricon functionality 209
Trident functionality 209
Tri-GP functionality 209
using configuration, Emulator 44
Manual collection, SOE 225
Modbus (Minimum and Maximum) Range

property 562
Master Logical Port property 558
Modbus Slave Address property 563
master node, Triconex time synchronization 307, 367
Mode property 563

modes, operational 458
Index
Modify Banner Message command 7, 8, 564
Name property 566
module attributes, Trident 369
naming multiple variables 167
module attributes, Tri-GP 369
NCM, See Tricon NCM
Module Configuration Settings report 92
negative scan surplus 466
modules
configuration, printing 309, 370
inserting, Tricon 265
inserting, Trident 334
inserting, Tri-GP 334
removing, Tricon 265
removing, Trident 335
removing, Tri-GP 335
Tricon AI 266
Tricon BPAO 175
Tricon DO 267
Tricon PI 269
Tricon Thermocouple 270
Trident EPI 339
Trident HRDI 336
Trident PI 339
Trident SDO 335
Tri-GP EPI 339
Tri-GP HRDI 336
Tri-GP SDO 335
upgrading, Trident 334
upgrading, Tri-GP 334
NERC
password rules 60
security banner text 7
user access logs 6467
monitor display, with tagnames 179

Monitor Display Options 564
Monitor Value on by Default property 565
monitoring
CEM Monitor Colors property 490
colors 539
field power 267, 535
program execution, controller 464
programs 514
value included in annotation 544
variables, controller 463
Move Behind Logic Elements property 204, 565
MP attribute properties, Trident 329
MP attribute properties, Tri-GP 329
MPs
Tricon 252
Trident 318
Tri-GP 318
Multicast IP Address property 566
multicasting, TSAA 294, 359
multiple instances, Emulator 43
N
Name Order property 566
703
.NET framework, installing 6

Network Address Mask property 494
network connection, testing 403, 452
network ports
connecting to PC, Tricon 379
TCM 278
Network property 566
networks, additional routing 452
New Document Command 567
new features xiii
New Project command 567
new project, creating 20
New Tagname Command 567
New Tagnames Command 568
NIC card, installing in a TriStation PC 373, 408
NIC Index property 568
Node Name property 568
Node Number property 569
non-supervised DO points 268
not authorized error 30
Number of Extended Block property 569
Number of Gear Teeth property 569
Number of Inputs property 570
Number of Instances property 43, 570
numbers
REAL, scaling to integers 213
scaling for Modbus 215
O
OFFLINE state 570
On NET 1 Enable Time Synchronization property 570
On NET 2 Enable Time Synchronization property 571
Only Once setting 571
OPC
browsing tagnames 41
external client write access 233, 238
protocol 494
SOE block for 223, 294
704
Index
OPC (continued)
SOE severity 294
system events severity 295
TCM connection speed 285
TCM tagnames table 41
user access to 387
OPC System Events Severity property 571
Open Document command 571
Open Project command 572
Opened Point Alarm Threshold property 571
operand, ST language 131
operating parameters
Tricon 249
Trident 315
Tri-GP 315
operating systems supported 4
operation symbols, ST language 131
Operation Type property 572
Paste command 576

Pause command 576
Peer-to-Peer
allocating memory 221
applications 219
data transfer time 219, 220
time synchronization with TCM 307308
time synchronization with Trident 2.x CM 367368
time synchronization with Tri-GP CM 367368
Tricon TCM port configuration 287
Trident CM port configuration 352
Tri-GP CM port configuration 352
using configuration, Emulator 44
Peer-to-Peer Time Synchronization Enabled
property 494, 577
Permission property 391, 438, 577
physical address, assigning 174
Physical Address property 578
Operations property 572
PI module
configuring, Tricon 269
configuring, Trident 339
operations, order of 131
PI Point Options properties 579
operator, ST language 131
Pickup command 578
options
download 41
project 35
TriStation 1131 45
user access logs 66
Point Assignment properties 578
order of evaluation, CEMPLE matrix 143
points
allocating memory, Tricon 251
allocating memory, Trident 317
allocating memory, Tri-GP 317
Allow Disabling of Points property 483
creating multiple tagnames 180
declaring tagnames 172
disabling 230, 474, 475
forced, options for 40
forcing 477
import options 195
memory 177
overview 172
re-enabling 476
restricting access to Trident 237
restricting access to Tri-GP 237
scaling REAL values 178
undeclared 184
viewing disabled 476
write access to Tricon 232233
write access to Trident 235238
write access to Tri-GP 235238
operational modes 458
order of evaluation, expressions 131

Organize command 574
output, invert 549
output points, disabling changes 513
overflow error, initialization table 242
owner, changing 115
P
parameters, POINTS_DISABLED 474
Parity property 575
partial changes, library 77
Password property 575
Password Required for Connection property 576
passwords
default 28
login errors 29
rules for 60
user 60
Windows 28, 55
point supervision, SDO 335

point transition 336
Point Type property 579
Index
POINTS_DISABLED parameter 474

poll time 467
port numbers, reserved 633
Port Selection property 580
Port Write Enabled property
description 231, 581
for CM Modbus ports 355
for CM serial ports 348
for TCM Modbus ports 290
for TCM network ports 284
for TCM serial ports 280
ports
reserved numbers 633
Tricon ACM 271
Tricon EICM 274
Tricon HIM 273
Tricon NCM 275
Tricon SMM 277
Tricon TCM 278291
Trident 1.x CM 342
Trident 1.x CM serial 344
Trident 2.x CM 346358
Trident 2.x CM network 350
Trident 2.x CM serial 348
Tri-GP CM 346358
Tri-GP CM network 350
Tri-GP CM serial 348
positive scan surplus 466
POU Cross-Reference report 92
POU Variables report 92
POUs 102
power usage, Tricon 264
power, field 535, 558, 561
precedence, operations 131
Precision property 581
Prevent Restart Following Fatal Error property 316, 582
Previous Sheet command 582
Primary mode, SOE 226
Print All command 91, 583
Print command 582
print function blocks 398, 445
Print Number property 583
Print Preview command 583
Print Report command 583
print server
with Trident CM 439
with Tri-GP CM 439
705
PRINTER parameter
Tricon 398
Trident 445
Tri-GP 445
printing
configuring for Trident CM 442
configuring for Tri-GP CM 442
configuring Tricon EICM port 394
configuring Tricon TCM port 397
connecting to Tricon TCM 395
connecting to Trident CM 440
connecting to Tri-GP CM 440
documents, individual 94
documents, multiple 94
logic sheets 122
module configuration, Tricon 309
module configuration, Trident 370
module configuration, Tri-GP 370
project documents 91
reports 80
scan time increases 392, 439
with Tricon 392
with Trident 439
with Tri-GP 439
Privilege property 584
privileges, security 61
process safety time 466
Program command 585
program execution, controller 464
Program Execution List property 584
Program mode, described 458
program organizational units 102
Program Variable Listing report 92
programming, about languages 105
Programming Mode, See Program command
programs
compiling 240
creating 109
definition 102
maximum number of 102, 239
order on execution list 239
viewing number of variables in 169
Prohibit Writes property 585
project
annotation properties 37
backing up 5, 461, 487
cannot edit 54
cannot open 27
CEM monitor colors 149
changing the download state 492
706
Index
project (continued)
closing 495
compiling 498
conversion rules 12
converting from v2.x or v3.x 17
converting to v4.8.0 11
converting Tricon from v4.7.0 and earlier 13
converting Trident from v4.7.0 and earlier 15
creating 20
default directory for 46
description, adding 31
documents, printing 91
downgrading system version, Tricon 255
downgrading system version, Trident 321
download options 41
Emulator version 33
enabling features 530
exiting 532
exporting elements 69
file access rules 27
forced points options 40
language properties 36
logging in 27
monitor colors 39
options 35
properties 35
Roll Backward or Forward command 595
sample 5
security setting, default 11
selecting target system 11
selecting target system, Tricon 22
selecting target system, Trident 24
selecting target system, Tri-GP 26
upgrading system version, Tricon 255
upgrading system version, Trident 321
upgrading, Tricon 13
upgrading, Trident 15
version number 33
viewing history 640
project version (continued)

rules 33, 462
Project workspace 20
properties
annotations 202
function blocks 126
functions 125
project 35
TriStation 1131 45
Properties command 551
Protocol property 586
protocols
Tricon TCM 292
Trident 2.x CM 346, 358
Tri-GP CM 346, 358
Protocols property 587
Pulses Per Revolution property 587
R
rails 498
RARP Server 448
Rate Type property 588
Read Only command 588
read/write property 114
read-only property 114
REAL data type 653
real number, precision when approaching zero 654
REAL numbers
disabling scaling 218, 513
scaling to integers 213
unscaled 217
REAL points, specifying precision 581
Rebuild Application command 588
rebuilding an application 241
Project Description property 585
red X, explained 634
Project Files property 586
Redo command 588
Project History by Element report 92
Reduce Font Size command 589
Project History by Time report 92
reducing initialization table size 243
Project Implementation report 92
Redundant Mode property 589
Project Memory Allocation report 93
Redundant mode, SOE 226
Project Security Levels report 93
re-enabling points 476
project state 462
Refresh command 589
Project Users report 93
refreshing values of variables 500
project version
changes 462
downloaded 33, 461, 462
Emulator 33
Remote Access to Aliased Tagnames property 590
Remote Access to All Tagnames property 590

Remote mode 458, 591
Index
remote write enabled, setting 591
RS-232 transceiver mode 628
Remove File command 591
RS-485 transceiver mode 628
Remove Invalid Items command 591
RTS Pre-Delay setting 608
removing custom Help files 53
rules, project versioning 33, 462
Replace command 592
rules, passwords 60
reports
adding custom 82
databases 83
default directory for templates 46
exporting 82
Library Documents 73
module configuration, Tricon 309
module configuration, Trident 370
module configuration, Tri-GP 370
Project Security Levels 61
Project Users 58
project, printable 91
Shared Libraries 73
updating database 80
viewing and printing 80
rules, target system version 12
requested scan time 466

reserved port numbers 633
Resolution Type property 267, 592
Restart on Power Up property 593
Restore command 593
Restore Project command 594
Restore Project To Last Download command 594
restricting access
to Tricon 229
to Tricon points 232
to Trident 234
to Tri-GP 234
Run command 596

Run mode 458, 596
RUNNING state 596
S
safety and control, about 104
safety application, defined 485
sample projects 5
Save As command 596
Save Element command 597
Save History command 597
Save Implementation command 597
Save Project command 597
Save View command 598
saving, user access logs 65
Scale Factor property 598
scaling, for Modbus 215
scan surplus 466
scan time
affect of print function blocks 392, 439
defined 466, 603
setting for running application 467
Scan Time property 599
restrictions and limitations, CEMPLE matrix 142
SDO module, configuring 335
Retentive property 594
Search Text command 599
retentive variables 242
security
Operations property 572
user access 54
Right Power Rail command 595

Roll Backward or Forward command 595
router, using for TCM connection 381
routing
Tricon TCM 291
Trident 1.x CM 345
Trident 2.x CM 356
Tri-GP CM 356
Routing Configuration property 595
rows
deleting 157
hiding and sizing 610
inserting 156
sizing and hiding 159
707
security banner
customizing 7
default text 8
error while saving 8
Security command 600
Security Level property 600
security setting
changing 55
default 11, 55
defined 54
Select Function Block command 600
Select Network Contents command 601
708
Index
Select Sheet Contents command 601
SNTP time synchronization 305, 364
Selection Tool command 601
SOE
assigning tagnames 226
Automatic collection type 225
block type 225
blocks, defining properties 223
buffer size 225
collection mode 226
collection type 225
configuration 222
copying configuration 222
definition file (.SOE) 43
for OPC 223, 294
Manual collection type 225
Primary mode 226
Redundant mode 226
searching for tagnames 222
sorting by block 222
trip variable 228
using with Trident HRDI module 336
using with Tri-GP HRDI module 336
Sequence of Events, See SOE

serial connection
Tricon 376
Trident 412
Tri-GP 412
Serial Port property 601
serial ports
connecting to PC, Tricon 377
connecting to PC, Trident 414
connecting to PC, Tri-GP 414
TCM 278, 280
Set Calendar Clock command 602
Set Editor Options command 602
Set Programming Mode command 603
Set Scan Time command 603
Set Time Zone command 604
Set Value property 604
severity levels, OPC 294, 295
Shared Libraries report 93
Shared Read property 605
sheet templates, See logic sheets
sheet title 122
sheets, See logic sheets
Sheets Menu 122, 605
Shorted Point Alarm Threshold property 606
Show Causes for Selected Effect command 606
Show Effects for Selected Causes command 606
Show Grid command 606
Show IEC Representation command 607
Show Line Numbers command 607
Show Network Numbers command 607
Show Zones command 607
signal delays property 608
Single Step command 609
Size/Alignment command 609
Size/Hide Columns command 609
Size/Hide Comment Column command 610
Size/Hide Rows command 610
slave node, Triconex time synchronization 307, 367
slot selection, TCM 283
Slot Selection property 610
SNTP Master IP Address property 611
SNTP Master Network property 611
SOE Block Assignments property 612

SOE Block Collection Mode property 612
SOE Block Collection Type property 613
SOE Block Name property 613
SOE Block Number property 613
SOE Block property 612
SOE Block Type property 614
SOE Block Variables report 93
SOE Buffer Size property 615
SOE Dead Time property 338, 615
SOE Recorder, multiple clients 223
SOE Severity property 616
SOE Trigger State property 337, 616
SOE Trigger Time property 338, 616
Sort by Group property 617
Sort by Tagname property 617
sort order, tagnames table 41
Space Saver property 128, 618
ST language
about 107
copying and pasting code 130
Editor 130
expressions 131
font size 537
intermediate code 241
operands and operators 131
Index
SYS_MP_EXT_STATUS 474
tagnames
assigning to SOE blocks 226
changing multiple 181
creating multiple tagnames 180
data types of, for SOE 226
declaring tagnames 172
definition 103
deleting 182
disabling 474
enabling for multiple writes 174
export command 532
exporting to file 189
file format 190
forcing 477
import command 543
import file format 193
importing from file 196
memory allocation example 185
monitor color 179
monitoring colors 539
overview 172
physical addresses 174
renaming 182
reports 93
restricting access 513
scaling 178
specifying DO points, Tricon 515
table 183, 184
undeclared 184, 186
unused 186, 187, 188
viewing number of 169
SYS_OVD_INHIBIT function block 335
tagnames table, TCM OPC 41
SYS_SHUTDOWN 474
target system version

change matrix, Tricon 258
change matrix, Trident 324
changing 255, 321
configuring, Tricon 252259
configuring, Trident 318325
configuring, Tri-GP 318325
connection problems 460
conversion rules 12
defined 11
determining current 252, 318
download state 255, 321
on Tricon Operating Parameters screen 249
results of change 258, 324
rules for changing, Tricon 255
selecting during project conversion 11
selecting during project creation 22, 24, 26
TCM configuration rules 255
validating changes 253, 320, 635
Standard Security
changing to 55
defined 54
login 28
login attempts 27
Standard Security property 618
Start Value and Increment property 618
state 15
state changes, controller download 462
status attributes
Trident 369
Tri-GP 369
STDLIB 68, 77
Stop Bits property 619
Stop mode 458, 619
STRING data type 655
structured data type 134
subnet masks 387, 434
summary information, document 112
supervised DO points 268
supervision, point 335
Supports Application Defined States property 620
Supports Use in Cause Rows property 620
Supports Use in Effect Columns property 620
Supports Use in Intersections property 621
surplus, scan 466
synchronizing time, See Time Synchronization
system attributes
Trident 369
Tri-GP 369
System Events Severity properties 621
system events, OPC 295
system requirements 4
system version
Tricon 252
Trident 318
Tri-GP 318
T
table, tagnames 183, 184
table, initialization, See initialization table
Tabs property 621
Tagname property 622
709
Target System Version property 622
710
Index
TCM, See Tricon TCM

TCM access list
access levels 387
configuring 390
controller access 61
Deny Access 387
description 231
grouping clients 387
IP addresses 387
maximum number of entries 387
permissions 387
protocols 387
Read Only 387
Read/Write 387
resources, defined 386
sample list 388
subnet mask, using 387
troubleshooting 376
time synchronization (continued)

Triconex, with TCM 307
Triconex, with Trident 2.x CM 367
Triconex, with Tri-GP CM 367
Trident 1.x CM 363
Trident 2.x CM master node 367
Trident 2.x CM slave node 367
Trident project conversion 12
Tri-GP CM master node 367
Tri-GP CM slave node 367
with external source 299
with Tricon ACM 299
with Tricon NCM 300
with Tricon NCMG 301
with Tricon TCM 303
with Trident 2.x CM 364
with Tri-GP CM 364
Time Synchronization Configuration property 626
Time Synchronization properties 625
TCP Port property 622
time zone, setting for controller 604
TCP Port Restrictions properties 623
timeout value, Emulator 43
TCP/IP protocol, installing 374, 408

TCXEMX.chm file 51
TCXLIB 68, 77
title block, editing 161

title, logic sheet 122
TOD data type 657
technical support xv
Toggle Terminal Inverter command 627
Temporary Files property 623
TR_PROGRAM_STATUS 474
Terminal property 623
TR_SHUTDOWN 474
terminals
described 119
double spacing 516, 517
enable EN/ENO by default 526
FBD and LD 119
TR1LIB 68, 75, 77

training xiv
Transceiver Mode 627
Transceiver Port property 629
Termination Options property 624
transfer time, Peer-to-Peer 219
testing
network connection 403, 452
on controller 460
on Emulator 459
transmission speed, Baud Rate property 488
Text Size property 624

time after trip 228
Time After Trip property 625
time before trip 228
Time Before Trip property 625
TIME data type 656
time synchronization
GPS, with TCM 303
SNTP, with TCM 305
SNTP, with Trident 2.x CM 364
SNTP, with Tri-GP CM 364
TCM master node 307
TCM slave node 307
TRDLIB 68, 75, 77

Tricon
AI modules 266
BPAO modules 175
connecting serial port to PC 377
connecting to for first time 376
connecting via network port 379
converting project from v2.x or v3.x 17
converting project from v4.7.0 and earlier 13
default connection 385
disabling OVD 512
DO modules 267
Modbus functionality 209
module configuration, printing 309
modules 265270
operating parameters 249
PI modules 269
Index
Tricon (continued)
project, creating new 21
restricting access to 229
serial communication 376
special alias numbers 211
special aliases 212
target system version 11, 22, 252259
target system version change matrix 258
thermocouple input module 270
time synchronization 298
write access 230
Tricon ACM
configuring connection 384
configuring ports 271
connection using media converter 382
default IP address 400
direct connection to TriStation 380
getting IP address using RARP server 401
installing NIC card for 373
TriStation Ethernet connection 379
TriStation network connection 379
Tricon EICM
configuring a printing port 394
configuring ports 274
configuring serial TriStation connection 378
connecting a printer 392, 393
setting an IP address 402
TriStation serial communication 376
Tricon HIM
Base Address property 487
ports 273
Tricon NCM
ports 275
Tricon NCMG, time synchronization 301
711
Tricon TCM (continued)

connecting devices using a hub 396
connecting devices using a router or hub 381
connecting printing devices 395
connection using router or hub 381
controlling access to 386391
exporting configuration 255, 296
fiber cables 381
fiber mode 283, 285
firewall, using behind 285
GPS time synchronization 303
importing configuration 297
installation rules 278
IP addresses 283, 285
Management protocol 293
maximum number of 278
Modbus TCP ports 289
network ports 282, 284
OPC 224
OPC connection speed 285
peer-to-peer ports 287
printing from 392
protocols supported 278
protocols, configuring 292
routing ports 291
serial ports 280
slot selection 283
SNTP time synchronization 305
target system version change rules for 255
Triconex time synchronization 307
TriStation protocol 293
TriStation serial communication 376
TSAA protocol 294
TSAA write access to 232
Triconex Time Synchronization 303, 364
Triconex Time Synchronization, TCM 307308
Tricon SMM
ports 277
synchronizing time 302
Triconex Time Synchronization, Trident 2.x CM 367

368
Tricon TCM
access list 386391
backing up configuration 296
compatibility 224
configuring a printing port 397
Trident
1.x CM connection to TriStation 421
1.x MP connection to TriStation 417
2.x connection to TriStation 1131 426
2.x network ports, configuring 331
Triconex Time Synchronization, Tri-GP CM 367368
712
Index
Trident (continued)
access 234
attributes, status 369
configuring hardware 327
configuring TriStation 1131 connection, 2.x 429
connecting to for first time 411, 412
converting project from v2.x or v3.x 17
converting project from v4.7.0 and earlier 15
default IP address for 411
disabling OVD 512
EPI module 339
HRDI module 336
initial connection to 411
IP address, 2.x 430
modules 334335
PI module 339
printing devices 439
SDO module 335
system and module attributes 369
target system version 11, 24, 318325
upgrading PI to EPI 339
version 1.1 and earlier support 15
write access 235
Trident CM
1.x routing 345
1.x serial ports 344
access list 434438
configuring 342
configuring printing devices 442
configuring TriStation 1131 connection 423
configuring, 2.x 346
direct connection to TriStation 1131 427
exporting configuration 360
hub connection to TriStation 422
hub connection to TriStation 1131 428
Trident CM (continued)
IP addresses 351
Modbus TCP ports, 2.x 355
network ports, 1.x 342
network ports, 2.x 350
project conversion upgrade 12
protocols supported, 2.x 346
protocols, 2.x 358
routing ports, 2.x 356
serial ports, 2.x 348
specifying default gateway 451
specifying network routing 452
time synchronization, 1.x 363
time synchronization, 2.x 367
TSAA protocol 359
upgrading from 1.x to 2.x 12
using default IP address 447
Trident MP
attribute properties 329
configuring 327
configuring TriStation connection 419
hub connection to TriStation 418
module properties 327
serial ports 332
trigger state, SOE 337
trigger time, SOE 338
Triggering Mode property 629
Tri-GP
access 234
attributes, status 369
configuring hardware 327
configuring TriStation 1131 connection 429
connecting to for first time 411, 412
connection to TriStation 1131 426
default IP address for 411
disabling OVD 512
EPI module 339
Index
Tri-GP (continued)
HRDI module 336
inital connection to 411
IP address 430
modules 334335
network ports, configuring 331
printing devices 439
SDO module 335
system and module attributes 369
target system version 26, 318325
write access 235
Tri-GP CM
access list 434438
configuring 342, 346
configuring printing devices 442
direct connection to TriStation 1131 427
exporting configuration 360
hub connection to TriStation 1131 428
IP addresses 351
Modbus TCP ports 355
network ports 350
protocols 358
protocols supported 346
routing ports 356
serial ports 348
specifying default gateway 451
specifying network routing 452
time synchronization 364, 367
TSAA protocol 359
using default IP address 447
Tri-GP MP
attribute properties 329
configuring 327, 331
module properties 327
713
Tri-GP MP (continued)
serial ports 332
trip state 228
Trip State property 629
trip tagname 228
Trip Tagname property 630
trip variable, assigning 228
TriStation 1131
connection to Tricon ACM, NCM, or TCM 380
connection to Tricon TCM 381
connection to Trident 1.x CM 421
connection to Trident 1.x MP 417
connection to Trident 2.x 426
connection to Trident MP 417, 418
connection to Tri-GP 426
converting to v4.8.0 11
creating a project 20
Directories tab 46
Drawing Color tab 47
examples 5
FBD Editor tab 48
hub connection to Trident 2.x 428
hub connection to Trident CM 422
hub connection to Tri-GP 428
installing 6
installing DLC protocol 408
installing TCP/IP protocol 374
LD Editor tab 49
libraries 68
options 45
properties 45
sample projects 5
system requirements 4
Trident 2.x connection 427
Trident CM connection 421
Trident MP configuration 419
Tri-GP connection 427
uninstalling 5, 9
upgrading 5
verifying the installation 9
TriStation Port Number property 630
TriStation protocol
CM 358
definition 494
TCM 293
TriStation UDP Port Number property 630
troubleshooting
access control list, CM 413
access control list, TCM 376
cannot edit project 54
cannot edit user documents 109
714
Index
troubleshooting (continued)
cannot open project 27, 31
CM access control list 413
login problems 29
TCM access control list 376
Tricon network connection 376
Trident network connection 412
Tri-GP network connection 412
viewing total variables used 169
True Color property 631
True State Name property 631
TSAA clients 232, 236
TSAA Multicast IP Address property 631
TSAA Port Number property 631
TSAA protocol 294, 359, 494
TX1LIB 68, 75, 77
type name, described 119
Type Over command 632
U
UCN Node Number property 632
UDP Base Port Number property 288, 354, 632
undeclared tagnames
definition 184
viewing 186
underflow
gradual for LREAL data types 652
gradual for REAL data types 654
Undo command 633
uninstalling TriStation 1131 5, 9
unipolar input 267, 592
upgrading (continued)
TriStation 1131 5
Usage property 635
Use Local Time property 635
user access
adding or modifying 59
creating 54
editing documents 54
level names tab 63
managing 58
Privileges tab 61
See also CM access list
See also TCM access list
user access logs 6467
user documents
copying 110
creating 109
User Documents report 93
user name
default 28
Windows 28, 55
user-defined
data types, using 163
functions 103, 150151
variables 169
users
adding 59
authentication of 55
logon name, changing 60
managing 58
modifying 59
password, changing 60
unknown user name error 29
unregistered libraries 79
Validate Only command 635
unused tagnames
definition 186
deleting 188
editing 187
viewing 186
validating target system version change

Tricon 253
Trident 320
update rate, TSAA multicasting 294, 359

Update Rate property 634
Update Reports Database command 634
Updated Selected Function Cells command 634
updating libraries 75
upgrading
PI to EPI, Trident 339
project, Tricon 13
project, Trident 15
target system version, Tricon 255
Value property 636

Value Range to Scale an Integer properties 636
VAR, declaring 137
VAR CONSTANT, defining 134
Var Type property 637
VAR_EXTERNALS, declaring 136
VAR_IN_OUT function parameters 74, 140
VAR_TEMP, defining 135
Var/Const property 636
Variable Detail Table, CEM editor 146
Index
variables
Auto Name command 486
changing multiple 168
creating in FBD and LD 163
declaring in FBD and LD 164
declaring in ST 137
definition 103
deleting, initialization table impact 242
formatted name 537
in initialization table 242
initial value 544
initialization table sample 243
limit exceeded 241
maximum number in function block 102
maximum number in program 103
monitoring on controller 463
naming multiple 167
overflow, initialization table 242
question mark while monitoring 463
reducing number of 241
retentive 242
specifying in CEM 152
types 103
user-defined data types in 163
viewing number of 169
Verify Last Download to the Controller command 637
Verify Password property 637
Verify Version command 638
viewing (continued)
undeclared tagnames 186
unused tagnames 186
viewing disabled points 476
views
enlarged 642
managing 162
saving 162
W
web site, Invensys xiv
Width property 640
Windows
administrator privileges 64
domain authentication 28, 55, 60
file access rules for projects 27
file properties dialog box 31
Guest account, using 30, 64
passwords, rules for 60
user name 28, 55
Windows Event Viewer 64
Wire Tool command 641
Wire Type property 641
workspace
controller 247, 313
project 20
Workspace View command 642
View Download History command 638
write access
by tagname or alias 172
disabling remote changes 513
OPC client 233, 238
restricting access to Tricon points 232
restricting access to Trident points 237
restricting access to Tri-GP points 237
to Tricon points 232233
to Trident points 235238
to Tri-GP points 235238
Tricon 230
Trident 235
Tri-GP 235
TSAA clients to CM 236
TSAA clients to TCM 232
View Intermediate FBD command 639
Write To File command 642
verifying a TriStation 1131 installation 9

version number
downloaded 461
projects 33
Tricon system version 252
Trident system version 318
Tri-GP system version 318
verifying library version 79
version, project
changes 462
major.minor 33, 462
Vertical Network Divider command 638
View Intermediate ST command 639
715
View Manager command 640
View Project History command 640
Zoom command 642
viewing
custom Help files 52
initialization table 242
total variables and tagnames used 169
Zoom To Fit command 643

Zoom To Region command 643
716
Index
Invensys Operations Management

5601 Granite Parkway Suite 1000
Plano, TX 75024
United States of America
http://iom.invensys.com
Global Customer Support

Inside U.S.: 1-866-746-6477
Outside U.S.: 1-508-549-2424 or contact your
local Invensys representative.
Website: http://support.ips.invensys.com

TriStation 1131 Developer S Guide v4 9 0 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TriStation 1131 Developer S Guide v4 9 0 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TriStation 1131 Developer S Guide v4 9 0 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TriStation 1131

TriStation 1131 Developers Workbench

Document No. 9720100-012, Rev. 1

TriStation 1131 Developers Guide, v4.9.0

Specifying Download Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

TriStation 1131 Developers Guide, v4.9.0

Ladder Diagram Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

TriStation 1131 Developers Guide, v4.9.0

Specifying Local Variables, Tagnames, and Constants in a CEM Program . . . . . . 152

TriStation 1131 Developers Guide, v4.9.0

Using Macros with Annotations and Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Tricon Controller Configuration

TriStation 1131 Developers Guide, v4.9.0

Adding or Deleting a Tricon Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Trident and Tri-GP Controller Configuration

TriStation 1131 Developers Guide, v4.9.0

Inserting a Trident or Tri-GP Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Tricon Communication with TriStation 1131

TriStation 1131 Developers Guide, v4.9.0

Connecting a Tricon EICM Port to a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

Trident and Tri-GP Communication with TriStation 1131

TriStation 1131 Developers Guide, v4.9.0

Directly Connecting a Trident or Tri-GP CM to Printing Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440

Appendix A Commands and Properties

Appendix B Data Types

TIME Data Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656

Appendix C TCM Model 4351/4352 Configuration

Appendix D Reserved Names

Names Reserved by TriStation 1131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680

TriStation 1131 Developers Guide, v4.9.0

New Features in TriStation 1131 v4.9.0

Chapter 1, Project AdministrationDescribes how to install the TriStation 1131

Chapter 2, Application DevelopmentExplains how to develop an application.

Chapter 3, Tricon Controller ConfigurationExplains how to configure modules

Chapter 4, Trident and Tri-GP Controller ConfigurationExplains how to configure

Chapter 5, Tricon Communication with TriStation 1131Describes how to set up

Chapter 6, Trident and Tri-GP Communication with TriStation 1131Describes how to

Chapter 7, ImplementationExplains how to implement an application on a controller.

Appendix A, Commands and PropertiesDescribes TriStation 1131 commands,

Appendix B, Data TypesDescribes the data types used in applications developed

Appendix C, TCM Model 4351/4352 ConfigurationExplains how to configure the

TriStation 1131 Developers Guide, v4.9.0

TriStation 1131 Libraries Reference

Triconex Emulator Users Guide

SOE Recorder Users Guide

Enhanced Diagnostic Monitor Users Guide

Tricon, Trident, and Tri-GP Safety Considerations Guides

Communication Guide for Tricon v9-v10 Systems

Communication Guide for Trident Systems

Communication Guide for Tri-GP Systems

Product and Training Information

TriStation 1131 Developers Guide, v4.9.0

Emergency requests are given the highest priority

All other requests are handled on a time-available basis

TriStation 1131 Developers Guide, v4.9.0

We Welcome Your Comments

The title and version of the guide you are referring to

Your suggestions for correcting or improving the documentation

The version of the Triconex hardware or software you are using